HomeMy WebLinkAboutHAREN CONSTRUCTION CO SPIRIT CREEK PUMP STATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,_ ~u if 1??9t
CONTRACT DOCIJMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
- a.'
FOR
BOND -PROJECT NO. 80501
SPIRIT CREEK PlJMP STATION
Augusta, Georgia
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
Cranston, Robertson & \Vhitehurst, P.C.
Engineers - Planners - Surveyors
P.O. Box 2546 .- 452 Ellis Street
Augusta, Georgia 30903
,
~
..
June 24, 2005
2003-259
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Addendum No. 1
to the
Contract Documents and Drawings
for the construction of
PROJECT NO. 80501
SPIRIT CREEK PUMP STATION
Our File No. 2003-259
August 26, 2005
1.
The following questions from the Pre-Bid Conference and subsequent submitted questions
have been addressed:
A. Can the bid form be simplified and/or the project be changed to lump sum?
No, the current setup of the bid form and project structure will remain the same.
B. Can the contract completion time be extended to 395 days and/or the liquidated
damaged be reduced?
No, the current schedule is what will be required to meet the projects scheduling
goals and an E.P.D. mandated completion date; therefore, both the contract
completion time and liquidated damages will remain the same.
C. Can the electrical building be moved further away from the wet well in order
to facilitate simultaneous construction without shoring?
No, the electrical building shall remain in the location shown on the plans, which was
strategically chosen due to the limitations of the variable frequency drives.
D. Do the specifications allow for the use of other hatch manufactures besides Flygt
which is noted on the drawings?
Yes, as also noted on the plans (Sheet C6.1, "Schedule of Access Hatches", Note 2),
equivalent hatches will be considered during the equipment submittal phase after the
contract is awarded.
E. Will it be acceptable to allow the precast manufacturer to precast an extended
base onto the vaults/structures in lieu of doweling and pouring a cast-in-place
footing around the base as shown on the drawings (Sheet C7.1)?
Yes, as long as such a structure can be delivered to the site; it will be acceptable. It
was our intention to provide an alternative to pre-casting the extended base because
of the width (15'-4"), which could be a delivery issue.
Addendum No. 1 Page 1 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F..
It appears that there will be a significant amount of dirt to waste from the site
cut and pump station excavation. I What are the current plans for the wasting
of this amount of dirt?
The Contractor will not be allowed to waste excess material on site or on any nearby
City property/easements. Instead, excess material shall be legally disposed of at an
offsite location approved by the Owner. All associated costs shall be the
Contractor's responsibility and should be included in the lump sum pay item for
Grading.
G.
Reference Specification Section 02250 regarding the temporary bypass pumping
system(s) for this project. Please provide the required capacity(ies) for the
bypass pumping system(s).
As mentioned in the pre-bid meeting, the only by-pass pumping required will be for
the existing 24" gravity sewer shown on the site plans. The flow on this line should
be minimal. According to the Owner, there are less than 10 homes tied onto this line.
However, it is recommended that the Contractor visit the site to observe and verify
the flows.
H.
Reference Specification Subsection 05400-1.4B regarding pre-approval of light
gauge steel truss frame fabricators. Either provide a list of pre-approved
fabricators or waive the requirement for this project.
Eliminate the pre-approved requirement of light gauge steel truss frame fabricators
as described in Specifications Subsection 05400-1.4B. The frame fabricators will be
reviewed and approved during the material submittal phase after the contract is
awarded.
1.
Reference Specification Section 07195 regarding water repellant. What surfaces
will require water repellant for this project?
Specification Section 07195 is for application on surfaces of the electrical building
only. This is in addition to the integral water repellent.
J.
Reference Page 04200-11 of the specifications and Drawings Sl.l - S4.1
regarding "Masonry Cell Insulation." Are the exterior walls of the electrical
building to be filled with granular insulation?
Yes, as stated on Page 04200-11 of the specifications, "Pour granular insulation into
the cores of all exterior hollow masonry unit walls as shown to fill void spaces
completely." "As shown" refers to all exterior hollow masonry unit walls shown on
the Plans.
Addendum No.1 Page 2 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
K. Reference Specification Section 11300 regarding power requirements for valves.
Please clarify. The specification s~ys all plug valves, control valves and sluice
gates shall be designed for 460 volt, 3-phase operation; but not all plug valves
\
on this job are electrically actuate~. Is this correct?
This power requirement does not apply to the manual plug valves.
L. Will any approved equals for plug valves, control valves, sluice gates, or hatches
be added by addendum?
No, due to time constraints all reviews and approvals for "equal" equipment will be
done during the equipment submittal phase after the contract is awarded.
M. References Drawing C2.2 and the Proposal Section of the Contract Documents
regarding curb and gutter. Is there any curb and gutter on this project?
There is no curb and gutter shown on the plans. However, it may be added in the field
by the Owner's representative and is, therefore, in the Proposal Section.
N. Reference Drawing C2.3 regarding influent 24" DIP and 24" DIP overflow line.
Would you consider bringing these lines straight to the existing 24" sewer line
and doghousing a manhole over the existing line to make the tie-ins?
Since this is a unit price job, this could easily be changed in the field and may be a
viable option for the influent line. However, this would not be possible with the
overflow line because of invert elevation constraints. Any changes to the alignment
shall be handled in the field.
II.
The following clarifications/amendments have been made to the contract drawings: (No
revised contract drawing sheets will be reissued.)
A. Sheet C1.3 - Detailed Estimate - Revise Pay Item PS-3 from "350 hp" to "335 hp."
B. Sheet C1.3 - Detailed Estimate - Revise Pay Item P-4 from 4" thick to 6" thick.
C. Sheet C2.4 - 20" Force Main Profile - Revise "VLV-1920" to "VLV-1930."
D. Sheet C6.1 - W et Well Piping: Plan - Add hydraulic lines from hydraulic system for
grinder to channel grinder. See existing leader and tag on the Plans for location of
lines.
E. Sheet C6.1- Wet Well Piping: Plan - Add the following as Note 9, "All dismantling
joints shall be of the restrained type and manufactured by Smith Blair or approved
equal. "
F. Sheet C6.1 - Schedule of Access Hatches - Revise Note 4 from 6 Type D hatches
and 2 Type C hatches to 6 Type C hatches and 2 Type B hatches.
Addendum No.1 Page 3 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H.
1.
J.
L.
M.
N.
P.
G.
Sheet C6.3 - Legend - Revise "Hydraulically Operated Plug Valve" to "Electrically
Operated Plug Valve."
I
Sheet C7.1 - Bypass Inlet Structure Plan - Revise "S.G.-0700" to "S.G.-0900."
Sheet C7.2 - Flowmeter Manhole and Plug Valve Manhole Details - Revise
minimum thickness of #57stone bed from 1" to 1 '.
Sheet C7.2 - Air Release Valve Detail - Revise "NM of air valve" to "nominal
diameter of air valve."
K.
Sheet C7.2 - Manhole Notes - Add the following as Note 8: "All manholes shall
have bolt down, water tight covers."
Sheet C7.4 - Reaction Blocking: Detail - Delete Note 4 in its entirety.
Sheet S4.1 - Details 3 and 5 - Add vapor barrier thickness of "10 mil poly."
Sheet S7.1 - Detail 3 - Revise the call-out at the stairs from "8/S7.1" to "8/S8.1."
O.
Sheet C7.2 - Flowmeter Manhole Detail- Add dismantlingjoint to force main inside
manhole. Dismantling joints shall be of the restrained type and manufactured by
Smith-Blair or approved equal.
Sheet M1.1 - Detail 1 - Add "with insect screen" to goose neck vent note.
Q.
Sheet E1.1
1. Delete General Note #9 in its entirety and replace with the following. "All
instrumentation control conduit and wiring shall be furnished by the Division
16 Contractor. Division 16 Contractor to refer to Specification Section
11900 for quantity and type of control conductors to be provided.
Termination of control conductors shall be by Instrumentation/Control
System Contractor. Division 16 Contractor shall be responsible for all power
wiring, conduit as well as termination for such."
2. Under Feeder Schedule Note #35 - Change asphaltic coated rigid aluminum
conduit to read "PVC coated rigid aluminum conduit".
3. Referencing Detail 2/E 1.1 - Intent of detail is to show grounding required for
receptacles. All underground conduit installed on this project shall be PVC
unless noted otherwise. All exposed conduit in pump station shall be rigid
aluminum conduit as well as rigid aluminum as noted in General Note #6.
All overhead conduits in electrical building shall be EMT.
4. Add the following to General Note #7: "Concrete housekeeping curbs shall
be 4" thick with 45 degree beveled edges and shall be sized per equipment."
Addendum No.1 Page 4 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R.
Sheet E2.1
1. Add three (3) - I" empty conduits from emergency generator set to
I
automatic transfer switch stub up at each end and cap.
2. Add three (3) - I" empty conduits from future emergency generator set to
future transfer switch. Stub up at each end and cap conduit.
3. Add four (4) empty - 1" spare conduits stubbed out from Electrical
Building to outside edge of concrete pad. Stub out at location as directed by
Engineer for future use.
4. At four (4) locations as delineated by Engineer, Contractor shall install 20'
of 4" empty conduit sleeve below roadway at locations as noted by Engineer.
5. Change homerun LPA-34 to read "LPA-34, 38". Install three (3) additional
#10 conductors in this homerun. Connect six (6) fixtures to circuit #34 and
six (6) fixtures to circuit #38. Change breaker LPA-38 to a 30 amp/2 pole
breaker.
S.
Sheet E3.1
1. Referencing Electrical Building Lighting Plan Detail l1E3.1 - Add an
emergency light at exit door as well as two (2) wall mounted emergency
lighting units. Exit lights shall be LED type with battery type equal to
Lithonia "Quantum" Series. Emergency wall mounted battery pack lights
shall be dual head with test switch and indicator light. Emergency lighting
units shall be equal to Lithonia "ELM" Series. Tie into un-switched lighting
conductor in this space.
2. Contractor shall provide a lightning protection system on the Electrical
Building. System to consist of roof top mounted lightning rods with
aluminum down conductors. Contractor shall route aluminum down
conductors at all four corners of the building and tie into a copper clad steel
rod at each corner of the building. All conductors routed in building shall be
routed concealed in PVC and shall be aluminum. Tie lightning protection
system into SCADA antenna provided by others. Total lightning protection
system shall be designed and manufactured by Thompson Lightning
Protection or approved equal. System shall be tested and certified by
manufacturer prior to acceptance.
T.
Sheet E5.1
1. Change A.I.C. rating on motor control center, emergency switchboard and
main switchboard to read "65,000 A. I. c." .
2. Referencing Detail 71E5.1 - Add spacing to ground rods shown at the main
switchboard such that ground rods are spaced 10' apart. #3/0 ground shown
routed to building steel shall route directly to rebar reinforcing in concrete
slab and not steel column as shown.
Addendum No.1 Page 5 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ill.
The following items have been revised or added to the contract documents and
specifications:
A. Proposal Section - Revise Pay Item PS-3 from "350 hp" to "335 hp".
\
B. Proposal Section - Revise Pay Item P-4 from 4" thick to 6" thick
C. Supplementary Conditions - Add the following as a new condition:
Eng:ineers Field Office: .
The Contractor shall provide, in addition to his own field office, a separate
field office for the Owner's use during construction. This field office shall conform
to the attached specification on Sheets 7-9 of this addendum.
D. Section 02722 - Page 12 - Delete all three (3) paragraphs under subsection
3 .1.A. 7 .a.iii.x concerning detectable tape. No detectable tape will be required under
this project.
E. Section 02722 - Page 14 - Delete all references to hydraulic infiltration/exfiltration
leakage test for gravity lines only. A low pressure air test in accordance with the
applicable sections of the Uni-Bell UNI-B-6-90, latest version will be required for
gravity sewer lines.
F. Section 02930 - Page 3 - Delete the first sentence of subsection 3.4, "Temporary
grass shall be used when directed by the Engineer to control erosion where
permanent grassing cannot be planted." Replace with "Temporary grass shall be
planted to control erosion."
G. Section 02930 - Pag:e 3 - Add the following to paragraph 3.4.A: "Pasture rye will not
be permitted."
H. Section 07411 - Replace all references to "Specification Section 07410,
Manufactured Roof and Wall Panels," with "Specification Section 5400, Pre-
Engineered Light Gauge Steel Truss Frames."
I. Section 11500 - Delete Section 11500 in its entirety and replace with revised Section
11500 attached on Sheets 10-17 of this addendum.
Addendum No. 1 Page 6 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.1
ENGINEER'S FIELD OFFICES
I
ENGINEER'S FIELD OFFICES
A. Furnish equipment specified for exclusive use of OWNER, PROGRAM MANAGER
and its representatives.
B. Ownership of equipment furnished under this article will remain, unless otherwise
specified, that of CONTRACTOR.
C. Equipment furnished shall be new or like new in appearance and function.
D. Minimum Features:
1. 11O-volt lighting and wall plugs.
2. Fluorescent ceiling lights.
3. Electric heating and self-contained air conditioning unit, properly sized for
Project locale and conditions. Provide ample electric power to operate
installed systems.
4. Railed stairways and landings at entrances.
5. Exterior Door(s):
a) Number: One
b) Type: Solid core.
c) Lock(s): Cylindrical, keyed alike
6. Number of Windows: Two
7. Minimum Interior Height: 8 feet.
E. Trailer Type Mobile Structure:
F. Floor Space: Minimum Approx. 250square feet.
G. All metal frame; all metal exterior, sides, and roof; and insulated double walls,
floor, and roof.
H. Security guard screens on all windows.
I. Toilet and washbasin in separate compartment with hot and cold water and drains
J. Blinds on all windows.
K. Office Equipment - General:
1. Bottled Water Service: One
2. Paper Cup Dispenser with Cups: One.
3. Paper Towel Dispenser with Towels: One.
4. Desks: Two, steel, 30 inches by 60 inches with desk surface located 29
inches from floor.
5. Computer Chair: Two with the following characteristics:
a. Five castor base.
b. Adjustable height.
c. Swivels.
d. Locking Back.
Addendum No.1 Page 7 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.1
e. Adjustable seat back for height and angle.
f. Adjustable arms.
6. Folding Table: Two, 36 inches by 72 inches.
7. Steel Folding Chairs: Four.
8. Drafting Table: One, 3 feet by 6 feet.
9. Drafting Stool: One
10. Four Drawer Steel File with Lock: One, legal width
11. Bookcase: One, 36 inches wide by 48 inches high.
12. Wastepaper Basket: Two
13. First-Aid Kit: One.
14. Carbon Dioxide (10-Pound) Fire Extinguisher: One.
15. Telephone: One, with one incoming/outgoing lines, Touch-Tone, with
conference speaker, and 12-foot coiled handset cord.
16. Facsimile (Fax) Machine, Use of Contractors fax is acceptable.
17. Duplicator Use of Contractors copier is acceptable.
18. Computer Hardware: High-speed internet access will be provided in the
A UD field office.
ENGINEER'S FIELD OFFICE
A. Make available for OWNER'S use prior to start of the Work at site, to remain on
the site for minimum of 30days after final acceptance of the Work.
B. Locate where directed by OWNER; level, block, tie down, skirt, provide stairways,
and relocate when necessary and approved. Construct on proper foundations, provide
proper surface drainage and connections for utility services.
C. Provide minimum 100 square feet of gravel or crushed rock base, minimum depth
of 4 inches, at each entrance.
D. Raise grade under field office, as necessary, to elevation adequate to avoid
flooding.
E. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with state and local health authorities.
F. Exterior Door Keys: Furnish four set(s) of keys.
G. Telephone:
1. Provide number of incoming lines equal to that specified for telephone
type.
2. Provide separate modem line.
3. Provide appropriate jacks; locate as directed by OWNER.
4. Provide all wiring necessary for a completed telephone system.
H. Computer: Provide all required connecting cables and plugs.
Addendum No. 1 Page 8 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I.
Local Area Network (LAN):
1. Provide a lOT base cable pre-wired, complete in all aspects.
2. Ethernet hub shall be capable of a minimum of two connections.
3. LAN shall be designed and installed by personnel experienced in similar
LAN Systems.
J.
Maintain in good repair and appearance, and provide weekly cleaning service and
replenishment, as required, of paper towels, paper cups, hand soap, toilet paper, first-
aid kit supplies, and bottled water.
Addendum No.1 Page 9 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION \11500
I
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
This section shall cover all work necessary to furnish, install and place into operation the
electrical submersible pump(s) required to complete this project. This section includes.
electric submersible pump(s) to be supplied with motor, close coupled volute, cast iron
discharge elbow, guide bar brackets, power cable, and accessories.
PART 2 - REQUIREMENTS
2.1 SCOPE
Furnish and install 2~335 HP and 1-40 HP submersible non-clog wastewater pump(s) in
accordance with the chart below and as manufactured by ITf Flygt Corporation. Each pump
shall be equipped with a close coupled submersible electric motor connected for operation
on 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz, 4 wire service with 35 linear feet of submersible cable
(SUBCAB) suitable for submersible pump applications. The power cable shall be sized
according to NEC and ICEA standards. Also, 35 linear feet of multi-conductor submersible
cable (SUBCAB) will be used to convey pump monitoring device signals. The pump shall
be supplied with a mating cast iron 8 inch discharge connection and be capable of operating
at the following proposed and future conditions:
Proposed Conditions (1-20" Force Main)
Pump Scenario Motor Size GPM TDH Shutoff Head Note
1 Pump Running 335 HP 1600 75 390 ft. Initial Pump on Frequency
1 Pump Running 335 HP 4500 135 390 ft. Max. Frequency for Single
2 Pumps Running 335 HP 3250 225 390 ft. Both Pumps at Full Speed
1 Pump Running 40HP 350 56 89 ft. Initial Pump on Frequency
1 Pump Running 40HP 1750 63 89 ft. Pump at Full Speed
Future Conditions (1-20" Force Main & 1-24" Force Main)
Pump Scenario
2 Pumps Running
5 Pumps Running
Pump Size GPM
335 HP 4500
335 HP 3000
TDH
105
238
Note
Max. Frequency for 2-Pumps
All Pumps at Full Speed
Each pump shall be fitted with 35 feet of stainless steel lifting chain or stainless steel cable.
The working load of the lifting system shall be 50% greater than the pump unit weight.
Addendum No.1 Page 10 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.2
2.3
SUBMITTALS
I
Submittal data shall be provided to show compliance with these specifications, plans or other
specifications that will influence the proper operation of the pump(s).
Standard submittal data for approval must consist of:
a. Pump Performance Curves.
b. Pump Outline Drawing.
c. Station Drawing for Accessories
d. Electrical Motor Data.
e. Control Drawing and Data.
f. Access Frame Drawing.
g. Typical Installation Guides.
h. Technical Manuals.
1. Parts List.
J. Printed Warranty.
k. Manufacturer's Equipment Storage Recommendations.
L Manufacturer's Start-Up Report Form.
TESTING
Testing performed upon each pump include the following inspections:
a. Impeller, motor rating and electrical connections shall be checked for compliance
with this specification.
b. Prior to submergence, each pump shall be run dry to establish correct rotation.
c. Each pump shall be rim submerged in water. .
d. Each pump shall be factory tested with its respective control panel.
e. Motor and cable insulation shall be tested for moisture content or
insulation defects.
Upon request, a written quality assurance record confirming the above testing/inspections
shall be supplied with each pump at the time of shipment. Each pump (when specified) shall
be tested in accordance with the latest test code of the Hydraulic Institute (H.I.) at the
manufacturer to determine heads vs. capacity and kilowatt draw required. Witness tests shall
be available at the factory upon request. The pump(s) shall be rejected if the above
requirements are not satisfied.
2.4
START-UP SERVICE
The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified factory trained field
service engineer for a minimum of two 8-hour working days(s) at the site to inspect the
installation and instruct the owners's personnel on the operation and maintenance of the
pumping units. After the pumps have been completely installed and wired, the contractor
shall have the manufacturer do the following:
Addendum No.1 Page 11 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. Megger stator and power cables.
b. Check seal lubrication.
c. Check for proper rotation.
d. Check power supply voltage.
e. Measure motor operating load and no load current.
f. Check level control operation and sequence.
During this initial inspection, the manufacturer's service representative shall reVIew
recommended operation and maintenance procedures with the owner's personneL
2.5 FACTORY SERVICE
Factory-Approved service facilities with qualified factory-trained mechanics shall be
available for prompt emergency and routine service.
2.6 GUARANTEE
In addition to the general guarantee required elsewhere in these specifications, the pump
manufacturer shall furnish the Owner with their standard five (5) year or 10,000 hour
municipal warranty.
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1 PUMP DESIGN
The pump(s) shall be automatically and firmly connected to the discharge connection, guided
by no less than two parallel guide bars extending from the top of the station to the wet well
mounted discharge connection. There shall be no need for personnel to enter the wet-well.
Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection shall be accomplished by a
machined metal to metal watertight contact. Sealing of the discharge interface with a
diaphragm, O-ring or profile gasket will not be acceptable. The entire weight of the
pump/motor unit shall be borne by the pump discharge elbow. No portion of the pump/motor
unit shall bear on the sump floor directly or on a sump floor mounted stand.
Power and pilot cable supports shall be provided and consist of a wire braid sleeve with
attachment loops or tails to connection to the under side of the access frame.
3.2 PUMP CONSTRUCTION
Major pump components shall be of gray cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B, with smooth
surfaces devoid of blow holes or other casting irregularities. All exposed nuts or bolts shall
be AISI type 316 stainless steel. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the pumped
media, other than stainless steel, shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of
acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with a polyester resin paint finish on the exterior
of the pump.
Addendum No.1 Page 12 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3
3.4
3.5
Sealing design shall incorporate metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces.
PumplMotor unit mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and
fitted with Nitrile or Viton rubber O-rings. Joint sealing will be the result of controlled
compression of rubber O-rings in two planes and O-ring contact of four sides without the
requirement of a specific bolt torque limit. Rectangular cross sectioned rubber, paper or
synthetic gaskets that require specific torque limits to achieve compression shall not be
considered as adequate or equal. No secondary sealing compounds, elliptical O-rings, grease
or other devices shall be used.
COOLING SYSTEM
Each pump/motor unit shall be provided with an integral, self-supplying cooling system. The
motor water jacket shall encircle the stator housing and shall be of cast iron, ASTM A-48,
Class 35B. The water jacket shall thus provide heat dissipation for the motor regardless of
whether the motor unit is submerged in the pumped media or surrounded by air. After
passing through a classifying labyrinth, the impeller back vanes shall provide the necessary
circulation of the cooling liquid, a portion of the pumpage, through the cooling system. Two
cooling liquid supply pipes, one discharging low and one discharging high within the jacket,
shall supply the cooling liquid to the jacket. An air evacuation tube shall be provided to
facilitate air removal from within the jacket. Any piping internal to the cooling system shall
be shielded from the cooling media flow allowing for unobstructed circular flow within the
jacket about the stator housing. Two cooling liquid return ports shall be provided. The
internals to the cooling system shall be non-clogging by virtue of their dimensions. Drilled
and threaded provisions for external cooling and, seal flushing or air relief are to be provided.
The cooling jacket shall be equipped with two flanged, gasketed and bolted inspection ports
of not less than 4"0 located 1800 apart. The cooling system shall provide for continuous
submerged or completely non-submerged pump operation in liquid or in air having a
temperature of up to 40DC (104DF), in accordance with NEMA standards. Restrictions
limiting the ambient or liquid temperatures at levels less than 40DC are not acceptable.
CABLE ENTRY SEAL
The cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure a watertight
and submersible seal. The cable entry shall consist of dual cylindrical elastomer grommets,
flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance fit against the cable outside diameter and the
cable entry inside diameter. The grommets shall be compressed by the cable entry unit, thus
providing a strain relief function. The assembly shall provide ease of changing the cable
when necessary using the same entry seal. The cable entry junction chamber and motor
shall be sealed from each other, which shall isolate the stator housing from foreign
material gaining access through the pump top. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary
sealing systems shall not be considered acceptable.
MOTOR
The pump motor shall be a NEMA B design, induction type with a squirrel cage rotor, shell
type design, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. The stator windings shall be
insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation rated for 1800C (356DF). The stator shall
Addendum No.1 Page 13 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.6
be insulated by the trickle impregnation method using Class H monomer-free polyester resin
resulting in a winding fill factor of at least 95%. The motor shall be equal to inverter duty
rated in accordance with NEMA M G 1, Part 31. The stator shall be heat -shrink fitted into the
cast iron stator housing. The use of multiple step dip and bake-type stator insulation process
is not acceptable. The use of bolts, pins or other fastening devices requiring penetration of
the stator housing is not acceptable. The motor shall be specifically designed for submersible
pump usage and designed for continuous duty pumping media of up to 400C (l040F) with
an 800C temperature rise and capable of at least 15 evenly spaced starts per hour. The rotor
bars and short circuit rings shall be made of cast aluminum. Thermal switches shall be
embedded in the stator end coils. to monitor the temperature of each phase winding. These
thermal switches shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor
overload protection and shall be connected to the control panel. The junction chamber shall
be sealed off from the stator housing and shall contain a terminal board for connection of
power and pilot sensor cables using threaded compression type terminals. The use of wire
nuts or crimp-type connectors is not acceptable. The motor and the pump shall be produced
by the same manufacturer.
The combined service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency and specific gravity)
shall be a minimum of 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of plus or minus 10%.
The motor shall be designed for operation up to 400C (1040F) ambient and with a
temperature rise not to exceed 80oC. A performance chart shall be provided upon request
showing curves for torque, current, power factor, input/output kW and efficiency. This chart
shall also include data on starting and no-load characteristics.
The power cable shall be sized according to the NEC and ICEA standards and shall be of
sufficient length to reach the junction box without the need of any splices. The outer jacket
of the cable shall be oil resistant chlorinated polyethylene rubber. The motor and cable shall
be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a
depth of 65 feet or greater.
The motor horsepower shall be adequate so that the pump is non-overloading throughout the
entire pump performance curve from shut -off through run-out.
EXPLOSION-PROOF PUMPS
The power system including the pump, motor and power cable shall be approved for use in
areas classified as hazardous locations in accordance with the NEC Class I, Div. 1, Group
C and D service as determined and approved by a U.S. nationally recognized testing
laboratory (U.L., FM, CSA) at the time of the bidding of the project. As required by Factory
Mutual (FM) the motor shall be capable of operating in pumped media up to 104
DEGREES F. Motor thermal switches shall monitor and protect the motor from excessive
temperature. An internal Float Switch shall be available, as an option, in the motor chamber.
Service of explosion-proof submersible units shall be performed by qualified FM
experienced personnel. The pump manufacturer must provide training schools to
qualify personnel in the proper service and repair of explosion-proof pumps.
Addendum No.1 Page 14 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.7
3.8
3.9
PILOT CABLE
The pilot cable shall be designed specifically for use with submersible pumps and shall be
type SUBCAB (SUBmersible CABle). The cable shall be multi-conductor type with stainless
steel braided shielding, a chlorinated polyethylene rubber outer jacket and tinned copper
conductors insulated with ethylene-propylene rubber. The conductors shall be arranged in
twisted pairs. The cable shall be rated for 600 Volts and 900C (194 OF) with a 400C (104 OF)
ambient temperature and shall be approved by Factory Mutual (FM). The cable length shall
be adequate to reach the junction box without the need for splices.
BEARINGS
The pump shaft shall rotate on at least three grease-lubricated bearings. The upper bearing,
provided for radial forces, shall be a single roller bearing. The lower bearings shall consist
of at least one roller bearing for radial forces and one or two angular contact ball bearings
for axial thrust.
The minimum LlO bearing life shall be 100,000 hours at any point along the usable portion
of the pump curve at maximum product speed.
The lower bearing housing shall include an independent thermal sensor to monitor the
bearing temperature. If a high temperature occurs, the sensor shall activate an alarm and shut
the pump down.
MECHANICAL SEAL
Each pump shall be provided with a tandem mechanical shaft seal system consisting of two
totally independent seal assemblies. The lower seal shall be independent of the impeller hub.
The seals shall operate in a lubricant reservoir that hydro dynamically lubricates the lapped
seal faces at a constant rate. The lower, primary seal unit, located between the pump and the
lubricant chamber, shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion
resistant tungsten-carbide seal ring. The upper, secondary seal unit, located between the
lubricant chamber and the motor housing, shall contain one stationary and one positively
driven rotating corrosion resistant tungsten-carbide seal ring. Each seal interface shall be
held in contact by its own spring system. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor
adjustment and shall be capable of operating in either clockwise or counter clockwise
direction of rotation without damage or loss of seal.
Should both seals fail and allow fluid to enter the stator housing, a port shall be provided to
direct that fluid immediately to the stator float switch to shut down the pump and activate an
alarm. Any intrusion of fluid shall not come into contact with the lower bearings.
The following seal types shall not be considered acceptable or equal to the dual
independent seal specified: shaft seals without positively driven rotating members, or
conventional double mechanical seals containing either a common single or double spring
acting between the upper and lower seal faces. No system requiring a pressure differential
to offset pressure and to affect sealing shall be used.
Addendum No. 1 Page 15 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Each pump shall be provided with a lubricant chamber for the shaft sealing system. The
lubricant chamber shall be designed to prevent overfilling and to provide lubricant expansion
capacity. The drain and inspection plug, with positive anti-leak seal shall be easily accessible
from the outside. The seal system shall not rely upon the pumped media for lubrication. The
motor shall be able to operate continuously while non-submerged without damage
while pumping under load.
Seal lubricant shall be FDA Approved, nontoxic.
3.10 PUMP SHAFT
Pump and motor shaft shall be a solid continuous shaft. The pump shaft is an extension of
the motor shaft. Couplings shall not be acceptable. Shaft material on 6x5 and 7x5 drive units
shall be stainless steel- ASTM A479 S43100-T and shall be completely isolated from the
pumped liquid.
3.11 IMPELLER
The impeller( s) shall be of gray cast iron, Class 3 5B, dynamically balanced, multiple vaned,
double shrouded non-clogging design having long throughlets without acute turns. The
impeller(s) shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge and other
matter found in wastewater. Impeller(s) shall be keyed to the shaft, retained with an
expansion ring and shall be capable of passing a minimum 6 inch diameter solid. All
impellers shall be coated with an acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer.
3.12 WEARRlNGS
A wear ring system shall be used to provide efficient sealing between the volute and suction
inlet of the impeller. Each pump shall be equipped with a Nitrile rubber coated steel or brass
ring insert that is drive fitted to the volute inlet.
This pump shall also have a stainless steel impeller wear ring heat -shrink fitted onto the
suction inlet of the impeller.
3.13 VOLUTE
Pump volute(s) shall be single-piece gray cast iron, Class 35B, non-concentric design with
smooth passages large enough to pass any solids that may enter the impeller. Minimum inlet
and discharge size shall be as specified.
3.14 VOLUTE
All stators shall incorporate thermal switches in series to monitor the temperature of each
phase winding. Should high temperature occur, the thermal switches shall open, stop the
motor and activate an alarm.
Addendum No.1 Page 16 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A lower bearing temperature sensor shall be provided. The sensor shall directly contact the
outer race of the thrust bearing providing for accurate temperature monitoring.
A leakage sensor shall be provided to detect water in the stator chamber. The Float Leakage
Sensor (FLS), a small float switch, shall be used to detect the presence of water in the stator
chamber. When activated, the FLS will stop the motor and activate an alarm. USE OF
VOLTAGE SENSITIVE SOLID STATE SENSORS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED.
The thermal switches, FLS and the lower bearing temperature monitor shall be connected to
a MAS (Monitoring and Status) monitoring unit. The MAS shall be designed to be mounted
in the control panel.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1 INSTALLATION
A. The pump(s) and all required appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's specifications.
END OF SECTION
Addendum No. 1 Page 17 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
BOND PROJECT NO. 80501
SPIRIT CREEK PUMP STATION
Augusta, Georgia
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
The Honorable William H. Mays.lII, Mayor
Betty Beard
Marion F. Williams
Barbara Sims
Richard Colclough
Bobby G. Hankerson
Andy Cheek
Tommy Boyles
Jimmy Smith
Don A. Grantham
Frederick L. Russell
Administrator
Max Hicks
Director, Augusta Utilities Department
Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.c.
Engineers - Planners - Surveyors
Augusta, Georgia
June 24, 2005
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES
I Invitation for Bids 1
IE Instructions to Bidders 3
P Proposal 8
BB Bid Bond 2
NA Notice of Award 1
A Agreement 3
PB Performance and Payment Bonds 5
NP Notice to Proceed 1
GC-O Index to General Conditions 1
GC General Conditions 64
SC-O Index to Supplemental Conditions 1
SC Supplemental Conditions 12
TS-O Index to Technical Specifications 3
TS Technical Specifications 291
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
October, 2001
SECTION m
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
m-Ol
GENERAL
All proposals must be presented in a sealed envelope, addressed to the Owner. The
proposal must be filed with the Owner on or before the time stated in the invitation for bids. Mailed
proposals will be treated in every respect as though filed in person and will be subject to the same
requirements.
Proposals received subsequent to the time stated will be returned unopened. Prior
to the time stated any proposal may be withdrawn at the discretion of the bidder, but no proposal
may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after bids have been opened, pending the execution
of contract with the successful bidder.
m-02
EXAMINATION-OF WORK
Each bidder shall, by careful examination, satisfy himself as to the nature and location
of the work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the facilities
needed preliminary to and during the prosecution ofthe work, the general and local conditions, and
all other matters which can in any way affect the work or the cost thereof under the contract. No oral
agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after
the execution of the contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations therein.
IB-03
ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS
No interpretation of the meaning of plans, specifications or other prebid documents
will be made to any bidder orally.
Every request for such interpretation should be in writing addressed to the Director
of Augusta Utilities Department c/o Augusta Purchasing Department, 530 Greene Street, Room 605,
Augusta, Georgia 30911 and to be given consideration must be received at least five days prior to
the date fixed for the opening of bids. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental
instructions will be in the form of written addenda to the specifications which, if issued, will be sent
by certified mail with return receipt requested to all prospective bidders (at the respective addresses
furnished for such purposes), not later than three days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids.
Failure of any bidder to receive any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder
from any obligation under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the
Contract Documents.
m-04
PREPARATION OF BIDS
Bids shall be submitted on the forms provided and must be signed by the bidder or
his authorized representative. Any corrections to entries made on bid forms should be initialed by
the person signing the bid.
IE-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
October, 2001
Bidders must quote on all items appearing on the bid forms, unless specific directions
in the advertisement, on the bid form, or in the special specifications allow for partial bids. Failure
to quote on all items may disqualify the bid. When quotations on all items are not required, bidders
shall insert the words "no bid" where appropriate.
Alternative bids will not be considered unless specifically called for.
Telegraphic bids will not be considered. Modifications to bids already submitted will
be allowed if submitted by telegraph prior to the time fixed in the Invitation for Bids. Modifications
shall be submitted as such, and shall not reveal the total amount of either the original or revised bids.
Bids by wholly owned proprietorships or partnerships will be signed by all owners.
Bids of corporations will be signed by an officer of the firm and his signature attested by the
secretary thereof who will affix the corporate seal to the proposal.
NOTE: A 10% Bid Bond is required in all cases.
ffi-05
BASIS OF AWARD
The bids will be compared on the basis of unit prices, as extended, which will include
and cover the furnishing of all material and the performance of all labor requisite or proper, and
completing of all the work called for under the accompanying contract, and in the manner set forth
and described in the specifications.
Where estimated quantities are included in certain items of the proposal, they are for
the purpose of comparing bids. While they are believed to be close approximations, they are not
guaranteed. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to check all items of construction. In case of
error in extension of prices in a proposal, unit bid prices shall govern.
ffi-06
BIDDER'S OUALIFICATIONS
No proposal will be received from any bidder unless he can present satisfactory
evidence that he is skilled in work of a similar nature to that covered by the contract and has
sufficient assets to meet all obligations to be incurred in carrying out the work. He shall submit with
his proposal, sealed in a separate envelope, a FINANCIAL EXPERIENCE AND EQUIPMENT
STATEMENT, giving reliable information as to working capital available, plant equipment, and his
experience and general qualifications. The Owner may make such investigations as are deemed
necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work and the bidder shall furnish to
him all such additional information and data for this purpose as may be requested. The Owner
reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by the bidder or investigation of him
fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the
contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Part of the evidence required above shall
consist of a list of the names and addresses of not less than five (5) firms or corporations for which
the bidder has done similar work.
IB-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
October, 2001
IB-07
PERFORMANCE BOND
At the time of entering into the contract, the Contractor shall give bond to the Owner
for the use of the Owner and all persons doing work or furnishing skill, tools, machinery or materials
under or for the purpose of such contract, conditional for the payment as they become due, of all just
claims for such work, tools, machinery, skill and terms, for saving the Owner harmless from all cost
and charges that may accrue on account of the doing of the work specified, and for compliance with
the laws pertaining thereto. Said bond shall be for the amount of the contract satisfactory to the
Owner and authorized by law to do business in the State of Georgia.
Attorneys-in-fact who sign bonds must file with each copy thereof a certified and
effectively dated copy of the power of attorney.
IB-08
REJECTION OF BIDS
These proposals are asked for in good faith, and awards will be made as soon as
practicable, provided satisfactory bids are received. The right is reserved, however to waive any
informalities in bidding, to reject any and all proposals, or to accept a bid other than the lowest
submitted if such action is deemed to be in the best interest of the Owner.
IB-09
MINORITY AND ECONOMICALLY DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS
SUPPORT
It is the intent of the Augusta-Richmond County Commission to increase the
involvement of qualified minority and economically disadvantaged businesses in the contracted work
of County Government.
In an effort to support this intention, this project is offered to all qualified firms. The
bids will be evaluated based on qualifications, price and construction time. With all other items
being considered equal, the contract, if awarded will be awarded to a minority and economically
disadvantaged firm or a firm that has included such firms as subcontractors on this project.
The bidders are required to submit a statement of qualifications for themselves and
a list of qualified subcontractors (including local vendors) and all minority or economically
disadvantaged fIrms with their bid package. If the fIrm does not fall into this category, no
information is necessary.
IB-3
I
J
.~
~
-
-
-
:1
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
)
1--'
I
SECTION P
PROPOSAL
DATE: September 2, 2005
\
Gentlemen:
In compliance with your invitation for bids, the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all
labor, equipment and materials, and to perform all work for the project referred to herein as:
BOND PROJECT NO. 80501
SPIRIT CREEK PUMP STATION
in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and in consideration of the amounts shown on the
bid, schedule attached hereto and totaling:
1100 dollars ('I P ;(~tb~
The undersigned hereby agrees that, upon written acceptance of this bid, he will
within 10 days of receipt of such notice execute a formal contract agreement with the Owner, and
that he will provide the bond or guarantees required by the contract documents.
'\
i
The undersigned hereby agrees that, if awarded the contract, he will commence the
~~. within Ten (lQ) calendar days after the date of written notice to proceed, and that he will
q9!riP!~te~th" work withiI18'1"1'iIee'Hunored;(300)"calenaar days after the date of such notice.
. - -:"'<:~ ' .' - ., e>:::;,...;i.'-"-' -.'. ..-,,-....-. ._,-..... ...-'::';'::::'~:-:::::~..;.J.:'~.l:,...;.~~-,;y'r'-.: .".:'
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addendum No. 1 dated 8/26/05
Enclosed is a bid guarantee, consisting of a bid bond
in the amount of ten percent (10%) of bid amount
Respectfully submitted,
Haren Construction Company, Inc.
FIRM NAME
1715 Highway 411 North, Etowah, TN 37331
BUSINE~~S AD RESS ~. .L.
BY; _ _ _ ~LJh'r._
~ E. aren, . . /
TITLE:
Attested By:
P-l
I
-'
.\
~
~
~
-
-
I
I
I. ')
.......,.:f't
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I~)
I
BID SCHEDULE
TO ACCOMPANY THE PROPOSAL OF
BIDDER: Haren Construction Company, Inc.
BOND PROJECT NO. 80501
SPIRIT CREEK PUMP STATION
ADDRESS:
1715 Highway 411 North
Etowah, TN 37331
ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION. QUANTITY. UNIT & UNIT PRICE
1.
ST-I
STRUCTURES
Electrical Building Structure Complete
Lump Sum
Cast-In-P1ace Concrete for Pump Station, Including Hatches"
Door and Embeds, Complete .
Lump Sum
Precast Concrete Grit Trap, Including Hatches, Piping and .
Embeds, Installed Complete /J. ..
1 . EA @ $ r:f!Z Oa!J lEA
ST-2
ST-3
ST-4
Precast Concrete Bypass Structures, Including Hatches and
Embeds, Installed Complete r,
2 EA @ $ -.J 00CX/ lEA
~f~ A/J~()')M M. I
AMOUNT
$ la;, o[KJ
,
$ 2, ClS;oaJ
$ ff't? 000
$ /00 000
Subtotal 1 $;;' 3 a:- ~
PUM:P SATION/STRUCTURE PIPING & EOUIPMENT
Miscellaneous Non Embed Pump Station Steel, Including
Handrails, Grating, Pipe Supports, Etc.
Lump Sum
ll.
PS-l
PS-2
Internal Pump Station Pipe, Valves & Fittings Complete
Lump Sum '3'" I1f -#
Submersible Pump,~p (Explosion Proof) and Accessories,
Installed Complete ~ .."...
2 EA @ $ ~ 5', 0 D 0 lEA
. .
PS-3
PS-4
Submersible Pump, 40hp (Explosion Proof) and Accessories,
Installed Complete
1 EA @ $.2.5; ax) lEA
PS-5
Portable Hydraulic Grit Pump (140 HP) and all Accessories
1 . EA @ $ 9~ 06)D lEA
. .
PS-6
Hydraulic Grinder System, Installed Complete
1 EA @ $ (/0, DDD lEA
,
P-2
$ 3qooP
,
$ 23S 0.9.0
/
$ 330 CtXJ
$ .2..S Q:;C:)
$ 'J tJ, 000
,
$ &J/ 000
,
I
I
")
II
II
'I
I
I
I
I
IJ
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I- ),-
_/ '
I
ITEM- NO. DESCRIPTION, QUANTITY. UNIT & UNIT PRICE
PS-7 Sump Pump and Accessories, Installed Complete
1 EA @ $ 000 lEA
PS-8
PS-9
PS-lO
III.
ME-I
ME-2
ME-3
ME-4*
IV.
S-1
S-2
S-3
S-4
24" Sluice Gate, Including Actuator, Wall Thimble and
Accessories, Installed Complete
1 EA @ $3: CoO lEA
30" Sluice Gate, Including Actuator, Wall Thimble and
Accessories, Installed Complete
1 EA @ $ 7: J'oO lEA
48" Sluice Gate, Including Actuator, Wall Thimble and
Accessories, Installed Complete
8 EA @ $ /$000 lEA
MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL
HV AC Equipment and Installation Complete
Lump Sum
Subtotal IT
J.Dnmp Stl'lt;o~ ""nr! Ple~+~~a1 Bn;ldinn Dl""""'b;ng .,....d A"''''psso~ps
-............. -.-u. II u.J.. U. L.d "-'Ll 1.v u.u. 6 ~ u.J.~J..u. , U..u. '-"\".oo~ .1..1.\".00,
Installed Complete
Lump Sum
Electrical Equipment and Installation Complete
Lump Sum
Instrumentation, Controls and SCADA Allowance
Lump Sum
Subtotal III
SANITARY SEWER YARD PIPING AND
APPURTENANCES
24" Diameter Ductile Iron Sanitary Sewer Pipe, Class 250, Depth
6' to 20', Including Type II (No. 57 Stone) Bedding Material
630 LF @ $ ISD ILF
36" Diameter Ductile Iron Sanitary Sewer Pipe, Class 250, Depth
16' to 20', Including Type TI (No. 57 Stone) Bedding Material
60 LF @ $ :lBt) ILF
48" Diameter Ductile Iron Sanitary Sewer Pipe, Class 250, Depth
14' to 19', Including Type II (No. 57 Stone) Bedding Material
200 LF @ $.".:? O.l? ILF
14" Diameter Ductile Iron Sanitary Sewer Force Main, Class 350,
Standard Joint
675 LF @ $ ~ 0 ILF
P-3
AMOUNT
$ ,,500
$ 5; 'DOC>
$ ~JcO
$ /~, 0cL?
$ fl7.1 DOC)
I
$39Dv~
$ IQ (hO
,
$3JaOEXJ
$95,000.00
$ ~ &\[)(X)
$ pr; ~odJ
$ /';<,000
$ tuzw
$ ;(~ 4-tJ 5tJD
- I
I
I
1
1
I
1
1
1
I
I d,
--)
I
I
1
1
I
1
1
1--' ·
1
)
ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION. OUA1\TTITY. UNIT & UNIT PRICE
5-5 20"Diameter Ductile Iron Sanitary Sewer Force Main, Class 300,
Standard Joint
120 LF @ $ /00 fLF
I
5-6 14" Diameter Ductile Iron Sanitary Sewer Force Main, Class 350,
Restrained Joint
575 LF @ $ (PIJ fLF
S-7 20" Diameter Ductile Iron Sanitary Sewer Force Main, Class 300,
Restrained Joint
300 LF @ $ / 3 S ILF
S-8 24" Diameter Ductile Iron Sanitary Sewer Force Main, Class 300,
Restrained Joint
240 LF @ $ /&0 /LF
S-9 Select Backfill, GA DOT Type L Class 1 & II
3,000 CY @ $ S ICY
S-10 Miscellaneous Pipe Fittings & Connections
10,000 LBS @ $ r "ILBS
S-I1- Precast Sanitary Manhole, GA DOT SID 1011A, Type I, Depth
0' to 6' (60" Diameter), Including Vacuum Testing
4 EA @ $ ;),00':/ lEA
S-12 Additional Sanitary Manhole Depth, Type I, Class 1 (60"
Diameter)
5 VF@ $ //S NF
S-13 Additional Sanitary Manhole Depth, Type I, Class 2 (60"
Diameter)
35 VF @ $ //S IVF
S-14 Precast Sanitary Manhole, GA DOT SID 10 l1A, Type 2, Depth
0' to 6' (120" Diameter), Including Vacuum Testing
1 EA @ $ { nnD lEA
S-15 Additional Sanitary Manhole Depth, Type 2, Class 2 (120"
Diameter)
15 VF @ $ 7100 IVF
S-16 14" In-Line Plug Valve, Including 60" Diameter Precast Concrete
Manhole, Installed"Complete, Open Left
3 EA @ $ r::~ roO
S-17 20" In-Line Plug Valve, Including 60" Diameter Precast Concrete
Manhole, Installed Complete, Open Left
3 EA @ $ P I GoO lEA
P-4
AMOUNT
$ I), coO
$ iff,oeo
$ fo soO
I
$ Li~ 209
$ /5;000
$ fO,m?
I
$ !p;o
$ J'?5
$ '/;0;;";;
$JOa:?
$ /. coD
$ /~ooo
$ :<~ };oo
I. ITEM NO.
il S-18
\
il f
S-19
I
I S-20
I
S-21
I
S-22
I S-23
1
I S-24
I ) v.
W-l
I
1 W-2
I W-3
I
W-4
I W-5
I
W-6
I
1-)
I
DESCRIPTION, QUANTITY, UNIT & UNIT PRICE
14"x14" Tapping Sleeve & Plug Valve, Including Valve Box,
Installed Complete
1 EA @ $ /;.COO lEA
3" AirNacuum Valve Including 72" Diameter Precast Concrete
Manhole & Isolation Gate Valve, Installed Complete
2 EA @ $ /.:?.' 3Oc? lEA
Flow Meter Manhole, 72" Diameter Precast Concrete, Installed
Complete
2 EA @ $ J/ ()gO lEA
I
Ductile Iron Pipe Polyethylene Encasement
250 LF @ $ r ILF
Concrete Encasement of Sanitary Sewer iCreek Crossing, Etc.)
25 CY @ $ / ;} 5 ICY
Miscellaneous Class A Concrete, Including Reinforcement and
Embeds (Thrust Blocks, Etc.)
75 CY @ $ ff.5 ICY
AMOUNT
$ 0/ D[)C)
$ ,;ZS; coo
,
$ (000
$ {oGV
$ -3 / :<s
/
$ ~ 77-5'
Cut and Plug Existing Sanitary Sewer
1 EA @ $ :J/ fJOO lEA $ ~ oeD
Subtotal IV $ S;?il, 300
WATER MAIN
6" DiameterDuctile Iron Water Transmission Main, Class 350,
Standard Joint
1,500 LF @ $..:< 5' ILF
6" Diameter Ductile Iron Water Transmission Main, Class 350,
Restrained Joint
250 LF @ $ , 30 ILF
Select Backfill, GA DOT Type I, Class I & n (Sand/Clay) -
Measured by In~Place Volume
1,000 CY @ $ (? ICY
Miscellaneous Pipe Fittings and Connections
750 LBS @ $ . ,3 ILBS
$ 3.;; ,SDO
$ ~fDD
$ 5:: 000
$ c<,/S'O
Fire Hydrant, Installed Complete with Valve, Lead Pipe, Joint
Restraint, and Blocking
1 EA @ $ ;::._ .{Ot) lEA $ ~ ~DO
6" In-Line. Gate Valve, Including Valve Box, Installed Complete,
Open Left
1 EA @ $ 7t?O lEA $ 70,0
P-5
I'
I
I
I
I
I
1
1
1
I.~
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1-)
I
ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION, QUANTITY, UNIT & UNIT PRICE
W-7 10"x6" Tapping Sleeve, Valve & Valve Box, Installed Complete
1 EA @ $ ~.J'CV lEA
)
W-8
New 2" Water Service, Including Meter, PRV and RPZ
Backflow Preventer, Installed Complete
Lump Sum
Polyethylene Wrap of Ductile Iron Water Main
200 LF @ $ -:5 ILF
W-9
W-IO
Miscellaneous Class A Concrete
50 CY @ $ 7.5
AMOUNT
$ )/5()c
,
$ ~ D9D
$ CoO
ICY $ .3,7SU
. I
Subtotal V $ 71,3 a:J
,
vt PAVEMENT STRUCTURES
P-l 6" GAB and 2" Asphalt Pavement (Access Road)
2,800 SY @ $ ! r.51? /SY
P-2 8" GAB and 3-1/2" Asphalt Pavement (pump Station)
1,250 SY @ $.2 i ~ ISY
P-3 . 8" GAB and 6" Reinforced Concrete Pavement (Pump Station)
800 (p" ~ SY @ $ b L/ ISY
P-4 jVThick Concrete Sidewalk and Building Stoops
10 SY @ $ ,/0 ISY
P-5
VIT.
M-l
M-2
M-3
Foundation Backfill, GA DOT Type 2, for Additional
Unclassified Excavation
1,300 CY @ $ b ICY
M-4
Clearing and.Grubbing
5.25 ACRE @ $ t~ mO IACRE
Bypass Pumping Operations, Complete
Lump Sum
M-5
$ ~ ~ fot:?
$ :30, 6 2.S
,
$ l/~ 000
,
$ 1'00
$ 7 tflJ()
$3~ 73'cO
$ _2" 0Q:1
P-6
* f~tz, AOPe,,JOv~ No. J
I ITEM: NO.
I M-6
\
i
I M-7
I M-8
I M-9
I M-I0
M-ll
I
I M-12
I M-13
I M-14
)
I M-15
I
I
I
I
I
I
I )
.....
I
DESCRIPTION. QUANTITY. UNIT & UNIT PRICE
Drop Inlet, GA DOT STD 1019 A with Weir or Grate, as
Applicable
2 EA @ $) of' D//) lEA
I
18" Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP), Depth 0' to 10'
95 LF @ . $ 35" ILF
24" Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP), Depth 0' to 10'
40 LF @ $ 90 ILF
24" Corrugated Plastic Pipe (CPP), Depth 0' to 10'
75 LF @ $ fO ILF
Flared End Section, Sizes Vary
4 EA @ $ G25 lEA
Stone Dumped Rip-Rap, Type 3, 12" Including Geotextile Fabric
(pipe Outlets)
100 SY @ $ f {/ /Sy
Grading
Lump Sum
6' Chain Link Fence with Barbed Wire, Installed Complete
1,225 LF @ $ /3 ILF
Chain Link Fence Gate with Barbed Wire, 6' x 12', Installed
Complete
6 EA @ $ .5t?iJ lEA
Permanent Grassing
Lump Sum
P-7
AMOUNT
$ LImO
$ 3;3;ZS
;
$ !?a9
I
$ ~ O&,O
$ ~,,S6?o
$ ~OOO
$ .:? ~ rot!)
$ IJ:/,<S
,
$ ~ c:c;o
$ 6;m8
I
I'
-
-
I
-
11
I
:1
,I
I -)
'I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I )
I
DESCRIPTION. QUANTITY, UNIT & UNIT PRICE
Lump Sum Construction (Including But Not Limited to the Items
Listed Below)
Bonds, Insurance
Mobilization, Demobilization
Remove and Reset Fences, all Types
Remove and Reset Gates, all Types
Instrumentation, Controls & SCADA Coordination
Remove and Reset Storm Sewer and Headwalls, Lengths and Sizes Vary
Remove and Reset Light Poles and Electrical Poles, Type Varies
Remove and Reconnect Water Services, Complete
Remove and Reconnect Sanitary Sewer Services, Complete
Remove and Reset Signs, Type Varies
Remove and Reset Water Valve, Size Varies
Remove and Reset Yard Lamps, Type Varies
Erosion and Sediment Control (Temporary Grassing, Construction Exits, Check Dams,
Sediment Traps and Miscellaneous Erosion Control Measures)
Silt Fence, Type n A"
Silt Fence, Type "C"
Property Restoration
Shoring, if Required
Traffic Control
Miscellaneous Grading
Raise/Lower Manhole Tops and Valve Boxes to Grade
. Remove and Reset Existing Fire Hydrants and Valves
Lump Sum
ITEM NO.
**LS-l
\,
i:
Subtotal VII
Base Bid Total
AMOUNT
$ I<-JP 000
.
$S'l~71S
$ ~, 9~B;f?{X)
DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATIVES
Deductive Alternate No. 1 for Wilo EMU Submersible Pumps in
Lieu ofnT FL YGT Pumps
Lump Sum $ fl <f/ 13m
See Control Specification Section 11900 for labor, materials, and equipment to be supplied by
Instrumentation and Controls Contractor.
All items which must be removed by the contractor during construction and are not specifically
shown to be paid for otherwise are to be removed without additional payment. All costs for
this removal or removal and resetting shall be included in the pay item "Lump Sum
Construction. "
Contract award will be based on the Base Bid, and Deductive Alternative No.1 will only be
considered after award o.f the contract.
VIII.
***DA-l
*
**
***
P-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
--:-
SECTION BB
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS" that we, the HAREN CONSTRUCTION COMPANY ~ INC.
Travelers Casualty and Sarety Company of AIIIerica
as ,Principal. and as Surety, are he.reby held
and firmly bound unto the Augusta-Richmond County Commission of Aug~sta, Georgia as Owner in
the penal sum of
TEN PERCENT (10'e) OF AMOUNT BID.
for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly
and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, anminl~trators, successors and assigns.
Signed this 2
day of SEPTEMBER
,2005 .
:The condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the
AuguSta-Richmond County Commission of Augusta. Georgia, a certain Bid, attached hereto and
hereby made a part hereof to enter into a contract in writing for BOND PROJECT NO. 80501
SPIRIT CREEK PUMP STATION, for Augusta, Georgia in accordance with plans and
s~ecifications of the Augusta Utilities Department.
NOW, THEREFORE,
(a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate,
(b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in
the Form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said Bid)
and shall furnish a bond for his faithful peIformance of said contract, and for the
payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection
therewith, and shall in all other. respects perform the agreement created by the
acceptance of said Bid. then this obligation shaH be void, otherwise the same shalJ
remain in force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability
of the Surety for any and aU claims hereund~r shall, in no event, exceed the penal
amount of this obligation as herein stared.
BB-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1-...
.1.11\. ";;L:'L;",-~~j Vl:UUC: .1eL:CJ.V~, lJ~'t!uy I>UpUlUteS ana agrees that the obligations of said Surety
and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the
Owner may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension.
IN WITNESs WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals,
and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals [0 be hereto affixed and these
presents to be signed by their proper officers. the day and year first set forth above.
Signed and sealed this
SEPTEMBER
2
day of
A.D. 200s .
. WjlneSS~,0Q~~.
~tVll'D' (3. <KR.dJ.J
, . B. KeCel- Asst. ,Q:~te,.~
Witn
. Tmeters Casualty and Sarety Company of America
(Seal)
(Surety)
By{JAud i0td:/~~
1 . (Title) Zf-'l.~)
DEBORAH s. HUDGINS.. ATTORNC.'"Y-IN-FACT
BB-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ILT-1018 (9/04)
I
II!ii STPAUL
..... TRAVELERS
IMPORTANT DISCLOSURE NOTICE OF TERRORISM
INSURANCE COVERAGE
On November 26, 2002, President Bush sig~d into law the
Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of ,2002 (the "Act"). The Act
establishes a short-term program under which the Federal
Government will share in the payment of covered losses caused
by certain acts of international terrorism. We are providing you
with this notice to inform you of the key features of the Act, and to
let you know what effect, if any, the Act will have on your premium.
Under the Act, insurers are required to provide coverage for
certain losses caused by international acts of terrorism as defined
in the Act. The Act further provides that the Federal Government
will pay a share of such losses. Specifically, the Federal
Government will pay 90% of the amount of covered losses caused
by certain acts of terrorism which is in excess of an insurer's
statutorily established deductible for that year. The Act also caps
the amount of terrorism-related losses for which the Federal
Government or an insurer can be responsible at
$100,000,000,000.00, provided that the insurer has met its
deductible.
Please note that passage of the Act does not result in any change
in coverage under the attached policy or bond (or the policy or
bond being quoted). Please also note that no separate additional
premium charge has been made for the terrorism coverage
required by the Act. The premium charge that is allocable t6 such
coverage is inseparable from and imbedded in your overall
premium, and is no more than one percent of your premium.
I
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA, TRAVELERS
IASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY and FARMINGTON CASUALTY COMPANY have caused this instrument to be
. gned by their Senior Vice President and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 13th day of May, 2005,
I STATE OF CONNECTICUT
}SS, Hartford
TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA
TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
FARMINGTON CASUALTY COMPANY
By
/4-2r-~- --
George W. Tho~pson
Senior Vice President
On this 13th day of May, 2005 before me personally came GEORGE W. THOMPSON to me known, who, being by me du1y
Lorn. did depose and say: that he/she is Senior Vice President of TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF
~iuCA, TRAVELERSCASUr\LTY AND SURETY COMPANY and FARMINGTON CASUALTY COMPANY, the
corporations descnoed in and which executed the above instru.meIit: that he/she knows the seals .of said corporations; that the seals
Itffixed to the said instrument are such corporate seals; and that he/she executed the said instrument 'on behalf of the corporations by
"uthority ofhiS/her office under the Standing Resolutions thereof.
I
I
I
'<<\~ t ~
My commission expires June'30, 2006 Notary Public
Marie C. Tetreault
CERTIFICATE
. the undersigned, Senior Vice President of TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND . SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA,
-rRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY and FARMINGTON CASUALTY COMPANY; stock corporations of
the State of Connecticut, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority
lemains'm full force 'and has not been revoked; .and furthermore, that the Standing Resolutions of the Boards of Directors, as set
brth in the Certificate of Authority, are now in force. . . .
r~SeaIed at the ~o~ceofthe Company, in the Ci1J' ofHarlford, State of Connecticut. Dated this 2
day of
%~- -=
-
By
Nicholas Seminara
Senior Vice President
. " ~ 0" .
I
NOTICE OF AWARD
I
I
~L\ ':9ci'.1
DATE:t,,~C \~~)\~}! ( \ lub
\ 'l
CONTRACTOR:
Haren Construction Company, Inc,
I
ADDRESS: 1715 Highwayy 411 North
I
Etowah
City
TN 37331
State Zip Code
PROJECT:
Spirit Creek Pump Station
PROJECT NO: 80501
I
I
At a meeting of the Augusta-Richmond County Commission held on 09/06/05 you were awarded a Contract for the
above noted Project.
I
Enclosed please find 5
copies of the Contract Documents for your execution. Please complete the
pages, affixing signatures, dates, notary and/or corporate seals, etc, where necessary and return to this office
10 days from the date of this letter, excluding Legal Holidays,
I
The Certificate of Insurance must be complete.
I
Power of Attorney must be submitted in triplicate; an original and two copies is permissible,
I
Very truly yours,
Augusta Program Management Team
1
~J?t. ~
Project Engineer
Reciept of this NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby acknowledged this, the ~+:h day of ~-t-~ 2005
l:-\am(kn~\v).eJ,,,,, 0,0 ') ~~m~, j Frank E. Haren Jr..president
Contractor By I Title
Please sign and return one copy of this Notice of Award Acknowledgement to:
Augusta Utilities Department
I
I
I
Attn: Program Managers
I
I
I
360 Bay Street, Suite 180
Augusta, GA 30901
I
80501 HAREN NOTICE OF AWARD 05_09_20,DOT
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
SECTION A
AGREEMENT
('TH S ~'l~t\^-B6a... ~
THIS AGREEMENT, made on the \? of , 20~, by and
between AUGUSTA, GEORGIA BY AND THROUGH THE AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY
COMMISSION, party of the first part, hereinafter called the OWNER, and HAREN
CONSTRUCTION COMPANY. INC., party of the second part, hereinafter called the
CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH, that the Contractor and the Owner, for the considerations hereinafter
named, agree as follows:
ARTICLE I - SCOPE OF THE WORK
The Contractor hereby agrees to furnish all of the materials and all of the equipment
and labor necessary, and to perform all of the work shown on the plans described in the specifications
for the project entitled:
BOND PROJECT 80501
SPIRIT CREEK PUMP STATION
and in accordance with the requirements and provisions of the Contract Documents as defined in the
General and Special Conditions hereto attached which are hereby made a part of this agreement.
ARTICLE II - TIME OF COMPLETION -- LIOUIDATED DAMAGES
The work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced within ten ClQ)
calendar days after the date of written notice by the Owner to the Contractor to proceed. The work
shall be completed within Three Hundred (300) calendar days after the date of such notice and with
such extensions of time as are provided for in the General Conditions.
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between the Contractor and the
Owner, that the date of beginning, rate of progress and the time for completion of the work to be done
hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDmONS of this Contract. Contractor agrees that said work shall
be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insure full
completion there of within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed by and between
the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is a
reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range
and construction conditions prevailing in this locality.
IF THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NEGLECT, FAIL OR REFUSE TO COMPLETE
THE WORK WITHIN THE TIME HEREIN SPECIFIED, then the Contractor does hereby agree, as
a part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, to pay to the Owner the sum of One
Thousand Dollars ($1,000.00), not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for such breach of contract
as hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the
time stipulated in the contract for completing the work.
A-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the
Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual
damages the Owner would, in such event, sustain, and said amounts shall be retained from time to time
by the Owner from current periodical estimates.
It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this contract
and the specifications wherein a definite portion and certain length of time is fixed for the performance
of any act whatsoever; and where under the contract an additional time is allowed for the completion
of any work, the new time limit fixed by extension shall be the essence of the Contract.
ARTICLE ill,. PAYMENT
(A) THE CONTRACT SUM
The Owner shall pay to the Contractor for the performance of the Contract the amount
as stated in the Proposal and Schedule ofItems. No variations shall be made in the amount except as
set forth in the specifications attached hereto.
(B) PROGRESS PAYMENTS
On no later than the fifth day of every month, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner
an estimate covering the percentage of the total amount of the Contract which has been completed
from the start of the job up to and including the last working day of the preceding month, together with
such supporting evidence as may be required by the Owner and/or the Engineer. This estimate shall
include only quantities in place and at the unit prices set forth in the bid schedule.
On the vendor run following approval of the invoice for payment, the Owner shall after
deducting previous payments made, pay to the Contractor 90% of the amount of the estimate on units
accepted in place. The 10% retained percentage may be held by the Owner until the final completion
and acceptance of all work under the Contract.
ARTICLE IV - ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT
(A) Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and
acceptance, the Engineer shall within 10 days make such inspection, and when he finds the work
acceptable under the Contract and the Contract fully performed he will promptly issue a final
certificate, over his own signature, stating that the work required by the Contract has been completed
and is accepted by him under the terms and conditions thereof, and the entire balance found to be due
the Contractor, including the retained percentage, shall be paid to the Contractor by the Owner within
15 days after the date of said final certificate.
(B) Before final payment is due the Contractor shall submit evidence satisfactory to
the Engineer that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the work have been
paid, except that in case of disputed indebtedness of liens of evidence of payment of all such disputed
amounts when adjudicated in cases where such payment has not already been guaranteed by surety
bond.
A-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(C) The making and acceptance of the final payment shall constitute a waiver of all
claims by the Owner other than those arising from unsettled liens, from faulty work appearing within
12 months after final payment, from requirements of the specifications, or from manufacturers'
guarantees. It shall also constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously
made and still unsettled.
(D) If after the work has been substantially completed, full completion thereof is
materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, and the Engineer, so certifies, the Owner shall
upon certification of the Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance
due for that portion of the work fully completed and accepted.
Each payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this.Agreement in three
(3) counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, in the year and day first mentioned above.
('~"""
(~~"nMo"'l) '"
- ~ ........ (>0-.
~ 4- .... .... ~.~
,,~ .. .. A'~
~ i.:! . . ..to 1""
'" .':::l · · r:..
"";11 \.~
~ . . :::i ~
~\.C. ~
~.. '"
1". r: .
#
~ . ""
'f~ r .... .... .,
_, GEORG\l'-_.J'
~~"~ LIt... 'P7
("
, . ").
Witness 1
~~
Address:
orp. Sec.
C~RA~R:
Br~~..
As its . . resident
Haren Construction Company, Inc.
1716 High'J!ay d 11 N
P.O. Box 350
Etowah, TN 37331
(SEAL)
ArrEST:
A-3
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION PB
PERFORMANCE BOND
(NOTE:
THIS BOND IS ISSUED SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH PAYMENT BOND ON
PAGE PB-3, IN FAVOR OF THE OWNER CONDITIONED FOR THE
PAYMENT OF LABOR AND MATERIAL.)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That HAREN CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC.
as Principal,
hereinafter called Contractor, and TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA
a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of CT
with its principal office in the City of HARTFORD , State of C1 , as
Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto AUGUSTA, GEORGIA BY
AND THROUGH THE AUGUSTA-RICHMOND 0<(iPJJtl1~ w~~~NH_EQ.lWgee,
hereinafter called the Owner, in the penal amount of :nIlSA~, Elr..rr HUNDRED AND NO/100 'Dollars
($ 4,928,800.00 ) for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs,
executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents
for the faithful performance of a certain written agreement.
WHEREAS, Contractor has by said written agreement dated
entered into a contract with Owner for the construction of BOND PROJECT NO. 80501
SPIRIT CREEK PUMP STATION, Augusta, Georgia, in accordance with the drawings and
specifications issued by the Augusta Utilities Department and the Augusta-Richmond County
Commission, which contract is by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as
the CONTRACT.
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that, if Contractor
shall promptly and faithfully perform said CONTRACT, then this obligation shall be null and
void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by
the Owner.
Whenever Contractor shall be, and declared by Owner to be in default under the
CONTRACT, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may
promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly
(1) Complete the CONTRACT in accordance with its terms and conditions, or
(2) Obtain a bid or bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and
conditions, and upon determination by Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, or,
if the Owner elects, upon determination by the Owner and the Surety jointly of
the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and
Owner, and make available as Work progresses (even though there should be a
PB-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
default or a succession of defaults under the contract or contracts of completion
arranged under this paragraph) sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less
the balance of the contract price; but not exceeding, including other costs and
damages for which the Surety may be liable hereunder, the amount set forth in the
first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the contract price," as used in this
paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the
Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to
Contractor.
Any suit under this bond must be instituted before the expiration of two (2) years
from the date on which final payment under the CONTRACT falls due.
No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or
corporation other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or
successors of the Owner.
day of
AD. 20
HAREN CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC.
(Seal)
( Contractor)
Attest c::P~,
Andrew R. Haren-Corp. Sec.
Wimess v/cZa ~~
Attest
TRAVElERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
OF AMERICA (Seal)
(Surety)
B 1~ImJjIi4~
~ (Title) - {)
DEBORAH S. HUDGINS, ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
PB-2
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_ Sr-PAUL
~ TRAVELERS
IMPORTANT DISCLOSURE NOTICE OF TERRORISM
INSURANCE COVERAGE
On . November 26, 2002, President Bush signed into law the
Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of ,2002 (the "Act"). The Act
establishes a short-term program under which the Federal
Government will share in the payment of covered losses caused
by certain acts of international terrorism. We are provi~ing you
with this notice to inform you of the key features of the Act, and to
let you know what effect, if any, the Act will have on your premium.
Under the Act, insurers are required to provide coverage for
certain losses caused by international acts of terrorism as defined
in the Act. The Act further provides that the Federal Government
will pay a share of such losses. Specifically, the Federal
Government will pay 90% of the amount of covered losses caused
by certain acts of terrorism which is in excess of an insurer's
statutorily established deductible for that year. The Act also caps
the amount of terrorism-related losses for which the Federal
Government or an insurer can be responsible at
$100,000,000,000.00, provided that the insurer has met its
deductible.
. Please note that passage of the Act does not result in any change
in coverage under the attached policy or bond (or the policy or
bond being quoted). Please also note that no separate additional
premium charge has been made for the terrorism coverage
required by the Act. The premium charge that is allocable to such
coverage is inseparable from and imbedded in your overall
premium, and is no more than one percent of your premium.
ILT-tOt8 (9/04)
~ ", . .
IIN 'WIT~SS WHEREOF, TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA, TRAVELERS
CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY and FARMINGTON CASUALTY C01.\fPANY have caused this instrument to be
I signed by their Senior Vice President 'and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 13th day of May, 2005.
I STATE OF CONNECTICur
} ss. Hartford
COUNTY OF HARTFORD
:$
TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA
TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
FARMINGTON CASUALTY COMPANY
By
/~~~~ .~
George W~ Thompson
Senior Vice President
I On Ibis 13th day of May, 20.05 befo,e me personally came GEORGE W. TIlOMPSON ro me known, who, being by me duly
sworn, did depose' and say: that he/she is Senior Vice President of TRAVELERS ~48UALTY AND SURETY CO~ANYOF
I AMERICA, TRAVELERS.:CASUf\LTYAND SURETY CO~ANY and FARMINGTON CASUALTYCOl\filANY, the
corpoJ'ations described in and whicll executed the above instrumimt~ that. he/she knows the seals of said corporations; that the seals
affixed to the said instniment are such corporate seals; and that he/she executed the said instrument-on behalf of the corporations by
I authority ofhislher office, under the Standing Resolutions thereof.
I
I
~~t~
My commission expires June 3D, 2006 Notary Public
Marie C. Tetreault
I CERTIFICATE
11, the undersigned, Senior Vice p. resident of TRAVELERs CASU. ALTY AND, SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA,
TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY and FARMINGTON CASUALTY COMPANY; stock corporations of
the State of Connecticut, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority
remains ih full force 'and has not been revoked; and furtheffil,ore, that the Standing Resolutions of the Boards of Directors, as set
I forth in'the Certificate of Authority, are now in force. . , .' . .
Signed'and Sealed at the Hortle Office of the Company, in the City of Hartford, State of Connecticut. Dated this . day of
,2005. .
~-~
--
By
Nicholas Seminara
. .senior Vice Presid~nt
I
I
I
'.1'
.' OJ ~ .,,'
t906-EB190 ~l\JJl33UUO:J 'p.lOn.lllH C ~1/\ I :3 8 :3 '8
ANV dJ.4l0:J XJ.'IVfiSV:J NOJ.f>.NmIlIV.tI
ANV dWO:J XJ.aans <<NV XJ.'lVfiSV:J smrI:iIA VlLL
v:Jmmv.tIO ANVdwO:J XJ.IDIClS mIV XJ.'IVnsV:J sIDn:ilAVH.L
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
. ,. 'l';)lptmn Sf If q:lf'llM 6lSupftQ.mpun
10 puoq htm Oll:l;)dS:l1 lpfM. ;)ll1ltlJ alp Uf.,{tmdmo:J alp uodn SUfP1I!q ptm Pf{tlA aq l{lll{S {tl~S :lnui!S:lllJ ptm all1luu8f~ aifUlfS:lUJ q:ms Aq P;)!Jp.m:l
ptm paln:laXa OS l;)MOd tpns Atm ptmAtmdmo;) alp uodn 8UfPUfq ptm PHllA ;)q UllllS {tlas alfUlfsollJ 10 amti;nDlfS alfUlfsollJ qonsliUf.1'1l:l<l ~1l:)!Jflr.io JO
,{:)WOllU JO oClMOd qqns. Atm ptm Joa.I:nJl all1ltnI atJl Uf hIOlulinqo sSunfW. latpO ptm siltrpI1ll.mpun pUll spuoq iltIflSallll ptm 8unn:l:lxa JO AllIO sasodmd
10J l:nliI-Uf-8,{:)WOllV 10 safJRlaJoas lUlllSfSSY lllilpfsalI 'Slllilpfsald aOfA luapfsalI liUfltl!oddll Ol:lJalp SUnllpl :llll:lYn-mO htm Ol JO hauiollll .10 oClA\od
htm Ol :llflII!S:nlJ hq paxtIJll \Xl hum RiIlldmo;) :llp JO lllas alp ptm 'h.nllal:las llIlllSfssy Atm'h.nlla,IO:lS Atm 'luapfsald aOfA llIlllsfssy htm 'lU:lPfs:lld
;Y.lfA htm 'luapfsald :xIfA 10'fllilS Atm 'luapfsald a:lfA aAnU:laXH htm 'lUap!saJd :sJaoillo lilIfh\ouoJ atp JO qOlla JO all1lmrii!s alp llllU :mLLOA
:paJJa puuaJ.loJ IIn] U! MOU Ii! uo!}nIO!ialI qJ!qM 'ANVdW03
.u'IVaSV3 NOJ.DNIJ\IlIV.tI pU1~ ANVdW03,XJ.no.S <INY XJ.WllSV3 SlI:I'I~VHJ. 'V3IlImv .tIO XNVdW03
umns.<<NV li'IVllSV:J SlI:I'I:!IAVlIJ. JO S.lopa.l!([ JO sp.l~og aq} Aq pa}OA UO!lnlOSalI ~U!pu~js ~U!MOIlOJ :Jql JO AlJ.loqln~
Aq pun Japun (pa}1IJ.Id .10 fnJ!unqJam) aI!m!sJ~J Aq pafnas pun pau1f!s sJ A}!.Ioq}nv JO alnJY!J.la:J pun AaUJo>>V JO .IaMod S!qJ.
OAlPotpnll JO uonllliapp llilllf.Itt\1l ollUllnsmd SJ:l:lillO htmdmo:J alom JO :mo hq
10 Al!lolpnu JO S:llll:lY!ll:lO .If:llp JO :lllloY!llao J:lq JO Sf'll tI! paq!l:lsaJd oClA\od ~tp ollUllnsmd slua8y ptm l:lniI-Uf-shawollY aJom JO auo hq (pa.IftlbaJ
.p. '{tl:lS oClpun) palnoaX:l Al11P (q) JO'A.rnl:lJO:lS ltmlSfssy JO Aml:lJ:l:lS n Aq Itl:lS s,hUlldmo~ :ltp tp!M p:l{tl:lS pUllpalSallll Al11PPUll A.rnlaJ:las llflllSfSSY
htm JO h.nllaJ:las :llUJodrO;) :ltp '~.ItIStlaJ~ llIlils!ssy hUll '~mstl:lJ~ :ltp 'lllilPfS:lJd ailfA puo:las AlIll 'luapfs:lJd :l:lfA Atm JO luap!s:lld a:lfA JOfllilS
. hUll 'l~fS:lld aOfA:lAnno:lxH A1:Ill 'mnUJpl'q;) :l:)!A ,(lIll 'lU:lPfsaJd atp hq patrllfs (tl) llilqA\ AUlldmo;) :ltp uodn illql'm.q pUlll'!{tlA aq umrs liup{lll.l:lpun
fllUO!l!puoil .10 'a:nIllZfIDlooal 'puoq U JO all1luu atp tI! hIollliln~o illI!lfW. 10 'Al!ffiUaptl! JO l:>tlIlUO:> 'a:nIllZ!trlloO;)J 'puoq htm ltlttL :CTIlLOA
. h.nllaJoas. atp JO aOillo .:ltp Uf pam sf JoaJ:ltp Adoo U plIll SlI!lfW. tI!
Sf uopuil:llap' q:>ns q:>tl:lllltp papfAOJd 'Awdmo;) sm JO sa:lAoldma 10 slaoillo al0m 10 :lUO Ol AlPotpnll ilUfoliaJoJ alp JO l-Illd hUll .10 un :lltllialav hlltu
lllilpfSaId aOfA ,(lIll .10 llmp!8:}Jd a:>!A 10fUas AUg 'lUap!sald a:>!A :lAnn:>axH AUll 'UlllIlI!llq;) aO!A AUll 'lUap!s:lJd :ltp 'UllUlJ!llq;) alp lllttL :CTIlLOA
'.mq 10 tIrfll U:lAfil J:lMod atp a){OA:lJ pUll a:lltl!oddll
q:lns Atm :lAOmaJ Atlm amn AUllltl SJO}:>:lIfG JO pmos: atp .10 s.moillo PIllS JO AUll pUll 'ilup{lll-I:lpun llluoP!puoo JO 'aoUllZftrllO:Y.lJ 'puoq tl JO a.ItlltlU :ltp
Uf hIOl\1~!{qo slilI!lfW. Y.llpo ptm 'Al}UUI:lPtl! JO SPtlIlUOO 'saoUllZftrlloO:lJ 'spuoq {tlas S ,AUlldmo;) :lq:} tp]A\ j1las pUll aUIllU S ,AlIlldmo;) atp lp]A\ trll!S O}
:l<l!J:lSaJd h1lUI Al!lolpnll JO :)l\10ml.Ia:> J:lq JO Sf'll Stl AlPotpntl qons aalm.oddn qons :lA!~ Atlm pUll AUlldmoo :ltp JO J[1lt{:lq uo pUll JOJ l:lU Ol SlU:lSy pUll
l:miI-Uf-s,{:)UJOllY lUfoddu .(l11UA.rnl:lJ:>:lS l~S!SSV AUll .10 AmlaJ:>as :lltlJodJO;) atp 'Jamstl:)J~ lU1ll8!SSY hUll. '.r.utrnTf:lll alp 'lllilP!S:lld aO!A PUO:l:lS
hUll 'l1mP!s:lld aOfA AUu 'lllilpfS:lJd' :lOfA JOfUaS Am 'lllilPfS:lJd :)ofA :lAPU:l:JxH hUll 'titmu!l1lf;) :JO!A hUll 'lllilP!S:lld :ltp 'tI1ltn.IfmI;) :)lp ltlttL ;mLLQA
:l:>~G pue G:lloJ, IItlJ Uf MOU
~.m suoflnloS~lI q:>f'llM 'SGfUUdmo;) PIUS JO suoflnlos~ llUJPtrnlS llufMOUO} ~lp JO AlflOlpUll Aq pue JGpun Gpllm. S! lU::l~UfOddll sJ'lU
'pGuuyuOO ptrn P~!mlll AqGJ~q Q.It1 'UGA!1l UJ::ll~q AlflOlpUlll~tp olluensmd 'l:>ll,d-U!-(S)AGUJ'OUV PIUs JO Sl:>ll ::llp lIll pUll 'SGfUUdwo:) ~lp JO SlroYJO p~zflotpnll AfllP Gtp Aq pGu1l!s G1::lM Gums
~tp.p. SlllU::l:P:::l ::lUItlS gtp Ol pue AUtlJ Sll Aq:ualn 'sGfUUdmo;) Gtp PU!q Ol ptrn Ol::ll::lqllU::lP!:>UJ SlUGsuo:> JIll pun Aue pun lltIp{lllJ::lpun
tmIopWUOO 10 '::lOllllZfU1lo:>:u 'puoq ll. JO G.It\lllU gtp UJ AIOlllllnqo sllUflflM. l::llpO pue 'AlfUlU::lPUf JO SlOllllUOO 'S~OtrnZfu1l00g1 'spuoq
ne pull Aue 'loe pue ::l.mi1lWi!S gios JGqjSflI Aq :(s)lugtutUlSUf llUfMouoJ glp 'SG1U1S pglfUfi,::ltpUNJfM ::l:mld Aue lU 'gllP~IM01Dpll
pue QlM~XG 'Wi!S 01 pGlJGJUoo AqGJGq AlflOlpnu ptrn J~Mod UtIJ lpfM 'lOUd-U!-(S)A::lWOllV ItlJM.lll pue ::ltUl J!Gtp 'aassauuai
'anJAqsUN JO 'AaIOD "V uqor 'lPunJg or qIll 'SU~PUH.S qnJoqaa h.lf '!S!uuacI or .:1 :lUJoddll pue GltllpstIO:,. '00{lllU SlUGSgld
gsgtp Aq op pue 'palUfoddu pue pgllllflSUOO. '~pum lpllq C.S~fUUdwo:)" gq} l::llJllU!~lGq) 'lnOpbGUUO;) JO ~ltnS 'pJO.J1ltlH JO Anno:)
'pJOJllllH JO Al!;) ::ltp UJ SG:>YJO Illd!ouJ'ld .If~lp llU'!Allq ptrn 'lnofl:>GUUo:) JO allllS ~lp JO SMllI ~tp .IGPun. P~ZJUtlllJO AfllP SUOfl~lOd.IOO
'XNVdW03 XJ.'IVllSV:J NOJ.DNIlWVd' pue XNvdW03 limns aNVAJ.WllSV3 SlI~'I:!IAVlI.L 'V:JIlIID\IV
40 XNVdWO:J XJ.D1lS aNY xJ.wasv:J SU:ifI:iIAVlI.L J.VlU 'SJ.N:lSIDIcI :lSnLL Xg SNOSll:lcI 'IW MONX
. , ~ ',' r I I ') n tLl. S rW ~!
. . '.. ,;, \ ,~v J.v
~r:: ~.J v H
J.:JVl-NI-(S)AnrnoJ.J.V.[o XJ.mORLllV ,[0 UV3ImlI~:J <<NY XMOJ,J,V ,[0 lIaMOd
1 : T flJ: I. 6 T .,n~ r.OOJ .
n -.J ~ G .. U~V .. IJ
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION PB
LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
(NOTE:
THIS BOND IS ISSUED SIMULTANEOUSLY WITH PERFORMANCE
BOND ON PAGE PB-l, IN FAVOR OF THE OWNER CONDITIONED FOR
THE PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK.)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That HAREN CONSTRUCTION COMPANY OF AMERICA
as Principal,
hereinafter called Contractor, and TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA
a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of
CT
with its principal office in the City of HARTFORD
, State of
CT
, as
Surety, hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto AUGUST A, GEORGIA BY
AND THROUGH THE AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION, as Obligee,
hereinafter called the Owner, for the use and benefit of claimants as hereinbelow defined in the
amount of FOUR MILLION, NINE HUNDRED TWENTY-EIGHT THOUSAND, EIGHT HUNDRED
AND NO /100------------------------------------- Dollars ($ 4,928,800.00 ) for the payment
whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, Contractor has by written agreement dated O't /OG:/ZcC S-
entered into a contract with Owner for the construction of BOND PROJECT NO. 80501
SPIRIT CREEK PUMP STATION, in accordance with drawings and specifications issued by
the Augusta Utilities Department and Augusta-Richmond County Commission, which contract is
by reference made a part hereof, and is hereinafter referred to as the CONTRACT.
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that, if the
Contractor shall promptly make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for all labor and
material used or reasonably required to use in the performance of the CONTRACT, then this
obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject, however, to
the following conditions:
(1) A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a
subcontractor of the Contractor for labor, material, or both, used or reasonably
required for use in the performance of the contract, labor and material being
PB-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(2)
(3)
(4)
construed as to include that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline,
telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the CONTRACT.
The above named Contractor and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with
the Owner that every claimant as herein defined, who has not been paid in full
before the expiration of a period of ninety (90) days after the date on which the
last of such claimant's work or labor was done or performed, or materials were
furnished by such claimant, may sue on this bond for the use of such claimant,
prosecute the suit to final judgement for such sum or sums as may be justly due
claimant, and have execution thereon. The Owner shall not be liable for the
payment of any costs or expenses of any such suit.
No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant,
(a) Unless claimant, other than one having a direct contract with the
Contractor, shall have given written notice to any two of the following:
The Contractor, the Owner, or the Surety above named, within ninety (90)
days after such claimant did or performed the last of the work or labor, or
furnished the last of the materials for which said claim is made, stating
with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to
whom the materials were furnished, or for whom the work or labor was
done or performed. Such notice shall be served by mailing the same by
registered mail or certified mail, postage prepaid, in an envelope addressed
to the Contractor, Owner or Surety, at any place where an office regularly
maintained for the transaction of business, or served in any manner in
which legal process may be served in the state in which the aforesaid
project is located, save that such service need not be made by a public
officer.
(b) After the expiration of one (1) year following the date on which
Contractor ceased work on said CONTRACT, it being understood,
however, that if any limitation embodied in this bond is prohibited by any
law controlling the construction hereof, such limitation shall be deemed to
be amended so as to be equal to the minimum period of limitation
permitted by such law.
(c) Other than in a state court of competent jurisdiction in and for the county
or other political subdivision of the state in which the project, or any part
thereof, is situated, or in the United States District Court for the district in
which the project, or any part thereof, is situated, and not elsewhere.
The amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or
payments made in good faith hereunder, inclusive of the payment by Surety of
mechanics' liens which may be filed of record against said improvement, whether
or not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this bond.
PB-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
W~~~:~ Gik
Attest ~
Andrew R. Haren-Corp. Sec.
W;mess v/-:il& ~:i&u
Attest~y
PB-5
day of S' F-f~ ""-fl<i><L
~\
AD. 20 .
HAREN CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC.
(Seal)
( Contractor)
TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
OF AMERICA (Seal)
(Surety)
B{JkJ J#ir~eID)
(Title)
DEBORAH s. HUDGINS, ATTORNEY':IN-FACT
I '
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
_ ST'PAUL
IIIII'TRAVELERS
IMPORTANT DISCLOSURE NOTICE OF TERRORISM
INSURANCE COVERAGE
On. November 26, 2002, President Bush signed into law the
Terrorism Risk Insurance Act of ,2002 (the "Act"). The Act
establishes a short-term program under which the Federal
Government will share in the payment of covered losses caused
by certain acts of international terrorism. We are providing you
with this notice to inform you of the key features of the Act, and to
let you know what effect, if any, the Act will have on your premium.
Under the Act, insurers are required to provide coverage for
certain losses caused by international acts of terrorism as defined
in the Act. The Act further provides that the Federal Government
will pay a share of such losses. Specifically, the Federal
Government will pay 900/0 of the amount of covered losses caused
by certain acts of terrorism which is hi excess of an insurer's
statutorily established deductible for that year. The Act also caps
the amount of terrorism-related losses for which the Federal
Government or an insurer can be responsible at
$100,000,000,000.00, provided that the insurer has met its
deductible.
Please note that passage of the Act does not result in any change
in coverage under the attached policy or bond (or the policy or
bond being quoted). Please also note that no separate additional
premium charge has been made for the terrorism coverage
required by the Act. The premium charge that is allocable to such
coverage is inseparable from and imbedded in your overall
premium, and is no more than one percent of your premium. .
ILT-lOl8 (9/04)
. r' . .
IlN -w'ITNEss WHEREOF, TRAVELERS CASUAL'!)' AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA, TRAVELERS
IICASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY and FARMINGTON CASUALTY COMPANY have caused this instrument to be
signed by their Senior Vice President 'and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 13th day of May, 2005.
I . , .,.
STATE OF CONNECTICUT TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA
TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY
}SB. Hartford FARMINGTON CASUALTY COMPANY
By ~cr-~~'
-,,-
George w~ Thompson
Senior Vice President
I>n this 13th day of May, 20.05 before me person~ly came GEORGE W. mOMPSON to me known, who, being by me duly
sworn, did: depose. and say: that helshe is Senior Vic,e Pr~sid,en~ of TRA YELE~ ~A,SU~TY AND S~J:Y CO~ ANY ,OF
.,umRICA, TRAVELERS.:CASU,ALTYAND SURETY CO~ANY and FARMINGTON CASUALTY.COM}JANY, the
If<>ffOJ."lltions des.crt~ed in and whicli 'executed the above ii1strum€mi: that. hels~e know~ ~e seals .of said corporations; that ~e seals
8ffixed to the SaId Instrument are such corporate seals; and that he/she executed the SaId Instrument'on behalf of the corporations by
,-ri1r of hislher office.1Dlderthe StandiiJg Resolutions thereof.
I
I
~t.~
My commission expires June 30, 2006 Notary Public
Marie C. Tetreault
tmTIFICATE
I, th~ undersigned, Senior Vice President of TRAVELERs CASUALTY AND. SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA,
FRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COj.\fPANY and FARMINGTON CASUALTY COMPANY; stock corporations of
.e State of Connecticut, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority
remains. ill full' force .and has not been revoked; and furtheI'Jll.ore, that the Standing Resolutions of tbe Boards of Directors, as set
.oith in the Certificate of Authority, are now in force. . " . ,
.~ed'and S~ed at the Home Office of the Company, in the City of Hartford, State ofConn~cticut. Dated this . day of
,2005. '
~_.~-
~
By.
Nicholas Seminara
. .Senior Vice Presid~nt
I
I
I.
'"j
.";, .n"
,/'"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'1
:. l.
, " 1':)qotnlll S! l! q~!1Ih\ OJ ~pttn
10 plIOq AUll Oll~:)ds:ll1fi!A\ ~.ltlltlJ :)1fi lI!'AUlldmo;) ~llp uodn illI!P1lfq pUll PHllA ~q filltIs p~s gnuJ!sOllJ we ~.milltf<l!~ ~i!ID!sot1J q::ms ,(q p~~o
ptl1l p:)}t\\Y.)lG) OS .roh\od q::ms AUll pUll'AUlldUlC);) ~lp lIoon ~lI!PlI!q pUll P!IllA ~q nnqs Itl:lS gIfUl!SouJ ~o ~.ml~!S :lHUl!SOllJ qms .ilup:e~(.. :)}llO~O JO
A~llUOUll JO .mA\od q:ms' Al1ll pUll JO:).I:llp :l.nqw :llil lI! AIOlugHqo s8unfJh\ Jgtpo pUll s8IIpM.mpun ptIll spuoq glIflS~Ull pUll Bunnn:nc:l JO AllIo sasodmd
10J l::Illll-lI!-sAmIJOuV ~o S:lrml:lJ:)'1S lUllls!SSVlmlp!S~'H '~mlp!S:l.Id ~O!A llI:lp!S~'H ilunlI!oddll Olg.rotp guntlt:lJ :ll1l0g:n-mo AUll Ol JO ,(guiOllll jo .roM.od
AUll Ol ~HID!s::ltlJ Aq p:lX!lJ1l gq AtnU Almdmo;) :llp JO Itl~S ~tp pUll 'A'.ml:l~O~S lUlllS!ssy AUll'.-\ml~UO:lS AtIll 'lU:lP!S:l.Id :lO!A ltllllS!ssy AUll 'ltJ:)P!S~Jd
;Y.>!A AUll llIQP!S:l.Id :l~!A JO!mlS AUll 'ltJ:)P!S:l.Id :l~!A :lARUOgXH AUll lmlP!S:lJd :Sl:lOIDO illJ!M.onoJ gtp JO q:m:l JO a.nqtlmJ!s :ltp ltnU. :UH.LOA
. . . :lJOlJJOl pUinlJ.loJ IInJ uJ ,",ou Ii! uonnIosOllI 1[J!1[.M. 'XNVdWO;)
A..lWfiSV3,NO.LDNrnIlIV.!I pun XNV&\IO::> ,A..LIDIO.S (INV A..lWIlSV:J SlInUVlU 'v::>mmv .!IO XNVdWO;)
A.l:nm.S<<NV. X.L'IVllSV:J SlI:iI'lUVlIJ.. JO S.lOPOl.lJa: JO liP.mog Olql Iq P,OllOA u<JjlnIOS;)lI ~UfPU1ljS ~UJ.M.oIloJ ;)1[l JO AlJiOl{lnlf
Aq pm .I;}PUR (p;}J1IJ.Id .10 (lfJ!lI1lqJOlW) OlUlUJSJlfJ Aq P;}IlfOlS pun pOlWl!s sf ,(l!.lOqlRV JO Oll:1lJUTl.IOl:J pm A;)U.Io>>V JO .I;}.M.Od S!lU
"Al!lotpnu JO 1I0RtlggIgp lI:lllpM. U ollUllnsmd sl:j:lIDO AUlldmo;) :llOm 10 :l1I0 Aq.
10 Al!lOlpntl JO S:lltl:lYIJ.mO .I!gtp 10 "ltl:lYfll:l:l .roq 10 S!l[ lI! p:lq!'l:ls~ud l:lM.od atp ollUllnsmd SllI:lgy pUll pUll-lI!~SA:lUlOllY "10m ~o "1I0 ,{q (p:l.qnb:lJ
.f! '{ws .mpun) p:llnn:lx:l Amp (q) ~O'A.nlt:llO:lS ltIlllS!SSY 10 Arnl:lJ:l:lS tl Aq Im)S S ,AtIlldmob "lp tp!M pgltl:lS ptIll. P"lS:lllU AltlPPtIll A.nlt:lJ:):lS ltIlllS!ssy
hUll 10 A'.ml:lJ:):lS :lltllOdrO;) :ltp '.m.J11Stl:ll~ lmilsfSSY AUU 'l:lmSll:'ll~ :ltp 'lmlp!S:lld :lJIA PUO:l:lS AtIll lmlPIS:l.Id g~!A AtIll 10 llIgPIS:lJd g:lJA 10JmlS
. AUll ~~g.Id :l:lIA:lAPOOgXH AlIa 'tIllUUfilqa :l:)!A AtIll 'lII:lp!S:l.Id gtp Aq p~ltnlIs (u) mllfh\. AUlldmo;) gtp uodn gUw~q PtIllP!IllA gq nmJS gupJUl-IQpun
J1llIOp!plIOO 10 ':l:ll1tlZfll1lo:>:U rpuoq II JO :l.nqUU :ltp lI! AIOltignqo 8unfJh\ 10 'Al!lJlImPlI! JO Pll~UO:l ':lOtIll.ZfIDl~:u'puoq AUll ltllJ.L :<IH.LOA
. . ArnJ:l.I:l:lS.:ltp JO :l:>IDO .:ltp Uf P~IYS! JO::llglp AdO:l U pUll gunflM. UJ
Sf UO!lVg:lI~ tI:>ns q:>ll:l llltp p:lpJAOld 'Atmdmo;) s!1llJo S:l:lAoldm::110 Sl:l:lIDO :llOm 10 ::lUO Ol AlJlolllnu 8lI!o~:l~(jJ :;/1pJo ptld AtIllIO IJlI :)}u8::lIgp,(llUI
lmlp!lr.lld :;):I!A AUll :to lII:lp!S:l.Id :l:l!A 10JU:lS AUll llIQPIS:l.Id :l:>IA :lAnn:>:lxH hUll 'lIlllIll1llq;) ::l:l!A AUll lmlPIS::l.Id :ltp 'tIll~;) :ltp ltnU. :<IH.LOA
'.I::lq ~o lIrf1llIQA!~ .roM.od ::llp g){OAgl pUll g:lllI!oddll
q:ms htIll gAOUIQJ AtlUl :lmn AtIllltl SlOP:lIfG JO p11l0g::ltp 10 S.I::l:lIDO PIllS JO hUll ptIll '8UPJll}.IQpun fllUOPTI'lIOOlO ':l:lUllZJU80::l:;)~ 'puoq 11 JO g.nqll1I ::llll
U! !roluBnqo sgunfJh\ l::ltpO ptIll 'AlJUUI:lPlI! JO SpUlllIO:l 'S:l:lUllZJU80:lgJ 'splIoq Ill:lS S ,Aulldmo;) gtp tp!h\. iu:ls ptIll :llIIll1I S ,AUlldwo;) :llll tp!h\. miJS OJ
gqp:>saJd AtlUl AlPotpUll JO :llU:>!.ffi.I::l:l .I:llf 10 S!l[ Stl AlP?tpnu q:ms :l:llIqoddll q:>ns :lA!g htlUl ptIll hUlldmo:l Qtp JO J{Uq:)q lIO plI1l .IOJ l:lU Ol SlU::l8y pUll
ltiUlI-ll!-sA::lUlOllY llIfoddll .(tlUlAnQgJ:):lS ltiuJS!ssy AtIll lO Ailll::lJ:):lS ::llUlOWO;) glJl 'l:lmStl::ll~ lUlllSIssV AtIll '.r.1lmlIr.lll :;)tp llIQP!Sg.Id ::lO!A PlIO:lgS
. AtIll 'ltmPJSatd :;):I!A '{1i1l 'lmlPISgld' ::l:lrA 10!mlS AUu 'llIQP!S:lJd gO!A :lAnn:l~XH AtIll ~tI:) ~O!A AUIl llI:lp!S:J.Id :ltiJ 'U1lUI.IflltI;) :ltp ltnU. ~QA
:lO;}]P ptm::>OIOJ,II1Y tq MOU
QI1l suopnIos::>1{ lJo!1IM.. 'S::>!lI1ldwo::> PIllS}O SUOP~tos::>1{ guwlI1lls SlI!M.OIlO} ::>tp}O AlPOtpRn Aq pm J::>pun ::>PtmI.S! lU~~1I!odd~ sm .
'p::lUJ.IyUOO puu p::l!JPlll Aq::lmq g.rn "lIGA!8 tqgJ~q AlPotpn~
0lJi Olltmnsmd 'lOll.!!-U!-(S)A:m1011V PIlls }O SlOll ::>lp Till pu~ '~!lI1ldmo::> Gtp JO SI::>OYJO p;}zpotpn~ AInp GtpAq p::>u2!s glgM ::>ums
0tu.P. su lU:)}X::> ::mIlls gtp 01 puu AIItlJ Sll Aq::ll::llrl 's~!lI1ldwo;) ::ltp PU!q O} ptm Ol::lIGtp llI::>P!Otq S}UGSUOO ~ pm Atm pm SlIplClJ~pun
(eUoPWuoo JO 'gOtIllzpniOO::>1 'puoq u JO Gl11llm ~tp U! AIOluSrrqo sSupflM. l::ltpO ptm 'AlfUUl::>Ptq}O S}OIl.QUOO 's::!otm~OO:ll 'spuoq
ne puu Aue 'lO~ puu g.mllllI8!S gjos IGqjS!lI Aq :(s)lUGtII1l.QStq StqM.OIlO} Gtp 'S::>llllS P;}}fUfi,gtp.u!lll'fM ~OUld AtIIllll 'gSpaIA\.OlDpll
puu O}tI.OOO{G 'u2!S 01 pglJgJUoo AqglglJ. AlPOtpRll ptm IGMOd ItnJ lJl'fM lOllll-tq-(s)MWoUV {iyM~i pm ~tul .I!Gtp 'o);)ss3uuai
'a1IfA1[SUN JO 'AOlIOn "V uqof 'Jpm.lD: -r lJIJ.L 'suPipnn.s qlf.loq3([ '..If 'JsfUU3d .f .3: :ltqodd~ pUll gltllps!Ioo"~ Slugsard
*lJl Iq op puu 'pgltqoddll pun pgltTlpsuoo' '~pllW tpllq Csg!ll1ldwO;)" Gq}. IGijtm!gJgq) inbno::muo::> 10 ~ltnS 'p10.JJ.lUH JO AunO;)
'pIOJJ.IeH}O Al!;) gtp tq s~oYJO JUd!OllHd l!gtp SUfAlllf ptm lnopo:muo;)}o ::lllllS ::ltp jo SAte{ ~tp J::lpun' P::lZfll1lSJO A'[IlP suo!lluodJ06.
'ANVdWO::> llWIlSV::> NO.LDNIl\llIV.[' pm. ANvdWO::> A..lIDIIlS <<NV,.'^",1V.Q.~Xq\J ~~1.3i\VH.L 'v::>mmv
(0 ANY dWO::> UIDIllS ([NY iU wnsv::> SlIrIU VH.L .LVRL 'S.LN3:SIDId I :ilsmu I Aa- 'S~OSlI:ild 'I'IV A\ON}J
:;:-L ,!H
. -- , ^.- I l! I . 0 T !"1 () {"'0Q1
.L::>VJI-NI-(S)X:iINlIO.u.V.[O XJJlIORLllV.[O UV::>I.!IlLlI3:::> QNy.A.~O~.L"''[OlmA\Od
C3/\I:JJ3tj
t906-E8190 ~I\3JP::lQUo:J 'pJO,pJlIH
ANYdPlO:J ..U:W1lSV:J NO.LfJ.NIPm'VJI
ANY dWO:J UalIl1S <lNV U'1V1lSV:J smrI:lIA VlU
v:Jmawv ,[0 ANYdwO:J umms <lNV U'lV1lSV:J SUI'!:lIA VlJ.t
I
AC1JRQ
CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE
DATE (MMlDDIYYYY)
09/16/2005
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POUCIES BELOW.
I
PRODUCER (865)691-4847 FAX (865)694-4847
TIS Insurance Services, Inc.
1900 Winston Road, Suite 100
P.O. Box 10328
Knoxville, TN 37939-0328
INSURED Haren Construction C~y, Inc. et al
P. O. Box 350
Etowah, TN 37331
INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE
INSURER A: St. Paul Fire Br Marine
INSURER B: AIG/ Wood S eci a 1 Ri sk
INSURER c:
INSURER D:
INSURER E:
NAlC#
Insurance
I
I
THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES, AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
I~~ ~~I TYPE OF INSURANCE POUCY NUMBER POlICY EFFECTIVE POlICY EXPlRAOON UMlTS
GENERAL UABlUTY KC041oo287 06/14/2005 06/14/2006 EACH CX:CURRENCE $ 1 000.000
f.- 100.000
~ COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DAMAGE TO RENTED $
tJ CLAIMS MADE [!] CX:CUR MED EXP (A1rj one person) $ 5.000
I--
A ~ BLASTING COVERAGE PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1 000 000
~ XCU GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2.000.000
GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AGG $ 2.000.000
h POliCY fXl~:g: n LOC
AUTOMOBILE UABlUTY KC04100287 06/14/2005 06/14/2006 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
f.- $
~ ANY AUTO (Ea accident) 1. 000.000
ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
I-- $
SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person)
A f--
~ HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
$
~ NON-OWNED AUTOS (Per accident)
I-- PROPERTY Dl\MAGE $
(Per accident)
RARAGE UAIlIUTY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
EXCESS/UMBRELLA UAIlIUTY BE4952273 06/14/2005 06/14/2006 EACH CX:CURRENCE $ 20.000 000
t:!:1 OCCUR D CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ 20.000.000
B $
~ DEDUCTIBLE $
X RETENTION $ 10,00( $
WORKERS COMPENSAOON AND WVS41ooo56 06/14/2005 06/14/2006 X I WCSTATU- I IOJ~
EMPLOYERS" LIABIUTY $ 500.000
A ANY PROPRIErORlPARTNER/EXECUTlVE E.L EACH ACCIDENT
OFFICERlMEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 500.000
~~~~~m~c3~s below E,L. DISEASE- POLICY LIMIT $ 500 000
OTHER
DESCRlPllON OF OPERAl1ONS / LOCA110NS / VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT / SPECIAL PROVISIONS
iroject: Spirit Creek ~p Station - Augusta, GA Contract A~nt: $4,928,000
he certificate holder is naaed as additional insured with respect to general liability for work
3erfor.ed by or on behalf of the noed insured.
I
I
I
I
I
I
~1
I
I
I
I
I
~
l
t
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
Augusta-RichBond County
Consolidated Gover~ent
530 Green Street - ~60S
Augusta, GA 30911
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
~ DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NMED TO THE LEFT,
BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTA11VE
Construction Div. JAMSHO
~/I4--
ACORD 25 (2001/08)
@ACORDCORPORATION1n8
..........-
11-'
II
II
II
II
IMPORTANT
If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed, A statement
on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s),
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may
require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate
holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
DISCLAIMER
The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between
the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it
affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
ACORD 25 (2001/08)
I
I
NOTICE TO PROCEED
I
DATE: October 6, 2005
TO: Haren Construction Company, Inc,
I
1715 Highway 411 North
I
Etowah, TN 37331
Attn: Frank E. Haren, Jr,
I
PROJECT: Spirit Creek Pump Station
PROJECT NO: 80501
I
You are hereby notified to commence WORK in accordance with the Agreement dated
September 6, 2005
I
on or before
{O /2.'f/o~ ,and you are to complete the WORK within 300
I
consecutive calendar days thereafter. The date of completion of all WORK is therefore
8/ZD/Of.o
I
Very truly yours,
Augusta Program Management Team
I
.~
?~
I
Receipt of this NOTICE TO PROCEED is hereby acknowledged
I
I
This, the 6th
day of October
, 2005
Contractor: Haren Construction Company, Inc,
I
I
By: 'J,.L- JJf..tjJ t
Title: ~,~ ~
Please sign and return one copy of this Notice to Proceed Acknowledgement to:
Augusta Utilities Department
I
I
Attn: Program Managers
360 Bay Street, Suite 180
Augusta, GA 30901
I
80501 HAREN NOTICE TO PROCEED,DOC
I
I
I
I ARTICLE
I -01.
-02.
-03.
I -04.
-05.
-06.
I -07.
-08.
-09.
I -10.
-11.
-12.
I -13.
-14.
I -15.
-16.
I -17.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION GC
INDEX TO GENERAL CONDITIONS
Definitions
Preliminary Matters
Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse
Availability of Lands, Physical Conditions, Reference Points
Bonds and Insurance
Contractor's Responsibilities
Other Work
Owner's Responsibilities
Professional's Status During Construction
Changes In The Work
Change of Contract Price
Change of Contract Time
Warranty and Guarantee; Tests and Inspections: Correction, Removal or Acceptance
of Defective Work
Payments to Contractor and Completion
Suspension of Work and Termination
Dispute Resolution
Miscellaneous
GC-O
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
SECTION GC
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE I--DEFINITIONS
Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract Documents the following terms
have the meanings indicated, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof:
Addenda-Any changes, revisions or clarifications of the Contract Documents which have been duly
issued by OWNER to prospective Bidders prior to the time of opening of Bids.
Agreement-The written agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be
performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as
provided therein.
Application for Payment-The form accepted by PROFESSIONAL which is to be used by
CONTRACTOR in requesting progress or final payments and which is to include such supporting
documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
Bid-The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the price(s) for
the Work to be performed.
Bonds-Bid, performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security furnished by
CONTRACTOR and its Surety in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Change Order-- A document recommended by PROFESSIONAL, which is signed by CONTRACTOR
and OWNER, and authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the
Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement.
Contract Documents-The Agreement: Addenda (which pertain to the Contract "Documents);
CONTRACTOR's Bid (including documentation accompanying the Bid and any post-Bid
documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement;
the Bonds; these General Conditions; the Supplementary Conditions; the Plans, Specifications and the
Drawings as the same are more specifically identified in the Agreement; Certificates of Insurance;
Notice of Award; and Change Order duly delivered after execution of Contract together with all
amendments, modifications and supplements issued pursuant to paragraphs 3.3 and 3.5 or after the
Effective Date of the Agreement.
Contract Price-The moneys payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents
GC-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of paragraph 11.9.1 in the case of Unit Price
Work).
Contract Time-The number of days (computed as provided in paragraph 17.2.1) or the date stated in
the Agreement for the completion of the Work.
CONTRACTOR-The person, firm or corporation with whom OWNER has entered into the Agreement.
COUNTY-Richmond County, Georgia, or Augusta, Georgia, political subdivisions of the State of
Georgia, the Augusta-Richmond County Commission, and its authorized designees, agents, or
employees.
Day-Either a working day or calendar day as specified in the bid documents. If a calendar day shall fall
on a legal holiday, that day will be omitted from the computation. Legal Holidays: New Year's Day,
Martin Luther King Day, Memorial Day, 4th of July, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day and
the following Friday, and Christmas Day.
Defective-An adjective which, when modifying the word Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty or deficient, does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements
of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has
been damaged prior to PROFESSIONAL's recommendation of final payment, unless responsibility for
the protection thereof has been assumed by OWNER at Substantial Completion (in accordance with
paragraph 14.8 or 14.10).
Drawings-The drawings which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which
have been prepared or approved by PROFESSIONAL and are referred to in the Contract Documents.
Effective Date of the Agreement-The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective,
but if no such date is indicated it means the date on which the Agreement is signed by the Mayor of
Augusta, Georgia.
Field Order-A written order issued by PROFESSIONAL that modifies Drawings and Specifications,
but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time.
General Requirements-Sections of Division I of the Specifications.
Laws or Regulations-Laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and/or orders.
GC-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
Notice of Award-The written notice by OWNER to the apparent successful bidder stating that upon
compliance by the apparent successful bidder with the conditions precedent enumerated therein, within
the time specified, OWNER will sign and deliver the Agreement.
Notice to Proceed-A written notice given by OWNER to CONTRACTOR (with a copy to
PROFESSIONAL) fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which
CONTRACTOR shall start to perform CONTRACTOR'S obligations under the Contract Documents.
OWNER- Augusta, Georgia, and the Augusta-Richmond County Commission.
Partial Utilization-Placing a portion of the Work in service for the purpose for which it is intended
or for a related purpose) before reaching Substantial Completion for all the Work.
PROFESSIONAL-The ArchitecturallEngineering firm or individual or in-house licensed person
designated to perform the design and/or resident engineer services for the Work.
PROGRAM MANAGER - The professional firm or individual designated as the representative or the
OWNER who shall act as liaison between OWNER and both the PROFESSIONAL and
CONTRACTOR when project is part of an OWNER designated program.
Project-The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may
be the whole, or a part, as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
Project Area-The area within which are the specified Contract Limits of the improvements
contemplated to be constructed in whole or in part under this Contract.
Project Manager-The professional in charge, serving OWNER with architectural or engineering
services, his successor, or any other person or persons, employed by said OWNER, for the purpose of
directing or having in charge the work embraced in this Contract.
Resident Project Representative-The authorized representative of PROFESSIONAL as PROGRAM
MANAGER who is assigned to the site or any part thereof.
Shop Drawings-All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically
prepared by or for CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations,
brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information
prepared by a Supplier and submitted by CONTRACTOR to illustrate material or equipment for some
portion of the Work.
Specifications-Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions
GC-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and
certain administrative details applicable thereto.
Subcontractor-An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with CONTRACTOR or
with any other SUBCONTRACTOR for the performance of a part of the Work at the site.
Substantial Completion-The Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in
the opinion of PROFESSIONAL as evidenced by PROFESSIONAL's definitive certificate of
Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that
the Work (or specified part) can be used for the purposes for which it is intended, or if there be no such
certificate issued, when final payment is due in accordance with paragraph 14.13. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to any Work refer to Substantial
Completion thereof.
Supplementary Conditions-The part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these
General Conditions.
Supplier-A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor.
Underground Facilities-All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels
or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasement containing such facilities which have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam,
liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage
removal, traffic or other control systems, or water.
Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
Work-The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required
to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work is the result of performing services, furnishing
labor and furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and furnishing
documents, all as required by the Contract Documents.
Work Change Directive-A written directive to CONTRACTOR, issued on or after the Effective Date
of the Agreement and signed by OWNER and recommended by PROFESSIONAL, ordering an
addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions
under which the Work is to be performed as provided in paragraph 4.2 or 4.3 or to emergencies under
paragraph 6.22. A Work Change Directive may not change the Contract Price or the Contract Time but
is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive
will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as
to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Time as provided in Article 10.
GC-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
Written Amendment-A written amendment of the Contract Documents, signed by OWNER and
CONTRACTOR on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and normally dealing with the non-
engineering or non-technical rather than strictly Work-related aspects of the Contract Documents.
GC-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 2-PRELIMINARY MATTERS
Delivery of Bonds:
2.1. When CONTRACTOR delivers the executed Agreements to OWNER, CONTRACTOR
shall also deliver to OWNER such Bonds as CONTRACTOR may be required to furnish in accordance
with these Contract Documents.
Copies of Documents:
2.2. After the award of the Contract, OWNER shall furnish CONTRACTOR, at no cost, one
(1) complete set of the Contract Documents for execution of the work. Additional sets of the project
manual and drawings and/or individual pages or sheets of the project manual or drawings will be
furnished by COUNTY upon CONTRACTOR's request and at CONTRACTOR's expense, which will
be OWNER's standard charges for printing and reproduction.
Commencement of Contract Time, Notice to Proceed:
2.3. The Contract Time shall commence as established in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to
Proceed may be given at any time after the Effective Date of the Contract.
Starting the Project:
2.4. CONTRACTOR shall begin the Work on the date the Contract Time commences. No
Work shall be done prior to the date on which the Contract Time commences. Any Work performed
by CONTRACTOR prior to date on which Contract Time commences shall be at the sole risk of
CONTRACTOR.
Before Starting Construction:
2.5. Before undertaking each part of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and
compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all
applicable field measurements. CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to PROFESSIONAL
any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which CONTRACTOR may discover and shall obtain
a written interpretation or clarification from PROFESSIONAL before proceeding with any Work
affected thereby. CONTRACTOR shall be liable to OWNER for failure to report any conflict, error,
ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, if CONTRACTOR knew or reasonably should
have known thereof.
2.6. Within ten days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in
the General Requirements), CONTRACTOR shall submit to PROFESSIONAL and OWNER for
reVIew:
GC-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
2.6.1. an estimated progress schedule indicating the starting and completion dates of the
various stages of the Work:
2.6.2. a preliminary schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submissions, and
2.6.3. a preliminary schedule of values for all of the Work which will include quantities and
prices of items aggregating the Contract Price and will subdivide the Work into component parts in
sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during construction. Such prices will
include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work which will be
confirmed in writing by CONTRACTOR at the time of submission.
2.7. Before any Work at the site is started, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with
copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, an original policy or
certified copies of each insurance policy (and other evidence of insurance which OWNER may
reasonably request) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with
Article 5.
Pre-construction Conference:
2.8. Before any Work atthe site is started, a conference attended by CONTRACTOR, OWNER
, PROFESSIONAL and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among
the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in 2.6 as well as procedures for
handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing applications for payment and maintaining
required records.
Finalizing Schedules:
2.9. At least ten days before submission of the first Application for Payment, a conference
attended by CONTRACTOR, PROFESSIONAL and OWNER and others as appropriate will be held
to finalize the schedules submitted in accordance with paragraph 2.6. CONTRACTOR shall have an
additional ten (10) calendar days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit
the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to CONTRACTOR until the schedules are
submitted and acceptable to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL as provided below. The finalized progress
schedule will be acceptable to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL as providing an orderly progression
of the Work to completion within any specified Milestones and the Contract Time, but such
acceptance will neither impose on PROFESSIONAL responsibility for the sequencing, scheduling or
progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve CONTRACTOR from full responsibility therefor.
The finalized schedule of Shop Drawing submissions and Sample submissions will be acceptable to
PROFESSIONAL as providing a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the submissions.
CONTRACTOR's schedule of values shall be approved by PROFESSIONAL as to form and
substance.
GC-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
CONTRACTOR, in addition to preparing an initially acceptable schedule, shall be responsible
for maintaining the schedule, including updating schedule. Schedule updates shall include progression
of work as compared to scheduled progress on work. Schedule updates shall accompany each pay
request.
GC-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 3-CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; INTENT,
AMENDING, REUSE
Intent:
3.1. The Contract Documents comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR concerning the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary: what is called
for by one is as binding as if called for by all. The Contract Documents will be construed in
accordance with the law of the State of Georgia.
3.2. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or
part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or
equipment thatmay reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom
or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be supplied whether or not
specifically called for. When words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction
industry or trade meaning are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words shall be
interpreted in accordance with that meaning.
3.3. Except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents or as may be provided
by amendment or supplement thereto issued by one of the methods indicated in 3.6 or 3.7, the
provisions oftheContract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity
or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and the provisions of any such
standard, specification, manual, code or instruction (whether or not specifically incorporated by
reference in the Contract Documents) and the provisions of any such Laws or Regulations applicable
to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract
Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation). Clarifications and interpretations of
the Contract Documents shall be issued by PROFESSIONAL as provided in paragraph 9.4.
3.4. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society,
organization or association, or to the Laws or Regulations of any governmental authority, whether such
reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard, specification, manual, code or
Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the
Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract
Documents.
3.5. If, during the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR discovers any conflict, error,
ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any
provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such
standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier referred to in 6.7,
CONTRACTOR shall so report to PROFESSIONAL in writing at once and before proceeding with
the Work affected thereby and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from
GC-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
PROFESSIONAL; however, CONTRACTOR shall not be liable to OWNER or PROFESSIONAL
for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless
CONTRACTOR had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof.
Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents:
3.6. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions andrevisions
in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof in one or more of the following ways:
3.6.1. a formal Written Amendment,
3.6.2. a Change Order (pursuant to paragraph 10.3), or
3.6.3. a Work Change Directive (pursuant to paragraph 10.4).
As indicated in paragraphs 11.2 and 12.1, Contract Price and Contract Time may only be changed by
a Change Order or a Written Amendment.
3.7. In addition, the requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor
variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized in one or more of the following ways:
3.7.1. a Field Order (pursuant to paragraph 9.5).
3.7.2. PROFESSIONAL's approval of a Shop Drawing or sample (pursuant to paragraphs 6.24
and 6.26), or
3.7.3. PROFESSIONAL's written interpretation or clarification (pursuant to paragraph 9.4).
Reuse of documents:
3.8. Neither CONTRACTOR nor any Subcontractor or Supplier or other person or organization
performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with OWNER shall have
or acquire any title to or OWNERSHIP rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications or other documents
(or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of PROFESSIONAL or PROFESSIONAL's
consultant; and they shall not reuse such Drawings, Specifications or other documents (or copies of
any thereof) on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of OWNER and
PROFESSIONAL and specific written verification or adaptation by PROFESSIONAL.
GC-lO
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 4-A VAILABILITY OF LANDS, PHYSICAL
CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS
Availability of Lands:
4.1. OWNER shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the
Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands which
are designated for the use of CONTRACTOR. Necessary easements or rights-of-way will be obtained
and expenses will be borne by OWNER. If CONTRACTOR and OWNER are unable to agree on
entitlement to or the amount or extent of any adjustments in the Contract Price or the Contract Times
as a result of any delay in OWNER's furnishing these lands, rights-of-way or easements, the
CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. The CONTRACTOR
shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary
construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.
Physical Conditions:
4.2.1. Explorations and Reports: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for
identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to
the site that have been utilized in preparing the Contract Documents and those drawings of physical
conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the site (except
Underground Facilities) that have been utilized in preparing the Contract Documents.
4.2.2. CONTRACTOR may rely upon the general accuracy of the "technical data" contained
in such reports and drawings. Such "technical data" is identified in the Supplementary Conditions.
Except for such reliance on such "technical data," CONTRACTOR may not rely upon or make any
claim against OWNER, PROFESSIONAL, or any of PROFESSIONAL's Consultants with respect to:
4.2.2.1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for CONTRACTOR's purposes,
including but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures
of construction to be employed by CONTRACTOR and safety precautions and programs incident
thereto, or
4.2.2.2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown
or indicated in such drawings, or
4.2.2.3. any CONTRACTOR interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data"
or any such data, interpretations, opinions or information.
4.2.3. If conditions are encountered, excluding existing utilities, at the site which are (1)
GC-ll
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated
in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ
materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction
activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then CONTRACTOR shall give
OWNER notice thereof promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 48 hours
after first observance of the conditions.
4.2.4. The OWNER and PROFESSIONAL shall promptly investigate such conditions, and,
if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in CONTRACTOR's cost of, or time
required for, performance of any part of the Work, the OWNER and PROFESSIONAL shall
recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time, or both. If the OWNER
and PROFESSIONAL determine that the conditions at the Site are not materially different from those
indicated in the Contract Documents or are not materially different from those ordinarily found and
that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the PROFESSIONAL shall notify
CONTRACTOR of the .determination in writing. The Work shall be performed after direction is
provided by the PROFESSIONAL.
Physical Conditions-Underground Facilities:
4.3.1. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract
Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on
information and data furnished to OWNER or PROFESSIONAL by OWNER'S of such Underground
Facilities or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions:
4.3.1.1. OWNER and PROFESSIONAL shall not be responsible for the accuracy or
completeness of any such information or data; and
4.3.1.2. The cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price and
CONTRACTOR shall have full responsibility for reviewing and checking all such information and
data for locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, for
coordination of the Work with the OWNER'S of such Underground Facilities during construction, for
the safety and protection thereof as provided in paragraph 6.20 and repairing any damage thereto
resulting from the Work, the cost of all of which will be considered as having been included in the
Contract Price.
4.3.2. Not Shown or Indicated. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or
contiguous to the site which was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents and which
CONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of, CONTRACTOR shall,
promptly after becoming aware thereof and before performing any Work affected thereby except in
an emergency as permitted by paragraph 6.22, identify the OWNER of such Underground Facility and
give written notice thereof to that OWNER and to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL. PROFESSIONAL
will promptly review the Underground Facility to determine the extent to which the Contract
GC-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
Documents should be modified to reflect and document the consequences of the existence of the
Underground Facility, and the Contract Documents will be amended or supplemented to the extent
necessary. During such time, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the safety and protection of
such Underground Facility as provided in paragraph 6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an
increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, to the extent that they are
attributable to the existence of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated in the
Contract Documents and which CONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been expected to be aware
of. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or length thereof, CONTRACTOR may make
a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
Reference Points:
4.4. OWNER shall provide Engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction
which in PROFESSIONAL's judgment are necessary to enable CONTRACTOR to proceed with the
Work. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out the Work (unless otherwise specified in
the General Requirements), shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make
no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall report
to PROFESSIONAL whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because
of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or
relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel.
Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material:
4.5 OWNER shall be responsible for any Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or
Radioactive Material uncovered or revealed at the site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings
or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work and
which may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the
Work at the site. OWNER shall not be responsible for any such materials brought to the site by
CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, Suppliers or anyone else for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible.
4.6 CONTRACTOR shall immediately: (i) stop all work in connection with such hazardous
condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by 6.22), and (ii) notify
OWNER and PROFESSIONAL (and thereafter confirm such notice in writing). OWNER shall
promptly consult with PROFESSIONAL concerning the necessity for OWNER to retain a qualified
expert to evaluate such hazardous condition or take corrective action, if any. CONTRACTOR shall
not be required to resume Work in connection with such hazardous condition or in any such affected
area until after OWNER has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to
CONTRACTOR special written notice (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or
has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work, or (ii) specifying any special conditions under
which such Work may be resumed safely. If OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot agree as to
entitlement to or the amount or extent of an adjustment, if any, in Contract Price or Contract Times
as a result of such Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed by
GC-13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
CONTRACTOR to be resumed, either party may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and
12.
4.7 If after receipt of such special written notice, CONTRACTOR does not agree to resume
such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such
special conditions, then CONTRACTOR may order such portion of the Work that is in connection
with such hazardous conditions or in such affected area to be deleted from the Work. If OWNER and
CONTRACTOR cannot agree as to entitlement to or the amount or extent of an adjustment, if any, in
Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may
make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12. OWNER may have deleted such portion of
the Work performed by OWNER's own forces or others in accordance with Article 7.
4.7.1 The provisions of 4.2 and 4.3 are.not intended to apply to Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum,
Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material uncovered or revealed at the site.
GC-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 5-BONDS AND INSURANCE
Performance and Other Bonds:
5.1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish performance and payment Bonds, each in an amount at least
equal to the Contract Price as Security for the faithful performance and payment of all
CONTRACTOR's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds shall remain in effect at
least until one year after the date when final payment becomes due, except as otherwise provided by
Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such other
Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the forms prescribed
by Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents and be executed by such sureties as are named
in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal
Bonds, and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the
Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. All Bonds signed by an agent must be
accompanied by a certified copy of the authority to act.
Licensed Sureties and Insurers; Certificates of Insurance
5.2.1 All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and
maintained by CONTRACTOR shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly
licensed or authorized in the State of Georgia to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and
coverages so required. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of
authority to act. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and
qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
5.2.2. CONTRACTOR shall deliver to OWNER, with copies to each additional insured
identified in 5.3, an original or a certified copy of the complete insurance policy for each policy
required, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by OWNER or any other
additional insured) which CONTRACTOR is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with
5.3.
5.2.3. If the surety on any Bond furnished by CONTRACTOR is declared bankrupt or
becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project
is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of paragraph 5.1, CONTRACTOR shall within five
days thereafter substitute another Bond and Surety, both of which must be acceptable to OWNER.
CONTRACTOR's Liability Insurance:
5.3. CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain such comprehensive general liability and
other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide
GC-15
Revision Date
August 2001
protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from CONTRACTOR's perfor-
mance and furnishing of the Work and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract
Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by CONTRACTOR, by any Subcontractor, by
anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by
anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
5.3.1. Claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefits and other similar
employee benefit acts;
5.3.2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death
of CONTRACTOR's employees;
5.3.3. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person
other than CONTRACTOR's employees;
5.3.4. Claims for damages insured by personal injury liability coverage which are sustained (a)
by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person
by CONTRACTOR, or (b) by any other person for any other reason;
5.3.5. Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction
of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom;
5.3.6. Claims arising out of operation of Laws or Regulations for damages because of bodily
injury or death of any person or for damage to property; and
5.3.7. Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage
arising out of the OWNERSHIP, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.
The insurance required by this paragraph 5.3 shall include the specific coverage's and be written for
not less than the limits of liability and coverage's provided in the Supplementary Conditions, or
required by law, whichever is greater. The comprehensive general liability insurance shall include
completed operations insurance. All of the policies of insurance so required to be purchased and
maintained (or the certificates or other evidence thereof) shall contain a provision or endorsement that
the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty
days prior written notice has been given to OWNER, PROGRAM MANAGER, and PROFESSIONAL
by certified maiL All such insurance shall remain in effect until final payment and at all times
thereafter when CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in
accordance with paragraph 13.12. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall maintain such completed
operations insurance for at least two years after final payment and furnish OWNER with evidence of
continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.
GC-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
Revision Date
August 2001
Contractual Liability Insurance:
5.4. The comprehensive general liability insurance required by paragraph 5.3 will include
contractual liability insurance applicable to CONTRACTOR's obligations under paragraphs 6.32 and
6.33.
OWNER's Liability Insurance:
5.5. OWNER shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining OWNER's own liability
insurance, and/or Risk Retention Program, and, at OWNER's option, may purchase and maintain such
insurance as will protect OWNER against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract
Documents.
Property Insurance:
5.6. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER shall purchase and
maintain property insurance upon the Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof (subject to
such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws
and Regulations). This insurance shall include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR,
Subcontractors, PROGRAM MANAGER, PROFESSIONAL and PROFESSIONAL's consultants in
the Work, all of whom shall be listed as insureds or additional insured parties, shall insure against the
perils of fire and extended coverage and shall include" all risk" insurance for physicallQSs and damage
including theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, collapse and water damage, and such other perils
as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and shall include damages, losses and expenses
arising out of or resulting from any insured loss or incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured
property (including but not limited to fees and charges of PROFESSIONALs, architects, attorneys and
other PROFESSIONALs). If not covered under the "all risk" insurance or otherwise provided in the
Supplementary Conditions, CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain similar property insunmce
on portions of the Work stored on and off the site or in transit when such portions of the Work are to
be included in an Application for Payment.
5.7. OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional
property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations
which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, PROFESSIONAL
AND PROFESSIONAL's consultants in the Work, all of whom shall be listed as insured or additional
insured parties.
5.8. All the policies of insurance (or the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be
purchased and maintained by OWNER in accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will contain a
provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or
renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to CONTRACTOR by
certified mail and will contain waiver provisions in accordance with paragraph of 5.11.2.
GC-17
Revision Date
August 2001
5.9. OWNER shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance
to protect the Interests of CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors or others in the Work to the extent of any
deductible amounts that are provided in the Supplementary Conditions. The risk of loss within the
deductible amount will be borne by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor or others suffering any such loss, .
and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may
purchase and maintain it at the purchaser's own expense.
5.10. If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the
property insurance policy, OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will
be charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to com-
mencement of the Work at the site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not
such other insurance has been procured by OWNER.
Waiver of Rights:
5.11.1. OWNER and CONTRACTOR waive all rights against each other for all losses and
damages caused by any of the perils covered by the policies of insurance provided in response to
paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 and other property insurance applicable to the Work, and also waive all such
rights against the Subcontractors, PROFESSIONAL, PROFESSIONAL's consultants and all other
parties named as insureds in such policies for losses and damages so caused. As required by paragraph
6.11, each subcontract between CONTRACTOR and a Subcontractor will contain similar waiver
provisions by the Subcontractor in favor of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, PROFESSIONAL, PROF-
ESSIONAL's consultants and all other parties named as insureds. None of the above waivers shall
extend to the rights that any of the insured parties may have to the proceeds of insurance held by
OWNER as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued.
5.11.2. OWNER and CONTRACTOR intend that policies provided in response to paragraphs
5.6 and 5.7 shall protect all of the parties insured and provide primary coverage for all losses and
damages caused by the perils covered thereby. Accordingly, all such policies shall contain provisions
to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of
recovery against any of the parties named as insureds or additional insureds, and if the insurers require
separate waiver forms to be signed by PROFESSIONAL or PROFESSIONAL's consultant, OWNER
will obtain the same, and if such waiver forms are required of any Subcontractor, CONTRACTOR will
obtain the same.
Receipt and Application of Proceeds:
5.12. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 will
be adjusted with OWNER and made payable to OWNER as trustee for the insureds, as their interests
may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of paragraph 5.13.
OWNER shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in
GC-18
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is
reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account
thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order or Written
Amendment.
Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds
5.13. OWNER, as trustee, shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers
unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within fifteen days after the occurrence of
loss to OWNER's exercise of this power. If such objection be made, OWNER, as trustee, shall make
settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach.
If required in writing by any party in interest, OWNER as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an
insured loss, give bond for the proper performance of such duties.
Acceptance of Insurance:
5.14. If OWNER has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the
insurance required to be purchased and maintained by CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraphs
5.3 and 5.4 on the basis of its not complying with the Contract Documents, OWNER shall notify
CONTRACTOR in writing thereof within ten days of the date of delivery of such certificates to
OWNER in accordance with paragraph 2.7. If CONTRACTOR has any objection to the coverage
afforded by or other provisions of the policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained
by OWNER in accordance with paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7 on the basis of their not complying with the
Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing thereof within ten days of the
date of delivery, of such certificates to CONTRACTOR in accordance with paragraph 2.7. OWNER
and CONTRACTOR shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of
insurance provided by each as the other may reasonably request. Failure by OWNER or
CONTRACTOR to give any such notice of objection within the time provided shall constitute
acceptance of such insurance purchased by the other as complying with the Contract Documents.
Partial Utilization-Property Insurance:
5.15. If OWNER finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior
to Substantial Completion of all the Work, such use or occupancy may be accomplished in accordance
with paragraph 14.10 provided that no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers
providing the property insurance have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected the changes
in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by
endorsement on the policy or policies, but the property insurance shall not be canceled or lapse on
account of any such partial use or occupancy.
Indemnification
GC-19
Revision Date
August 2001
5.16.1. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, PROGRAM
MANAGER, and its employees and agents from and against all liabilities, claims, suits, demands,
damages, losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the
performance of its Work, provided that any such liability, claim, suit, demand, damage, loss, or
expense (a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or injury to or destruction of
tangible property, including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (b) is caused in whole or in part
by an act or omission of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, whether or not it is caused in
whole or in part by the negligence or other fault of a party indemnified hereunder.
5.16.2. In any and all claims against OWNER or any of its agents or employees by any
employee of CONTRACTOR, any SUBCONTRACTOR, anyone directly or indirectly employed by
any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under
the previous paragraph shall not be limited in any way as to the amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any SUBCONTRACTOR under
workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.
5.16.3. CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and anyone directly or
indirectly employed by it from and against all claims, suits, demands, damages, losses expenses
(including attorneys' fees) arising out of any infringement on patent or copyrights held by others and
shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights.
GC-20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 6--CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1. CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the Work competently and efficiently,
devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform
the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible
for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but CONTRACTOR
shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means,
method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly
required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to see that the finished
Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
6.2. CONTRACTOR shall keep on the Work, at all times during its progress, a competent
resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without written notice to OWNER and
PROFESSIONAL except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be
CONTRACTOR's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of CON-
TRACTOR. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to
CONTRACTOR.
Labor, Materials and Equipment:
6.3. CONTRACTOR shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay
out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall
at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except in connection with the safety or
protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise
indicated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the site shall be performed during regular working
hours, and CONTRACTOR will not permit evening work or the performance of Work on Saturday,
Sunday or any legal holiday without OWNER's written consent given after prior written notice to
PROFESSIONAL.
6.4. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, CONTRACTOR shall furnish
and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction
equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary
facilities, temporary facilities and all other facilities and incidentals whether temporary or permanent
necessary for the execution, testing, initial operation, and completion of the Work as required by the
Contract Documents.
6.5. All materials and equipment shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise
provided in the Contract Documents. If required by PROFESSIONAL, CONTRACTOR shall furnish
satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the kind and quality of materials and
equipment. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned
and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable Supplier except as otherwise
GC-21
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
provided in the Contract Documents; but no provision of any such instructions will be effective to
assign to PROFESSIONAL, or any of PROFESSIONAL's consultants, agents or employees, any duty
or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority
to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of paragraph 9.14 or 9.15.
Adjusting Progress Schedule:
6.6. CONTRACTOR shall submit to PROFESSIONAL for acceptance to the extent indicated
in paragraph 2.9 adjustments in the progress schedule to reflect the impact thereon of new
developments; these will conform generally to the progress schedule then in effect and additionally
will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto.
Substitutes or "Or-Equal" Items:
6.7.1. Whenever materials or equipment are specified or described in the Contract Documents
by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the naming of the item
is intended to establish the type, function and quality requited. Unless the name is followed by words
indicating that no substitution is permitted, materials or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted
by PROFESSIONAL if sufficient information is submitted by CONTRACTOR to allow
PROFESSIONAL to determine that the material or equipment proposed is equivalent or equal to that
named. The procedure for review by PROFESSIONAL will include the following as supplemented
in the General Requirements. Requests for review of substitute items of material and equipment will
not be accepted by PROFESSIONAL from anyone other than CONTRACTOR. If CONTRACTOR
wishes to furnish or use a substitute item of material or equipment, CONTRACTOR shall make wri-
tten application to PROFESSIONAL for acceptance thereof, certifying that the proposed substitute will
perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, be similar
and of equal substance to that specified and be suited to the same use as that specified. The application
will state that the evaluation and acceptance of the proposed substitute will not prejudice
CONTRACTOR's achievement of Substantial Completion on time, whether or not acceptance of the
substitute for use in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the
provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) to adapt the design to
the proposed substitute and whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with
the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of the proposed substitute
from that specified will be identified in the application and available maintenance, repair and
replacement service will be indicated. The application will also contain an itemized estimate of all
costs that will result directly or indirectly from acceptance of such substitute, including costs of
redesign and claims of other contractors affected by the resulting change, all of which shall be
considered by PROFESSIONAL. In evaluating the proposed substitute, PROFESSIONAL may
require CONTRACTOR to furnish, at CONTRACTOR's expense, additional data about the proposed
substitute.
GC-22
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
6.7.2. If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is
indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a
substitute means, method, sequence, technique or procedure of construction acceptable to
PROFESSIONAL, if CONTRACTOR submits sufficient information to allow PROFESSIONAL to
determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by the Contract
Documents. The procedure for review by PROFESSIONAL will be similar to that provided in
paragraph 6.7.1 as applied by PROFESSIONAL and as may be supplemented in the General
Requirements.
6.7.3. PROFESSIONAL will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each
proposed substitute. PROFESSIONAL will be the sole judge of acceptability and no substitute will
be ordered, installed or utilized without PROFESSIONAL's prior written acceptance which will be evi-
denced by either a Change Order or an approved Shop Drawing. OWNER may require
CONTRACTOR to furnish, at CONTRACTOR's expense, a special performance guarantee or other
surety with respect to any substitute. PROFESSIONAL will record time required by PROFESSIONAL
and PROFESSIONAL's consultants in evaluating substitutions proposed by CONTRACTOR and in
making changes in the Contract Documents occasioned thereby. Whether or not PROFESSIONAL
accepts a proposed substitute, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER for the charges of
PROFESSIONAL and PROFESSIONAL's consultants for evaluating each proposed substitute.
Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others:
6.8.1. CONTRACTOR shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization (including those acceptable to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL as indicated in paragraph
6.8.2) whether initially or as a substitute, against whom OWNER or PROFESSIONAL may have
reasonable objection. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier
or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom CONTRACTOR
has reasonable objection.
6.8.2. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers
or other persons or organizations including those who are to furnish the principal items of materials
and equipment to be submitted to OWNER prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement for
acceptance by OWNER and PROFESSIONAL and if CONTRACTOR has submitted a list thereof in
accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, OWNER's or PROFESSIONAL's acceptance (either
in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objec-
tion in the bidding documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other
person or organization so identified may be revoked on the basis of reasonable objection after due
investigation, in which case CONTRACTOR shall submit an acceptable substitute, the Contract Price
will be increased by the difference, and the cost occasioned by such substitution and an appropriate
Change Order will be issued or Written Amendment signed. No acceptance by OWNER or
PROFESSIONAL of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization shall constitute
a waiver of any right of OWNER or PROFESSIONAL to reject defective Work.
GC- 23
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
6.9. CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL for all acts
and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or
furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with CONTRACTOR just as
CONTRACTOR is responsible for CONTRACTOR's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract
Documents shall create any contractual relationship between OWNER or PROFESSIONAL and any
such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the
part of OWNER or PROFESSIONAL to payor to see to the payment of any moneys due any such
Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization except as may otherwise be required by Laws
and Regulations.
6.10. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings
shall not control CONTRACTOR in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or
delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.
6.11. All Work performed for CONTRACTOR by a Subcontractor will be pursuant to an
appropriate agreement between CONTRACTOR and the Subcontractor which specifically binds the
Subcontractor to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of
OWNER and PROFESSIONAL and contains waiver provisions as required by paragraph 5.1L
CONTRACTOR shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance moneys received by
CONTRACTOR on account of losses under policies issued pursuant to paragraphs 5.6 and 5.7.
Patent Fees and Royalties:
6.12. CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to
the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design,
process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others.
CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless OWNER and PROFESSIONAL and anyone
directly or indirectly employed by either of them from and against all claims, damages, losses and
expenses including attorneys' fees and court and arbitration costs arising out of any infringement on
patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the
incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the
Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of
such rights.
Permits:
6.13. CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits, licenses, governmental
charges and inspection fees, and all public utility charges which are applicable and necessary for the
execution of the Work. All permit costs shall be included in the base bid. Permits, if any, that are
provided and paid for by OWNER are listed in the Supplementary Conditions. Any delays associated
with the permitting process will be considered for time extensions only and no damages or additional
GC-24
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
compensation for delay will be allowed.
Laws and Regulations:
6.14.1. CONTRACTOR shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations
applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by
applicable Laws and Regulations, neither OWNER nor PROFESSIONAL shall be responsible for
monitoring CONTRACTOR's compliance with any Laws or Regulations.
6.14.2. If CONTRACTOR observes that any of the Contract Documents are contradictory to
such laws, rules, and regulations, it will notify the Project Manager promptly in writing. Any
necessary changes shall then be adjusted by an appropriate Change Order. If CONTRACTOR
performs any Work that it knows or should have known to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules,
and regulations and without such notice to the Project Manager, it shall bear all related costs.
Taxes:
6.15. CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required to
be paid in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable
during the performance of the Work.
Use of Premises:
6.16. CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and
equipment and the operations of workers to the Project site and land and areas identified in and
permitted by the Contract Documents and other land and areas permitted by Laws and Regulations,
rights-of-way, permits and easements. CONTRACTOR shall not unreasonably encumber the premises
with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Any loss or damage to
CONTRACTOR's or any Subcontractor's equipment is solely at the risk of CONTRACTOR.
CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the
OWNER or occupant thereof or of any land or areas contiguous thereto, resulting from the
performance of the Work. Should any claim be made against OWNER or PROFESSIONAL by any
such OWNER or occupant because of the performance of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall promptly
attempt to settle with such other party by agreement or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or
at law. CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and
hold OWNER harmless from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including, but not
limited to, fees of PROFESSIONALs, architects, attorneys and other professionals and court and
arbitration costs) arising directly, indirectly or consequentially out of any action, legal or equitable,
brought by any such other party against OWNER to the extent based on a claim arising out of
CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work.
6.17. During the progress of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises free from
GC-25
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris or contaminants resulting from the Work.
At the completion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris
from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery,
and surplus materials, and shall leave the site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER. CON-
TRACTOR shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract
Documents.
6.18. CONTRACTOR shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any
manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall CONTRACTOR subject any part of the Work or
adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger them.
Record Documents:
6.19. Contractor shall keep at the site and in good order one record copy of the Contract
Documents and all Drawings and Specifications. These documents shall be annotated on a continuing
basis to show all changes made during the construction process. These shall be available to
PROFESSIONAL and the Project Manager and shall be submitted with the Application for Final
Payment.
Safety and Protection:
6.20. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all
safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. CONTRACTOR shall assume all risk
of loss for stored equipment or materials, irrespective of whether CONTRACTOR has transferred the
title of the stored equipment or materials to OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary
precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or
loss to:
6.20.1. all employees on the Work and other persons and organizations who may be affected
thereby;
6.20.2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in
storage on or off the site; and
6.20.3. other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal,
relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and
shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. CONTRACTOR shall
notify OWNERs of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility OWNERs when
GC-26
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal,
relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property referred to in
paragraph 6.20.2 or 6.20.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by CONTRACTOR, any
Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of
them to perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall
be remedied by CONTRACTOR (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Drawings or
Specifications or to the acts or omissions of OWNER or PROFESSIONAL or anyone employed by
either of them or anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or
indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of CONTRACTOR). CONTRACTOR's duties
and responsibilities for the safety and protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the
Work is completed and PROFESSIONAL has issued a notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR in
accordance, with paragraph 14.13 that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided
in connection with Substantial Completion).
6.21. CONTRACTOR shall designate a responsible member of its organization whose duty shall be
the prevention of accidents at the site. This person shall be CONTRACTOR's superintendent unless
otherwise designated in writing by CONTRACTOR to the Project Manager.
Emergencies:
6.22. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at
the site or adjacent thereto, CONTRACTOR, without special instruction or authorization from
PROFESSIONAL or OWNER, is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss.
CONTRACTOR shall give PROFESSIONAL prompt written notice if CONTRACTOR believes that
any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused
thereby. If PROFESSIONAL determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because
of the action taken in response to an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order be issued
to document the consequences of the changes or variations.
6.22.1. CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify PROFESSIONAL of all events involving
injuries to any person on the Site, whether or not such person was engaged in the construction of the
Project, and shall file a written report on such person(s) and any other event resulting in property
damage of any amount within five (5) days of the occurrence.
6.22.2. If PROFESSIONAL determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required
because of the action taken by CONTRACTOR in response to such an emergency, a Change Order
will be issued to document the consequences of such action.
Shop Drawings and Samples:
GC-27
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
6.23. After checking and verifying all field measurements, CONTRACTOR shall promptly
submit to PROFESSIONAL for approval, in accordance with the accepted schedule of submittals, all
submittals and samples required by the Contract Documents. All submittals and samples shall have
been checked by and stamped with the approval of CONTRACTOR and identified as
PROFESSIONAL may require. The data shown on or with the submittals will be complete with
respect to dimensions, design criteria, materials and any other information necessary to enable
PROFESSIONAL to review the submittal as required. At the time of each submission,
CONTRACTOR shall give notice to PROFESSIONAL of all deviations that the submittal or sample
may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents.
6.24. PROFESSIONAL shall review and approve submittals and samples. Professional's
review and approval shall be only for conformance with the design concept of the Project and
compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. The approval of a separate item
as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. CONTRACTOR will
make any corrections required by PROFESSIONAL and resubmit the required number of corrected
copies until approved. CONTRACTOR's stamp of approval on any submittal or sample shall
constitute its representation to PROFESSIONAL and OWNER that CONTRACTOR has determined
and verified all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and
similar data, and that each submittal or sample has been reviewed or coordinated with the requirements
of the Work and the Contract Documents.
6.24.1. No Work requiring a submittal or sample submission shall commence until the
submission has been approved by PROFESSIONAL. A copy of each approved submittal and each
approved sample shall be kept in good order by CONTRACTOR at the site and shall be available to
PROFESSIONAL and OWNER. Any delays associated with the submittal process will be considered
for time extensions only, and no damages or additional compensation for delay will be allowed.
6.24.2. Before submission of each Shop Drawing or sample, CONTRACTOR shall have
determined and verified all quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation
requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar data with respect thereto and reviewed or
coordinated each Shop Drawing or sample with other Shop Drawings and samples and with the
requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.
6.24.3. At the time of each submission, CONTRACTOR shall give PROFESSIONAL specific
written notice of each variation that the Shop Drawings or samples may have from the requirements
of the Contract Documents, and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop
Drawing submitted to PROFESSIONAL for review and approval of each such variation.
6.26. PROFESSIONAL will review and approve with reasonable promptness Shop Drawings
and samples, but PROFESSIONAL's review and approval will be only for conformance with the
design concept of the Project and for compliance with the information given in the Contract
Documents and shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of
GC-28
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
construction (except where a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction
is indicated in or required by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident
thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly
in which the item functions.
6.27. PROFESSIONAL's approval of submittals or samples shall not relieve CONTRACTOR
from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless
CONTRACTOR has, in writing, called PROFESSIONAL's attention to each such variation at the time
of submission and the OWNER has given written approval to the specific deviation; any such approval
by PROFESSIONAL shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from responsibility for errors or omissions in
the submittals.
6.28. Where a shop drawing or sample is required by the Contract Documents or the schedule
of shop drawings and sample submissions accepted by PROFESSIONAL as required, any related
work performed prior to PROFESSIONAL's review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be
at the sole expense and responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
Continuing the Work:
6.30. CONTRACTOR shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all
disputes or disagreements with OWNER. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution
of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by paragraph 15.6 or as CONTRACTOR and
OWNER may otherwise agree in writing.
Cleaning Up:
6.31. CONTRACTOR shall maintain the site free from accumulations of waste materials,
rubbish, and other debris or contaminants resulting from the work on a daily basis or as required. At
the completion of the work, CONTRACTOR shall remove all waste materials, rubbish, and debris
from the site as well as all tools, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and will
leave the Site clean and ready for occupancy by OWNER. All disposal shall be in accordance with
applicable Laws and Regulations. In addition to any other rights available to OWNER under the
Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR's failure to maintain the site may result in withholding of any
amounts due CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR will restore to original condition those portions of
the site not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
Indemnification:
6.32. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, CONTRACTOR shall
indemnify and hold harmless OWNER, PROGRAM MANAGER and PROFESSIONAL and their
GC-29
Revision Date
August 2001
consultants, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, direct,
indirect or consequential (including but not limited to fees and charges of PROGRAM MANAGER,
PROFESSIONALs, architects, attorneys and otherPROFESSIONALs and court and arbitration costs)
arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage,
loss or expense (a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or
destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting
therefrom and (b) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of CONTRACTOR,
any Subcontractor, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to
perform or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of
whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder or arises by or is imposed by Law
and Regulations regardless ofthe negligence of any such party.
6.33. In any and all claims against OWNER, PROGRAM MANAGER or PROFESSIONAL
or any of their consultants, agents or employees by any employee of CONTRACTOR, any
Subcontractor, any person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform
or furnish any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification
obligation under paragraph 6.32 shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or
type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for CONTRACTOR or any such
Subcontractor or other person or organization under workers' or workmen's compensation acts,
disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
6.34. The obligations of CONTRACTOR under paragraph 6.32 shall not extend to the liability
of PROFESSIONAL, PROFESSIONAL's. consultants, agents or employees arising out of the
preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or
specifications.
GC-30
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 7---0THER WORK
Related Work at Site:
7.1. OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the site by OWNER's own
forGes, have other work performed by aided OWNERs or let other direct contracts therefor which shall
contain General Conditions similar to these. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was not
noted in the Contract Documents, written notice thereof will be given to CONTRACTOR prior to
starting any such other work, and, if CONTRACTOR believes that such performance will involve
additional expense to CONTRACTOR or requires additional time and the parties are unable to agree
as to the extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and
12. .
7.1.2. CONTRACTOR shall afford each utility OWNER and other contractor who is a party
to such a direct contract for OWNER, if OWNER is performing the additional work with OWNER's
employees, proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and
storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such work, and shall properly connect and
coordinate the Work with theirs. CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the Work
that may be required to make its several parts come together properly and integrate with such other
work. CONTRACTOR shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating or otherwise
altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of PROFESSIONAL
and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR under
this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility OWNERs and other contractors to the extent that there
are comparable provisions for the benefit of CONTRACTOR in said direct contracts between OWNER
and such utility OWNERs and other contractors.
7.2. If any part of CONTRACTOR's Work depends for proper execution or results upon the
work of any such other contractor or utility OWNER (or OWNER), CONTRACTOR shall inspect and
promptly report to PROFESSIONAL in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such work that
render it unavailable or unsuitable for such proper execution and results. CONTRACTOR's failure so
to report will constitute an acceptance of the other work as fit and proper for integration with
CONTRACTOR's Work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in the other work.
Coordination:
7.4. If OWNER contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the
site, the person or organization who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the
activities among the various prime contractors will be identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and
the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized, and the extent
of such authority and responsibilities will be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. Unless
otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, neither OWNER nor PROFESSIONAL shall
have any authority or responsibility in respect of such coordination.
ARTICLE 8---0WNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
GC-31
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
8.1. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, OWNER shall issue all
communications to CONTRACTOR through the PROGRAM MANAGER or PROFESSIONAL.
8.2. In case of termination of the employment of PROFESSIONAL, OWNER shall appoint
a PROFESSIONAL against whom CONTRACTOR makes no reasonable objection, whose status
under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former PROFESSIONAL. Any dispute in
connection with such appointment shall be subject to arbitration.
8.3. OWNER shall furnish the data required of OWNER under the Contract Documents
promptly and shall make payments to CONTRACTOR promptly after they are due as provided in
paragraphs 14.4 and 14.13.
8.4. OWNER's duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing Engineering
surveys to establish reference points are set forth in paragraphs 4.1 and 4.4. Paragraph 4.2 refers to
OWNER's identifying and making available to CONTRACTOR copies of reports of explorations and
tests of subsurface conditions at the site and in existing structures which have been utilized by
PROFESSIONAL in preparing the Drawings and Specifications.
8.5. OWNER's responsibilities in respect of purchasing and maintaining liability and property
insurance are set forth in paragraphs 5.5 through 5.8.
8.6. OWNER is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in paragraph 10.3.
8.7. OWNER's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests and approvals is set forth
in paragraph 13.4. -
8.8. In connection with OWNER's right to stop Work or suspend Work, see paragraphs 13.10
and 15.1. Paragraph 15.2 deals with OWNER's right to terminate services of CONTRACTOR under
certain circumstances.
GC-32
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 9---PROFESSIONAL'S STATUS DURING
CONSTRUCTION
OWNER's Representative:
9.1. PROFESSIONAL will be OWNER's representative during the construction period. The
duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of PROFESSIONAL as OWNER's
representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended
without written consent of OWNER and PROFESSIONAL.
Visits to Site:
9.2. PROFESSIONAL will make visits to the site at intervals appropriate to the various stages
of construction to observe the premises and quality of the executed Work and to determine, in general,
if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. PROFESSIONAL will not be
required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the
Work. PROFESSIONAL's efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER a greater degree of
confidence that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such
visits and on-site observations as an experienced and qualified design PROFESSIONAL,
PROFESSIONAL will keep OWNER informed ofthe progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard
OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Wark.
Project Representation:
9.3. If OWNER and PROFESSIONAL agree, PROFESSIONAL will furnish a Resident
Project Representative to assist PROFESSIONAL in observing the performance of the Work. The
duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of any such Resident Project Representative and
assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. If OWNER designates another agent
to represent OWNER at the site who is not PROFESSIONAL's agent or employee, the duties,
responsibilities and limitations of authority of such other person will be as provided in the
Supplementary Conditions.
Clarifications and Interpretations:
9.4. PROFESSIONAL shall issue such written clarifications or interpretations of the Contract
Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as may be determined necessary, or as reasonably
requested by CONTRACTOR, which shall be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall
intent of the Contract Documents. If CONTRACTOR believes that a written clarification and
interpretation entitles it to an increase in the Contract Price and/or Contract Time, CONTRACTOR
may make a claim as provided for in Articles 11 or 12.
GC-33
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
Authorized Variations in Work:
9.5. PROFESSIONAL may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of
the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time and are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents. These may be
accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on OWNER and also on CONTRACTOR who
shall perform the Work involved promptly. If CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order justifies an
increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree
as to the amount or extent thereof, CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Article
11 or 12.
Rejecting Defective Work:
9.6. PROFESSIONAL will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which
PROFESSIONAL believes to be defective and will also have authority to require special inspection
or testing ofthe Work as provided in paragraph 13.9, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed
or completed.
Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments:
9.7. In connection with PROFESSIONAL's responsibility for Shop Drawings and samples, see
paragraphs 6.23 through 6.29 inclusive.
9.8. In connection with PROFESSIONAL's responsibilities as to Change Orders, see Articles
10, 11 and 12.
9.9. In connection with PROFESSIONAL's responsibilities in respect of Applications for
Payment, etc., see Article 14.
Determinations for Unit Prices:
9.10. PROFESSIONAL will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price
Work performed by CONTRACTOR. PROFESSIONAL will review with CONTRACTOR
PROFESSIONAL's preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision
thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). PROFESSIONAL's written
decisions thereon will be final and binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR, unless, within ten
days after the date of any such decision, either OWNER or CONTRACTOR delivers to the other party
to the Agreement and to PROFESSIONAL written notice of intention to appeal from such a decision.
Decisions on Disputes:
9.11. PROFESSIONAL will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract
Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters
GC-34
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
relating to the acceptability of the Work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract
Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the Work and claims under Articles 11 and
12 in respect of changes to the Contract Price or Contract Time will be referred initially to
PROFESSIONAL in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph,
which PROFESSIONAL will render in writing within a reasonable time. Written notice of each such
claim, dispute and other matter will be delivered by the claimant to PROFESSIONAL and the other
party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than thirty days after the occurrence of the event
giving rise thereto) and written supporting data will be submitted to PROFESSIONAL and the other
party within sixty days after such occurrence unless PROFESSIONAL allows an additional period of
time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim.
9.12. When functioning as interpreter and judge under paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11,
PROFESSIONAL will not show partiality to OWNER or CONTRACTOR and will not be liable in
connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering
of a decision by PROFESSIONAL pursuant to paragraphs 9.10 and 9.11 with respect to any such
claim, dispute or other matter (except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of
final payment as provided in paragraph 14.16) will be a condition precedent to any exercise by
OWNER or CONTRACTOR of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the
Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter.
Limitations on PROFESSIONAL's Responsibilities:
9.13. Neither PROFESSIONAL's authority to act under this Article or elsewhere in the
Contract Documents nor any decision made in good faith to exercise such authority shall give rise to
any duty or responsibility of PROFESSIONAL to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any of their
agents or employees.
9.14. PROFESSIONAL shall not be responsible for the construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences, or procedures or the safety precautions and programs used. PROFESSIONAL
shall not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
9.15. PROFESSIONAL shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR,
any Subcontractors, any agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work.
GC-35
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 10--CHANGES IN THE WORK
10.1. Without invalidating the Contract, OWNER may at any time or from time to time order
additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. The OWNER shall provide CONTRACTOR with a
proposal request, identifying the Work to be added, deleted or revised. Upon receipt, CONTRACTOR
shall promptly submit a written proposal for the changed work prepared in accordance with Articles
11 and 12. If the proposal request calls only for the deletion of Work, the OWNER may order the
partial suspension of any Work related to the proposed deletion, in which case CONTRACTOR must
cease performance as directed; CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to claim lost profits on deleted
work. All changed Work shall be executed under the applicable conditions of the Contract
Documents.
10.2. Additional Work performed by CONTRACTOR without authorization of a Change Order
will not entitle CONTRACTOR to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract
Time, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Article 6. The effect of this paragraph shall
remain paramount and shall prevail irrespective of any conflicting provisions contained in these
Contract Documents.
10.3. Upon agreement as to changes in the Work to be performed, Work performed in an
emergency as provided in Article 6, and any other claim of CONTRACTOR for a change in the
Contract Time or the Contract Price, PROFESSIONAL will prepare a written Change Order to be
signed by PROFESSIONAL and CONTRACTOR and submitted to OWNER for approval.
10.4. In the absence of an agreement as provided in 10.3, OWNER may, at its sole discretion,
issue a Work Change Directive to CONTRACTOR. Pricing of the Work Change Directive will be in
accordance with Section 11.3. The Work Change Directive will specify a price, and if applicable a
time extension, determined to be reasonable by OWNER. If CONTRACTOR fails to sign such Work
Change Directive, CONTRACTOR may submit a claim in accordance with Articles 11 and 12, but
CONTRACTOR shall nevertheless be obligated to fully perform the work as directed by the Work
Change Directive.
10.5. CONTRACTOR shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work as directed by
OWNER, regardless of pending claim actions, unless otherwise agreed to in writing.
10.6. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the
Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the
provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be CONTRACTOR's
responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly.
GC-36
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 11-CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE
11.1. The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to written authorized
adjustments) payable to CONTRACTOR for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and
obligations assigned to or undertaken by CONTRACTOR shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense
without change in the Contract Price.
11.2. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment.
Any claim for an increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice delivered
by the party making the claim to the other party and to PROFESSIONAL promptly (but in no event
later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general
nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within
sixty days after such occurrence (unless PROFESSIONAL allows an additional period of time to
ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written
statement that the amount claimed covers all known amounts (direct, indirect and consequential) to
which the claimant is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in.
the Contract Price shall be determined by PROFESSIONAL in accordance with paragraph 9.11 if
OWNER and CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise agree on the amount involved. No claim for an
adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph 11.2.
11.3. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in
the Contract Price will be determined by the following procedures:
11.3.1. Designated Unit Price (Field Measure). CONTRACTOR and OWNER recognize and
acknowledge that the quantities shown for those items designated in the Bid Proposal as unit price
items are approximations prepared by OWNER for bid purposes and that.the actual compensation
payable to CONTRACTOR for the utilization of such items is based upon the application of unit prices
to the actual quantities of items involved as measured in the field and required to complete the Work
as originally defined in the Contract Documents.
11.3.2. When it is determined by OWNER that an addition, deletion, or revision to the Work,
as defined in these Contract Documents, is required and affects the quantities required for items
designed in the Bid Proposal as unit price items, CONTRACTOR and OWNER agree that the
compensation payable to CONTRACTOR for such unit price items shall be adjusted accordingly by
a Change Order based upon the application of the appropriate unit prices shown in the Bid Proposal
to the quantity of the unit price item required to complete the Work as defined in the Contract
Documents.
11.3.3. Other Unit Prices. For items not designated in the bid proposal as unit prices, OWNER
and CONTRACTOR may establish unit prices as agreed on by Change Order.
GC-37
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
11.3.4. Lump Sum. When it is determined by OWNER that an addition, deletion or revision
to the Work is required which results in a change in Work designated in the Bid Proposal as a lump
sum item, the amount of increase or decrease in the lump sum price shall be established by mutual
agreement of the parties.
11.3.5. If the pricing methods specified in 11.3 are inapplicable, or if the parties are unable to
agree on a price for the changed work, a reasonable price for the same shall be established by OWNER
in accordance with 11.4 and 11.5. OWNER shall then process a unilateral Change Order, specifying
the said reasonable price, in accordance with 11.4 through 11.6. CONTRACTOR shall perform the
Work as directed in the Change Order.
11.3.6. Failure on the part of CONTRACTOR to construct any item to plan or authorized
dimensions within the specification tolerances shall result in: reconstruction to acceptable tolerances
at no additional costs to OWNER; acceptance at no pay; or acceptance at reduced final pay quantity
or reduced unit price, all at the discretion of OWNER. Determinations of aggregate monetary change
for items identified as lump sum quantities shall be made by OWNER based upon an analysis of the
scope of CONTRACTOR's failure to construct to plan or authorized dimensions.
Cost of the Work:
11.4. The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs necessarily incurred and paid by
CONTRACTOR in the proper performance of the Work. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in
writing by OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of
the Project, shall include only the following items and shall not include any of the costs itemized in
paragraph 11.5:
11.4.1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of CONTRACTOR in the
performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by OWNER and
CONTRACTOR. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned
on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries
and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits which shall include social security contributions,
unemployment, excise and payroll taxes, workers' or workmen's compensation, health and retirement
benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. Such employees shall
include superintendents and foremen at the site. The expenses of performing Wark after regular
working hours, on Saturday, Sunday or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent
authorized by OWNER.
11.4.2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including
costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers' field services required in connection
therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to CONTRACTOR unless OWNER deposits funds with
CONTRACTOR with which to make payments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to
OWNER. Trade discounts, rebates and refunds and all returns from sale of surplus materials and
GC-38
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
Revision Date
August 2001
equipment shall accrue to OWNER, and CONTRACTOR shall make provisions so that they may be
obtained.
11.4.3. Payments made by CONTRACTOR to the Subcontractors for Work performed by
Subcontractors. If required by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall obtain competitive bids from
Subcontractors acceptable to CONTRACTOR and shall deliver such bids to OWNER who then
determines, with the advice of PROFESSIONAL, which bids will be accepted. If a subcontract
provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus a Fee, the
Subcontractor's Cost of the Work shall be determined in the same manner as CONTRACTOR's Cost
of the Work. All subcontracts shall be subject to the other provisions of the Contract Documents
insofar as applicable.
11.4.4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing
laboratories, surveyors, attorneys and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the
Work.
11.4.5. Supplemental costs including the following:
11.4.5.1. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel and subsistence expenses of
CONTRACTOR's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.
11.4.5.2. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment,
machinery, appliances, office and temporary facilities at the site and hand tools not owned by the
workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost less market value of such
items used but not consumed which remain the property of CONTRACTOR.
11.4.5.3. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery and the parts thereof whether
rented from CONTRACTOR or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by OWNER
with the advice of PROFESSIONAL, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, installation,
dismantling and removal thereof-all in accordance with terms of said rental agreements. The rental of
any such equipment, machinery or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the
Work.
11.4.5.4. Sales, consumer, use or similar taxes related to the Work, and for which
CONTRACTOR is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations.
11.4.5.5. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor
or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,
and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.
11.4.5.6. Losses and damages (and related expenses), not compensated by insurance or
GC-39
",.
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
otherwise, to the Work or otherwise sustained by CONTRACTOR in connection with the performance
and furnishing of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property
insurance established by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.6) provided they have resulted from
causes other than the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such loss-es shall
include settlements made with the written consent and approval of OWNER. No such losses, damages
and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining CONTRAC-
TOR's Fee. If, however, any such loss or damage requires reconstruction and CONTRACTOR is
placed in charge thereof, CONTRACTOR shall be paid for services a fee proportionate to that stated
in paragraph 11.6.2. '
11.4.5.7. The cost of utilities, fuel and sanitary facilities at the site.
11.4.5.8. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service
at the site, expressage and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.
11.4.5.9. Cost of premiums for additional Bonds and insurance required because of changes
in the Work and premiums of property insurance coverage within the limits of the deductible amounts
established by OWNER in accordance with paragraph 5.6.
11.5. The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following:
11.5.1. Payroll costs and other compensation of CONTRACTOR's officers, executives,
principals (of partnership and sole proprietorships), general managers, engineers, architects, estimators,
attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expeditors, timekeepers, clerks
and other personnel employed by CONTRACTOR whether at the site or in CONTRACTOR's
principal or a branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the
agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in paragraph 11.4.1 or specifically covered by
paragraph 11.4.4-all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by CONTRACTOR's
Fee.
11.5.2. Expenses of CONTRACTOR's principal area branch offices other than
CONTRACTOR's office at the site.
11.5.3. Any part of CONTRACTOR's capital expenses, including interest on
CONTRACTOR'S capital used for the Change Order Work and charges against CONTRACTOR for
delinquent payments.
11.5.4. Cost of premiums for all Bonds and for all insurance whether or not CONTRACTOR
is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain the same (except for the cost of
premiums covered by subparagraph 11.4.5.9 above).
GC-40
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date .
August 2001
11.5.5. Costs due to the negligence of CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly
or indirectly, employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not
limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied and
making good any damage to property.
11.5.6. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not
specifically and expressly included in paragraph 11.4.
CONTRACTOR's Fee:
11.6. CONTRACTOR's Fee allowed to CONTRACTOR for overhead and profit shall be
determined as follows:
11.6.1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee, or if none can be agreed upon;
11.6.2. a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the
Work:
11.6.2.1. for costs incurred under paragraphs 11.4.1 and 11.4.2, CONTRACTOR's Fee shall
be fifteen percent,
11.6.2.2. for costs incurred under paragraph 11.4.3, CONTRACTOR's Fee shall five percent;
and if a subcontract is on the basis of Cost of the Work Plus a Fee, the maximum allowable to
CONTRACTOR on account of overhead and profit of all Subcontractors shall be fifteen percent,
11.6.2.3. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under paragraphs 11.4.4, 11.4.5
and 11.3,
11.6.2.4. the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any such
change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease plus a
deduction in CONTRACTOR's Fee by an amount equal to ten percent of the net decrease, and
11.6.2.5. when both additions and credits are involved in anyone change, the adjustment in
CONTRACTOR's Fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with paragraphs
11.6.2.1 through 11.6.2.4, inclusive.
11.7. For all changes, CONTRACTOR shall submit an itemized cost breakdown, together with
supporting data in such detail and form as prescribed by the Project Manager. When a credit is due,
the amount of credit to be allowed by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for any such change which results
in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in direct cost as determined by
the Project Manager, plus the applicable reduction in overhead and profit. When both additions and
credits are involved in any change, the combined overhead and profit shall be calculated on the basis
GC-41
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
of the net change, whether an increase or decrease. In any event, the minimum detail shall be an
itemization of all man-hours required by discipline/trade with the unit cost per man-hour and total
labor price, labor burden, equipment hours and rate for each piece of equipment, material by units of
measure and price per unit, other costs specifically itemized, plus the overhead and profit markup.
Cash Allowances:
11.8. It is understood that CONTRACTOR has included in the Contract Price all allowances
so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be done by such
Subcontractors or Suppliers and for such sums within the limit of the allowances as may be acceptable
to PROFESSIONAL CONTRACTOR agrees that:
11.8.1. The allowances include the cost to CONTRACTOR (less any applicable trade
discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the site and all
applicable taxes; and
11.8.2. CONTRACTOR's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs,
overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the
Contract Price and not in the allowances. No demand for additional payment on account of any thereof
will be valid.
Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by
PROFESSIONAL to reflect actual amounts due CONTRACTOR on account of Work covered by
allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.
Unit Price Work:
11.9.1. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price
Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal
to the sum of the established unit prices for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times
the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items
of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and
determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit
Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR will be made by PROFESSIONAL in accordance with
Paragraph 9.10.
11.9.2. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by CONTRACTOR
to be adequate to cover CONTRACTOR's overhead and profit for each separately identified item.
11.9.3. Where the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by CONTRACTOR
differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement
GC-42
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
and there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work and if
CONTRACTOR believes that CONTRACTOR has incurred additional expense as a result thereof,
CONTRACTOR may make a claim for an increase in the Contract Price in accordance with Article
11 if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase.
GC-43
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 12--CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME
12.1. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any request for an
extension in the Contract Time shall be made in writing and delivered to PROFESSIONAL and
OWNER within seven (7) calendar days of the occurrence first happening and resulting in the claim.
Written supporting data will be submitted to PROFESSIONAL and OWNER within fifteen (15)
calendar days after such occurrence unless the OWNER allows additional time. All claims submitted
by CONTRACTOR for adjustments to the Contract Time must set forth in detail the reasons for and
causes of the delay and clearly indicate why the subject delay was beyond CONTRACTOR's control
or fault.
12.2. If CONTRACTOR is delayed at any time in the performance, progress, commencement,
or completion of the Work by any act or neglect of OWNER or PROFESSIONAL, or by an employee
of either, or by any separate CONTRACTOR employed by OWNER, or by changes ordered in the
Work, or by labor disputes, fIre, unavoidable casualties, utility conflicts which could not have been
identified or foreseen by CONTRACTOR using reasonable diligence, or any causes beyond
CONTRACTOR's control or fault, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such
reasonable time as OWNER may determine. CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to an extension of time
for such causes only for the number of days of delay which OWNER may determine to be due solely
to such causes and only to the extent such occurrences actually delay the completion of the Work and
then only if CONTRACTOR shall have strictly complied with all the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Provided, however, notwithstanding anything in the Contract Documents tothe contrary,
no interruption, interference, inefficiency, suspension or delay in the performance, progress,
commencement or completion of the Work for any cause whatsoever, including those for which
OWNER or PROFESSIONAL may be responsible in whole or in part, shall relieve CONTRACTOR
of its duty to perform or give rise to any right to damages or additional compensation from OWNER.
CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy against OWNER for interruption, interference,
inefficiency, suspension or delay of any aspect of the Work shall be the right to seek an extension to
the Contract Time in accordance with the procedures set forth herein.
GC-44
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 13--W ARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TESTS AND INSPECTIONS:
CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
Warranty and Guarantee:
13.1. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to OWNER that all materials and equipment
will be new unless otherwise specified and that all work will be of good quality, performed in a
workmanlike manner, free from faults or defects, and in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents and any inspections, tests, or approvals referred to in this Article. All
unsatisfactory Work, all faulty Work and all Work not conforming to the requirements of the Contract
Documents or such inspections, tests, approvals, or all applicable building, construction and safety
requirements shall be considered defective. Notice of all defects shall be given to CONTRACTOR
by PROFESSIONAL. All defective work, whether or not in place, may be rejected, corrected, or
accepted as provided in this Article.
Access to Work:
13 .2. For the duration of the Work, PROFESSIONAL and its representatives, other designated
representatives of OWNER, and authorized representatives of any regulatory agency shall at all times
be given access to the Work. CONTRACTOR shall provide proper facilities for such access and
observation of the Work and also for any inspection or testing by others.
Tests and Inspections:
13.3. If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public
authority having jurisdiction require any Work to specifically be inspected, tested, or approved by
someone other than CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall give PROFESSIONAL timely notice of
readiness therefore.
13.4. The testing firm( s) (if assigned by OWNER to this Work) and all such inspections, tests,
or approvals provided for by OWNER shall be identified in writing by PROFESSIONAL to
CONTRACTOR. All other inspections, tests or approvals shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense
including additional expenses for inspection and tests required as a result of delays by CONTRACTOR
or hours worked in excess of 40 hours per week. For all required inspections, tests, and approvals on
any Work prepared, performed, or assembled away from the site, CONTRACTOR will furnish
PROFESSIONAL with the required Certificates of Inspection, testing, or approval. All such tests will
be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or
such other applicable organizations as may be required by law or the Contract Documents. Materials
or Work in place that fail to pass acceptability tests shall be retested at the direction of
PROFESSIONAL and at CONTRACTOR's expense.
GC-45
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
13.5. All inspections, tests or approvals other than those required by Laws or Regulations of
any public body having jurisdiction shall be performed by organizations acceptable to OWNER and
CONTRACTOR (or by PROFESSIONAL if so specified).
13.6. If any Work (including the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested or approved is
covered without written concurrence of PROFESSIONAL, it must, if requested by PROFESSIONAL,
be uncovered for observation. Such uncovering shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense unless
CONTRACTOR has given PROFESSIONAL timely notice of CONTRACTOR's intention to cover
the same and PROFESSIONAL has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice.
13.7. Neither observations by PROFESSIONAL or Project Manager nor inspections, tests, or
approvals by persons other than CONTRACTOR shall relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations to
perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
Uncovering Work:
13.8. If any Work required to be inspected, tested or approved is covered prior thereto without
the prior written approval of PROFESSIONAL, or if any Work is covered contrary to the request of
PROFESSIONAL, the Work shall, if requested by PROFESSIONAL, be uncovered for observation,
inspection, testing or approval and replaced at CONTRACTOR's expense.
13.9. If PROFESSIONAL considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed
by PROFESSIONAL or inspected or tested by others, CONTRACTOR, at PROFESSIONAL's request,
shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as
PROFESSIONAL may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor,
material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct
and consequential costs of such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of
satisfactory reconstruction (including but not limited to fees and charges of PROFESSIONALs,
architects, attorneys and other PROFESSIONALs), and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate
decrease in the Contract Price and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER
may make a claim therefor as provided in Article 11. If, however, such Work is not found to be
defective, CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection,
testing and reconstruction, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof,
CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
OWNER May Stop the Work:
13.10. When Work is defective or when CONTRACTOR fails to supply sufficient skilled
workmen or suitable materials or equipment or make prompt payments to Subcontractors for labor,
materials, or equipment or if CONTRACTOR violates any provisions of these Contract Documents,
GC-46
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
OWNER may order CONTRACTOR to stop the Work until the cause for such order has been
eliminated. However, this right of OWNER to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part
of OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of CONTRACTOR or any other party.
CONTRACTOR shall have no right to claim an increase in the Contract Price or Contract Time or
other damages for a stop work order under this paragraph.
Correction or Removal of Defective Work:
13.11. When directed by PROFESSIONAL, CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to
OWNER and as specified by PROFESSIONAL, either correct the defective Work whether fabricated,
installed, or completed, or remove it from the site and replace it with non-defective Work. If
CONTRACTOR does not correct such defective Work or remove and replace such defective Work
within a reasonable time, as specified in a written notice from PROFESSIONAL, OWNER may have
the deficiency corrected. All direct and indirect costs of such correction shall be paid by
CONTRACTOR or deducted from payment to CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR will also bear the
expense of correcting or removing and replacing all Work of others destroyed or damaged by the
correction, removal, or replacement of the defective Work.
One Year Correction Period:
13.12. If, after approval of final payment and prior to the expiration of one year after the date
of substantial completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms
of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents, any Work or materials are
found to be defective, incomplete, or otherwise not in accordance with the Contract Documents,
CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to OWNER and in accordance with OWNER's written
instructions, either correct such defective Work or if it has been rejected by OWNER, remove it from
the Site and replace it with non-defective Work. If CONTRACTOR does not promptly comply with
the terms of such instructions, OWNER may have the defective Work corrected, removed, or replaced.
All direct, indirect and consequential costs of such removal and replacement (including but not limited
to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals) will be paid by
CONTRACTOR.
Acceptance of Defective Work:
13.13. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work,
OWNER (and, prior to PROFESSIONAL's recommendation of final payment, PROFESSIONAL)
prefers to accept it, OWNER may do so. CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and
consequential costs attributable to OWNER's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective
Work (such costs to be approved by PROFESSIONAL as to reasonableness and to include but not be
limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals). If any such
acceptance occurs prior to PROFESSIONAL's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will
be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work,
GC-47
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are
unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor as provided in Article
11. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by
CONTRACTOR to OWNER.
OWNER May Correct Defective Work:
13.14. If CONTRACTOR fails within a reasonable time after written notice of
PROFESSIONAL to proceed to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as
required by PROFESSIONAL in accordance with paragraph 13.11, or if CONTRACTOR fails to
perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if CONTRACTOR falls to comply
with any other provision of the Contract Documents, OWNER may, after seven days' written notice
to CONTRACTOR, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies
under this paragraph, OWNER shall proceed expeditiously, to the extent necessary to complete
corrective and remedial action. OWNER may exclude CONTRACTOR from all or part of the site, take
possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend CONTRACTOR's services related thereto, take
possession of CONTRACTOR's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site
and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which OWNER has
paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere. CONTRACTOR shall allow OWNER,
OWNER's representatives, agents and employees such access to the site as may be necessary to enable
OWNER to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All direct, indirect and con-
sequential costs of OWNER in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against
CONTRACTOR in an amount approved as to reasonableness by PROFESSIONAL, and a Change
Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to
the Work, and OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, OWNER may make a claim therefor as provided
in Article 11. Such direct, indirect and consequential costs will include, but not be limited to, fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals, all court costs and all costs of repair
and replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of
CONTRACTOR's defective Work. CONTRACTOR shall not be allowed an extension ofthe Contract
Time because of any delay in performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by OWNER of
OWNER's rights and remedies hereunder.
Neglected Work by CONTRACTOR
13.15. If CONTRACTOR neglects to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents, including any requirements of the progress schedule, PROFESSIONAL may direct
CONTRACTOR to submit a recovery plan and take specific corrective actions including, but not
limited to, employing additional workmen and/or equipment, and working extended hours and
additional days, all at no cost to OWNER in order to put the Work back on schedule. If
CONTRACTOR fails to correct the deficiency or take appropriate corrective action, OWNER may
terminate the contract or CONTRACTOR's right to proceed with that portion of Work and have the
GC-48
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
Work done by others. The cost of completion under such procedure shall be charged against
CONTRACTOR. A Change Order shall be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the
Contract Documents, including an appropriate reduction in. the Contract Price. If the payments due
CONTRACTOR are not sufficient to cover such amount, CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to
OWNER.
13.16. Should CONTRACTOR work overtime, weekends or holidays to regain the schedule,
all costs to OWNER of associated inspection, construction management and resident engineers shall
be identified to CONTRACTOR and the Contract Price reduced by a like amount via Change Order.
GC-49
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 14-PA YMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION
Schedule of Values:
14.1. The schedule of values established as provided in 2.9 will serve as the basis for progress
payments and will be incorporated into a form of application for Payment acceptable to Project
Manager. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units
completed.
Application for Progress Payment:
14.2. At least twenty (20) calendar days before the date established for each progress payment
(but not more often than once a month), CONTRACTOR shall submitto PROFESSIONAL for review
an application for Payment filled out and signed by CONTRACTOR covering the work completed as
of the date of the application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the
Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated
in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the
Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation
warranting that OWNER has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all liens and
evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other
arrangements to protect OWNER's interest therein, all of which will be satisfactory to OWNER.
Payment is subject to a ten percent (10%) retain age that will be held until the final payment or
acceptance by OWNER. The amount of retain age with respect to progress payments will be as
stipulated in the Agreement.
CONTRACTOR's Warranty of Title:
14.3. CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment
covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to
OWNER no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens.
Review of Applications for Progress Payment:
14.4. PROFESSIONAL will, within ten (10) calendar days after receipt of each Application
for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the application to
OWNER, or return the application to CONTRACTOR indicating in writing PROFESSIONAL's
reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, CONTRACTOR may make the
necessary corrections and resubmit the application. OWNER shall, within thirty-one calendar days of
presentation to him of the application for payment with PROFESSIONAL's recommendation of the
amount for payment, pay CONTRACTOR amount recommended.
GC-50
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
14.5. PROFESSIONAL's recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for
Payment will constitute a representation by PROFESSIONAL to OWNER, based on PROF-
ESSIONAL's on-site observations of the Work in progress as an experienced and qualified design
PROFESSIONAL and on PROFESSIONAL's review of the Application for Payment and the
accompanying data and schedules, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated; that, to the best
of PROFESSIONAL's knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance
with the Contract Documents subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or
upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract
Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under
paragraph 9.10, and to any other qualifications stated in.the recommendation; and that CONTRAC-
TOR is entitled to payment of the amount recommended. However, by recommending any such
payment, PROFESSIONAL will not thereby be deemed to have represented that exhaustive or
continuous on -site inspections have been made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work beyond
the responsibilities specifically assigned to PROFESSIONAL in the Contract Documents or that there
may not be other ma~ters or issues between the parties that might entitle CONTRACTOR to be paid
additionally by OWNER or OWNER to withhold payment to CONTRACT9R.
14.6. PROFESSIONAL's recommendation of final payment will constitute an additional
representation by PROFESSIONAL to OWNER that the conditions precedent to CONTRACTOR's
being entitled to final payment as set forth in paragraph 14.13 have been fulfilled.
14.7. PROFESSIONAL may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if,
in PROFESSIONAL's opinion, it would be incorrect to make such representations to OWNER.
PROFESSIONAL may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently
discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, nullify any such payment
previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in PROFESSIONAL's opinion to protect
OWNER from loss because:
14.7.1. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or
replacement.
14.7.2. the Contract Price has been reduced by Written Amendment or Change Order.
14.7.3. OWNER has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance
with paragraph 13.14. or
14.7.4. of PROFESSIONAL's actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events
enumerated in paragraphs 15.2.1 through 15.2.9 inclusive.
OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by PROFESSIONAL because
claims have been made against OWNER on account of CONTRACTOR's performance or furnishing
of the Work or Liens have been filed in connection with the Work or there are other items entitling
GC-51
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
OWNER to a off-set against the amount recommended, but OWNER must give CONTRACTOR
immediate written notice (with a copy to PROFESSIONAL) stating the reasons for such action.
Substantial Completion:
14.8. When CONTRACTOR considers the entire Work ready for its intended use,
CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER and PROFESSIONAL in writing that the entire Work is
substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by CONTRACTOR as incomplete) and
request that PROFESSIONAL issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Within a reasonable time
thereafter, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and PROFESSIONAL shall make an inspection of the Work
to determine the status of completion. If PROFESSIONAL does not consider the Work substantially
complete, PROFESSIONAL will notify CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If
PROFESSIONAL considers the Work substantially complete, PROFESSIONAL will prepare and
deliver to OWNER a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of
Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be
completed or corrected before final payment. OWNER shall have seven days after receipt of the
tentative certificate during which to make written objection to PROFESSIONAL as to any provisions
of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, PROFESSIONAL concludes that
the Work is not substantially complete, PROFESSIONAL will, within fourteen days after submission
of the tentative certificate to OWNER notify CONTRACTOR in writing stating the reasons therefor.
If, after consideration of OWNER's, objections, PROFESSIONAL considers the Work substantially
complete, PROFESSIONAL will within said fourteen days execute and deliver to OWNER and
CONTRACTOR a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of
items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as
PROFESSIONAL believes justified after consideration of any objections from OWNER. At the time
of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, PROFESSIONAL will deliver to
OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities pending
final payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety,
maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties. Unless OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree
otherwise in writing and so inform PROFESSIONAL prior to PROFESSIONAL's issuing the
definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, PROFESSIONAL's aforesaid recommendation will
be binding on OWNER and CONTRACTOR until final payment.
14.9. OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date
of Substantial Completion, but OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete
or correct items on the tentative list.
Partial Utilization:
14.10. Use by OWNER at OWNER's option of any substantially completed part of the Work
which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) OWNER,
PROFESSIONAL, and CONTRACTOR agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of
GC-52
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
the Work that can be used by OWNER for its intended purpose without significant interference with
CONTRACTOR's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to
Substantial Completion of all the Work subject to the following:
14.10.1. OWNER at any time may request CONTRACTOR in writing to permit OWNER to
use any such part of the Work which OWNER believes to be ready for its intended use and
substantially complete. If CONTRACTOR agrees, CONTRACTOR will certify to OWNER and
PROFESSIONAL that said part of the Work is substantially complete and request PROFESSIONAL
to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. CONTRACTOR at any time
may notify OWNER and PROFESSIONAL in writing that CONTRACTOR considers any such part
of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request PROFESSIONAL to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after
either such request, OWNER, CONTRACTOR and PROFESSIONAL shall make an inspection of that
part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If PROFES SIONAL does not consider that part
of the Work to be substantially complete, PROFESSIONAL will notify OWNER and
CONTRACTOR, in writing, giving the reasons therefor. If PROFESSIONAL considers that part of
the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of paragraphs 14.8 and 14.9 will apply with
respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of
responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto.
14.10.2. OWNER may at any time request CONTRACTOR, in writing, to permit OWNER
to take over operation of any such part of the Work although it is not substantially complete. A copy
of such request will be sent to PROFESSIONAL and, within a reasonable time thereafter, OWNER,
CONTRACTOR and PROFESSIONAL shall make an inspection ofthat part ofthe Work to determine
its status of completion, and PROFESSIONAL will prepare a list of the items remaining to be
completed or corrected thereon before final payment. If CONTRACTOR does not object in writing
to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL that such part of the Work is not ready for separate operation by
OWNER, PROFESSIONAL will finalize the list of items to be completed or corrected and will deliver
such list to OWNER and CONTRACTOR together with a written recommendation as to the division
of responsibilities pending final payment between OWNER and CONTRACTOR with respect to
security, operation, safety, maintenance, utilities, insurance, warranties and guarantees for that part of
the Work which will become binding upon OWNER and CONTRACTOR at the time when OWNER
takes over such operation (unless they shall have otherwise agreed in writing and so informed
PROFESSIONAL). During such operation and prior to Substantial Completion of such part of the
Work, OWNER shall allow CONTRACTOR reasonable access to complete or correct items on said
list and to complete other related Work.
14.10.3. No occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work will be accomplished prior
to compliance with the requirements of paragraph 5.15 in respect of property insurance.
14.10.4. OWNER, may at its discretion, reduce the amount of retain age subject to Beneficial
Occupancy.
GC-53
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
Final Inspection:
14.11. Upon written notice from CONTRACTOR that the entire Work or an agreed upon
portion thereof is complete, PROFESSIONAL will make a final inspection with OWNER and CON-
TRACTOR and will notify CONTRACTOR in writing of all particulars in which this inspection
reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. CONTRACTOR shall immediately take such
measures as are necessary to remedy such deficiencies.
Final Application for Payment:
14.12. After CONTRACTOR has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of
PROFESSIONAL and OWNER and delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all
maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence
of insurance required by 5.2, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents and other
documents, CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the procedure for
progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously
delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited
to the evidence of insurance required, (ii) consent of the surety, if any, to final payment, and (iii)
complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to OWNER) of all liens arising out of
or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of liens and as approved by
OWNER, CONTRACTOR may furnish receipts or release in full and an affidavit of CONTRACTOR
that (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a lien
could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with
the Work for which OWNER or OWNER's property might in any way be responsible have been paid
or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full,
CONTRACTOR may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to OWNER to indemnify OWNER
against any lien.
14.12.1. No application for final payment will be accepted by OWNER until approved as-built
documents by CONTRACTOR are accepted and approved by PROFESSIONAL.
14.12.2. Notwithstanding any other provision of these contract documents to the contrary,
OWNER and PROFESSIONAL are under no duty or obligation whatsoever to any vendor, materials
provider, Subcontractor, laborer or other party to ensure that payments due and owing by
CONTRACTOR to any of them are or will be made. Such parties shall rely only on
CONTRACTOR's surety bonds for remedy of nonpayment by him. CONTRACTOR agrees to defend
and resolve all claims made by Subcontractors, indemnifying OWNER and PROFESSIONAL for all
claims arising from or resulting from Subcontractor or supplier or material men or laborer services in
connection with this project.
14.12.3. General Indemnity: CONTRACTOR shall indemnify OWNER and PROFESSIONAL
GC-54
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
for any damages sustained, including lost profits, resulting from CONTRACTOR's failure or refusal
to perform the work required by these contract documents.
Final Payment and Acceptance:
14.13. If, on the basis of PROFESSIONAL' s observation of the Work during construction and
final inspection and PROFESSIONAL's review of the final Application for Payment and
accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, PROFESSIONAL is satisfied
that the Work has been completed and CONTRACTOR's other obligations under the Contract
Documents have been fulfilled, PROFESSIONAL will, within ten (10) working days after receipt of
the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing PROFESSIONAL's recommendation of payment
and present the Application to OWNER for payment. At the same time PROFESSIONAL will also
give written notice to OWNER and CONTRACTOR that the Work is acceptable subject to the
provisions of 14.6. Otherwise, PROFESSIONAL will return the application to CONTRACTOR,
indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case
CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. After the
presentation to OWNER of the application and accompanying documentation, in appropriate form and
substance and with PROFESSIONAL's recommendation and notice of acceptability, the amount
recommended by PROFESSIONAL will. become due and will be paid by OWNER to
CONTRACTOR.
14.14. If, through no fault of CONTRACTOR, final completion of the Work is significantly
delayed and if PROFESSIONAL so confirms, OWNER shall, upon receipt of CONTRACTOR's final
Application for Payment and recommendation of PROFESSIONAL and without terminating the
Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by OWNER for Work not fully completed or corrected
is less than the retainage stipulated in the Contract and if bonds have been furnished as required in
Article 5, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the
Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by CONTRACTOR to PROFESSIONAL with
the application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions
governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
CONTRACTOR's Continuing Obligation:
14.15. CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents shall be absolute. Neither recommendation of any progress or
final payment by PROFESSIONAL, nor the issuance of a certificate of Substantial
Completion, nor any payment by OWNER to CONTRACTOR under the Contract
Documents, nor any use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by OWNER, nor
any act of acceptance by OWNER nor any failure to do so, nor any review and approval
of a Shop Drawing or sample submission, nor the issuance of a notice of acceptability
by PROFESSIONAL pursuant to paragraph 14.13, nor any correction of defective Work
GC-55
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
by OWNER will constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the c::ontract
Documents or a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents (except as provided in paragraph 14.16).
Waiver of Claims:
14.16. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute:
14.16.1. A waiver of all claims by OWNER against CONTRACTOR, except
claims arising from unsettled liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection
pursuant to 14.11, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of
any special guarantees specified therein, or from CONTRACTOR's continuing
obligations under the Contract Documents; and
14.16.2. A waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than
those previously made in writing and still unsettled.
GC-56
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 15--SUSPENSION OF WORK AND
TERMINATION
OWNER May Suspend Work:
15.1. OWNER may, at any time and without cause, suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a
period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to CONTRACTOR and PROFESSIONAL
which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. CONTRACTOR shall resume the Work on
the date so fixed. CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension
of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to any suspension if CONTRACTOR makes an
approved claim therefor as provided in Articles 11 and 12.
Termination For Cause:
15.2. Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the following events:
15.2.1. if CONTRACTOR commences a voluntary case under any chapter of the Bankruptcy
Code (Title 11, United States Code), as now or hereafter in effect, or if CONTRACTOR takes any
equivalent or similar action by filing a petition or otherwise under any other federal or state law in
effect at such time relating to the bankruptcy or insolvency;
15.2.2. if a petition is filed against CONTRACTOR under any chapter of the Bankruptcy Code
as now or hereafter in effect at the time of filing, or if a petition is filed seeking any such equivalent
or similar relief against CONTRACTOR under any other federal or state law in effect at the time
relating to bankruptcy or insolvency;
15.2.3. if CONTRACTOR makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors;
15.2.4. if a trustee, receiver, custodian or agent of CONTRACTOR is appointed under
applicable law or under contract, whose appointment or authority to take charge of property of
CONTRACTOR is for the purpose of enforcing a Lien against such property or for the purpose of
general administration of such property for the benefit of CONTRACTOR's creditors;
15.2.5. if CONTRACTOR admits in writing an inability to pay its debts generally, as they
become due;
15.2.6. if CONTRACTOR fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule established under paragraph 2.9
as revised from time to time);
GC-57
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
15.2.7. if CONTRACTOR disregards Laws or Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction;
15.2.8. if CONTRACTOR disregards the authority of PROFESSIONAL; or
15.2.9. if CONTRACTOR otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the
Contract Documents,
OWNER may, after giving CONTRACTOR (and the surety, ifthere be one) seven days' written notice
and to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of CONTRACTOR,
exclude CONTRACTOR from the site and take possession of the Work and of all CONTRACTOR's
tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent
they could be used by CONTRACTOR (without liability to CONTRACTOR for trespass or
conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which
OWNER has paid CONTRACTOR but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as OWNER
may deem expedient. In such case CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to receive any further payment
until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct, indirect and
consequential costs of completing the Work (including but not limited to fees and charges of
PROFESSIONALs, architects, attorneys and other PROFESSIONALs and court and arbitration costs)
such excess will be paid to CONTRACTOR. If such costs exceed such unpaid balance,
CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to OWNER. Such costs incurred by OWNER will be
approved as to reasonableness by PROFESSIONAL and incorporated in a Change Order, but when
exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, OWNER shall not be required to obtain the
lowest price for the Work performed.
15.3. In the event OWNER terminates the contract for cause and it is subsequently judicially
determined that there was no cause for termination, the termination for convenience provision will be
the means for disposition of the balance of the contract obligations.
Termination for Convenience
15.4. Upon seven working days' written notice to CONTRACTOR and PROFESSIONAL,
OWNER may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of OWNER, elect to
terminate the Contract. In such case, CONTRACTOR shall be paid (without duplication of any items):
15.4.1. For completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead
and profit on such Work;
15.4.2. For expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection
with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead. and profit on such expenses;
GC-58
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
15.4.3. For all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts
with Subcontractors, suppliers and others; and
15.4.4. For reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination.
CONTRACTOR shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other
economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.
15.5. Where CONTRACTOR's services have been so terminated by OWNER, the
termination will not affect any rights or remedies of OWNER against CONTRACTOR then existing
or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due CONTRACTOR by
OWNER will not release CONTRACTOR from liability.
CONTRACTOR May Stop Work or Terminate:
15.6. If through no act or fault of CONTRACTOR, the Work is suspended for a period of
more than ninety calendar days by OWNER or under an order of court or other public authority, or
PROFESSIONAL fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted
or OWNER fails for thirty-one days to pay CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due,
then CONTRACTOR may upon seven working days' written notice to OWNER and
PROFESSIONAL and provided OWNER or PROFESSIONAL did not remedy such suspension or
failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from.OWNER payment on the same
terms as provided in 15.2. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other
right or remedy, if PROFESSIONAL has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty days
after it is submitted or OWNER has failed for thirty-one calendar days after it is submitted to pay
CONTRACTOR any sum finally determined to be due, CONTRACTOR may upon seven days' written
notice to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL stop the Work until receipt of payment of all such amounts
due CONTRACTOR, including interest thereon. The provisions of this paragraph are not intended
to preclude CONTRACTOR from making claim under Articles 11 and 12 for an increase in Contract
Price or Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to CONTRACTOR's
stopping Work as permitted by this paragraph. The provisions of this paragraph shall not relieve
CONTRACTOR of the obligations under paragraph 6.30 to carry on the Work in accordance with the
progress schedule and without delay during disputes and disagreements with OWNER.
GC-59
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 16--DISPUTE RESOLUTION
16.1. All disputes arising under this Contract or its interpretation whether involving lawor
fact or both, or extra work, and all claims for alleged breach of contract shall within ten (10) working
days of the commencement of the dispute be presented by CONTRACTOR to OWNER for decision.
All papers pertaining to claims shall be filed in quadruplicate. Such notice need not detailthe amount
of the claim but shall state the facts surrounding the claim in sufficient detail to identify the claim,
together with its character and scope. In the meantime, CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the Work
as directed. Any claim not presented within the time limit specified in this paragraph shall be deemed
to have been waived, except that if the claim is of a continuing character and notice of the claim is not
given within ten (10) working days of its commencement, the claim will be considered only for a
period commencing ten (10) working days prior to the receipt by OWNER of notice thereof. Each
decision by OWNER will be in writing and will be mailed to CONTRACTOR by registered or
certified mail, return receipt requested, directed to his last known address.
16.2 All claims, disputes and other matters in question between OWNER and
CONTRACTOR arising out of, or relating to, the Contract Documents or the breach thereof shall be
decided under Georgia Law in the Superior Court of Richmond County, Georgia. CONTRACTOR by
execution of the Contract consents to jurisdiction and venue in the Superior Court of Richmond
County, Georgia, and waives any right to contest same.
GC-60
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
ARTICLE 17-MISCELLANEOUS
Giving Notice:
17.1. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written
notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a
member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent
by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the
notice.
Computation of Time:
17.2.1. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be
computed to exclude the first andinclude the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period
falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction,
such day will be omitted from the computation.
17.2.2. A calendar day of twenty- four hours measured from midnight to the next lnidnight shall
constitute a day.
General:
17.3. Should OWNER or CONTRACTOR suffer injury or damage to person or property
because of any error, omission or act of the other party or of any of the other party's employees or
. agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim should be made in writing to the
other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions
of this paragraph 17.3 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any
applicable statute of limitations or repose.
17.4. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and
remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto, and, in particular but without limitation, the
warranties, guarantees and obligations imposed upon CONTRACTOR by paragraphs 6.32, 13.1, 13.12,
13.14, 14.3 and 15.2 and all of the rights and remedies available to OWNER and PROFESSIONAL
thereunder, are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and
remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or
Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee or by other provisions of the Contract Documents, and
the provisions of this paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract
Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply.
All representations, warranties and guarantees made in the Contract Documents will survive final
payment and termination or completion of the Agreement.
GC-61
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
17.5. CONTRACTOR shall keep adequate records and supporting documentation applicable
to this Work and Contract. Said records and documentation shall be retained by CONTRACTOR for
a minimum of five (5) years from the date of final completion or termination of this Contract.
OWNER shall have the right to audit, inspect, and copy all such records and documentation as often
as OWNER deems necessary during the period of the Contract and for a period of five (5) years
thereafter provided, however, such activity shall be conducted only during normal business hours.
OWNER, during this period of time, shall also have the right to obtain a copy of and otherwise inspect
any audit made at the direction of CONTRACTOR as concerns the aforesaid records and supporting
documentation.
17.6. The Contract Documents are intended by the Parties to, and do, supersede any and all
provisions of the Georgia Prompt Pay Act, O.c.G.A. Section 13-11-1, et seq. In the event any
provision of the Contract Documents are inconsistent with any provision of the Prompt Pay Act, this
provision of the Contract Documents shall control.
17.7. Notwithstanding any provision of the law to the contrary, the parties agree that no
interest shall be due Contractor on any sum held as retain age pursuant to the Contract Documents and
CONTRACTOR specifically waives any claim to same.
Substitutions:
17.8. Notwithstanding any proVISIOn of these general conditions, there shall be no
substitutions of materials that are not determined to be equivalent to those indicated or required in the
contract documents without an amendment to the contract.
Sanitary Sewer Overflow Prevention:
17.9. Procedures to Prevent Overflows During Sanitary Sewer Construction:
17.9.1 The CONTRACTOR is hereby notified that the discharge of any untreated wastewater
to waters of the State is a violation of Georgia Water Quality Regulations and is prohibited.
17.9.2 The CONTRACTOR will submit an Emergency Response Plan prior to beginning work.
This plan will include a list of key personnel with 24-hour contact information who will respond
during an emergency situation. The ERP will include estimates of mobilization time for a response
crew to arrive onsite. Any changes to the Emergency Response Plan will be submitted to the
RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENT A TNE prior to implementation.
17.9.3 In the event bypass pumping is required to facilitate new sewer construction, bypassing
plans and supporting calculations must be submitted to the Augusta Utilities Department for review
prior to establishment of the bypass. All bypass systems will include complete redundancy in pumping
GC-62
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
systems, if failure of the primary pumping system could result in a discharge of untreated wastewater
to waters of the State.
17.9.4 Bypass pumping will be monitored continuously by a person knowledgeable in pump
operation and maintenance if the failure of the bypass pump could result in the discharge of untreated
wastewater to waters of the State.
17.9.5 In the event of a discharge of untreated wastewater, the CONTRACTOR will take the
following actions:
18. Take immediate steps to eliminate or minimize the discharge of untreated wastewater.
19. Immediately notify the Utilities Department dispatcher (706.796.5000) and the RESIDENT
PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE (contact information will be provided at the
preconstruction conference).
20. Maintain a chronicle of relevant information regarding the incident including specific
actions taken by the CONTRACTOR and estimates of the discharge volume.
17.9.6 The RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE will coordinate notification of the
Georgia Environmental Protection Division (800.241.4113) and the Augusta Emergency Management
Agency if appropriate.
17.9.7 If, in the opinion of the RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATNE and the OWNER,
the CONTRACTOR is not responding to an emergency situation in an appropriate manner, the
Utilities Department will undertake necessary actions to abate an overflow situation. The cost of these
actions will be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
17.9.8 Following a discharge of untreated wastewater, a downstream inspection will be
conducted by the Utilities Department to assess potential mitigation measures that may be required of
the CONTRACTOR.
PROGRAM MANAGER:
17.10 The PROGRAM MANAGER for the project is CH2M HILL, 360 Bay Street, Suite 100
Augusta, GA 30901.
The presence or duties of PROGRAM MANAGER's personnel at the construction site, whether as
onsite representatives or otherwise, do not make PROGRAM MANAGER or PROGRAM
MANAGER's personnel in any way responsible for those duties that belong to OWNER and / or the
CONTRACTOR or other entities, and do not relieve the CONTRACTOR or any other entity of their
obligations, duties, and responsibilities, including, but not limited to, all construction methods, means,
techniques, sequences, and procedures necessary for coordinating and completing all portions of the
construction work in accordance with the construction Contract Documents and any health and safety
precautions required by such construction work.
GC-63
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Revision Date
August 2001
PROGRAM MANAGER and PROGRAM MANAGER's personnel have no authority to exercise any
control over any construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their
work or any health or safety precautions and have no duty of inspecting, noting, observing, correcting,
or reporting on health or safety deficiencies of the CONTRACTOR(s) or other entity or any other
persons at the site except PROGRAM MANAGER's own personnel.
The presence of PROGRAM MANAGER's personnel at the construction site is for the purpose of
providing to OWNER a greater degree of confidence that the completed construction work will
conform generally to the construction documents and that the integrity of the design concept as
reflected in the construction documents has been implemented and preserved by the construction
contractor(s). PROGRAM MANAGER neither guarantees the performance of the construction
contractor(s) nor assumes responsibility for construction contractor's failure to perform work in
accordance with the construction documents.
For this AGREEMENT only, construction sites include places of manufacture for materials
incorporated into the construction work, and construction contractors include manufacturers of
materials incorporated into the construction work
GC-64
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION
.SC-01.
SC-02.
SC-03.
SC-04.
SC-05.
SC-06.
SC-07.
SC-08.
SC-09.
SC-OlO.
SC-011.
SC-012.
SC-013.
SC-014.
SC-015.
SC-016.
SC-O 17.
SC-018.
SC-019.
SC-020.
SC-021.
SC-022.
SC-023.
SC-024.
SC-025.
SC-026.
SC-027.
SC-028.
SC-029.
SC-030.
SECTION SC-O
INDEX TO SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Scope of the Work
List of Drawings
Bonds
Contractor's Liability Insurance
Project Sign
Protection of the Environment
Temporary Toilets
Plans and Specifications Furnished
Record Drawings
Shop Drawings
Existing Structures
Salvage Material
Referenced Specifications
Traffic Control
Surveys
Construction Order and Schedule
Consulting Engineers
Inspection and Testing of Work
Georgia Prompt Pay Act
City Acceptance
Disputes
Specified Materials
Interest Not Earned on Retainage
Basis of Payment
Compliance with Laws, Codes, Regulations, Etc.
Equivalent Materials
After Hours Inspection
Instrumentation, Controls and SCADA Allowance
Submersible Pump Alternative Manufacturer
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
SC-O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION SC
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
-01. SCOPE OF THE WORK:
The project referred to in the Agreement shall consist of furnishing all materials, labor,
machinery, etc. necessary to install pump station equipment, and all related site improvements.
-02. LIST OF DRAWINGS:
The following drawings, prepared by Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.c. comprise
the plans for the project.
SHEET NO.
C1.0
C1.1
C1.2
C1.3
C2.1
C2.2
C2.3
C2.4
C3.1
C4.1
C4.2
C6.1
C6.2
C6.3
C7.1
C7.2
C7.3
C7.4
C8.1
TITLE
DATE
ORIGINAL REVISED
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
Cover Sheet
Index To Sheets
General Notes
Detailed Estimate
Access Road Plan
Site Plan
Yard Piping Plan
Yard Piping Profiles
Plan/Profile Spirit Creek W.W.T.P. Force Main
Access Road Profile
Access Road Cross Sections
Pump Station Layout & Piping Plan
Pump Station Piping Sections & Details
Process & Instrumentation Diagram
Bypass Structures & Grit Trap Details
Manhole Details
Miscellaneous Details
Miscellaneous Details
Erosion, Sedimentation, & Pollution Control Plan
SC-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SHEET NO.
C8.2
S1.0
S1.1
S2.1
S3.1
S4.1
S5.1
S5.2
S5.3
S6.1
S7.1
S8.1
P1.1
M1.1
M2.1
ELI
E2.1
E3.1
E4.1
E5.1
DATE
ORIGINAL REVISED
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05 .
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
6/24/05
TITLE
Erosion, Sedimentation, & Pollution Control Details
Structural Notes
Electrical Building Plans
Electrical Building Elevations
Electrical Building Sections
Electrical Building Details
W et Well Plans
Wet Well Plans
Wet Well Foundation Plan
Wet Well Sections
Stair Details
Structural Details
Plumbing Plan, Details & Schedules
HV AC Plans & Details
HV AC Specifications and Schedules
Electrical Legend, Notes & Details
Electrical Site Plan
Pump Station Electrical Lighting, Power & Riser Diagram
Power Plans-Pump Station & Bypass Inlet/Outlet Structures
Electrical Gear Details
-03. BONDS:
The Contractor will include in the lump sum payment for Lump Sum Construction the
cost of his performance and payment bonds.
-04. CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE:
Insurance shall be written with limits of liability shown below or as required by law,
whichever is greater:
Commercial General Liability (per occurrence) Each Occurrence $
General Aggregate $
Products $
SC-2
1,000,000
2,000,000
2,000,000
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Commercial General Liability (per occurrence) Each Occurrence
General Aggregate
Products
Personal & Adv Injury
Fire Damage
Automobile Liability (any auto) Combined Single Limit
Excess Liability (any auto) Each Occurrence
Workers Compensation
Employer Liability
$
$
$
$
$
$
$ 5,000,000
Statutory Limits
$ 1,000,000
1,000,000
2,000,000
2,000,000
1,000,000
500,000
1,000,000
-05. PROJECT SIGN:
The Contractor will provide and install two (2) project signs at prominent locations on the
construction site as directed by the Engineer. The signs will carry in a prominent manner the names of the
project, the Owner, and the names of the Contractor and the Engineer and a 24-hour phone number for the
Contractor in 4-inch letters. The sign shall be constructed and erected on wood posts in a substantial manner
8- feet above the ground. The full size stencil shall be approved along with colors before fabrication. The
Contractor shall include the cost of the project signs in his Lump Sum Construction bid item.
-06. PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT:
The Contractor will carefully schedule his work so that a minimum amount of the exposed
earth will be subject to erosion by rainfall or wind, and he will provide means satisfactory to the Engineer to
minimize the transportation of silt and other deleterious material from the project area onto adjacent
properties or into adjacent water courses.
All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whether
herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant or of other classification, must show approval of either
EP A or USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in conformance with printed
instructions.
-07. TEMPORARY TOILETS:
Contractor shall provide temporary toilet facilities on the site for workmen employed in the
construction work. Toilets shall be adequate for the number of men employed and shall be maintained in a
clean and sanitary condition. Workmen shall be required to use only these toilets. At completion of the
work, toilets used by Contractor shall be removed and premises left in the condition required by the Contract.
-08. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED:
The Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, by the Owner up to five (5) sets of direct
black line prints together with a like number of complete bound specifications for construction purposes.
SC-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Additional sets of plans and/or specifications will be fumished to the Contractor at the cost of reproduction
upon his written request.
-09.
RECORD DRAWINGS:
The Contractor will maintain in his office one complete set of drawings (including any
supplemental sketches) pertaining to the project upon which, at the end of each day's work any deviations
from the construction lines shown thereon and all changes ordered by the Engineer will be shown accurately
in red pencil. If necessary, supplemental drawings will be made to show details of deviations or changes, and
these will be kept with the marked set. The drawings will be available to the Engineer for inspection during
construction and at the completion of construction. Prior to submitting his estimate for [mal payment, as-built
drawings are to be prepared and submitted by the contractor to the engineer. As-built drawings shall include
tap locations and manholes located to a minimum of two separate surface features.
-010. SHOP DRAWINGS:
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his review shop drawings, cuts, diagrams, bar
lists, steel details and other descriptive data on every item, where shown on the drawings or specified herein.
The Contractor shall check all submittals and so indicate on each copy thereof.
Five copies of such shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer before ordering of the
material. Submittals which have not been checked by the Contractor will not be reviewed by the Engineer.
Reviews by the Engineer of submittals will cover only general conformity with the project requirements, while
responsibility for detailed conformity shall remain with the Contractor. The Contractor:will be notified by mail
of the results of the submittal reviews within ten (10) days of the receipt by the Engineer thereof.
-011. EXISTING STRUCTURES:
Where sidewalks, street signs, private signs, walls, fences, pipelines, etc. are removed in
accomplishing the work, each and every item will be replaced in the same or better manner or condition than
that in which it was before construction began. The Contractor will protect and hold harmless the Owner
from any suit, action, or dispute whatever arising from the Contractor's work adjacent to private property.
-012. SALVAGE MATERIAL:
All existing installations to be removed, including but not limited to masonry and concrete
rubble, asphalt, pipe, etc. will be disposed of at a location approved by the Owner.
-013. REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS:
Where specifications or standards of trade organizations and other groups are referenced in
these specifications, they are made as much a part of these specifications as if the entire standard or
SC-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
specification were reprinted herein. The inclusion of the latest edition or revision of the referenced
specification or standard is intended.
-014. TRAFFIC CONTROL:
Traffic control shall conform to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)
of the Federal Highway Administration, latest edition. The Contractor shall give prior written notification to
and shall obtain the approval oftheAugusta Fire Department, Police Department, Emergency Medical
Services, and the Augusta Traffic Engineering Department of any street closures.
-015. SURVEYS:
The Engineer has established base lines for locating the principal component parts of the
work, together with a suitable number of bench marks adjacent to the work. From the information thus
provided, the Contractor shall develop and make all detail surveys needed for construction lines and
elevations. The Contractor shall employ only Registered Land Surveyors or Registered Professional Engineer
to perform all detail surveys.
The Contractor will diligently preserve and maintain the position of all stakes, reference points
and bench marks after they are set and, in case of willful or careless destruction, he shall be charged with the
resulting expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused by their unnecessary loss or
disturbance.
-016. CONSTRUCTION ORDER AND SCHEDULE:
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed order, schedule, and methods
of construction activities within the general guidelines specified for maintenance and
protection of highway and pedestrian, traffic; utility lines; drainage ways; adjacent
properties; and as otherwise specified.
B. After notice to proceed and prior to the first payment on the contract the Contractor
shall submit the following for review:
(1) Breakdown of contract price into units of cost for each item required to
complete the total work; this breakdown will be the basis for judging the
percentage complete at any time.
(2) A statement of the order of procedure to be followed that will result in the
required protection and completion of the work within the overall contract
time.
(3) A bar chart showing the percentage of each item schedules against time and
SC-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
so scheduled that Contractor's order of construction is clearly shown.
c.
With each request for payment the Contractor shall submit two copies of the bar
chart clearly marked to show the work completed at the date of the payment
requested.
D.
Progress Schedule Requirements
(1) Bar Chart Schedule: Prepare on maximum 11 inch by 17 inch sheet size for
each separate stage of Work as specified and shown, to include at least:
(a) Identification and listing in chronological order of those activities
reasonably required to complete work, including, but not limited to,
subcontract work, major equipment design, factory testing and
startup activities, project close out and cleanup and specified work
sequences, constraints, and milestones, including Substantial
Completion date(s). Listings to be identified by Specification
section number.
(b) Identify: (i) horizontal time frame by year, month, and week, (ii)
duration, early-start, and completion of each activity and sub-
activity and (iii) critical activities and Project float.
(c) Provide sub-schedules to further define critical portions of the work.
(d) MontWy schedule submissions: show overall percent complete,
projected and actual, and completion progress by listed activity and
sub-activity.
(e) Identify the critical path on the schedule.
(2) General:
(a) Schedule( s) shall reflect work logic sequences, restraints, delivery
windows, review times, contract times and milestones set forth in the
Agreement, and shall begin with the date of Notice to Proceed and
conclude with the date of Final Completion.
(b) The schedule requirement herein is the minimum required.
Contractor may prepare a more sophisticated schedule if such work
will aid Contractor in execution and timely completion of work.
SC-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(c) Base schedule on standard 5-day work week.
(d) When bar chart or network analysis schedules are specified, use
Primavera Project Planner, latest version, SureTrak latest version
or a compatible and approved software.
(e) Adjust or confirm schedules on a monthly basis as follows:
Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance proposed
adjustments in the progress schedule that will not change the
contract times (or milestones). Such adjustments will conform
generally to the progress schedule then if effect and additionally will
comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable
thereto.
Proposed adjustments in the progress scheduled that will change the
contract times (or milestones) may only be a Change Order.
Use of float suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing
or logic, specialleadllag logic restraints, and extended activity times
are prohibited, and use of float time disclosed or implied by use of
alternate float-suppression techniques shall be shared to
proportionate benefits to Owner and Contractor.
Pursuant to above float -sharing requirement, no time extensions will
be granted nor delay damages paid until a delay occurs which (i)
impacts project's critical path, (ii) extends work beyond contract
completion date.
-017. CONSULTING ENGINEERS:
The Owner has engaged consulting engineers to assist the Director of Utilities, defmed herein
as the Engineer, by preparing plans and specifications for the work and by providing certain services during
the bidding and construction phases of the project. The consulting engineer, Cranston, Robertson &
Whitehurst, P.C. are authorized to represent the Director of Utilities within the limits of the various duties
delegated and assigned to the firm by the Director. Nevertheless the Director of Utilities remains the final
authority hereunder and is the "Engineer" as used throughout the Contract Documents. The Program
Manager for the project is CH2M Hill, 360 Bay Street, Suite 100, Augusta, Georgia 30901. The Program
Manager's representative on the site will serve as the Resident Project Representative (RPR) for the project.
The presence or duties of Program Manager's personnel at the construction site, whether as
onsite representatives or otherwise, do not make Program Manager or Program Manager's personnel in any
SC-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
way responsible for those duties that belong to Owner and/or the Contractor or other entities, and do not
relieve the Contractor or any other entity of their obligations, duties, and responsibilities, including, but not
limited to, all construction methods, means, techniques, sequences, and procedures necessary for
coordinating and completing all portions of the construction work in accordance with the construction
Contract Documents and any health and safety precautions required by such construction work.
Program Manager and Program Manager's personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any
construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety
precautions and have no duty of inspecting, noting, observing, correcting, or reporting on health or safety
deficiencies of the Contractor( s) or other entity or any other persons at the site except Program Manager's
own personnel.
The presence of Program Manager's personnel at the construction site is for the purpose of
providing to Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed construction work will conform
generally to the construction documents and that the integrity of the design concept as reflected in the
construction documents has been implemented and preserved by the construction contractor( s). Program
Manager neither guarantees the performance of the construction contractor( s) nor assumes responsibility for
construction contractor's failure to perform work in accordance with the construction documents.
For this Agreement only, construction sites include places of manufacture for materials
incorporated into the construction work, and construction contractors include manufacturers or materials
incorporated into the construction work.
-018. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF WORK:
The Owner shall provide sufficient competent engineering personnel for the technical
observation and testing of the work.
The Engineer and his representatives shall at all times have access to the work whenever it
is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access, and for
inspections.
Inspectors shall have the power to stop work on account of a workman's incompetency,
drunkenness, or willful negligence or disregard of orders. An inspector may stop the work entirely if there
is not a sufficient quantity of suitable and approved materials or equipment onthe ground to carry it out
properly or for any good and sufficient cause. Inspectors may not accept on behalf of the Owner any
material or workmanship which does not conform fully to the requirements of the contract and they shall give
no orders or directions under any possible circumstances not in accordance with the Specifications. The
Contractor shall furnish the inspector with all required assistance to facilitate thorough inspection or the culling
over or removal of defective materials or for any other purpose requiring discharge of their duties for which
service no additional allowance shall be made. The inspector shall, at all times, have full permission to take
samples of the materials that mayor may not be used in the work.
SC-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Any inspection provided by the Engineers is for the purpose of determining compliance with
provisions of the contract specifications and is in no way a guarantee of the methods or appliances use by
the Contractor, nor for the safety of the job.
If the specifications, the Engineer's instructions, laws, ordinances, or any public authority
require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer timely notice of
its readiness for inspection, and if the inspection is by an authority other than the Engineer, of the date fIxed
for such inspection. Inspections by the Engineer shall be made promptly, and where practicable at the source
of supply. If any work should be covered up without review or consent of the Engineer, it must, if required
by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination and properly restored at the Contractor's expense.
Re-examination of any work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, if so ordered, the work
must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work is found to be in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such work is not in
accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such cost.
The Owner will employ a qualified materials testing laboratory, hereinafter referred to as the
Laboratory, to monitor more fully on the Owner's behalf the quality of materials and work, and to perform
such tests as may be required under the Contract Documents as conditions for acceptance of materials and
work. The Laboratory will be solely responsible to and paid separately by the Owner. The timing of the
work of the Laboratory will be coordinated by the Engineer through his duly authorized inspector.
The Owner will bear the cost of testing a particular material or area of the work once. Where
retesting is required following corrective measures or under other circumstances, the Contractor shall
reimburse the Owner for the cost of additional testing.
-019. GEORGIA PROMPT PAY ACT:
This Agreement is intended by the Parties to, and does, supersede any and all provisions of
the Georgia Prompt Pay Act, O.c.G.A. Section 13-11-1, et seq. In the event any provision of this
Agreement is inconsistent with any provision of the Prompt Pay Act, the provision of this Agreement shall
control.
-020. CITY ACCEPTANCE:
Notwithstanding any other obligations of the Contractor, he shall complete the work to the
full satisfaction of the Augusta Utilities Department and the Engineer. This provision shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities for guarantees.
-021. DISPUTES:
All claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and the Contractor
SC-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
arising out of or relating to the Agreement, or the breach thereof, shall be decided in the Superior Court of
Richmond County, Georgia. The Contractor, by executing this Agreement, specifically consents to venue
in Richmond County and waives any right to contest the venue in the Superior Court of Richmond County,
Georgia.
-022. SPECIFIED MATERIALS:
Attention is drawn to the specification of certain brands or manufacturers of construction
materials on the drawings. Unless the phrase "or equal" appears in the specification thereon, no substitution
or deviation from the product specified will be allowed.
Notwithstanding any provision of the general conditions, there shall be no substitution of
materials that are not determined to be equivalent to those indicated or required in the contract documents
without an amendment to the contract.
-023. INTEREST NOT EARNED ON RETAINAGE:
Notwithstanding any provision of the law to the contrary, the parties agree that no interest
shall be due to the Contractor on any sum held as retainage pursuant to this Agreement and Contractor
specifically waives any claim to same.
-024. BASIS OF PAYMENT:
As explained in the section "Instructions to Bidders" and paragraphs 11.91, 11.92 and 11.93
of the General Conditions, payment for all items of construction will be made at the total of the actual number
of units installed at the unit prices stated in the Bid Schedule to the Proposal. Partial payments will be made
based on the actual number of units of work completed during the month and in-place at the unit prices stated
in the Bid Schedule.
-025. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS. CODES. REGULATIONS. ETC.:
Supplementing the provision of the GENERAL CONDmONS, the successful bidder
awarded this contract by signing the contract acknowledges the following, however, this is not to be
construed as all inclusive or being these only:
1. Underground Gas Pipe Law:
The Contractor signing the contract acknowledges that he is fully aware of the contents and
requirements of "Georgia Laws 1969, Pages 50 and the following, and any amendments and
regulations pursuant thereto", and the Contractor shall comply therewith.
2. High Voltage Act:
SC-lO
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The Contractor by signing the contract acknowledges that he is fully aware of the contents
and requirements of "Act No. 525, Georgia law 1960, and any amendments thereto, and
Rules and Regulations of the commissioner of Labor pursuant thereto" (the preceding
requirements within quotation marks being hereinafter referred to as the "high voltage act"),
and the Contractor shall comply therewith. The signing of Contract shall also confIrm on
behalf of the Contractor that he:
A. has visited the premises and has taken into consideration the location of all electrical
power lines on and adjacent to all areas onto which the contract documents require
to permit the Contract either to work, to store materials, or to stage operations, and
B. that the Contractor has obtained from the Owner of the aforesaid electric power
lines advice in writing as to the amount of voltage carried by the aforesaid lines.
The Contractor agrees that he is the "person or persons responsible for the work to
be done" as referred to in the high voltage act and that accordingly the Contractor
is solely "responsible for the completion of the safety measures which are required
by Section 3 of the high voltage act before proceeding with any work." The
Contractor agrees that prior to the completion of precautionary measures required
by the high voltage act he will neither bring nor permit the bringing of any equipment
onto the site (or onto any area or areas onto which the contract documents require
or permit the Contractor to work, to store materials, or to stage operations) with
which it is possible to come within eight feet of any high voltage line or lines pursuant
to operations arising out of performance of the Contract. The foregoing provisions
apply to power lines located (a) on the site and (b) on any area or areas onto which
the contract documents require or permit the Contractor either to work, to store
materials, or to stage operations, or (c) within working distance for equipment or
materials, being used on (a) and (b) above. These provisions of the Contract do not
limit or reduce the duty ofthe Contractor otherwise owed to the Owner, to other
parties, or to both. The Contractor agrees that the foregoing provisions supplement
provisions of the General Conditions. The Contractor agrees and acknowledges that
any failure on his part to adhere to the high voltage act shall
not only be a violation oflaw but shall also be a breach of contract and specific
violation of the provisions of the General Conditions which pertains to safety
precautions.
3.
Occupational Safety & Health Act:
The Contractor by signing the contract acknowledges that he is fully aware of the provisions
of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and he shall comply
therewith.
SC-l1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
documents without an amendment to the contract.
-027. AFTER HOURS INSPECTION:
If the Contractor opts to work before or after normal working hours, 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.,
Monday through Friday, or on Augusta, Georgia Legal Holidays, then the Contractor must pay for the
cost of inspection by the City of Augusta, Georgia and follow all necessary procedures listed in
"Section 15, Right-of-way Encroachment Guidelines, Part E, Outside of Normal Working Hours," of
the Augusta-Richmond County Planning Commission Development Documents dated September,
1999. If inspectors of Augusta-Richmond County are needed to work outside normal business hours,
Augusta-Richmond County needs to be notified in advance.
-028. INSTRUMENTATION. CONTROLS AND SCADA ALLOWANCE:
Included in the base bid of this project is an Allowance of $95,000.00 for the labor,
materials and equipment required to provide and install a complete Instrumentation, Controls and
SCADA system that is generally described in Section 11900 and which meets the City of Augusta
requirements. The Allowance will be for the costs of the system as installed by M.R. Systems, Inc.,
the preferred subcontractor of the City. Any fees, overhead and profit desired by the General
Contractor for coordinating this work will not be paid out of this Allowance. Instead, it shall be
included in the pay item for Lump Sum Construction.
-029. SUBMERSffiLE PUMP ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURER:
The base bid for this project includes submersible pumps as manufactured by ITT Flygt
Corporation that are in accordance with Sections 11500 and 11501. Deductive Alternate No. 1 listed
in the Bid Schedule shall be for Submersible Pumps as manufactured by Wilo EMU and which meet
the specified operating conditions. Contract award will be based on the Base Bid, and Deductive
Alternate No. 1 will only be considered after award of the contract.
-030. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:
The contractor shall provide equipment operation and maintenance manuals. Furnish
five copies of the manual bound in hardback binders or an approved equivalent. Furnish three copies
of the manual prior to the time that equipment tests are performed, and furnish the remaining manuals
before the contract is completed. Inscribe the following identification on the cover: the words
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, the name and locations of the equipment, and the
name of the Contractor. The manuals shall include the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
each subcontractor installing the equipment (if applicable), and of the local representatives for the
equipment. The manuals shall have a table of contents and be assembled to conform to the table of
contents with the tab sheets placed before instructions covering the subject. The instructions shall be
legible and easily read. The manuals shall include: installation and maintenance instructions;
lubrication schedule including type, grade, temperature range, and frequency; safety precautions,
diagrams, and illustrations; test procedures; performance data; and parts list. The parts lists for
equipment shall indicate the sources of supply, recommended spare parts, and the service organization
which is reasonably convenient to the project site. The manuals shall be complete in all respects for
equipment, accessories, and associated appurtenances provided.
SC-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION TS
INDEX TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION
TITLE
NO. OF PAGES
02110 Clearing and Grubbing 2
02160 Excavation Support Systems 2
02200 Earthwork 7
02200 APPENDIX A - GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 12
02221 Excavation and Backfilling For Pipe Lines 4
02240 Dewatering 5
02250 Temporary Bypass Pumping Systems 5
02270 Erosion, Sedimentation & Pollution Control Measures 6
02510 Graded Aggregate Base Course 1
02513 Bituminous Paving 3
02515 Concrete Pavement 3
02520 Plowable Fill 3
02525 Curbs and Gutters, Concrete 5
02713 Water Distribution System 16
02721 Storm Sewer System 4
02722 Sanitary Sewer System 16
02821 Chain Link Fencing 5
02930 Grassing - Bermuda 3
03101 Concrete Construction-Civil 5
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 11
04200 Unit Masonry 14
TS-O-l
I
I
05120 Structural Steel 8
I 05310 Steel Deck 4
I 05400 Pre-Engineered Light Gauge Steel Truss Frames 6
07190 Vapor Barrier 1
I 07195 Water Repellents 2
I 07411 Manufactured Roof Panels 6
07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 5
I 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 5
08710 Door Hardware 3
I 09900 Painting and Caulking 5
I 11200 Hydraulic Grinder 11
11300 Valves 4
I 11500 Submersible Pumps 9
I 11501 Variable Frequency Drive Panels for Submersible Pumps 10
11600 Grit Pump System 1
I 11900 Instrumentation, Controls and SCADA 4
11900 APPENDIX A - Telemetry System Bill of Material 10
I
15000 General Mechanical Provisions 1
I 16000 General 9
16005 Power Style Switchboard 7
I 16010 Lighting and Power Panelboards 2
I 16015 Fuses 1
16020 Raceways 4
I 16030 Conductors 3
I TS-0-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
16040 Outlets 2
16050 Wiring Devices & Device Plate 3
16060 Lighting Fixtures & Lamps 2
16070 Disconnect Switches 1
16080 Dry Type Transformers 1
16100 Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes and Fittings 1
16110 Grounding 4
16120 Equipment Identification 1
16180 Intrusion Alarm System 2
16190 Engine Generator Set 7
16200 Motor Control Center 5
16220 Construction Reviews Inspection and Testing 2
17000 Measurement and Payment 7
TS-0-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02110
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 - SCOPE
1.1 Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all trees, brush, stumps,
logs, grass, weeds, roots, decayed vegetable matter, posts, fences, stubs, rubbish and all other
objectionable matter resting on or protruding through the original ground surface and
occurring within the construction limits or rights-of-way of any excavation, borrow area, or
embankment.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 CLEARING: Clearing shall consist of the felling and cutting up, or the trimming of trees,
and the satisfactory disposal of the trees and other vegetation together with the down timber,
snags, brush and rubbish occurring within the areas to be cleared. Trees and other
vegetation, except such individual trees, groups of trees, and vegetation, as may be indicated
on the drawings to be left standing, and all stumps, roots and brush in the areas to be cleared
shall be cut off one foot above the original ground surface. Individual trees and groups of
trees designated to be left standing within cleared areas shall be trimmed of all branches to
such heights and in such manner as may be necessary to prevent interference with the
construction operations. All limbs and branches required to be trimmed shall be neatly cut
close to the whole of the tree or to main branches, and the cuts thus made shall be painted
with an approved tree wound paint. Individual trees, groups of trees, and other vegetation,
to be left standing, shall be thorougWy protected by barriers or by such other means as the
circumstances require. Clearing operations shall be conducted so as to prevent damage by
falling trees to trees left standing, to existing structures and installations, and to those under
construction, and so as to provide for the safety of employees and others.
2.2 GRUBBING: Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of all stumps, roots and
matted roots from the site as indicated on the drawings. In foundation areas, stumps, roots,
logs or other timber, matted roots, and other debris not suitable for foundation purposes shall
be excavated to a depth of not less than 18 inches below any subgrade, shoulder or slope.
All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of stumps
and roots, shall be refilled with suitable material and compacted to make the surface conform
to the surrounding ground surface.
2.3 DISPOSAL OF CLEARED AND GRUBBED MATERIAL: Saw logs, pulp wood, cord
wood or other merchantable timber removed incidental to clearing and grubbing shall
become the property of the Contractor and may be sold by him, provided such disposal is
otherwise in accordance with these specifications. All incombustible matter removed shall
be hauled away and deposited at locations approved by the Engineer. Combustible matter
may be burned or may be disposed of as stated above. Burning shall be done at such time
and such manner as to prevent fire from spreading and to prevent any damage to adjacent
cover and shall further be subject to all requirements of Local, State and Federal
Governments pertaining to the burning. No burning will be allowed on the site unless all
fires are kept under constant attendance by persons having equipment necessary to prevent
the spreading of fire. Such equipment shall include, at the minimum, a bulldozer or front end
CLEARING AND GRUBBING
02110-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02160
EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Submittals:
Layout drawings for excavation support system and other data prepared by, or under the
supervision of, a qualified professional engineer. System design and calculations must be
acceptable to local or federal authorities having jurisdiction.
1.2 Quality Assurance:
A. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer must be legally authorized to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located, and experienced in providing successful engineering
services for excavation support systems similar in extent to those required for this Project.
B. Supervision: Engage and assign supervision of excavation support system to a qualified
professional engineer foundation consultant.
C. Regulations: Comply with codes and ordinances of governing authorities having jurisdiction
and to the requirements of OSHA Health and Safety Standards for Excavations, 29 CPR Part
1926, or successor regulations.
1.3 Job Conditions:
A. Before starting work, verify governing dimensions and elevations. Verify condition of
adjoining properties. Take photographs to record any existing settlement or cracking of
structures, pavements, and other improvements. Prepare a list of such damages, verified by
dated photographs, and signed by Contractor and others conducting investigation.
B. Existing Utilities:
1. Protect existing active sewer, water, gas, electricity and other utility services and
structures.
11. Notify municipal agencies and service utility companies having jurisdiction. Comply
with requirements of governing authorities and agencies for protection, relocation,
removal, and discontinuing of services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 General: Provide adequate shoring and bracing materials which will support loads imposed.
Materials need not be new, but should be in serviceable condition.
EXCA V ATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS
02160-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36.
B. Steel Sheet Piles: ASTM A 328.
C. Timber Lagging: Any species, rough-out, mixed hardwood, nominal 3 inches thick, unless
otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Shoring:
A. Wherever shoring is required, locate the system to clear permanent construction and to permit
access for performing the work. Provide shoring system adequately anchored and braced to
resist earth and hydrostatic pressures.
B. Shoring systems retaining earth on which the support or stability of existing structures is
dependent must be left in place at completion of work.
3.2 Bracing:
A. Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If
necessary to move a brace, install new bracing prior to removal of original brace.
B. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or included in permanent concrete work, except
as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
C. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion of braced frames.
D. Maintain bracing until structural elements are supported by other bracing or until permanent
construction is able to withstand lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures.
E. Remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing in stages to avoid disturbance to underlying soils and
damage to structures, pavements, facilities, and utilities.
F. Repair or replace, as acceptable to Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced through
installation or removal of shoring and bracing work.
END OF SECTION
EXCAVATION SUPPORT SYSTEMS
02160-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02200
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINmONS
A. Excavation consists of the removal of material encountered to sub grade elevations and
the reuse of or disposal of materials removed.
B. Subgrade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill
immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.
C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not
available from excavations.
D. Subbase Course: The layer placed between the sub grade and base course in a paving
system or the layer placed between the sub grade and surface of a pavement or walk.
E. Base Course: The layer placed between the subbase and surface pavement in a paving
system.
F. Unauthorized excavation: The removing of materials beyond indicated sub grade
elevations or dimensions without direction by the Architect. Unauthorized excavation,
as well as remedial work directed by the Architect, shall be at the Contractor's expense.
G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs,
mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features
constructed above or below ground surface.
H. Utilities: on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for the following:
1. Filter fabric.
B. Samples of the following:
1. 12-by-12-inch sample of filter fabric.
EARTHWORK 02200-1
I
J
I
I
I
1
I
_I
I
1
I
.1
,
I
_.J
I
"..1
,
I
_..J
~
~
~
~.
~
~
II
_I
II
W
C. Test Reports: In addition to test reports required under field quality control, submit the
following:
1. Laboratory analysis of each soil material proposed for fill and backfill from on-site
and borrow sources.
2. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each soil material.
3. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of
each stratum tested.
D. Photographs of existing adjacent structures and site improvements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ a qualified independent geotechnical
engineering testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that
soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory
testing.
PART2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved
soil materials are not available from excavations.
B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW,
SP, SM, GC, SC, ML, and CL; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any
dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter.
C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups MH, CH, OL,
OR, and PT.
D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials.
E. Subbase and Base Materials: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed
gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95
percent passing a 12-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
EARTHWORK
02200- 2
I
I
1
I
I
I
.1
,
,
I
_.J
I
. j
I
_J
I
_J
I
___J
I
I
c_J
~
I
L.J
F. Bedding Material: ASTM D 2321 material conforming to Class I or Class IT
specifications.
G. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, conforming to Georgia
Department of Transportation #57 coarse aggregate.
H. Impervious Fill: Clay or sand clay mixture capable of compacting to a dense state with
permeability of less 10-6.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS
A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and
grades.
3.2 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES
A. Excavate trenches to indicated slopes, lines, depths, and invert elevations shown on the
plans in accordance with Section 02221.
3.3 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE
A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.
B. When Engineer determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue
excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.
1. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according
to the Contract provisions for changes in Work.
C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water,
or construction activities, as directed by the Architect.
3.4 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE BACKFILL
II
<..-J
A. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of filter fabric around perimeter of drainage trench or at
footing, as indicated. Place a 6-inch compacted course of drainage fill on filter fabric to
support drainage pipe. After installing and testing, encase drainage pipe in a minimum
of 6 inches of compacted drainage fill and wrap in filter fabric, overlapping edges at least
12 inches, or in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
I
I
II
'-'
B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact drainage fill over subsurface drain, in width
EARTHWORK
02200- 3
I
~
~
I
1
,
I
J
,
I
_I
,
I
,J
,
,
~
I
...J
~
~.
I
:J
II
LJ
II
w
3.5
3.6
indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer
of filter fabric, overlapping edges at least 6 inches.
C. Impervious Fill: Place and compact impervious fill material over drainage backfill to
final sub grade.
FILL
A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials,
obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. Plow
strip, or break up, sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material
will bond with existing surface.
B. When sub grade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that
required for fill, break up ground surface to depth required, pulverize, moisture-condition
or aerate soil and recompact to required density.
C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below.
1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material.
2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base materials, or satisfactory excavated
or borrow soil material.
MOISTURE CONTROL
A. Uniformly moisten or aerate sub grade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before
compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.
1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain
frost or ice.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil material that is too wet
to compact to specified density. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet
satisfactory soil material.
3.7
COMPACTION
A Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for
material compacted by heavy compacted equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose
depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.
B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations.
EARTHWORK
02200-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I"
Place backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure.
C. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the
following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557:
1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, compact the top 12 inches
below sub grade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry
density.
2. Under walkways, compact the top 6 inches below sub grade and each layer ofbackfill
or fill material at 95 percent maximum dry density.
3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact the top 6 inches below subgrade and each
layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum dry density.
3.8 GRADING
A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes.
Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevation
indicated.
1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades.
2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface
tolerances.
B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.
Finish sub grades to required elevations within the following tolerances:
1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.
2. Walks: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.
3. Pavements: Plus or minus Y2 inch.
3.9 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE
A. Under pavements and walks, place subbase course material where called for on
prepared subgrades. Place base course materials over subbases for pavements.
1. Compact subbase and base courses at optimum moisture content to required
grades, lines, cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM
D 1557 maximum dry density.
EARTHWORK 02200-5
I
I
I
I
I
.1
I
I
,,<^)
I
I
I
I
I
........~j
I
I
I
I]
~
1\
~_J
2. Shape subbase and base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades.
3. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course is 6 inches or less, place
materials in a single layer.
4. When thickness of compacted subbase or base course exceeds 6 inches, place
materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3
inches thick when compacted.
B. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase and base course to prevent
lateral movement. Construct shoulders at least 12 inches wide of acceptable soil
materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency to inspect and test each sub grade and
each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work
verify compliance with requirements.
1. Perform field in-place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method),
ASTMD 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTMD 2937 (drive cylinder method),
as applicable.
(a) Field in-place density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method
according to ASTM D 2922, provided that calibration curves are periodically
checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556.
With each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with
the moisture gages according to ASTM D 3017.
(b) When field in-place density tests are performed using nuclear methods, make
calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on
each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the
Architect.
2. Paved Areas: At sub grade and at each compacted f1l1 and backfill layer, perform at
least one field in-place density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or
building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.
3. Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in-place
density test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer that two tests along
a wall face.
4. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least
EARTHWORK 02200-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"._._J
I
11
IJ
one field in-place density test for each 150 feet or less of trench, but no fewer than
two tests.
B. When testing agency reports that sub grades, fills, or backfills are below specified density,
scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact
and retest until required density is obtained.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion.
Keep free of trash and debris.
B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially
completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent
construction operations or weather conditions.
1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architect; reshape
and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density.
C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished
surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.
1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent
work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.
3.12 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory
soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
EARTHWORK
02200-7
II
,-.}
-
I
.i
I
J
I
J
I
J
I
j
I
)
I
..J
,
I
__J
,
I
_J
I
_J
I
I
I
.......J
I
'--1
I
,.-J
I
~_J
02200 APPENDIX" A"
Report of Geotechnical Exploration
Spirit Creek Force Main Project
Richmond County, Georgia
prepared for the
Augusta-Richmond County
prepared by
GRA YES ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC.
Project No. G-051231
1220 West Wheeler Parkway, Suite F
Augusta, Georgia 30909
706-651-9922
Fax 706-651-0810
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
J
I
) .
I
.J
I
...1.
I
. J
I
_J,
I
.,J
I
,J
I
_..I
I
__.I
~.
~
~-
~
Report of Geotechnical Exploration
Spirit Creek Force Main Project
Richmond .County, Georgia
prepared for the
Augusta-Richmond County
prepared by
GRAVES ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC.
Project No. G-051231
1220 West Wheeler Parkway, Suite F
Augusta, Georgia 30909
706-651-9922
FAX 706-651-0810
II
::J
11
~J
I
I
j
I
,
I
o
I
.J
I
j
I
...;
I
J
I
-'
I
I
.,.;;
I
_oJ
I
.J
I
I
~,
I
I
I
I
GRAVES
ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC.
1220 W. Wheeler Parkway
Suite F
Augusta, GA 30909
(706) 651 -9922
February 15,2005
Augusta-Richmond County
C/o Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.c.
452 Ellis Street
P.O. Drawer 2546
Augusta, Georgia 30903
ATTENTION:
Mr. Scott Williams/Mr.Dennis We1ch
SUBJECT:
Report of Geotechnical Exploration
Spirit Creek Force Main Project
Richmond County, Georgia
Graves Engineering Project No. G-051231
Gentlemen:
Graves Engineering Services, Inc. is pleased to submit this report of our exploration services for the
proposed project. Our services were provided in accordance with our proposal no. P-04999 which was
authorized by Augusta-Richmond County purchase order on January 6, 2005. This report presents a
review of the information provided to us, a discussion of the site and subsurface conditions, and our
earthwork recommendations. The appendix contains the results of our field and laboratory testing.
Project Informadon
The project consists of the Spirit Creek Force Main sanitary sewer project in Richmond County, Georgia.
The project consists of a force main sewer line that starts from a proposed pump station off of Bennock
Mill Road and extends approximately 43,000 linear feet to the north-northwest to the treatment plant
located on Highway 56 Loop. We understand that a section of gravity sewer will also extend from the
pump station to near the intersection with Highway 56. The route is shown on preliminary plan drawings
prepared by and provided to us by Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.c.. The route had been
surveyed by Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.c. and the centerline of the easements were staked in
the field.
The route crosses several roads, entrance drives and a Seaboard Coastline Railroad. The route also
crosses Butler, Little Spirit and Spirit Creeks. The major road crossings will be bored and jacked such
that the pavement sections will remain intact. The force main is generally to be constructed within 8 to 15
feet of existing grades. The proposed pump station is planned to extend to a depth of approximately 40
to 50 feet. The pump station is anticipated to be supported by a mat foundation.
Purpose Of Exploration
The purpose of this exploration was to obtain specific subsurface data at the site and to provide earthwork
recommendations for the proposed project.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I--
I
I
I
I
I
Augusta-Richmond County
clo Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.c.
February 15, 2005
-Page 2-
Site Conditions
We conducted a site reconnaissance to observe and document surface conditions at the site. Information
gathered was used to help us interpret the subsurface data and to detect conditions w~ich could affect our
recommendations.
The main easement initially runs adjacent or parallel to Spirit Creek ?r to .Little Spirit Creek.. The ro~te
has rolling topography with approximately 50 to 60 feet of topographIc relIef. Based on ~e mformatIOn
contained on the preliminary Plan and Profile drawings, the existing ground surface elevatIons along the
route range from approximately 120 to 180 feet MSL. The route extends through several wetland a.r:eas.
Surface water was noted at numerous locations along the route and generally correspond to the locatIons
of creeks and associated wetland areas.
Most of the site is located just off roadways(Highway 56, 56 Loop and International Boulevard) or
railroad easements and these areas are generally cleared of vegetation and were covered with gravel,
grassed or had surface soils exposed. Surface soils exposed consist of a sandy organic topsoil or sands
of the coastal plain.
Intermittent portions of the route extend through areas that are moderately to heavily wooded with
hardwoods and pine. Some clearing was performed and an adverse terrain vehicle was utilized to provide
access to boring locations. Surface soils exposed consist of a sandy, loamy organic topsoil in wooded
areas.
Site Geologic Conditions
The site is located near the fall line which is the contact area of the Upper Coastal Plain Province and the
Piedmont Province. The Coastal Plain soils were deposited during inundation by the ancient oceans and
consist of random layers of fine sands and silts interbedded with lenses of clay. The Georgia Piedmont
Province is a broad plateau gently sloping from the Blue Ridge Mountains to the Coastal Plain, covering a
distance of -illJ--N-Q~imatID one hY.m:lLe..<Lmile~in_th~area._The-5oiLoymurdeILOLthis-area_iS-resictuum-______
formed by in-place weathering of the parents rocks. A typical upland soil profile consists of thin topsoil
underlain by a few feet of clayey soils that transition with increasing depth into less clayey, coarser
grained silts and sands with varying mica content. Separating the completely weathered soil overburden
from the unaltered parent rock is a transition zone of residuum with penetration resistances of more than
100 blows per foot (bpf) which is locally described as partially weathered rock(PWR). Partially
weathered rock retains much of the appearance and fabric of the parent rock formations, and may consist
of thinly interlayered very hard or dense soil and rock.
The weathering processes that formed the overburden soils and partially weathered rock were extremely
variable. Differential weathering of the rock mass has resulted in erratically varying subsurface
conditions, evidenced by abrupt changes in soil type and consistency in relatively short horizontal and
vertical distances. Although no rock outcrops were noted at the surface, depths to rock can be irregular,
and isolated boulders, discontinuous rock layers, or rock pinnacles can be present within the overburden
transition zones.
~ased on published literature, the site is underlain by Coastal Plain sediments consisting of interbedded
SIltS, sands, and clays. These soils overlay residual soils and crystalline rocks of the Piedmont.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Augusta-Richmond County
c/o Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.C.
February 15,2005
-Page 3-
Subsurface Conditions
The subsurface conditions were explored with widely spaced soil test borings drilled according to the
procedures presented in the appendix. The bo~ng ~ocations an~ depths. were se~ect.ed by Cranst?n,
Robertson & Whitehurst, P.C.. and Graves Engmeenng. The bonng locatIOns are md1cated by statIOn
number on the attached boring records. The actual field boring locations were determined by our field
crew from staked locations on the route. Boring elevations were obtained by interpolation between
contours on the drawing provided to us. The boring elevations shown in the appendix should be
considered accurate only to the degree implied by the method used.
The subsurface conditions encountered at the boring locations are shown on the Test Boring Records in
the Appendix. These Boring Records represent our interpretation of the subsurface conditions based on
the field logs, visual examination of field samples by an engineer and tests of the field samples. The lines
designating the interface between various strata on the Boring Records represent the approximate
interface location. In addition, the transition between strata may be gradual. Water levels shown on the
Boring Records represent the conditions only at the time of our exploration.
A total of 46 soil test borings were drilled along the route to depths ranging from 10 to 60 feet below the
ground surface. The soil test borings revealed a subsurface profile generally consisting of typical coastal
plain deposits of interbedded sands, silts and clays. These soils were encountered to the boring
termination depths. The surficial layer consisted of loamy and sandy, organic topsoils. The surficial layer
was generally encountered to a depths ranging from 3 to 12 inches below the ground surface.
The coastal plain soils typically consisted of sands with varying fine grained particle content(SP to SC)
interbedded with fine grained clayey silts. The sandy soils were generally loose to dense in consistency ,
with standard penetration resistance's ranged from 5 to 41 blows per foot with an average of
approximately 18. The coastal plain clayey silts were recorded to be generally soft to very hard in
consistency with standard penetration resistance's of 2 to 91 blows per foot recorded. Borings B-1, B-2,
B-3, B-7 B-45 encountered lenses of a soft, fi~e sandy, clayey si1t("muck" with layers of fiberous
organics(peat)) at depths ranging from 12 to 27 feet. Standard penetration resistance1s ranged from 2 to 9
blows per foot. This material was generally encountered very near the adjacent wetland areas.
Groundwater Conditions
Groundwater was encountered in many of the borings at depths ranging from 2.5 to over 20.0 feet at over
24-hours after drilling. In silty sands the water levels can usually be determined accurately near the time
of drilling. In fine grained soils and clayey sands, it may take several days for water levels to stabilize. In
addition, fluctuations in the groundwater level can occur due to variations in rainfall, evaporation,
construction activity, surface runoff, and other site specific factors. The highest groundwater levels are
generally encountered in early spring and the lowest in late summer.
The likelihood of groundwater in the near surface soils at some locations can be expected to increase
following periods wet weather. This is due to rain water infiltration through the upper sands at those
locations. The water can then become "perched" on top of the clayey sands and silts below.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Augusta-Richmond County
c/o Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.c.
February 15, 2005
-Page 4-
Utility Construction Considerations
The construction of the pump station will require excavations on the order of 40 to 50 .fe~t. Based on our
review of the project drawings, the force main piping is generally to be cO,nstructed w1~n 8 to 15 f~e~ of
existing grades. We have not reviewed the project drawings for the gravIty flow, S~~l1tary sewer p1pmg.
However, we understand that it will be installed to depths up to 20 feet. In addItIon, at the road and
railroad crossings, we understand that the bore and jack pits will be excavated to depths of 10 to 15 feet.
The soils encountered along the route should be amiable to excavation with normal excavation equipment
and should not interfere with boring and jacking operations. The deeper cuts are to be extended below the
groundwater level, especially near the pump station and the wetlands in the initial sections of the route.
Some of these areas are underlain by layers of relatively clean fine to coarse sands. This will likely
require wellpoint dewatering as the excavation proceeds(please see the construction water control section
of this report).
We recommend that the excavations be shored, sloped or benched as required to provide stability and a
safe work environment. For the soils encountered, we recommend that cut slopes of 2H: 1 V be utilized.
This may require a wider temporary easement at some locations. All excavations should comply with
applicable local, state and federal safety regulations including the current OSHA Excavation and Trench
Safety Standards. It is our understanding that these regulations are strictly enforced and if they are not
closely followed, the owner and contractor could be liable for substantial penalties.
Heavy construction equipment and materials removed from the excavations should not be placed within 5
to 10 feet of the top of the excavation. We understand that the bore and jack pits may be shored with the
use of driven sheetpiling. Please see the wall and retaining structure section of this report for a more
detailed discussion.
Since preliminary plans call for the pipe at several locations to be installed below the groundwater table,
we recommend that 12 to 18 inches of clean stone be utilized for pipe bedding in wet areas. Compaction
of pipe backfill at several locations may be extremely difficult due to the anticipated wet conditions. In
addition, wet clayey soils removed from the excavations will require significant drying time prior to
reutilization as fill. Therefore, construction planning should assume that significant volumes of select
stone bedding and imported initial pipe backfill will be required.
Foundation Recommendations
We anticipate that a mat foundation will be utilized to support the pump station structure. As stated
previously, the foundation is anticipated to vary in depth from 40 feet to 50 feet below existing grades.
Therefore, the slab will likely bear in either the firm to very firm sands(SW -SM). Mat foundations
bearing in this material can be designed for maximum allowable net bearing pressures of up to 3000 psf,
The ~oil parameter used in the analysis and design of mat foundations is the modulus of subgrade
reactlOn(Ks). Based on the data obtained in our exploration, we recommend a design modulus of
sub grade reaction of 300 kips per cubic foot.
The maximum net allowable bearing pressures recommended are based on our previous experience and
correlation1s made previously between standard penetration test resistance's and the performance of
foundations supported by soils similar to those at this site. We expect total settlements on the order of 1
inch and differential settlements of up to 1/2 inch.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Augusta-Richmond County
clo Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.c.
February 15,2005
-Page 5-
If possible, foundation concrete should be placed the same day that excavations are dug. If the bearing
soils are softened by surface water intrusion or exposure, the softened soils must be removed from the
foundation excavation bottom immediately prior to placement of concrete. If the excavation must remain
open overnight or if rainfall becomes imminent while the bearing soils are exposed, we recommend that a
2 to 4-inch thick "mud-mat" of "lean" (2000 psi) concrete be placed on the bearing soils before the
placement of reinforcing steel.
We recommend that the minimum widths for individual column and continuous wall footings be 24 and
16 inches, respectively. The minimum widths are recommended to provide a margin of safety against a
local or punching shear failure of the foundation soils. Exterior footings should bear at least 18 inches
below final exterior grade. The depths of interior footings should be a minimum of 12 inches below the
top of the floor slab. This embedment is necessary to provide adequate confinement of the bearing soils
and to achieve the recommended bearing pressure.
We recommend that the geotechnical engineer observe the mat area excavations immediately prior to
placing concrete. He should compare the soils exposed with those encountered in the soil test borings
and document the results. Any significant differences should be brought to the attention of the ownersl
representative along with appropriate recommendations. The foundation bearing area should be level or
suitably benched. It should also be free of loose soil, ponded water and debris prior to the inspection.
Compacted Fill Recommendations
We recommend that soils to be used as trench backfills be free of debris and have less than 2% by weight
fibrous organic material. They should have a liquid limit less than 50 and a plasticity index less than 20.
Before filling operations begin, representative samples of each proposed fill material should be collected.
The samples should be tested to determine the maximum dry density, optimum moisture content, natural
moisture content, gradation and plasticity of the soil. These tests are needed for quality control during
compaction and also to determine if the fill material is acceptable. '
We have conducted laboratory testing and visually inspected soil samples obtained from the site. We
expect that most of the sands and silts encountered in the borings are acceptable for use as compacted
backfill. The organic soils encountered predominately near the wetland areas are not be acceptable for
use as compacted fill due to organic and moisture content. In addition, as stated previously, wet
soils(especially clayey soils) removed from the excavations may require significant drying time prior to
reutilization as fill.
We recommend that all compacted fill be constructed by spreading acceptable soil in loose layers not
more than lO inches thick. The fill should be compacted in thin lifts to at least 95 percent of the Standard
Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D-698). The upper 12 inches of fill beneath pavements should be .
compacted to at least 100 percent of the Standard Proctor maximum dry density .
Th~ moistur~ content of the fill soils should be maintained within +3 and -3 percentage points of the
optImum mOIsture content as determined from the Proctor compaction test. This provision may require
the contractor to dry the soils during periods of wet weather or wet the soils during the hot summer
months.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Augusta-Richmond County
clo Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.C.
February 15, 2005
- Page 6-
We recommend that the backfill placement and compaction be observed and documented by the
geotechnical engineer. Significant deviations, either from specifications or good practice, should be
brought to the attention of the owner's representative, along with appropriate recommendations. At least
one field density test should be performed for every 100 to 200 linear feet of trench for each lift.
Retaining Structures
We understand that sheetpiling may be utilized as shoring for the excavations for the bore and jack pits.
The sheetpiling will act as a below grade walls when the pits are excavated. These sheetpile walls must be
designed to resist soil pressures imposed on them. Walls which are permitted to rotate at the top, such as
sheetpiling walls, should be designed to resist "active" lateral earth pressure. Typically, a top rotation of
about 1 inch per 10 feet height of wall is sufficient to develop active pressure conditions in soils similar to
those encountered at the site. The pump station walls should be designed to resist "at rest" lateral earth
pressure since the top of the walls will be braced from movement.
To account for the "at rest and active" lateral pressures of retained earth, we recommend that the
temporary retaining system design assume that the soils behind the bracing system will apply a triangular
stress distribution based on the excavation depth and the following strength parameters for the natural
soils at this site:
ANGLE of INTERNAL
MATERIAL UNIT WEIGHT(PCF) FRICTION(Degrees) COHESION(PSF)
Firm SW -SM 115 33 0
Very Loose Sp.SM 95 27 0
Loose SP-SM 100 29 0
Very Loose SM 95 25 0
Loose SM 100 27 0
Firm SM 110 29 0
Very Firm SM 115 30 0
Dense SM 120 32 0
Loose SC 105 28 150
Firm SC 115 30 300
Very Firm SC 120 32 700
V.Soft Clayey ML 85 10 100
Soft Clayey ML 90 11 300
Firm Clayey ML 95 12 800
Stiff Clayey ML 100 13 1500
Very Stiff Clayey ML 105 15 3000
The compacted mass unit weight of the soil'should be used with the above soil parameters to calculate the
corresponding earth pressure coefficients and lateral earth pressures, The above values are actual
anticipated values and do not contain any safety factors. If dewatering systems are not provided, then the
walls should be designed to resist the full hydrostatic head in addition to the lateral earth pressures in
areas below the water table.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Augusta-Richmond County
clo Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.C.
February 15,2005
-Page 7-
The lateral pressures developed by surcharge loads from slopes, heavy construction equip~ent, stored
material, stockpiled soils, etc. near the top of the excavation must be added to the lateral SOlI stresses to
determine the horizontal loads which must be resisted. In addition, transient loads imposed on the walls
by construction equipment during construction should be considered. Excessively heavy equipment (that
could impose temporary excessive pressures or long term excessive residual pressures against the
constructed walls) should not be allowed within about 5 feet (horizontally) of the walls.
Construction Water Control
We expect that groundwater control will be required for portions of the alignment due to the presence of
shallow groundwater. Since the excavations will extend several feet below the groundwater level, we
anticipate that a wellpoint dewatering system will be required at some locations. Wellpoints are small
diameter wells that are jetted or driven into the soil(at 3 to 10 foot spacings depending upon soil type) and
are placed in straight lines along the area to be drained. They are connected at the top to a horizontal
suction pipe called a header and then connected to pump specifically designed for dewatering work. The
wellpoints may require staging at various levels as the excavation proceeds to provide the required
drawdown of the water table. We recommend that the design of the dewatering system be performed by
a specialty contractor that is experienced with similar conditions. We also recommend that pumping
continue until the trench is completely backfilled such that backfilling can be completed in as dry a '
condition possible.
Basis For Recommendations
The recommendations provided are based in part on project information provided to us and they only
apply to the specific project and site discussed in this report. If the project information section in this
report contains incorrect information or if additional information is available, you should convey the
correct or additional information to us and retain us to review our recommendations. We can then modify
our recommendations if they are inappropriate for the proposed project.
Regardless of the thoroughness of a geotechnical exploration, there is always a possibility that conditions
between borings will be different from those at specific boring locations and that conditions will not be as
anticipated by the designers or contractors. In addition, the construction process ,may itself alter soil
conditions. Therefore, experienced geotechnical personnel should observe and document the construction
procedures used and the conditions encountered. Unanticipated conditions and inadequate procedures
should be reported to the design team along with timely recommendations to solve the problems created.
We recommend that the owner retain Graves Engineering to provide this service based upon our
familiarity with the project, the subsurface conditions and the intent of the recommendations.
We recommend that this complete report be provided to the various design team members, the contractors
and the project owner. Potential contractors should be informed of this report in the "instructions to
bidders" section of the bid documents.
We wish to remind you that our exploration services include storing the samples collected and making
them available for inspection for 60 days. The samples are then discarded unless you request otherwise.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Augusta-Richmond County
clo Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.C.
February 15,2005
-Page 8-
We will be happy to discuss our recommendations with you and would welcome the opportunity to
provide the additional studies or services necessary to complete this project. We appreciate the
opportunity to provide our professional services and look forward to working with you on the remainder
of this project and on future projects. If you have any questions concerning this report or wish to have
further discussions, please contact us at (706) 651-9922.
Respectfully Submitted, .. .....",~r;;.:i ',. . ..
GRA V ENGINEE RIN~'S~. . "tcP.~'1JNC........
if '-~G\S'ft.::r~J ','
ff ~ Ci:"". .',- .~fe.\~\
/ /I ~ t! {, i PR~~~~;"'.'Al.Z..~.'...'.i;.:.:..n
fi,1':.~ J1;~ II
'.. ...., ~ "0. ,~.:_;;.
ichard W. Swanson, P.E... J41QIN~'i ',;~:/I
Principa! Eng,ineer 1 Preside ,;. "" ~;~ '. ..,,:fIr!
Ga. RegIstratIOn No. 22223 ~.::::::::::::.~:._~:;;;;.,r
Attachments: Test Boring Records
Field and Laboratory Testing Procedures
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
BORING NO. B-1
SOIL TEST BORING RECORD
PROJECT: Spirit Creek Force Main
LOCATION: Northwest Quadrant of Pump Station - Richmond Ca., Georgia
GRAVES PROJECT NO.: G-051231
I GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: 132' I DRILLING METHOD: 2.25" J.D. AUGER
Page 1 of 2
DATE COMPLETED: 12/27/04
~
J:
f-
a.
UJ
o
i~
<!l
U.S.C.S. Soil Classification
I~
:.:<.::;:.::;:.:: 0-3" Topsoil
::?::?::?::::: Firm, Brown-Tan, Silty Fine to Medium
.::::~::?::?::::: Sand(SM)
...,'.,..: -------
::::"::'-::":::::"::'-::. Very Firm, Gray-Tan, Clayey, Silty Fine to
'::'-::"::':::"::':::"::':: Medium Sand(SC)
05 -,:.):::.::.::::.::.::::.:::
Very Stiff to Hard, Gray-Tan-Brown, Fine
Sandy, Clayey Silt(ML)
10
.::::?::?;?:: Firm, Tan-Brown-Gray, Slightly Silty Fine to
::<.:<::;:.:: Coarse Sand(SW -SM) with thin clayey silt
.:.:::-:.:::,:.:::.:.; seams
..........
15 - ::::}::}:::}::~ Note: 7.3% Passing 200 Sieve on Sample #5.
.:.:.:':.:.:':.:.:.:.:.
..........
~~~ r~~~ ri 1~~~~~
.....
" " Soft to Very Soft, Dark Grey, Fine to Medium
"" S .
, , , , andy, Clayey SIlt(ML)
30-""
, , , ,
, , " Note: 78.1 % Passing 200 Sieve on Sample #9.
~ ~ ~ ~ LL=43, PI=15 on Sample #9.
""
""
""
""
3 5 - " , ,
""
""
:::::~:::::;::(:::: Fi:m to V~ry Firm, Orange-Brown-Gray-Tan,
.:.::::.::::.::::.: SlIghtly SIlty Fine to Coarse Sand(SW-SM)
.~{%~:?~:[:{ with gravel
40
~~
GRAVES
avGlNEERING SERVICES ~
Standard Penetration Resistances
w
_ ::l
z~
>
10 20 30 40 50 80 70 80 90
55
55
55
55
55
S5
II
55
..
/
./
55
ss .Il
.. I \1\.
.
\
.~
.J
/
18
29
~
34
27
18
14
19
04
02
17
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GRAVES
SOIL TEST BORING RECORD
ENGINEERING SERVICES
BORING NO. B-IA
Page 2 of 2
PROJECT: Spirit Creek Force Main
LOCATION: Northwest Quadrant of Pump Station - Richmond Co., Georgia
GRAVES PROJECT NO.: G-051231
I GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: 132' I DRILLING METHOD: 2.25" LD. AUGER
DATE COMPLETED: 12/27/04
',:,):;:,:,-::,:: Firm to Very Firm, Orange-Brown-Gray-Tan,
.:.:::-:.:::-:.:::-:.:' Slightly Silty Fine to Coarse Sand(SW -SM)
.::;:.:<.:<.:: with gravel
':. 'o'. ':.'o'
...........
':. .... ....',
..........
.:. .:. ':."
..........
.... .:......:
45 - .::::?::?~?::
...........
illl
50 - Jiliii
\f..
J:
b:
w
D
i~
(!)
.... ':. ':. ,,'
..........
':. ':. ':.':
..........
':. ':. ..... 0,
55 - :.:.<:<.:<.::
.:..:..:....
..........
':. ':. ':.',
..........
':. ':. ':.':
..........
.::::~:::::~:::~(::
}: ~ ::::: ~ :::~ ~ :::::
60
65-
70 -
75-
80
U.S.C.S. Soil Classification
I~ ~~ w
Standard Penetration Resistances . ::l
z~
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
\
55 .. 21
,
55
~
/
/
..
13
29
55
55
10
12
Boring Terminated At 60.0 Feet.
Groundwater encountered at 18.5 feet at the
time of boring and at 17.0 feet at several days
after boring.
SS - Split Spoon Sample
LL - Liquid limit
PI - Plasticity Index
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02221
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LINES
PART 1 - SCOPE
1.1 This section covers all excavation, trenching and backfilling for pipe lines, complete.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 Existing Improvements:
A. The Contractor shall maintain in operating condition and protect from damage all
existing improvements including utilities, roads, streets, sidewalks, drives, power and
telephone lines, gas lines, water lines, sewers, gutters and other drains encountered,
and repair to the satisfaction of the utility owner and the Engineer any aerial, surface
or subsurface improvements damaged during the course of the work. Where and if
shown on the plans, the locations and existence or nonexistence of underground
utilities are not guaranteed. The Contractor shall contact the various utility
companies to determine and/or verify such information prior to proceeding with the
work. He shall make reasonable and satisfactory provisions for the maintenance of
traffic on streets, drives, walkways and at street crossings and if necessary to provide
temporary walkways and bridges for crossing of the open trench as directed. Work
shall not commence within Augusta Right-of-Way until a Right-of-Way
Encroachment Permit is obtained from the Public Works Department.
2.2 EXCA V A TION:
A. All excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered shall be
performed to the depths indicated on the drawings or as specified herein. Excavation
shall be made by the open cut method except as otherwise specified or shown on the
drawings. Excavation methods shall comply with codes and ordinances of governing
authorities having jurisdiction and to the requirements of OSHA Health and Safety
Standards for Excavations, 29 CPR Part 1926, or successor regulations.
B. All excavated materials not required for fill or backfill shall be removed and wasted
as directed. The banks of shallow trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as
practicable and where required shall be properly sheeted and braced. Except where
otherwise indicated, trench bottoms shall be not less than 12 inches wider than the
outside diameter of the pipe to be laid therein, and shall be excavated true to line, so
that a clear space of not less than 6 inches in width is provided on each side of the
pipe. The bottom of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing
and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its
entire length, except for portions of the pipe sections where it is necessary to
excavate for bell holes and for the proper sealing of pipe joints. Bell holes shall be
dug after the trench bottom has been graded; Bell holes shall be excavated only to
an extent sufficient to permit accurate work in the making of the joints and to insure
that the pipe, for a maximum of its length will rest upon the prepared bottom of the
trench. Depressions for joints other than mechanical shall be made in accordance
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LINES
02221-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
with the recommendations of the joint manufacturers for the particular joint used.
Excavation for structures and other accessories shall be sufficient to leave at least 12
inches in the clear between their outer surfaces and the embankment or timber which
may be used to hold the bank and protect them. Where damage is liable to result
from withdrawing sheeting, the sheeting will be ordered to be l,eft in place. Except
at locations where excavation of rock from the bottoms of trenches is required, care
shall be taken not to excavate below the depths indicated. Where rock excavation is
required, the rock shall be excavated to a minimum overdepth of 4 inches below the
normal required trench depth. The overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench
excavation shall be backfilled with loose, moist earth, thoroughly tamped. Rock is
defined as materials which are so hard or cemented that the excavation of such
material requires blasting. The excavation shall proceed in a conventional manner
with satisfactory effort made to remove hard materials before the Engineer makes a
determination of need for blasting. Predrilling and blasting will be allowed, if the
Contractor can provide evidence for the Engineer's review that boring logs can and
will show that the material can or cannot be excavated. Evidence will be provided
for the Engineer's review and approval before predrilling and blasting is undertaken.
The excavation and removal. of isolated boulders or rock fragments larger than one
cubic yard in volume encountered in materials of common excavation shall be
classified as rock excavation. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is
incapable of properly supporting the pipe, as determined by the Engineer or indicated
on the drawings,.is encountered in the trench bottom, such soil shall be removed to
a depth required for the lengths designated by the Engineer, and the trench backfilled
to trench bottom grade, as herein specified, with coarse sand, fine gravel, or other
suitable material. Backfill with earth under structures will not be permitted and any
unauthorized excess excavation below the levels indicated for the foundation of such
structures shall be filled with sand, gravel, or concrete, as directed.
1. GRADING AND STACKING: All grading in the vicinity of trench excavation
shall be controlled to prevent surface ground water from flowing into the
trenches. Any water accumulated in the trenches shall be removed by pumping
or by other approved methods. During excavation, material suitable for
backfilling shall be stored in an orderly manner at a distance from the edges of
trenches to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave-ins. Material unsuitable
for backfilling, as determined by the Engineer, shall be removed from the job site
and disposed of by the Contractor in a manner as approved by the Engineer.
2. SHORING AND SHEETING: All shoring, sheeting, and bracing required to
perform and protect the excavation and to safeguard employees and the public
shall be performed. The failure of the Engineer to direct the placing of such
protection shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for damage
resulting from its omission.
(a) Whenever sheeting is driven to a depth below the elevation of the top of the
pipe, that portion of the sheeting below the elevation of the top of the pipe
shall not be disturbed or removed. Sheeting left in place shall be cut off not
less than 1 foot below finished grade. No sheeting shall be removed until
the excavation is substantially backfilled as hereinafter specified.
3. WATER REMOVAL: Where water is encountered, it shall be prevented from
accumulating in excavated areas by pumping, well-pointing and pumping, or by
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LINES
02221-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
other means approved by the Engineer as to capacity and effectiveness. Water
removed from excavations shall be discharged at points where it will not cause
injury to public or private property, or the work completed or in progress. Under
no circumstances shall trench bottoms be prepared, pipes laid, or appurtenances
installed in water. Water shall not be allowed to rise in unbackfilled excavations
after pipe or structures have been placed.
4. BLASTING: Explosives are to used only within legal limitations. Before
explosives are used, all necessary permits for this work shall be secured and all
precautions taken in the blasting operations to prevent damage to private or
public property or to persons. The Contractor shall assume full liability for any
damage that may occur during the use of explosives. No blast shall be set off
within 50 feet of pipe already laid in the trench.
5. TREE PROTECTION: Care shall be exercised to protect the roots of trees to be
left standing. Within the branch spread of the tree, trench shall be opened only
when the work can be installed immediately. Injured roots shall be pruned
cleanly and backfill placed as soon as possible.
2.3 BACKFILLING:
A. Trenches and other excavations shall not be backfilled until all required tests are
performed and the work has been approved by the Engineer. The trenches shall be
carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling consisting
of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials.
No material shall be used for backfilling that contains mulch, other unstable
materials, stones, blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, or other hard materials
having any dimension greater than 4 inches; or large clods of earth, debris, frozen
earth or earth with an exceptionally high void content. Backfilling within Augusta
Right-of-Way shall conform to Georgia Department of Transportation and City of
Augusta Specification.
~.
B. For backfill up to a level 1 foot over the top of pressure pipelines and 2 feet above
the top of gravity pipelines, only selected materials shall be used. Select materials
shall be finely divided material free from debris, organic material and stone, and may
be suitable job excavated material or shall be provided by the Contractor from other
sources. The backfill shall be placed in uniform layers not exceeding 8 inches in
depth. Each layer shall be moistened and carefully and uniformly tamped with
mechanical tampers or other suitable tools. Each layer shall be placed and tamped
under the pipe haunches with care and thoroughness so as to eliminate the possibility
of voids or lateral displacement.
C. The remainder of the backfill material shall then be placed and compacted above the
level specified above. In areas not subject to traffic, the backfill shall be placed in
12 inch layers and each layer moistened and compacted to a density approximating
that of the surrounding earth. Under roadways, driveways, paved areas, parking lots,
along roadway shoulders and other areas subject to traffic, the backfill shall be placed
in 6 inch layers and each layer moistened and compacted to density at least equal to
that of the surrounding earth so that traffic can be resumed immediately after
backfilling is completed. Any trenches which are improperly backfilled, or where
settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction,
then refilled and compacted with the surface restored to the required grade
compaction. Along all portions of the trenches not located in roadways, the ground
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LINES
02221-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over the trenches left
in a neat condition satisfactory to the Engineer.
D. Sheeting not specified to be ,left in place shall be removed as the backfilling
progresses. Sheeting shall be removed in such a manner as to avoid caving of the
trench. Voids left by the removal of sheeting and shoring shall be carefully filled
and compacted. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, damage is liable to result
from withdrawing sheeting, the sheeting will be ordered to be left in place.
2.4 BORING AND JACKING:
A. Where required by the drawings, the pipeline will be installed in a steel casing,
placed by boring and jacking. Where boring is required under highways, the
materials and workmanship will be in accordance with the standards of the State
Highway Department or local authority. Boring and jacking under railroads will be
governed by the latest A.R.E.A. standards and those of the railroad involved. The
steel casing shall be in accordance with ASTM A252 to the thicknesses shown on the
drawings.
2.5 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT:
A. Where necessary existing pavements shall be removed and replaced, the applicable
standards ofthe State Highway Department or local authority shall govern this work.
Joints shall be sawed, unless joints equally uniform in the opinion of the Engineer
result from other means. All pavement repairs shall be in accordance with the details
in the plans. Where the parent pavement is concrete, the slab surface shall be
smoothly finished flush with the surrounding pavements.
END OF SECTION
EXCA V A TING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LINES
02221-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02240
DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes construction dewatering.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 02160 "Excavation Support Systems."
2. Section 02200 "Earthwork"
3. Section 02200 "Appendix A - Geotechnical Report"
4. Section 02221 "Excavation and Backfilling for Pipe Lines"
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering
system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water flow into excavations and
permit construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.
1. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and
constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to sub grades and
permanent structures is prevented.
2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.
3. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation.
4. Remove dewatering system if no longer needed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings for Information: For major dewatering system, if needed. Show arrangement,
locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of headers and discharge lines; and means
of discharge and disposal of water.
DEWATERING
02240 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring
performance of dewatering system.
2. Include a written report outlining control procedures to be adopted if dewatering
problems arise.
3. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
B. Qualification Data: For installer and professional engineer for major dewatering system.
C. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining
construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by
dewatering operations.
D. Record drawings at Project closeout identifying and locating capped utilities and other
subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions performed during dewatering.
1. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points.
E. Field Test Reports: Before starting excavation, submit test results and computations
demonstrating that dewatering system is capable of meeting performance requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Augusta, Georgia requirements for erosion control
with regard to water disposal.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for major
dewatering system, if needed.
1.6 PROJECT CONDmONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated.
B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is
available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of
geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results
of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for
interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.
1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for
dewatering.
2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in the Project Manual.
DEWATERING
02240 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer
or land surveyor, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly
identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.
1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of
surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify
Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident
in adjacent construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused
by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
dewatering operations.
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations,
from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area.
2. Protect sub grades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and
other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and Augusta, Georgia Traffic Department. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with
pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves,
appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls where such system is needed to
control water.
B. Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water
to specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have
DEW ATERING
02240 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
been constructed and fill materials have been placed, or until dewatering is no longer
required.
C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control. ground water to permit excavation,
construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install
sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of
foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.
1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, sub grade
softening, and slope instability.
D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations,
drains, sewers, and other excavations.
1. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below surface of
excavation.
E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public
health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water
in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and
other flow-control devices as needed.
F. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to
maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails.
If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering
system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner.
1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or
fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below
overlying construction.
G. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.
3.3 OBSERVATION WELLS
A. Provide, take measurements, and maintain at least the minimum number of observation
wells or piezometers indicated and additional observation wells as may be required to
provide reliable information as the effectiveness of dewatering system.
B. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in
observation wells.
C. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or
destroyed. Suspend construction activities in areas where observation wells are not
functioning properly until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from
observation-well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly.
DEWATERING
02240 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02250
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. Under this item the Contractor is required to furnish all materials, labor, equipment,
power, maintenance, etc. to implement a temporary pumping system for the purpose
of diverting the existing flow around the work area for the duration of the project.
B. The design, installation and operation of the temporary pumping system shall be the
Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor shall employ the services of a vendor who
can demonstrate to the engineer that he specializes in the design and operation of
temporary bypass pumping systems. The vendor shall provide at least five (5)
references of projects of a similar size and complexity as this project performed by
his firm within the past three years. The bypass system shall meet the requirements of
all codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING BIDS:
A. The Contractor shall prepare with the vendor a specific, detailed description of
the proposed pumping system and submit it and the vendor's references with his bid
proposal. Bid proposals without an acceptable detailed plan for the temporary bypass
pumping system shall be rejected.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed plans and descriptions outlining all
provisions and precautions to be taken by the Contractor regarding the handling of
existing wastewater flows. This plan must be specific and complete, including
such items as schedules, locations, elevations, capacities of equipment, materials and all
other incidental items necessary and/or required to insure proper protection of the
facilities, including protection of the access and bypass pumping locations from
damage due to the discharge flows, and compliance with the requirements and
permit conditions specified in these Contract Documents. No construction shall begin
until all provisions and requirements have been reviewed by the Engineer.
C. The plan shall include but not limited to details of the following:
1. Staging areas for pumps;
2. Sewer plugging method and types of plugs;
3. Number, size, material, location and method of installation of suction piping;
4. Number, size, material, method of installation and location of installation of discharge
p1pmg;
5. Bypass pump sizes, capacity, number of each size to be on site and power
requirements;
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEMS
02250-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. Calculations of static lift, friction losses, and flow velocity (pump curves showing
pump operating range shall be submitted);
7. Standby power generator size, location;
8. Downstream discharge plan;
9. Method of protecting discharge manholes or structures from erosion and damage;
10. Thrust and restraint block sizes and locations;
11. Sections showing suction and discharge pipe depth, embedment, select fill and special
backfill;
12. Method of noise control for each pump and/or generator;
13. Any temporary pipe supports and anchoring required;
14. Design plans and computation for access to bypass pumping locations indicated on the
drawings;
15. Calculations for selection of bypass pumping pipe size;
16. Schedule for installation of and maintenance of bypass pumping lines;
17. Plan indicating selection location of bypass pumping line locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT:
A. All pumps used shall be fully automatic self-priming units that do not require the use of
footvalves or vacuum pumps in the priming system. The pumps may be electric or diesel
powered. All pumps used must be constructed to allow dry running for long periods of
time to accommodate the cyclical nature of effluent flows.
B. The Contractor shall provide the necessary stoplstart controls for each pump.
C. The Contractor shall include one stand-by pump of each size to be maintained on site.
Back-up pumps shall be on-line, isolated from the primary system by a valve.
D. Discharge Piping - In order to prevent the accidental spillage of flows all discharge
systems shall be temporarily constructed of rigid pipe with positive, restrained joints.
Under no circumstances will aluminum "irrigation" type piping or glued PVC pipe be
allowed. Discharge hose will only be allowed in short sections and by specific permission
from the engineer.
Allowable piping materials will be Godwin "QD" Steel Pipe (Godwin Pumps of America,
Inc.) Or fused, high-density polyethylene pipe as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe,Inc.
or equal.
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. Design Requirements:
1. Bypass pumping systems shall have sufficient capacity to pump a peak flow of
mgd. The Contractor shall provide all pipeline plugs, pumps of adequate size to
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEMS
02250- 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
handle peak flow, and temporary discharge piping to ensure that the total flow of
the main can be safely diverted around the section to be repaired. Bypass pumping
system will be required to be operated 24 hours per day.
2. The Contractor shall have adequate standby equipment available and ready for
immediate operation and use in the event of an emergency or breakdown. One
standby pump for each size pump utilized shall be installed at the mainline flow
bypassing locations, ready for use in the event of primary pump failure.
3. Bypass pumping system shall be capable of bypassing the flow around the work area
and of releasing any amount of flow up to full available flow into the work area as
necessary for satisfactory performances of work.
4. The Contractor shall make all arrangements for bypass pumping during the time
when the main is shut down for any reason. System must overcome any existing
force main pressure on discharge.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. It is essential to the operation of the existing sewerage system that there be no
interruption in the flow of sewage throughout the duration of the project. To this
end, the Contractor shall provide,. maintain and operate all temporary facilities
such as dams, plugs, pumping equipment (both primary and back-up units as
required), conduits, all necessary power, and all other labor and equipment
necessary to intercept the sewage flow before it reaches the point where it would
interfere with his work, carry it past his work and return it to the existing sewer
downstream of his work.
2. The design, installation and operation of the temporary pumping system shall be the
Contractor's responsibility. The bypass system shall meet the requirements of all
codes and regulatory agencies having jurisdiction.
3. The Contractor shall provide all necessary means to safely convey the sewage past
the work area. The Contractor will not be permitted to stop or impede the main
flows under any circumstances.
4. The Contractor shall maintain sewer flow around the work area in a manner that will
not cause surcharging of sewers, damage to sewers and that will protect public and
private property from damage and flooding.
5. The Contractor shall protect water resources wetlands and other natural resources.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND MAINTENANCE:
A. Test:
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEMS
02250- 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
3.3
1. The Contractor shall perform leakage and pressure tests of the bypass pumping
discharge piping using clean water prior to actual operation. The engineer will be
given 24 hours notice prior to testing.
B. Inspection:
1. Contractor shall inspect bypass pumping system every two hours to ensure that the
system is working correctly.
C. Maintenance Service:
1. The Contractor shall insure that the temporary pumping system is properly
maintained and a responsible operator shall be on hand at all times when pumps are
operating.
D. Extra Materials:
1. Spare parts for pumps and piping shall be kept on site as required.
2. Adequate hoisting equipment for each pump and accessories shall be maintained on
the site.
PREPARATION
A. Precautions
1. Contractor is responsible for locating any existing utilities in the area the Contractor
selects to locate the bypass pipelines. The Contractor shall locate his bypass
pipelines to minimize any disturbance to existing utilities and shall obtain approval
of the pipeline locations from the City and the Engineer. All costs associated with
relocating utilities and obtaining all approvals shall be paid by the Contractor.
2. During all bypass pumping operation, the Contractor shall protect the Pumping
Station and main and all local sewer lines from damage inflicted by any equipment.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all physical damage to the Pumping Station
and main and all local sewer lines caused by human or mechanical failure.
INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
A. The Contractor shall remove manhole sections or make connections to the existing
sewer and construct temporary bypass pumping structures only at the access location
indicated on the Drawings and as may be required to provide adequate suction conduit.
B. Plugging or blocking
plugging device. When
and acceptance or work,
slowly return to normal
disturbances downstream.
of sewage flows shall incorporate primary and secondary
plugging or blocking is no longer needed for performance
it is to be removed in a manner that permits the sewage flow to
without surge, to prevent surcharging or causing other major
TEMPORARYBYPASS PUMPING SYSTEMS
02250-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. When working inside manhole or force main, the Contractor shall exercise caution and
comply with OSHA requirements when working in the presence of sewer gases,
combustible oxygen-deficient atmospheres, and confined spaces.
D. The installation of the bypass pipelines is prohibited in all saltmarsh/wetland areas. The
pipeline must be located off streets and sidewalks and on shoulders of the roads. When the
bypass pipeline crosses local streets and private driveways, the contractor must place the
bypass pipelines in trenches and cover with temporary pavement. Upon completion of the
bypass pumping operations, and after the receipt of written permission from the engineer, the
Contractor shall remove all the piping, restore all property to pre-construction condition and
restore all pavement. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining any approvals for
placement of the temporary pipeline within public ways from the City.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING SYSTEMS
02250-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
! I
I
i I
I
I
I
I
I
II
I
!
I
SECTION 02270
EROSION, SEDIMENTATION & POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
PART 1 - GENERAL:
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers erosion, sedimentation and storm water pollution control
measures as shown on the plan or required on the job and are intended to comply
with the requirements of the Georgia Environmental Protection Division's General
Permit No. GAR 100002, latest edition. For the purpose of this prqiect and as
referenced in the General Permit, the Owner and the Contractor are considered the
"Primary Permittee," and the Contractor and all his subcontractors shall be
considered the "Operator."
B. The measures shown on the plans and specified herein are minimum requirements
and may be augmented by the Engineer if positive control is not established for storm
magnitudes up to and including a 25 year rainfall event. These specifications and the
corresponding plans do not, in any way, relieve the Contractor of any obligations
with respect to permits for wetlands, storm water, stream buffers, flood plains or any
other local, state or federal requirements.
1.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE:
A. The construction schedule is as shown on the Erosion, Sedimentation and Pollution
Control Plan.
PART 2 - DEFINmONS:
2.1 All terms used in this section shall be interpreted in accordance with the definitions set forth
in the General Permit, some of which are restated as follows:
A. "Best Management Practices (BMP' s)" means schedule of activities, prohibitions of
practices, maintenance procedures and other management practices to prevent or reduce the
pollution of waters of the state. BMP's also include treatment requirements, operating
procedures and practices to control site runoff, spillage or leaks, sludge or waste disposal or
drainage from raw material storage.
B. "Buffer" means the area ofland immediately adjacent to the banks of state waters in
its natural state of vegetation, which facilitates the protection of water quality and
aquatic habitat.
C. "Construction Activity" means the disturbance of soils associated with clearing,
grading, excavating, filling of land or other similar activities which may result in soil
eroSIOn.
D. "Final Stabilization" means that all soil disturbing activities on the site have been
completed and that unpaved areas have a minimum of 95% uniform coverage by
EROSION, SEDIMENTATION & POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
02270-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
permanent vegetation or equivalent permanent stabilization measures such as riprap,
gabions or permanent geotextileshave been employed.
E. "Grading" means altering ground surfaces to specified elevations, dimensions and/or
slopes; this includes stripping, cutting, filling, stockpiling and shaping or any
combination thereof.
F. "Qualified Personnel" means a person who has successfully completed an erosion
and sediment control short course or an equivalent course approved by the
Environmental Protection Division (EPD) and the State Soil and Water Conservation
Commission.
G. "Waters of the State" means any and all rivers, streams, creeks branches, lakes,
reservoirs, ponds, drainage systems, springs wells, wetlands and all other bodies of
surface or subsurface water, natural or artificial, lying within or forming a part of the
boundaries of the State which are not entirely confined and retained completely upon
the property of a single individual, partnership or corporation.
PART 3 - GENERAL PROCEDURES:
3.1 The Contractor shall utilize, at a minimum, Best Management Practices, including sound
construction practices to prevent and minimize erosion and resultant sedimentation, which
are consistent with and no less stringent than those practices contained in the "Manual for
Erosion and Sediment Control in Georgia," published by the State Soil and Water
Conservation Commission as of January 1 of the year in which the land disturbing activity
was permitted, as well as the following:
A. Stripping of vegetation, grading and other development activities shall be conducted
in such a manner as to minimize erosion. Earth areas which are not to be paved shall
be grassed at the earliest possible time during the construction phase, so as to
minimize exposure to rainfall and run-off.
B. Unnecessary cut and fill operations shall be kept to a minimum, except that
temporary berms, wherever possible, should be constructed at the end of each day of
grading, in order to contain sediment and slow down erosion, should rainfall occur
during the night.. Berms shall also be constructed, where needed, to prevent sediment
from being transported onto areas outside the actual construction limits.
C. Whenever feasible, existing natural vegetation shall be retained, protected and
supplemented.
D. Disturbed areas and the duration of exposure to erosive elements shall be kept to a
practicable minimum.
. E. Temporary vegetation and/or mulching shall be employed to protect exposed critical
areas during development.
F. Permanent vegetation and structural erosion control measures shall be installed as
soon as practicable.
EROSION, SEDIMENTATION & POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
02270-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. To the extent necessary, sediment in run-off water shall be trapped by the use of
debris basins, silt traps, silt barriers, or similar measures until the disturbed area is
stabilized.
H. Adequate provisions shall be provided to minimize damage from surface water to the
cut face of excavations and the sloping surfaces of fills.
I. Cuts and fills shall not endanger adjoining property.
J. Fills shall not encroach upon natural water courses or constructed channels in a
manner so as to adversely affect other property owners.
K. Construction equipment shall cross flowing streams by means of bridges or culverts,
except when such methods are not feasible, provided in any case that such crossings
shall be kept to a minimum and provided that the appropriate stream buffer variances
and wetlands approvals have been obtained from the Environmental Protection
Division (EPD) and the Corps of Engineers, respectively.
L. Should the specified erosion, sedimentation and pollution control measures prove to
be inadequate, additional measures as directed by Engineer shall be provided for
treatment or control of any source of sediments. Additional adequate sedimentation
control facilities to retain sediments on site or to preclude sedimentation of adjacent
waters shall be implemented.
M. Except when a prior variance has been obtained from EPD or where a drainage
structure must be constructed with adequate erosion control measures, no
construction activities shall be conducted within a 25 foot buffer along the tops of
banks on all state waters nor within a 50 foot buffer along the tops of banks on all
state waters classified as "trout streams." If required for construction purposes, a
buffer variance will be applied for by the Owner.
N. Whenever possible, proposed storm water piping systems and detention ponds shall
be constructed prior to other earth disturbing operations. The storm. water piping and
detention system shall then be used as a means to control erosion and sediment on
the site.
O. Sediment basins of the temporary nature shall be constructed as shown on plans and
as required to retain sediment on the site. All temporary sediment basins shall be
maintained in accordance with the "Manual for Erosion and Sediment Control in
Georgia," latest edition and then removed when final stabilization is attained.
P. Where erosion due to wind is likely to be of concern, trees or groups of trees and
bushes should be left standing, wherever possible, to serve as windbreaks.
PART 4 - ELEMENTS OF THE PLAN:
4.1 The minimum requirements for the prevention of erosion and sedimentation for this site are
depicted on the plans and specified herein. The elements of the plan are discussed as
follows, and are listed in chronological order, as far as is practical. The construction
activities should proceed in the order listed.
EROSION, SEDIMENTATION & POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
02270-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Remove all marketable timber from the limits of construction, rights-of-way, utility
easements, designated fill areas, and other areas to be cleared.
B. Begin clearing and grubbing operations only after silt barriers are installed.
Immediately after the area has been cleared for their placement, install dams, berms
and all other remaining erosion and sedimentation control measures as shown on the
drawings and specified herein. Care shall be taken not to clear and grub beyond the
construction limit.
C. Contractor shall notify Engineer within 24 hours after the installation of the initial
soil erosion control measures so that the Engineer may inspect the measures in
accordance with the EPD General Permit.
D. As grading operations commence, the topsoil shall be stripped and stockpiled in
mounds surrounded by berms, As mentioned above, berms or windrows shall be
constructed each afternoon at approximately 100 foot intervals across the graded
areas, except in the low-lying areas of the project. This action will tend to check
erosion should rainfall be experienced during the night.
E. Construction on the sanitary and storm sewer lines should be commenced as soon as
grading operations have been substantially completed. The disturbed strip along each
line which is located outside of a street right-of-way should be grassed immediately
upon the completion of trench backfilling, as described below.
F. A graded depression around each catch basin on the site shall be used to contain
sediment during construction in accordance with the "Manual for Erosion and
Sediment Control in Georgia," latest edition.
G. As soon as the graded areas which are not to be paved, to be built upon, or receive
underground utilities have been brought to final grade, three or four inches of topsoil
shall be spread over these areas. Grassing operations should begin immediately, as
described in the grassing specifications. Roadway shoulders and slopes shall receive
a similar treatment as soon as the installation of the utilities are complete.
H. All grassing will be performed in accordance with the section of the specifications
titled "Grassing (Bermuda)." Should seasonal limitations prevent the establishment
of the permanent grass cover, the area to be grassed shall be covered with temporary
grass cover; then the permanent grass will be established as soon as its growing
season is reached.
I. The hay bale dams and silt fencing described above shall not be removed until the
surrounding pavement base material has been placed and is ready for priming and/or
areas are properly stabilized.
J. In no instance, shall any pollutants, hazardous waste or solid materials including
petroleum products, building materials, etc. be discharged to waters of the State.
K. All work shall be in accordance with good grading practice and shall conform to
accepted practices in Erosion Control.
EROSION, SEDIMENTATION & POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
02270-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 5 - INSPECTIONS, SAMPLING& MONITORING:
5.1 The Contractor shall be aware that the Owner may contract with a third party to perform
additional site inspections of erosion, sedimentation and pollution control measures and also
procure samples of storm water runoff for testing in accordance with the requirements of the
EPD General Permit No. GAR 100002. Third party inspections and samplings shall not
relieve the Contractor of any obligations with respect to these specifications of that required
by the EPD General Permit GAR 100002. Should any inspections determine that there are
deficiencies in the Contractor's work, then corrective action will be required as directed by
the Engineer or Owner.
A. Contractor's Requirements. With respect to inspections, sampling and monitoring
for compliance with EPD General Permit, the Contractor shall, at a minimum, be
responsible for the following:
1. Each day when any type of construction activity has taken place on site,
qualified personnel provided by the Contractor shall inspect: a) all areas on
the site where petroleum products are stored, used or handled for spills and
leaks from vehicles and equipment; b) all locations on the site where vehicles
enter or exit the site for evidence of off-site sediment tracking; and c) all silt
retention basins, traps, barriers, etc. for evidence of failures, potential failures
or excess silt accumulation.
2. These inspections must also occur after each rainfall event on the site and
must be continued until such time that the project is complete and the site has
achieved final stabilization. The Contractor shall document these daily
inspections on a form provided by or approved by the Engineer and must
submit these forms weekly and after each rainfall event to the Owner's
designated representative. Additionally, should a deficiency in any of the
erosion control measures be noted, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer
within 24 hours.
3. Erosion and sedimentation control measures shall be inspected by a
representative of the Owner beginning with the first earth disturbing activity
and continuing through final stabilization of the project site. Storm water
monitoring, sampling and testing will be accomplished by personnel
representing the Owner beginning with the first earth disturbing activity and
continuing through final stabilization of the project site. The Contractor shall
allow the monitoring agency access to the site at all hours of the day by
providing a key to any locked gates and shall also coordinate these services
by notifying the monitoring agency when: a) the first rainfall event of 0.5 inch
or more in 24 hours occurs on the site after the soil erosion and sedimentation
control measures have been installed; and b) whenever a rainfall event greater
than 1 inch in 24 hours occurs on the site thereafter.
B. Subcontractor's Requirements: Subcontractors shall be considered as acting under
the direction of the Contractor in his role as the Operator under the EPD General
Permit. The Contractor shall insure that all subcontractors comply with the Permit.
Subcontractors shall be responsible, at a minimum, for the following:
EROSION, SEDIMENTATION & POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
02270-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Each day when any type of construction activity has taken place on his
portion of the site, the Subcontractor shall inspect: a) all areas on the site
where petroleum products are stored, used or handled for spills and leaks
from vehicles and equipment; b) all locations on the site where vehicles enter
or exit the site for evidence of off-site sediment tracking; and c) all silt
retention basins, traps, barriers, etc. for evidence of failures, potential failures
or excess silt accumulation.
2. These inspections must also occur after each rainfall event on the site and
must be continued until such time that the project is complete and the site has
achieved final stabilization.
3. The Subcontractor shall immediately report any noted deficiencies to the
Contractor, who will take appropriate corrective action.
END OF SECTION
EROSION, SEDIMENTATION & POLLUTION CONTROL MEASURES
02270-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02510
GRADED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers a graded aggregate base course to receive bituminous paving under
another section, complete.
B. The graded aggregate base course shall conform to all applicable specifications of Section
300 of the Standard Specification for Roads and Bridges of the Georgia Department of
Transportation, Latest Edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials for the graded aggregate base course shall be in accordance with Section 310
of the Standard Specification for Roads and Bridges of the Georgia Department of
Transportation. No blast furnace slag is allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE
A. The subgrade to receive the graded aggregate base course shall be constructed in
accordance with requirements of Section 209 of the Standard Specification for Roads and
Bridges of the Georgia Department of Transportation.
B. The aggregate base course shall be compacted to a minimum of 100% maximum density
ASTM D-698 at an optimum moisture content of:t 2%.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION OF BASE COURSE
A. Construction for the graded aggregate base course shall be in accordance with Section 310
of the Standard Specification for Roads and Bridges of the Georgia Department of
Transportation.
END OF SECTION
GRADED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
02510-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02513
BITUMINOUS PAVING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers the construction of pavement for all roads and parking areas,
complete.
B. Construction of the subgrade, base course and paving of the roadways and parking areas
shall be undertaken immediately after completion of all storm drain lines and structures,
all curbs and gutters, all yard piping, conduits and other facilities passing beneath paved
areas, and all structural slabs and foundations required within or adjacent to the paved
areas.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.2 ASPHALT CONCRETE
A. The asphalt concrete mixture shall conform to the Georgia Department of Transportation,
Standard Specifications for Highway Construction, for Type E asphalt concrete. The job
mix shall be approved by the Engineer and no material shall be used until approved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEASONAL LIMITATIONS
A. No bituminous mixtures shall be applied for surface treatment between October 21 st and
April 10th, except as directed by the Engineer.
3.2 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
A. Bituminous mixtures shall not be produced or placed during rainy weather, when the
subgrade or base course is frozen or shows any evidence of excess moisture nor when the
moisture on the surface to be paved would prevent proper bond nor when the air
temperature is less then 45 degrees F. in the shade away from artificial heat.
3.3 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS
A. All work and materials required under this section of the specifications shall conform to
the applicable sections of the Standard Specifications of the Georgia Department of
Highways, latest edition.
BITUMINOUS PAVING
02513-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4 SUBGRADE
A. The sub grade shall be prepared as specified under the sections of the above specifications
covering sub grade preparation, including but not limited to Section 209.
3.5 CURBS AND GUTTERS
A. After the sub grade has been compacted and approved by the Engineer, curbs and gutters
shall be placed where shown on the plans and constructed in accordance with the
requirements of the section, "Curbs and Gutters, Concrete."
3.6 PRIME COAT
A. A prime coat of 0.3 to 0.8 gallons per square yard of medium curing cut-back asphalt (RC-
250 or emulsion grades RS-2 or SS-I) shall be applied with a pressure distributor at a
temperature between 80 degrees F. and 140 degrees F. The prime coat shall be applied
to the previously prepared base course when the atmospheric temperature is above 50
degrees F.
3.7 SURFACE COURSE
A. The mixture shall be transported from the mixing plant to the point of use in approved
vehicles. Loads shall not be of such size or weight as to interfere with the efficient
operation of the spreader. Loads shall not be sent out so late in the day as to prevent the
completion of spreading and compaction of the mixture during daylight, unless artificial
light is provided. The mixture shall be delivered at a temperature between 225 degrees
F. and 325 degrees F. and within 20 degrees F. of the temperature set at the mixing plant.
B. Upon arrival at the point of dumping, the mixture shall be dumped into the hopper and
spread by mechanical pavers, true to line, grade and cross section specified and to the
loose depth that will secure a compacted thickness of 1-1/2 inches. The hot mixture shall
be free from lumps and shall be spread while it is in a workable condition.
After the mixture has been screeded and before roller compaction is started, the surface
shall be checked, all fat spots and irregular areas removed and replaced with satisfactory
material. All irregularities in alignment and grade along the outside edge shall also be
corrected by the addition of removal of mixture before the edge is rolled.
C. While the mixture is hot, it shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly by rolling. The
surface of the compacted mixture shall be smooth, and true to crown and grade. Any
mixture that becomes loose or broker, mixed with dirt or is in any way defective, shall be
removed and replaced with fresh hot mixture which shall be immediately compacted to
conform to the surrounding area. Any area showing an excess of bituminous materials
shall be removed and replaced, and the edges shall be kept to a reasonable straight line
and trimmed.
BITUMINOUS PAVING
02513-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. The density after compaction shall be at least 98 percent of the laboratory-determined
density.
E. Protection of Pavement: The newly finished pavement shall be protected from vehicular
traffic of any kind until the pavement has cooled and hardened and in no case less than 6
hours.
F. Tolerances: The finished surface shall not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet from the true
profile and cross section. .
3.8 TESTS
A. The above work will be subject to thickness and compaction tests as deemed necessary
by the Engineer. Such tests will be at the expense of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
BITUMINOUS PAVING
02513-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02515
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
,
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers the construction of concrete pavements. The work shall consist of a
pavement composed of Portland cement concrete constructed on a prepared sub grade in
accordance with these specifications, and in the areas and to the typical cross sections
shown in the plans. The Contractor is to provide for the construction and completion in
every detail of the work described. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
equipment, tools, transportation and supplies required to complete the work in accordance
with the plans, specifications, and terms of the contract documents.
B. Concrete pavement construction shall conform in all respects to the section "Concrete
Construction - Civil" of these specifications. The requirements below shall be considered
additional requirements for pavement.
1.2 SUBMITTALS AND APPROVALS
1. Concrete and other materials specified shall be furnished from sources of supply
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a "Proposed Paving
Construction Plan," showing joint types and locations, and a statement of proposed
sequence and schedule of paving operations. This submittal shall also include a brief
description of paving equipment to be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MJ\TERIALS
A. Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates, and water conforming to the
section of these specifications on Concrete Construction except as noted below.
B. The concrete shall have the following percentages of entrained air:
1. For 1-1/2 inch maximum size aggregate, entrained air content shall be 5 +1- percent
by volume.
2. For: 3/4 or 1 inch maximum size aggregate, entrained air content shall be 6 +1-
percent by volume.
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02515-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Joint materials and curing compounds shall be as specified under the section
"Concrete Construction - Civil" hereof.
2.2 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN AND TESTING
A. The concrete mix shall conform to the section "Concrete Construction - Civil" hereof,
except that the slump range shall be 2 to 4 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING AND FINISHING
A. SUBGRADE PREPARATION: Subgrade construction shall generally conform to Section
209 of the Standard Specifications for Construction of Roads and Bridges for the Georgia
Department of Transportation, latest edition.
B. The sub grade shall be systematically test rolled with a heavily loaded vehicle prior to
paving. All soft and yielding material and portions of the sub grade that will not compact
readily when rolled or tamped shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. The
sub grade shall be brought to an unyielding condition by compacting it to uniform density
at or slightly above standard optimum moisture. Immediately pnor to placing concrete,
the sub grade shall be moistened as required to provide a uniform dampened surface at the
time concrete is placed.
C. LINES AND GRADES: The concrete pavement shall be installed true to line and grade
accurate to accommodate the thickness of the specified surface courses in each individual
area. Where alternates may be specified, plan grades shall be adjusted accordingly.
D. FORMING: Forms shall be set to the required grades and lines to facilitate orderly
concrete placement. Forms shall be of such cross section and strength and so secured as
to resist the pressure of the concrete when placed without springing or settlement. Forms
shall be cleaned after each use and coated with form release agent as often as required to
ensure separation from concrete without damage.
E. In lieu of fixed forms, the Contractor may place concrete with a slipform paver designed
to spread, consolidate, screed and float finish the freshly placed concrete in one complete
pass of the machine. The slipform paver shall be operated with as nearly a continuous
forward movement as possible, with stopping and starting of the paver held to a minimum.
F. CONCRETE PLACEMENT: Concrete shall be deposited and consolidated in such a
manner as t9 prevent the formation of voids or honeycomb pockets. However,
overconsolidation of the concrete so as to cause segregation of aggregates shall be
avoided.
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02515-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. JOINTS: Contraction joints, expansion joints, and construction joints shall be placed as
indicated on the approved "Proposed Paving Construction Plan," specified above. Depth
of contraction joints shall be equal to at least one-fourth t4e depth of the slab and may be
installed by either hand-forming, or by sawing. If sawing is used, the joints shall be cut
as soon as the saw will not ravel the edges and in no case more than 24 hours after the .
pavement has been placed.
H. FINISHING: The finishing sequence of all slabs shall consist of striking off and
consolidating, floating, straight -edging and final surface finishing. Adding water to the
surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations shall not be permitted. A uniform,
gritty, non-slip finish shall be provided using a stiff-bristled broom or by the use of a
burlap drag just before the water sheen disappears.
I. CURING: Curing shall be as specified under "Concrete Construction - Civil" of these
specifications.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02515-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02520
FLOW ABLE FILL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. The work covered by this section of specifications consists of furnishing all labor,
equipment, appliances, and materials, and in performing all operations in connection
with the installation of flowable fill work, complete, in strict accordance with this
specification and the applicable drawings, and subject to the terms and conditions of
the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLOW ABLE FILL MIX DESIGN:
A. The mixes fall into the categories of "very flow able" and "less flowable," which is
controlled by the amount of water that is added. The less flowable mix should be
used when it is desirable to put traffic back on a roadway quickly (usually 8 to 10
hours) or when being used to backfill pipes which could "float" out of position due
to the buoyant effect of the very flowable fill mix. This mix will still self-consolidate
around pipes without any "honeycomb" areas. Adding water to flowable fill to
obtain the desired plastic characteristics will not compromise the quality of the
hardened flowable fill.
Less Plowable Mix (Mix 1)
Wei2hts Volume
Min. 50 Ibs Cement 0.25
Min. 600 lbs. Ply Ash 4.24
SSD 2500 Ibs Sand 15.17
55gal. 458 Ibs Chlorides Water 7.34
Total Cubic Feet 27
Reference
ASTM C150, Type I or IT
ASTM C618, Class C
Clean, potable, < 500 ppm
Above values are based on specific gravities - cement 3.15, fly ash 2.27, sand 2.64,
and water 1.00. Anticipated unconfined compressive strength is 80 psi at 28 days
and 150 psi at 56 days. For "very flow able" fill (Mix 2), add 10 gallons of water per
cubic yard of Mix 1.
FLOW ABLE FILL
02520-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF FLOWABLE FILL:
A. The trench shall be prepared and the pipe joints placed as normal. There should be
at least 6 inches of flow able fill above any utility line. Once the pipe is covered, it
will be sufficiently anchored and if directed by the Owner's representative, water
may be added to the remaining flowable fill to ease placement without danger of
floating the pipe. If it is important to quickly return traffic to the roadway, the
flow able fill mixture shall not be altered by the addition of water.
B. The flowable fill may be discharged from the ready-mix truck into the space to be
filled, or by other methods approved by the Utilities Department representative. The
mix may be placed in part depth or full depth as conditions at the site dictate.
Formed walls or other bulkheads shall be constructed to withstand the mounded soil
rather than wood or metal forms. When backfilling utility lines, flowable fill shall
be distributed evenly to prevent movement of the line.
C. The material is self-consolidating and there is no need to use vibrators. Finishing can
be accomplished with a square shovel if the fill surface is at the bottom of pavement
or with a wood float if the surface will be temporarily used as a finished surface.
D. Once the flowable fill is in the trench, the self-consolidating material displaces the
extra water not needed for maximum density. Provision shall be made for this "bleed
water' to run off and away from the surface of the hardening flowable fill (use of
vapor barriers suc as plastic sheets is not desired). The material will usually support
foot traffic within an hour after the bleeding ends. Typically, full traffic can be
allowed on the hardened flowable fill within 8 to 20 hours (depending on site
conditions, volume to be backfilled, etc.). Without damage to the fill or any
structures below. If it is necessary to return traffic in less than 8 hours, or if there is
concern that traffic flow will "rut" the hardening flow able fill, steel plates shall be
used to bridge over the hardening flow able fill as directed by the Utilities Department
representative. If the filled cavity is too wide to bridge, steel plates shall be placed
on top of the hardening flowable fill as soon as it is able to support foot traffic (one
hour after bleeding ends), and full traffic can be allowed without damage to the fill
or structure below.
E. As the extra water is displace from the consolidating flow able fill, there will be an
initial subsidence of about one-eighth (1/8) of an inch per vertical foot. Once the
flowable fill hardens, there will not be future settlement. The hardened flowable fill
can be shaped to grade the next day to allow the patch thickness required. The patch
may be applied directly to the cured flowable fill.
FLOW ABLE FILL
02520-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02525
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers construction of Portland cement concrete curbs and gutters,
complete.
B. Concrete and the equipment, workmanship and materials therefor shall conform to the
applicable requirements of the "Concrete Construction - Civil" section, except as
hereinafter specified. Concrete shall have a slump of not more than 3 inches. The
concrete mixtures shall have an air content by volume of 4.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5
percent, based on measurement made on concrete immediately after discharge from the
rmxer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
,
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the
work of this Section, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADEPREPARATION
A. The sub grade shall be constructed true to grade and cross section. The subgrade shall be
of materials equal in bearing quality to the sub grade under the adjacent roadway or street
and shall be placed and compacted to conform with applicable requirements of "Graded
Aggregate Base Course" with the following modifications. The sub grade for curb and
gutter shall extend in all cases at least one foot in width back of the curb or gutter or
valley pavement. The sub grade shall be tested for grade and cross section by means of a
template extending the full width of the curb, gutter, or combination curb and gutter. The
sub grade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition, in conformity with the
required section and established grade until the concrete.is placed. In cold weather, the
sub grade shall be prepared and protected so as to produce a sub grade free from frost when
the concrete is deposited.
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
02525-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2 FORMS
A. Forms shall be of wood or steel, straight, and of sufficient strength to resist springing
during depositing and consolidating the concrete. The outside forms shall have a height
equal to the full depth of the curb or gutter. The inside form of curb shall have batter as
indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside form. Straight
forms of wood shall be two inch nominal surface plank, and of steel, shall be of approved
section with a flat surface at the top. Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns except
that benders or thick plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of ten
feet or more, when grade changes occur in the return, or where the central angle is such
that a rigid form with a central angle of ninety degrees cannot be used. Back forms for
curb may be made of one half inch benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated
together. Curb forms shall be carefully set to alignment and grade and to conform to the
dimensions of the curb. Forms shall be held rigidly in place by the use of stakes placed
at intervals not to exceed four feet. Clamps, spreaders, and braces shall be used where
required to insure rigidity in the forms. The forms on the front of the curb shall be
removed not less than two hours nor more than six hours after the concrete has been
placed. Forms back of curb shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have
been finished as specified in the Finishing paragraph. Gutter forms shall not be removed
for twelve hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms shall not be removed while
the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any direction. Forms shall be cleaned and
coated with form oil each time before concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be
thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing
temperatures, oiling is mandatory.
3.3 JOINTS
A. Expansion joints and contraction joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of
curb, gutter, and combination curb and gutter. Dowels, tie bars and reinforcement when
required will be shown on the plans and shall be installed in accordance with the
applicable details.
1. Contraction Joints: Contraction joints shall be constructed by means of one-eighth
inch thick separators, of a section conforming to the cross section of the curb, gutter,
entrance pavements, and combination curb and gutter. Contraction joints shall be so
placed that monolithic sections between curb returns will not be less than five feet nor
greater than fifteen feet after the concrete has set sufficiently to preserve the width and
shape of the joint. After separator plates have been removed, all exposed edges of
joints shall be rounded with the proper edging tool to a radius of one-fourth inch.
2. Expansion Joints: Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed
expansion joint filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of the curb, gutter,
entrance, and combination curb and gutter.
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
02525-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Expansion joint filler, unless otherwise specified, shall conform to ASTM Standard
D 1751-60 or D 1752-60 or shall be resin impregnated fiberboard conforming to the
physical requirements of ASTM Standard DI752-60. Expansion joints shall be
provided in curb and combination curb and gutter at the ends of all returns.
Expansion joints at least one half inch in width shall be provided at intervals not
exceeding fifty feet. Expansion joints shall be provided in nonreinforced concrete
gutter at the locations indicated.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION
A. Curbs, Gutters and Combination Curb and Gutters: Shall be of the dimensions and
sections shown on the drawings.
B. Reconstruction: Where the plans provide for reconstruction of existing curb or
combination curb and gutter and the limit of new work specified does not fall on a joint,
the entire section shall be removed and the new curb, combination curb and gutter or
entrance pavement shall join the old curb at the first joint line beyond the specified limit.
C. Placing Concrete: The faces and adjacent edges of abutting rigid pavements and
structures shall be painted with an approved bituminous material prior to placing concrete.
Concrete shall be placed in the forms to the specified depth in six inch layers and
thorougWy consolidated by tamping and spading so that there are no rock pockets at
forms, and mortar entirely covers the top surfaces. Concrete may be compacted by means
of mechanical vibrators.
D. Finishing: The edges of the gutter and top of the curb shall be rounded with an edging
tool to a radius of one-fourth inch and the surfaces shall be floated and finished with a
smooth wood float until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. The floated
surfaces shall then be brushed with a fine hair brush with longitudinal strokes.
Immediately after removing the front curb form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with
a wood or concrete rubbing block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks
have been removed. The surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the same manner as
the gutter and curb top. The top surface of gutter and entrance shall be finished to grade
with a wood float. Except at grade changes or curves, the finished surfaces shall not vary,
from the testing edge of a ten foot straightedge, more than one-eighth inch for gutter and
entrance and one-fourth inch for top and face of curb. Irregularities exceeding the above
shall be satisfactorily corrected. Visible surfaces and edges of the finished curb, gutter,
and combination curb and gutter shall be free of blemishes and form and tool marks, and
shall be uniform in color, shape, and appearance.
E. Curb forming machines for constructing curb and gutter will be approved based on trial
use on the job. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued at any time during the
construction if the equipment produces unsatisfactory results, and the work shall be
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
02525-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
removed and reconstructed for the full length between regularly scheduled joints.
Removed portions shall be disposed of as directed.
3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Curing: Immediately after the finishing operations, the exposed concrete surfaces shall
be cured by one of the following methods as the Contractor may elect:
1. Mat Method: The entire exposed surface shall be covered with cotton mats
conforming to Federal Specification DD-M-148 or with two or more layers of burlap
conforming to Federal Specification CCC-C-467b having a combined weight of
fourteen ounces or more per square yard when dry. Mats shall overlap each other at
least six inches. The mat shall be thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on
the concrete surface and shall be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in
intimate contact with concrete for not less than seven days.
2. Impervious Sheeting Method: The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine
spray of water and then covered with waterproof paper conforming to ASTM
Standard C171 63, or with wetted polyethylene coated burlap or polyethylene
sheeting conforming to the water retention requirements of ASTM Standard C 171-
63; polyethylene sheeting and polyethylene film bonded to burlap shall be not less
than 0.004 inch thick.
(a) Sheets shall be laid directly on the concrete surface with a light colored side up
and overlapped twelve inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing
medium shall not be less than eighteen inches wider than the concrete surface to
be cured and shall be securely weighted down by placing a bank of moist earth
on the edges just outside the forms and over the transverse laps of form closed
joints. Sheets shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if damaged during
curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for
not less than seven days.
3. Membrane Curing Method: The entire exposed surfaces shall be covered with a clear
membrane forming curing compound. The curing compound shall be applied in two
coats by hand operated pressure sprayers at the coverage of approximately two
hundred square feet per gallon for both coats. The second coat shall be applied in the
direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application ofthe first coat.
The compound shall form a uniform continuous coherent film that will not check,
crack, or peel and shall be free from pin holes and other imperfections. Concrete
surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after the curing
compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage
specified above at no additional cost to the Owner. Joint openings shall be sealed at
the top by inserting moistened paper or fiber rope or covering with strips or
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
02525-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
waterproof paper prior to application of the curing compound, in a manner to prevent
the curing compound from entering the joint. Concrete surfaces to which membrane
curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected for seven days
from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and from any other action which might disrupt
the continuity of the membrane. Any area covered with curing compound and
damaged by subsequent construction operations within the seven day period shall be
resprayed as specified above at no additional expense to the Owner.
4. Protection: After curing, debris shall be removed and the backfill shall be placed as
indicated. The completed curb, gutter, and combination curb and gutter shall be
protected from damage until accepted. The Contractor shall repair damaged concrete
and clean concrete discolored during construction. Curb, gutter, and combination
curb and gutter that are damaged shall be remove and reconstructed for the entire
length between regularly scheduled joints, not by refinishing the damaged portion.
Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as directed.
3.6 SEALING JOINTS
A. The sealing of expansion joints in curb and gutter sections will not be required. Any
expansion joint material protruding after the concrete is cured shall be trimmed flush
with the surface. Expansion joints in the valley pavement shall be sealed with an
approved joint sealer, conforming to Federal Specification SS-S-I64. The joint
opening shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material before the sealing material
is placed. The sealing shall be done in such manner that the material will not be
spilled on the exposed surfaces of the concrete. Any excess material on the exposed
surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and the exposed concrete
surfaces cleaned.
END OF SECTION
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
02525-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02713
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers all work associated with the water distribution system.
B. The Contractor/Developer is responsible for verifying the exact location, size and
material of any existing water facility proposed for connection or use by the project.
C. All work that occurs in the public right-of-way shall comply with the Augusta-
Richmond County Planning Commission "Development Documents" (latest version)
and Public Works Department's Right-of-Way Encroachment Guidelines (latest
version). Any field changes that occur in the public right-of-way and are not
specifically related to water or sewer items shall be coordinated with the Public
Works Department.
1.2 STANDARDS FOR WATER MAINS:
A. COVER
1. Standard depth of cover is 4 feet below existing and proposed road surface
(and areas designed for normal traffic loading) unless otherwise approved by
the Augusta Utilities Department.
2. Minimum cover to finished grade over water mains shall be 36 inches.
Minimum cover under ditch bottoms shall be 24 inches. These must be
approved by the Augusta Utilities Department on a case-by-case basis.
B. HORIZONTAL SEPARATION
1. Ten (10) feet to.any existing or proposed sanitary sewerlforce main, storm
sewer or sewer manhole (less than 10 feet requires pipe material to be Ductile
Iron Pipe (DIP) for both Water Main and Sewer/Force Main).
2. Fifteen (15) feet to buildings, top of bank of lakeslstreamslcreeks, other
structures (10 feet absolute minimum - only when unavoidable, and pipe
material is required to be DIP).
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Ten (10) feet minimum separation to gas mains.
4. Ten (10) feet minimum to underground electric cable.
5. Current Georgia EPD separation requirements.
6. All separation distances above are edge to edge.
C. VERTICAL SEPARATION
1. Water main shall cross over other pipes.
2. Eighteen (18) inch minimum separation (edge to edge) between all pipes and
cables shall be maintained (6 inch absolute minimum separation with DIP)
when conforming to Georgia EPD separation requirements.
3. When water mains cross under sewers, additional measures shall betaken.
At least 18 inches of separation between the bottom of the sewer and the top
of the water main shall be provided. Adequate structural support for the
sewer to prevent deflection or settling on the water main. The joint of water
pipe shall be centered at the crossing. Encasement of the water pipe in
concrete shall also be considered.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1W ATER MAIN MATERIAL
A. Water mains shall be either ductile iron pipe (DIP), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or
galvanized pipe as outlined below. Any pipe, solder and flux used during installation
of the water lines and services must be "lead-free" with not more than 8% lead in
pipe and fittings, and not more than 0.2% lead in solders and flux.
B. DIP shall be centrifugally cast and shall conform to A WW A C150lANSI A21.50
(latest version) for design and A WW A C1511ANSI A21.51 (latest version) for
manufacture. PVC pipe 6 inch to 12 inch diameter shall conform to A WW A C900
(latest version). PVC pipe 14 inch to 36 inch diameter shall conform to A WW A
C905 (latest version).
C. For water mains 6" through 16", DIP Pressure Class 350 shall be allowed. For water
mains 18" through 24", DIP Pressure Class 300 shall be allowed. PVC C900 (most
current date), Class 200, SDR-14 with cast iron equivalent O.D.s, gasket bell end
with elastomeric gaskets shall be allowed for water mains 6" through 10" (solvent
weld joints are not permitted). Galvanized pipe shall be seamless, American made,
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Schedule 80 and shall conform with the ASTM Specifications. Flanged DIP shall
have threaded ductile iron flanges and shall conform to the requirements of A WW A
C115 (latest version). All flanges shall be Ductile Iron Class 150, ANSIB 16.5 (latest
version). Flanges shall be flat faced and all joints shall use 1/8 inch black neoprene
full-faced gaskets.
D. Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have bituminous coating outside and shall be
cement lined in accordance with A WW A C104/ANSI A21.4 (latest version). DIP
shall have 1/16" cement mortar lining with rubber gasket push-on joints or
mechanical joints. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron. Tee bolts and nuts
shall be Cor-Ten steel. Rubber gasket joints shall conform to A WW A C 111/ ANSI
A21.11 (latest version), and shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer with the
pipe. A non-toxic vegetable soap lubricant shall be supplied with the pipe in
sufficient quantities for installing the pipe. The lubricant shall be approved by NSF
for use with potable water mains.
E. Pipe classes designated previously in this standard are minimum allowed. Actual
pipe class shall be determined based upon the installation and the use intended. Pipe
shall be appropriately labeled on the drawings. All PVC pipe for potable water
service shall bear the approved stamp of the National Sanitation Foundation. Copper
wire (12 gauge, bare single strand) shall be attached along the top of all buried PVC
water lines, wrapped around service corporations and stubbed up into all valves
boxes for locating purposes.
1. DIP shall be required in the following circumstances:
(a) Within 10 feet of sanitary and storm pipes.
(b) Within 15 feet of structures (near side of concrete footing), or top of
bank of lakes/streamslcreeks.
(c) Crossings over or under sewers, gas and storm pipes with less than 18
inches separation, with no joint allowed within 10 feet of crossing.
(d) Beneath all paved areas, excluding driveways or sidewalks.
(e) Within project boundaries of subdivisions with private roads where
the Utilities Department will take over the line for operations and
maintenance.
(f) Along all state right-of-ways.
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. The Utilities Director may mandate DIP in any instances of off-site or on-site
construction where future abuse to the line is possible due to location or
circumstances.
3. Restrained Joints shall be DIP as follows:
(a) For 12-inch and Smaller - Restrained joint shall be U.S. Pipe Field
Lok, American Ductile Iron Pipe Lok -Fast, EBAA Iron Mega-Lug, or
an equivalent product.
(b) For 14-inchDiameter and Larger-Restrainedjoint shall be U.S. Pipe
TR Flex, American Ductile Iron Pipe Lok-Ring, or equivalent
product.
(c) If inserting in older cast iron pipe, the restrained joint shall be as
approved by the Augusta Utilities Department.
Retainer Glands/Mega-Lug shall not be considered a fitting.
The restraint method shall be suitable for the pipe size thickness and
test pressure as required for the specified design case.
(d) Jack and Bore Installations:
Casing pipe used with jack and bore shall be in accordance with
requirements of the Georgia Department of Transportation (GDOT)
or railway specifications and "Excavating Trenching and Backfilling
for Pipe Lines" of these specifications. Carrier pipe shall be
restrained joint DIP as outlined in these specifications.
Directional Bore Installations: Directional bores will be considered
as a viable alternative to jack and bore installation under Augusta-
Richmond County roadways. The Utilities Director will review each
case for materials and construction methods.
(e) Mains may be tapped as long as the tapping line is smaller than the
tapped line unless otherwise approved by the Augusta Utilities
Department. Equal size line connections approved by the Augusta
Utilities Department shall require that a tee be cut into the main
where possible. Tees are also required at locations dictated by the
Utilities Director. Tapped connections in pipe and fittings shall be
made in such a manner as to provide a watertight joint and adequate
strength against pull-out.
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Tapping Sleeves and Valve shall be ductile iron, mechanical joint.
Tapping sleeves and valves are required for all taps 4 inches and
greater. Taps less than 4 inches shall be provided with a service
saddle meeting the requirements of these specifications Valves shall
be provided on all taps. Tapping sleeves shall be a minimum of 6 feet
from pipe joints.
(f) Schedule 40 PVC shall only be used as sleeves for the installation of
service line tubing under all pavement areas. Use in the water
distribution system or other areas are not acceptable.
(g) Unspecified transitions from DIP to PVC are not allowed. Material
for transition shall be indicated and specified and must be approved
by the Augusta Utilities Department.
(h) All construction material shall be first quality, not previously used.
Repair clamps are not acceptable. Damaged or faulty pipe and
materials must be properly replaced. All gaskets shall be new. When
connecting to existing valves or fittings, gaskets shall be replaced, not
reused.
2.2 VALVES, FflTlNGS AND APPURTENANCES
A. Gate valves, 4 inches to 12 inches, shall be the resilient seat type conforming to
A WW A C509 (latest version). Valves larger than 12 inches shall be gear operated
butterfly valves, conforming to A WW A C504 (latest version). Wafer valves shall
not be accepted.
B. Valves shall OPEN LEFT if installed south of Gordon Highway (SR 10), or OPEN
RIGHT if installed north of Gordon Highway. Valves shall be provided with valve
stem extensions to within 6 inches of ground surface, where centerline of pipe to
grade is greater than 4 feet.
C. Valve boxes shall be M&H E- 2702, Mueller HI 0364 or approved equal. Each valve
box shall be slip-type to adjust for a minimum cover of 36" bury. The flanged base
of the valve box shall be at least six (6) inches above the pipe so not to stress water
lines 4" and smaller. Extension pieces will be required for additional depth over
valves. Extensions shall be M&H E-3120 or Mueller H-10375. Covers shall have
"W A TER" cast on top.
D. All valves, bends, tees, crosses and dead ends shall be restrained by a mechanical
restraint systems as outlined in these specifications, or by use of a concrete thrust
block in those instances that warrant such an installation. Thrust blocks shall be
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
poured-in-place concrete having a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi after
28 days of cure time. All materials, fittings and appurtenances intended for use in
pressure pipe systems shall be constructed for a minimum working pressure of 150
psi unless the specific application dictates a higher working pressure requirement.
E. Standard pressure pipe fittings of size four (4) inch ID '!lld larger shall be ductile iron
conforming to A WW A C153 (latest version), with mechanical joints unless flanged
or restrained joints are required. Gray cast -iron fittings are not allowed. Ductile iron
fittings shall be cement lined in accordance with A WW A C104 (latest version).
Mechanical joint fittings, 24 inches and smaller shall be rated for 350 psi working
pressure. Flanged joint fittings 24 inches and smaller shall be rated for 250 psi
working pressure. All fittings 30 inches and larger shall be rated for 250 psi working
pressure. For sizes less than four (4) inch ID, fittings shall be suitable to the pipe
material and application. Glands for mechanical joint fittings shall be ductile iron,
and tee bolts and nuts shall be Cor-Ten steel. Only bolt systems furnished by the
manufacturer for mechanical joints are acceptable; nuts and bolts shall be new, not
reused. Pipe gaskets shall be new as supplied by the pipe manufacturer. All flanges
shall be ductile iron Class 150, ANSI BI6.5. All flanges shall be flat faced. Full
face, 1/8 inch black neoprene gaskets shall be used on all flanged joints. All joints
shall conform to A WW A Clll (latest version). Bolts, nuts and washers for flanges
shall be hot dip galvanized, except T-bolts shall be Cor-Ten steel.
List of Specifications:
ANSI/A WW A CI51/A21.51-96 4-FEB-1996 or latest version
American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water
ANSI/A WW A CI50/A21.50-96 1996 or latest version
American National Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe
ANSI/AWW A CI15/A21.15-94 1994 or latest version
American National Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe With Threaded
Flanges
ANSI/A WW A CI11/A21.11-95 1995 orlatest version
American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure
. Pipe and Fittings
ANSI/A WW A C153-98 1998 or latest version
American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 in. through
48 in. (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids
ANSI/A WW A CI04/A21.4-95 1995 or latest versions
WATER DISTRffiUTION SYSTEM
02713-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
American National Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and
Fittings for Water
2.3 FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Fire hydrants shall be provided in all water mains, transmission and distribution
systems. Accepted models are Mueller #A-24018, M&H Figure 29T A WW A,
Compression Type-Dry Top-Traffic Model 150psi working pressure, 300 psi testing
pressure. Kennedy K-81D will also be accepted. All fire hydrants shall be ordered
safety yellow body with white bonnet and caps. Fire hydrants shall be spaced such
that the radius of protection will not be more than 500 feet. In certain areas, closer
.spacing may be required by the Fire Marshal.
B. Each hydrant shall be left turn opening and capable of delivering a flow of at least
500 gallons per minute with a residual design pressure of not less than 20 psi, or a
higher flow as required by the Fire Marshal. Multiple fire hydrants with looped
mains and/or larger main sizes may be required to provide water for higher flow
demand. Flow tests shall be performed to verify the specified fire flow demand.
C. Fire hydrants shall be of the dry barrel break -away type conforming to A WW A C502
(latest version), with two 2 V2 inches threaded hose nozzles and one 4 Y2 inch
threaded pumper nozzle. Hose and pumper nozzle threading shall be national
standard. Show connection shall be 6-inch mechanical joint. The center line of the
nozzles shall be 18 inches above the finish grade. Hydrants shall have a 51,4 inch
interior valve opening and be restrained from hydrant to tee at the main. At the
discretion of the Utilities Director, additional protection for fire hydrants shall be
provided including but not limited to concrete filled ductile iron traffic posts.
D. Fire hydrant branches (from main to hydrant) shall be a minimum of 6 inches ID.
Each branch shall be provided with a resilient seat gate valve located as close as
possible to the main. Hydrants shall be located at or near road right-of-way lines
with pumper nozzle pointing toward the road. A clear zone around all fire hydrants
shall be adhered to, consisting of a 5 foot radius around the hydrant and 7 feet above
the top of the hydrant. Maintain 15 feet minimum from hydrant to all structures.
Placement oflandscaping, fencing, etc. shall be considered in order to meet this clear
zone requirement.
List of Specifications:
ANSI! A WW A C500-93 1993 or latest version
Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service (includes addendum C500a-95
ANSI! A WW A C502-94 1994 or latest version
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants (includes addendum C502a-95)
ANSI! A WW A C503-97 1997 or latest version
Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants
ANSI! A WW A C504-94 1994 or latest version
Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves
ANSI! A WW A C507 -99 1- DEC-1999 or latest version
Ball Valves 6 in. through 48 in. (150 mm through 1200 mm)
ANSI! A WW A C508-93 1993 or latest version
Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 in. (50mm) Through 24 in.
(600mm) NPS (includes addendum C508a-93
ANSI! A WW A C509-94 1994 or latest version
Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water-Supply Service (includes addendum
C509a-95)
ANSI!A WW A C550-90 1990 or latest version
Protective Epoxy Interior Coating for Valves and Hydrants
2.4 WATER SERVICE LINES AND TAPS
A. Tapping sleeves and tapping crosses shall be of a heavy body ductile iron,
mechanical joint suitable for a working pressure of 150 psi for sleeves and crosses
larger than 14-inch (200 psi for sleeves and crosses equal to or less than 14-inch), as
approved by the Augusta Utilities Department.
B. No direct service taps shall be allowed. All service line taps shall be supplied with
corporation stops. Service line tubing shall be rolled of soft continuous and seamless
copper Type K conforming to A WW A C800 and ASTM B-88 (latest version).
C. Corporation Stops and Main Connectors:
%" FB600 - 3 Ford or Equal
1" FB600 - 4 Ford or Equal
Taper Thread Inlet by Flare Copper Outlet
Eighth Bends:
%" LA02 - 33 Flare 1/8 Bend
%" LA04 - 33 Compression 1/8 Bend
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1" LA02 - 44 Flare 1/8 Bend
1" LA04 - 44 Compression 1/8 Bend
D. Minimum size for residential use shall be one (1) inch. The service line shall be laid
in a straight line and be of a continuous piece of pipe from corporation to curb cock.
The curb cock shall be located 6 inches behind and 8 inches below the top of new
curb or edge of asphalt. Where service connects to DIP or any pressure-rated pipe,
service saddles must be used. Brass double strap tapping saddles shall be used. U-
bolt type straps are not acceptable. All water service taps on the main shall be spaced
at a minimum distance of 18 inches apart and a minimum of 18 inches from a bell or
fitting. If two or more taps are required ata minimum spacing, they shall be offset
450 alternatively. Services greater than one (1) inch shall be seamless galvanized.
2" services shall have two 2" 90-degree galvanized elbows per Augusta Utilities' 2
Inch Water Service detail.
Services shall not exceed over 100 feet from the main to the meter. Where possible,
meter shall be placed in unpaved area as close to the water main as possible.
2.5 METER INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install an approved meter box at the termination
point of all water services, and maintain until such time as a meter is installed.
Meters will be installed by Augusta Utilities Department at the time services is
required at the stub-out. Each unit within a residential building (i.e., duplex, triplex,
etc.) shall have a separate meter, unless prior approval is received by the Utilities
Director. Meter boxes for 1 V2 inch and smaller meters are standard. 2-inch and
larger shall be installed in a meter vault.
B. Meter boxes shall be Rome type, 10" x 19" x 10" cast iron box and lid. The top shall
have cast ribs on the bottom side with four (4) legs to prevent sliding movement.
The box shall have a minimum weight of 37 Ibs., for meters 1 V2 inch or smaller.
Meter and curb stop shall be fully encased by the meter box. Meter vaults (for meters
2 inch and larger) shall be fabricated of masonry block or pre-cast reinforced concrete
using 3,000 psi concrete and #4 rebar. The access hatch shall be made of heavy duty
aluminum, and shall be hinged and lockable. The hatch shall be large enough for
removal of the meter but no smaller than 48" x 36". Wall dimensions shall allow 2
feet of working clearance. Vault floors shall be no less than 4 inches thick with
3,000 psi concrete and #4 rebar, with the meter located no less than 18 inches offthe
floor. All meters will be provided and installed by the Augusta Utilities Department.
The meters remain the property of the Augusta Utilities Department.
C. Meters should generally be placed 18 inches inside the adjacent utility easement that
parallels the right-of-way. Where sidewalk, two feet of clearance is required between
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the customer's side of the sidewalk edge and the meter box. In developments where
the property line is not clearly defined (e.g., condominiums) the meter should be
placed for ready access as approved by the Augusta Utilities Department. Meter and
control valves shall be accessible and unobstructed for 4 feet in all directions. This
shall include but not be limited to transformers, telephone junction boxes, walls,
trees, etc. Meters shall not be placed in areas that can be fenced, such as backyard.
Meter boxes shall not be placed in any asphalt or concrete surfaced areas (sidewalks,
driveways, curbs, etc.) unless approved in writing by Augusta Utilities.. For shopping
centers, the developer's engineer should give special consideration to meter layout
so as to satisfy these requirements. When no alternative is available but to locate in
asphalt, the top of box shall be flush with the asphalt surface. Meters shall not be
located in low areas that normally receive storm water. The box shall also be located
outside of parking stalls. The box and lid should be traffic bearing, but located
outside of a commonly trafficked area.
2.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTION DEVICES
A. Backflow prevention devices shall be provided, as required by the Utilities Director
and as set forth in these Standards. All irrigation systems, water services and fire
lines for industrial/office/commercial, schools, mobile home parks, multi-family
residences and any other locations as determined by the Utilities Director shall
require suitable backflow prevention assemblies on the customer side of service lines
(domestic, irrigation, and fire). Backflow devices shall be tested by a certified person
and the results furnished to the Augusta Utilities Department prior to any water use.
Residential development shall install a "Dual Check" Backflow Device on the
customer's side of service line at the point of tie-in to the water meter. The plumber
or builder tying service into the set meter will submit the test results for the backflow
prevention device to the Augusta Utilities Department's Inspector prior to acceptance
and any water use.
B. Backflow prevention device assemblies shall be the latest approved product of a
manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of this type equipment. All
assemblies shall be as approved by the America Society of Sanitary Engineering
(ASSE), The American National Standards Institute (ANSI), The American Water
Works Association (A WW A), Foundation for Cross Connection Control and
Hydraulic Research of the University of Southern California, and the Georgia State
Plumbing Code.
C. Type and size of assemblies shall be indicated on the drawings.
D. Backflow prevention device ownership and maintenance responsibilities shall be as
set forth in the appropriate ordinances. The Contractor shall document that the
backflow prevention device has been tested by a qualified technician. A copy of the
technician's certification must be attached to the test results and submitted to the
Augusta Utilities Director.
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
List of Specifications:
ANSI! A WW A C51 0-97 1997 or latest version
Double Check Valve Backflow-Prevention Assembly
ANSI! A WW A C511-97 1997 or latest version
Reduced-Pressure Principle Backflow-Prevention Assembly
2.7 FIRE LINES
A. All fire lines shall have a detector check valve with a 5/8 inch by-pass meter (to
detect low flows) within the right-of-way or dedicated easement. No exceptions to
the by-pass meter requirement shall be made regardless of sprinkler system type,
configuration, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION
A. WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1. Authorization must be obtained from the Augusta Utilities Department to
construct, alter or modify a water line. Construction of water infrastructure
will be authorized by the Utilities Department upon approval of submitted
plans and notification of the Augusta Utilities Department at least 24 hours
prior to starting construction (706-772-5503). Where water lines will
encroach public right-of-way, a Right-of-Way Encroachment Permit
approved by the Public Works Department is required prior to construction.
A Right-of-Way Encroachment Permit application is available through the
Public Works Department (706-821-1706).
2. Installation of water mains and associated appurtenances shall be in accordance with
current A WW A specifications and manufacturer's requirements for the specific
product. Loading or unloading and storage of pipe, fittings, valves, etc. shall be done
such that to avoid damage. The interior of all pipe, fittings, valves, etc. shall be kept
free of dirt and foreign matter at all times. All piping shall be placed in a dry trench
with a stable bottom. Wet trench installation shall be allowed only upon written
approval of the Utilities Director.
3. Mechanical restraint systems shall be required at each fitting involving a change of
direction and as specified in the approved plans. Concrete thrust blocks will be
allowed in lieu of mechanical restraint systems.
4. Backfill shall be free of boulders and debris, and shall comform to Georgia
Department of Transportation Specifications. Sharp or rocky material encountered
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
in the base shall be replaced with proper bedding. Pipe shall be laid on line and
grade as designed. Pipe joints, gravity blocks, service connections, and conflicts
shall be left exposed until visually inspected and approved by the Augusta Utilities
Department's Inspector.
5. Fire hydrants shall be installed true and plumb with the center of the pumper nozzle
facing toward the road. Hydrants shall not be placed in the sidewalk. The contractor
will be responsible for moving hydrants placed in sidewalks.
6. All valves shall be placed according to plans. Valve stems shall be installed plumb.
Valve stem extensions are required as described in these specifications. Air relief
valves shall be installed at all high points in the water main where air can collect, as
shown on the plans or as directed by Augusta Utilities.
List of Specifications:
ANSI! A WW A C600-93 1993 or latest version
Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances
ANSI!A WW A C605-94 30-JAN-1994 or latest version
Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and
Fittings for Water
ANSI!A WW A C512-92 1992 or latest version
Air Release, AirN acuum and Combination Air Valves for Water Works
Service
(a) Handling and Storing of Materials: Unload pipe so as to avoid deformation
or other injury thereto. Place no pipe within pipe of a larger size. Store pipe
and fittings on sills above storm drainage level and deliver for laying after the
trench is excavated. Valves shall be drained and so stored as to protect them
from freezing.
(b) Pipe Laying (General): The interior of the pipe shall be clean and joint
surfaces wiped clean and dry when the pipe is lowered into trench. Lower
each pipe, fitting and valve into the trench carefully and lay true to line and
without objectionable breaks in grade. The depth of cover below finished
grade shall be not less than 3 feet, or as shown on the drawings. Give all
pipes a uniform bearing on the trench bottom. Allow no trench water or dirt
to enter the pipe after laying. Insert a watertight plug in the open end of the
piping when pipe laying is not in progress.
(c) Boring and Jacking: Where required by the drawings, the water line will be
installed in a steel casing, placed by boring and jacking. Where boring is
required under highways or city/county roads, the materials and workmanship
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
will be in accordance with the standards of the Georgia Department of
Transportation or local authority. Boring and jacking under railroads will be
governed by the latest A.R.RA. Standards, Part 5, "Pipelines" and those of
the railroad involved.
(a) Casing Pipe: The casing pipe shall conform to the materials standard
of ASTM Designation A252, with minimum wall thickness of 0.219
inch. Steel pipe will have a minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi.
Casing pipe shall be joined together with welded joints.
(b) Carrier Pipe: The carrier pipe shall be ductile iron as specified
herein.
(c) Installation: The steel casing shall be installed by the "Dry Bore and
Jack" method. If voids develop or if the bored hole diameter is
greater than the outside diameter of the pipe by more than
approximately 1 inch, remedial measures will be taken as approved
by the Engineer.
When installing water line through casing, Contractor shall use
mechanical joint pipe with retained glands through length of casing.
The water main shall be strapped to 8 foot long treated wooden skids
with metal straps throughout length of casing. The ends of the casing
shall be sealed with brick and mortar.
7. Reaction Blocking: All plugs, caps, tees, bends and other fittings shall be provided
with adequate reaction blocking as shown on the drawings. Reaction blocking shall
be made to bear directly against the undisturbed trench wall. Where trench
conditions are, in the opinion of the Engineer, unsuitable for reaction blocking, the
Contractor shall provide tied joints to adequately anchor the piping as shown on the
drawings. All the rods and clamps shall be given a bituminous protective coating.
8. Connection to Existing System: All connections to existing mains shall be made
under the direct supervision of the Augusta Utilities Department's Inspector. Valves
on existing mains shall be operated by or under direct supervision of Augusta
Utilities Department personnel. Tapping sleeves and valves shall be pressure tested
prior to tapping. If service to existing customers must be cut off, the Augusta
Utilities Department shall be notified at least three (3) days in advance to make
necessary notifications. The Contractor shall disinfect and secure appropriate
Utilities Department clearances and samples for any service interruptions which
occur as a result of a Contract request for shut down or error. The clearances shall
be obtained within 72 hours of reactivation.
If cut -off of service is required, the Contractor shall be ready to proceed with as much
material pre-assembled as possible at the site to minimize the length of service
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
interruption. Augusta Utilities reserves the right to postpone service cut -off if, in the
opinion of the Utilities Director, the Contractor is not ready to proceed on schedule.
No customer should be without water for more than four (4) hours. The
Owner/Developer shall arrange for.temporary services to Customer if water will be
shut off for more than four hours.
Local chlorination will be required for all pipe and fittings used to complete
connections with the potable water system. Tapping sleeves and valves shall be
chlorinated in accordance with A WW A requirements. All wet taps shall be
witnessed by the Augusta Utilities Department's Inspector.
3.2 CLEANING AND FLUSHING
D. Upon completion of installation, the mains shall be flushed and the water disposed
of without creating a nuisance. Flushing must achieve a minimum water velocity of
2.5 fps in all portions of the pipe. The duration of the flushing will be determined by
the Augusta Utilities Department's Inspector. If, in the opinion of the Augusta
Utilities Department's Inspector, there is insufficient water available for proper
flushing, the Contractor shall clean the lines by pigging. No flushing or cleaning
shall take place without an Augusta Utilities representative present. The existing
mains that the new mains are connected to may be required to be flushed under the
direction of the Augusta Utilities Department when service is restored.
3.3 TESTING AND DISINFECTION
A. Pressure and Leakage Testing: Before any work will be accepted for payment, the
Contractor will fill the piping with water, open outlet as necessary for expelling the
entrapped air. No fire hydrant shall be opened full force during charging operations.
Thereafter, furnish the necessary equipment and test the piping under the supervision
of the Engineer for a period of at least 4 hours at not less than 1.25 times the design
pressure in pounds per square inch, based upon the highest elevation of the section
under test. Pressure testing shall be in accordance with the latest A WW A Standard
C600, Section 4.1. at 1.5 times the working pressure at the point of testing. Inspect
all joints, and remedy to the satisfaction of the Engineer any defects discovered.
Continue the test until all visible leaks have been eliminated from the part of the
system under test, and the pressure remains constant with a maximum pressure drop
of 5 psi for the duration of the test.
B. All water mains shall be leak tested. The Contractor shall provide all equipment,
materials and labor necessary for pressure and leak testing. This test must be
observed by an Augusta Utilities Department representative and the design engineer.
A pumping pressure of 200 psi must be supplied at the expense of the Contractor.
The main tested shall either be isolated from active potable lines or protected from
leakage by a double valve arrangement. All water used for pressure testing must be
potable water with an adequate chlorine residual. Water lines shall be tested by valve
W ATERDISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
sections. Maximum allowable leakage shall be as determined in accordance with
current A WW A specifications. The standard duration of test is four (4) hours.
Testing procedures shall meet or exceed A WW A C600 (latest version) requirements.
Any portions of the main which fail the test shall be replaced or adjusted until the
entire new main passes the test criteria. The pressure and leakage test shall be done
concurrently.
C. Augusta Utilities shall be notified at least 24 hours in advance to schedule
bacteriological testing of water mains. The Contractor shall replace or adjust
components of the pipeline which fail the test. Clearance is required from the
Utilities Department before the Augusta Utilities Department will allow the main to
be put into service.
D. Immediately following the pressure test, and before any work will be accepted for
payment, the Contractor shall perform a leakage test. Leakage is defined as the
quantity of water to be supplied into the newly laid pipe, or any valved section
thereof necessary to maintain the specified leakage test filled with water to within 5
psi ofthe test pressure. No pipe installation will be accepted until the leakage is less
than the number of gallons per hour as determined by the formula:
L - SDyP
133200
L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour.
S = The length of pipe in the section tested.
D = The nominal diameter of the pipe in inches.
P = The average test pressure during the leakage test in pounds
per square inch gauge.
The leakage test shall be conducted in accordance with A WW A Standard C-
600, Section 4.1 (latest version).
E. All piping complete with fittings and appurtenances shall be sterilized as specified
in the applicable sections of A WW A Specification C651 (latest version)
"Disinfecting Water Mains." Piping and appurtenances shall be thoroughly flushed
then chlorinated with not less than fifty parts per million (50 ppm). Calcium
~ hypochlorite can be used. Water from the existing distribution system or other
source of supply should be controlled so as to flow slowly into the newly laid
pipeline during the application of chlorine. The solution should be retained in the
pipeline for not less than 24 hours and a chlorine residual of 10 ppm should be
available at this time. The system shall then be flushed with potable water and the
sampling program started. Sampling taps and chlorinated water used for disinfection
shall be flushed to a location that will not damage property, persons, etc., and shall
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-15
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
be provided by the Contractor at the expense of the Contractor. The provisions of
this paragraph apply equally to new pipe and fittings and to existing pipelines into
which connections have been made or which may have been otherwise disturbed to
the extent that contamination may have occurred. All requirements of the health
authorities shall be observed in executing this work. The disposal of heavily
chlorinated water (following disinfection) must be accomplished in accordance with
the latest editions of the A WW A Standard C651 and the EPD's Minimum Standards
for Public Water Systems.
Two or more successive sets of samples, taken at 24 hour intervals and tested by a
State approved private lab, shall indicate bacteriologically satisfactory water and the
results submitted to the Engineer and the Augusta Utilities Department.
3.4 WATER/SEWER SEPARATION:
A. A 10 foot horizontal separation shall be maintained between water and sewer lines.
Where the horizontal separation cannot be met or where water and sewer lines must
cross, an 18 inch vertical separation, water over sewer must be maintained. Where
the above conditions cannot be met, water and sewer lines shall be cast iron or ductile
iron pipe with joints staggered such that maximum separation between joints exists.
The water line shall be installed over the sewer line.
3.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
A. As the work progresses, record on one set of utility drawings all changes and
deviations from the contract drawings in sizes, lines or grade. Record also the exact
final location of water lines by offset distances to surface improvements such as edge
of existing pavement or to property lines, etc. at a maximum interval of 200 feet.
Make sufficient measurements to locate definitely all water lines etc., to permanent
points. The drawings will show references to all valves, fittings, pipe brand changes,
etc. Transfer accurately all such records in red pencil to white prints of the utility
drawings and deliver them to the Engineer with monthly payment estimate.
END OF SECTION
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
02713-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02721
STORM SEWER SYSTEM
PART 1 - SCOPE
1.1 This section covers the storm drainage system, including pipe culverts and appurtenant
structures, complete.
1.2 PIPE FOR CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS
A. Pipe for culverts may be reinforced concrete pipe of the class or D-Ioad strength
indicated and shall conform to ASTM C76 or AASHTO M 170 with the following
additional requirements. Pipe shall have a readily visible line at least 12 inches in
length painted or otherwise applied on the inside and outside of the pipe at each end
by the manufacturer, so that, when the pipe is laid on its proper position, the lines
will be at the top of the pipe. The line shall be accurately located to indicate the
position where the pipe reinforcing steel is nearest to the exterior surface of the pipe.
Non-reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to the latest ASTM C-14.
B. Pipe may also be corrugated metal pipe which shall conform to the latest AASHTO
M-36, M274 (Aluminized Steel, Type 2 material) or ASTM B744, B745 & B790
(Aluminum) . Bituminous coating, where required by the drawings, shall consist of
asphalt cement having a minimum thickness of 0.04 inch measured at the crest of the
corrugations. Paved inverts in corrugated metal pipe, where required by the
drawings, shall consist of asphalt cement applied on the inside of the pipe for one
quarter of its circumference (bottom of pipe when installed). The pavement shall
have a minimum thickness of 0.50 inch tapering to 0.1 inch at the sides.
C. Pipe may also be high density polyethylene corrugated plastic pipe which shall
conform with the requirements for test methods, dimensions, and markings found in
AASHTO Designations M252 and M294. Pipe and fittings shall be made from
virgin polyethylene compounds which conform with the requirements of cell class
324420C as defined and described in ASTM D3350. All sizes shall conform to the
AASHTO Classification "Type S" (which describes pipe with a smooth waterway).
Joints shall be water tight according to the requirements of ASTM D3212.
1.3 TESTS FOR PIPE:
A. RESPONSIBILITY AND CERTIFICATIONS: The Contractor shall be responsible
for having the pipe he proposes to furnish tested to demonstrate conformance to the
applicable specifications. Certified copies of the test reports shall accompany each
STORM SEWER SYSTEM
02721-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
load of pipe and shall be delivered to the Engineer for approval before the pipe is
installed.
B. Strength tests for reinforced concrete pipe shall be the tests of ASTM C-76.
C. Strength tests for concrete pipe shall be the tests of ASTM C-14.
D. Strength tests for corrugated metal pipe shall be the tests of AASHTO M-36.
1.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPE:
A. Each pipe shall be carefully examined before being laid, and defective or damaged
pipe shall not be used. Pipe lines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated.
Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Under
no circumstances shall pipe be laid in water, and no pipe shall be laid when trench
conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. Full responsibility for the
diversion of drainage and for dewatering of trenches during construction shall be
borne by the Contractor. All pipe in place shall have been approved before
backfilling. When storm drain pipe terminates in a new ditch, the headwall or end
section together with ditch pavement, if specified, shall be constructed immediately
as called for on the plans. Ditch slopes and disturbed earth areas shall be grassed and
mulched as required by the section "Grassing (Bermuda)". The Contractor will be
responsible for maintaining these newly constructed ditches and take immediate
action subject to approval to keep erosion of the ditch bottom and slopes to a
minimum during the life of the contract. No additional compensation will be given
to the Contractor for the required maintenances.
B. Installation of high density polyethylene corrugated plastic pIpe shall be III
accordance with ASTM Recommended Practice D2321.
1. JOINTING: Joints for concrete and reinforced concrete shall be of the Bell
and Spigot type and installed according to manufacturer's recommendations
using Portland cement mortar. Corrugated metal pipe joints shall be made
by riveting or by means of connecting bands with bolted couplings in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. ALIGNMENT: Elliptical concrete pipe with circular reinforcing and circular
concrete pipe with elliptical reinforcing shall be so placed that the reference
lines designating the top of the pipes will be not more than 5 degrees from the
vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. In all backfilling
operations that Contractor shall be responsible for preventing damage to or
misalignment of the pipe.
STORM SEWER SYSTEM
02721-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING FOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES:
A. Excavation and backfilling for drainage structures shall conform to the applicable
requirements specified hereinbefore in the section, "Excavation, Trenching and
Backfilling for Pipe Lines." Trenches andpits shall be of sufficient size to permit the
placing and removal of forms for the full width and length of structure footings and
foundation, as shown on the drawings. The dimensions and elevations indicated on
the drawings are approximate only and may be changed when deemed necessary to
secure satisfactory foundations. Bracing, sheeting and shoring shall be provided
where required.
1.6 DRAINAGE STRUCTURES:
A. Drainage structures, where indicated in the plans shall be of the following types,
constructed of the materials specified for each type and in accordance with the details
shown on the plans.
1. INLETS: Inlets shall be constructed of reinforced concrete, plain concrete or
brick, complete with frames and covers.
2. HEADW ALLS: Headwalls shall be constructed of brick, reinforced
concrete or plain concrete as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS FOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES:
A. CONCRETE AND REINFORCED CONCRETE: Concrete and reinforced concrete
shall conform to the requirements specified for Class B concrete designed for a
minimum compressive strength of 2,500 pounds in 28 days, based on test cylinders
prepared and tested as specified under the section "Concrete Construction - Civil" of
these specifications. Aggregate shall be as specified in the section on "Concrete
Construction - Civil." Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be not more than 1 Y2
inches or less than 1 inch. Forms shall be made of sound lumber and constructed to
the shape, form, line, and grade required, and shall be maintained sufficiently rigid
to prevent deformation under load, and inspected for approval prior to placement of
concrete. Water shall be removed from excavations before concrete is placed.
Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms as rapidly as practicable without
segregation or loss of ingredients. Concrete shall be placed in layers not over 18
inches deep and shall be spaded and compacted as directed. The concrete covering
over steel reinforcing shall be as shown on the plans, but where not shown, it shall
be not less than 1 inch for covers and not less than 1 Y2 inches for walls and flooring.
Concrete deposited directly against the ground shall have a thickness of at least 3
STORM SEWER SYSTEM
02721-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
inches between the steel and the ground. Expansion joint filler shall be preformed
bituminous fiberboard, or wood board except where specifically specified on the
drawings. Surfaces exposed to view shall be a smooth finish with all blemishes
removed. All concrete surfaces shall be cured for at least 7 days by covering with
waterproof paper, or kept moist with cotton mats or burlap as approved.
B. MORTAR: Mortar for connections to drainage structures shall be composed of one
part by volume of Portland cement and two parts of sand. The Portland cement shall
conform to ASTM C-150-65, Type I or TI. The sand shall conform to AASHTO
Standard M-45, and shall be of an approved gradation. Hydrated line may be added
to the mixture of sand and cement in an amount equal to 25 percent of the volume of
cement used. Hydrated lime shall conform to Federal Specification SS-L-351, Type
M, or ASTM Standard C 141-61, Type A. The quantity of water in the mixture shall
be sufficient to produce a stiff workable mortar but shall in no case exceed 7 gallons
of water per sack of cement. Water shall be clean and free of injurious acids,
alkalies, and organic impurities. The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes from
the time the ingredients are mixed with water. The inside of the joint shall be wiped
clean and finished smooth. In pipe too small for a man to work inside, wiping may
be done by dragging an approved swab or long-handled brush through the pipe as
work progresses. The mortar bead on the outside shall be protected from air and sun
with a proper covering until satisfactorily cured.
2.2 TESTING:
C. DISPLACEMENT TEST: Mains will be checked to determine whether any
displacement of the pipe has occurred (a) after the trench has been backfilled to two
feet above the pipe and tamped as specified; and (b) upon completion of the project.
The test will be as follows: A light will be flashed between manholes or, if the
manholes have not as yet been constructed, between locations of the manholes, by
means of a flashlight or by reflecting sunlight with a mirror. If the illuminated
interior of the pipe shows any misalignment, displaced pipe, or any other defects, the
defects designated by the contracting officer shall be remedied by the contractor at
his expense.
END OF SECTION
STORM SEWER SYSTEM
02721-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02722
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
, PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers the construction of sanitary sewers and appurtenant structures,
complete.
B. The contractor is responsible for verifying, the exact location, size and material of
any existing sewer facility proposed for connection or use by the project.
1.2 STANDARDS FOR SANITARY SEWER LINES
A. COVER
1. Minimum cover to finished grade over sanitary sewer shall be four (4) feet.
2. Maximum cover shall be 20 feet unless otherwise approved by the Augusta
Utilities Department.
1.3 HORIZONTAL SEPARATION
A. Ten (10) feet to water lines and storm sewer lines.
B. Fifteen (15) feet to buildings, top of bank of lakes/streams/creeks, other structures
(10 feet absolute minimum - only when unavoidable, and pipe material is required
to be DIP).
C. Ten (10) feet minimum separation to gas mains.
D. Ten (10) feet minimum to underground electric cable.
E. All separation distances above are edge to edge.
1.4 VERTICAL SEPARATION
A. Eighteen (18) inch minimum separation (edge to edge) between all pipes and cables
shall be maintained (6 inch absolute minimum separation with DIP).
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.5 LAYOUT
A. Individual sewer services shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in diameter and shall
extend from the main and terminate with a clean-out constructed at the edge of right-
of-way. If the main is installed outside of the right-of-way, the services with clean-
outs shall terminate at the edge of the permanent easement. All lines eight (8) inches
in diameter and larger shall terminate in a manhole. Sewer lines installed parallel to
lakes/streams/creeks shall be designed to leave a 25-foot undisturbed buffer along the
edge of the bank. The required service lateral with clean-out shall be inspected by
the Augusta Utilities Inspector prior to physical tie-in of private service line. The use
of donuts or tying into the stack pipe of the clean-out is strictly prohibited.
B. Under no circumstances shall house sewer services and water services be laid in the
same trench.
C. Where indicated on the plans, pipe stub-outs for the connection of future sewers shall
be provided during the construction of new manholes. Each stub-out shall be
plugged in the bell end of the stub-out with plug approved by Augusta Utilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY SEWER MATERIAL
A. Pipe for sanitary sewers shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or ductile iron pipe (DIP)
as outlined below. Standard pipe lengths not greater than 20 feet shall be used.
Pump station and force main pipe shall be DIP in accordance with Section 02713,
and PROTECTO 401 lined.
B. PVC pipe shall be manufactured from virgin resin conforming to ASTM D-3034
(latest version) with minimum classification of SDR-35. All ductile iron pipe and
fittings shall be delivered to the job with an internal lining of PROTECTO 401
ceramic epoxy applied in accordance with the largest published specification for
PROTECTO 401. Design methods shall conform to A WW A C150/ANSI A21.50
(latest version). DIP shall be Class 350 for 12" and smaller and Class 250 for 14"
'and larger.
C. All fittings shall be of the same quality and material as the pipe to be used. Pipe
classes shall be determined based upon the installation and the use intended. Pipe
shall be appropriately labeled on the drawings. WYE fittings shall be utilized. TEE
fittings and saddles shall not be allowed. All DIP fittings shall be ductile iron or cast
Iron.
D. Aerial pipe shall be mechanical joint DIP or continuous weld, wrapped and coated
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
steel pipe. Piers shall be placed at every joint directly behind the bell. Site
conditions may dictate construction utilizing more stringent requirements than
indicated in the standard detail. Anchor collars shall be constructed on the pipe
whenever pipe grade is 20% or greater. Restrainers may be used in lieu of collars
when a particular brand and method are determined equivalent.
1. DIP shall be required in the following circumstances:
(a) When sanitary sewer line has less than four (4) feet of cover.
Minimum depth of DIP is two (2) feet.
(b) When a sanitary sewer line cross over storm pipe (Must be one joint
of DIP centered on the crossing).
(c) When a sanitary sewer line passes laterally within one (1) foot of a
storm sewer line (Must be one joint of DIP centered on the crossing).
(d) When a sanitary sewer line is to have in excess of eighteen (18) feet
of fill.
(e) When a sanitary sewer line is at the maximum slope of 20%.
(f) For last joint of pipe at all drop manholes greater than three (3) feet.
(g) When a sanitary sewer is less than six (6) feet under a street.
(h) The Utilities Director may mandate DIP in any instances of off-site
or on-site construction where future abuse to the line is possible due
to location or circumstances, extensive length under pavement, or in
private property away from right-of-way areas.
2. PVC shall be jointed with a rubber gasket and shall conform to ASTM F477
(latest version) and manufacturer's recommendations. Solvent weld is
prohibited. DIP shall be of the bell and spigot type with push-on joints
conforming to ANSI A21.11 (latest version) or mechanical joints.
3. Sewer Pipe Bedding:
(a) Bedding requirements shall apply to sanitary sewer lines only. They
are not to be considered minimum bedding requirements and as such,
do not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to provide any
additional bedding necessary for proper construction.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
that the pipe is true to line and grade of the pipe barrel. Bell holes
shall be provided so as to relieve pipe bells of all load, but small
enough to ensure that support is provided throughout the length of
pipe. Crushed stone embedment material shall conform to ASTM
C33, Graduation #67 (3/4" to #4). Bedding material shall be placed
underneath and be carried up the sides of the pipe as specified below.
(c) Class B Bedding shall be performed by first undercutting the trench
an adequate amount to provide bedding under the pipe bell. The
trench shall then be brought to grade with compacted crushed stone
as specified above for the full width of the trench. The bedding
material shall be placed in the zone four (4) inches below the pipe and
the pipe laid to line and grade and backfilled with compacted crushed
stone placed the full width of the trench up to one-half the outside
diameter of the pipe. Select backfill placed in six (6) inch layers and
compacted shall be the backfill from the springline of pipe to 18
inches above the pipe. A minimum Class B Bedding shall be used for
all plastic pipes.
(d) Class C Bedding shall be performed by first undercutting the trench
an adequate amount to provide bedding under the pipe bell. The
trench shall then be brought to grade with compacted crushed stone
as specified above for the full width of the trench. The bedding
material shall be placed in the zone four (4) inches below the pipe and
the pipe laid to line and grade and backfilled with compacted crushed
stone placed the full width of the trench up to one-fourth the outside
diameter of the pipe. Select backfill placed in six (6) inch layers and
compacted shall be the backfill from the bedding material to 18
inches above the pipe. A minimum Class C Bedding shall be used for
all ductile iron pipes.
4. Jack and Bore Installations:
(a) Casing pipe used with jack and bore shall be in accordance with
requirements of the Georgia Department of Transportation (GDOT)
or railway specifications.
5. New sewers shall be tied-in to the existing sewers at locations indicated on
the plans. No lines smaller than six (6) inches shall be tied to a sewer line or
manhole. All tie-ins to existing manholes shall be cored. The Contractor
shall be responsible for maintaining uninterrupted service of the sanitary
sewer during tie-in operations. No connection to existing sanitary sewer shall
be allowed until the proposed sewer line is inspected and approved by the
Augusta Utilities Department's Inspector.
6. Side sewers shall be installed where shown on the plans. A side sewer
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
consists of a sewer extending from a connection to the street or main sewer
to its connection to the house sewer or other point. For new 8" through 12"
diameter sewers, the side sewer connection shall be constructed with a wye
fitting in the street sewer with a 45-degree elbow. For new 15" and larger
pipes, or existing sewers, the connection shall be made by machine made tap
and suitable saddle, unless otherwise approved by the Augusta Utilities
Department.
Belled pipe shall be laid with the bell end up grade and in general, all pipe
laying shall start and proceed up grade from the point of connection at the
street sewer or other starting point. Pipe shall be laid in a straight line at a
uniform grade between fittings or on a uniform horizontal or vertical
curvature achieved by deflecting the pipe joints within the manufacturer's
recommended limits. The maximum deflection permissible at anyone fitting
shall not exceed 45 degrees. The maximum deflection of any combination
of two adjacent fittings shall not exceed 45 degrees unless straight pipe not
less than 2 Y2 feet in length be installed between such adjacent fittings or
unless one of such fittings is a wye branch with a cleanout provided on the
straight leg.
7. Material for transition (e.g., PVC to DIP) shall be indicated and specified.
Where offset of DIP is required, mechanical joint DIP shall be installed with
mechanical joint heavy body DIP sleeves at the reconnections.
8. Sanitary Sewer Manholes:
(a) Precast manholes shall conform to the latest edition of ASTM C-478
(five inch wallthickness). Use six (6) inch wall thickness if manhole
exceeds 20 feet in depth. All holes for incoming and outgoing pipe
will, whenever possible, be precast, with pipe tie-in made using PS 10
flexible gasket, manufactured by PressSeal Gasket Corporation, or
approved equal. In the event of the necessity of cutting new holes,
the holes shall be machined cored neatly and carefully so as not to
damage the structural integrity of the manhole and large enough to
allow the insertion of a flexible rubber boot. Precast holes shall be
flexible boot fitted.
(b) Round manhole bases shall be sized to allow for proper seat of the
pipe to manhole connectors, conforming to ASTM C923. Minimum
round manhole diameters shall be as follows:
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Pipe <24" 24"
30" 36" 42" 48" 54"
PVCIDIP 48" 60"
72" 84" 96" 120" 120"
(c) Tindall T -Series bases or other approved similar type alternative base
configurations that have been previously utilized for comparable
applications may be an acceptable alternative to the round bases
specified above for gravity sewer lines.
(d) Barrel joints shall be tongue and groove with performed plastic
meeting the requirements of Federal Specifications SS-S-0021O,
"Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic Pipe Joints" Type I, rope
form, also known as "Ram Neck." Eccentric manholes cones are
required. Inverts shall be constructed of 3,000 psi plant mix.
Manhole steps shall be installed in all sections of each manhole as
indicated on the drawings. Frame and covers shall be cast or ductile
iron and set in a bed of mortar on the top of the manhole and
completely grouted outside and wiped smooth. Ring and cover shall
be USF-170 or approved equal. Cover shall read "Sanitary Sewer."
Watertight manhole covers are to be used wherever street runoff or
high water may flood the manhole tops. Locked manhole covers may
be may be desirable in isolated easement locations or where
vandalism may be a problem.
(e) The minimum diameter of manholes shall be 48 inches; larger
diameters are required for large diameter sewers. A minimum access
diameter of 22- 1,4 inches shall be provided.
(f) Outside drop manholes shall be precast and constructed for incoming
lines having invert 24 inches or more above the invert of the manhole
outlet, with DIP and tie rods per the plans. Shallow manholes shall
be precast or Type B slab top precast and shall be constructed in
accordance with ASTM C-478 (latest version).
(g) Drop manholes should be constructed with an outside drop
connection. Inside drop connection (when necessary) shall be secure
to the interior wall of the manhole and provide access for cleaning.
Inside drop connections shall be used only when approved by the
Utilities Department Engineering Division.
(h) Due to the unequal earth pressure that may result from the backfilling
operation in the vicinity of the manhole, the entire outside drop
connection shall be encased in concrete.
(i) A bench shall be provided on each side of any manhole channel when
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the pipe diameter(s) are less than the manhole diameter. The bench
should be sloped no less than Y2 inch per foot (4 percent). No lateral
sewer, service connection, or drop manhole pipe shall discharge onto
the surface of the bench.
9. All construction material shall be first quality, not previously used. Repair
clamps are not acceptable. Damaged or faulty pipe and materials must be
properly replaced. All gaskets shall be new. When connecting to existing
valves or fittings, gaskets shall be replaced, not reused.
10. The Engineer shall provide a complete set of shop drawings, which shall
indicate the Augusta Utilities Department's specific material requirements.
In general, material requirements will be guided by the latest versions of the
specifications of A WW A and ASTM.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION:
A. INST ALLA TION
1. Authorization must be obtained from the Augusta Utilities Department to
construct, alter or modify a sanitary sewer line. Construction of sewer
infrastructure will be authorized by the Utilities Department upon approval
of submitted plans and notification of the Augusta Utilities Department at
least 24 hours prior to starting construction (706-772-5503). Where water
lines will encroach public right-of-way, a Right-of-Way Encroachment
Permit approved by the Public Works Department is required prior to
construction. A Right-of-Way Encroachment Permit application is available
through the Public Works Department (706-821-1706).
2. Installation of sanitary sewer pipe and associated appurtenances shall be in
accordance with current ASTM specifications and manufacturer's
requirements for the specific product. Loading or unloading and storage of
pipe, fittings, valves, etc. shall be done such that to avoid damage. All pipe
shall be carefully examined before it is installed in the trench. Damaged pipe
or pipe which does not meet specification requirements shall be rejected and
removed from the work site. The interior of all pipe, fittings, valves, etc.
shall be kept free of dirt and foreign matter at all times. All piping shall be
placed in a dry trench with a stable bottom. Wet trench installation shall be
allowed only upon written approval of the Utilities Director.
3. Backfill shall be free of boulders and debris, and shall conform to Georgia
Department of Transportation Specifications. Sharp or rocky material
encountered in the base shall be replaced with proper bedding. Pipe shall be
laid on line and grade as designed. Pipe joints, gravity blocks, service
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
connections, and conflicts shall be left exposed until visually inspected and
approved by the Augusta Utilities Department's Inspector.
4. All concrete cradles, saddles, or encasements shall be installed as shown on
the plans. These structures shall be constructed in strict accordance to the
details shown on the plans. Concrete shall have a 28 day compressive
strength of 3,000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM Specification
C-39.
5. All manholes indicated on the plans shall be furnished and installed by the
Contractor in strict accordance with the plans. The invert channels shall be
smooth and accurately shaped to the semicircular bottom conforming to the
inside of the adjacent sewer sections as shown on the plans. Changes in
direction of the sewer and entering branches shall have as long a radius of the
true curvature as the size of the manhole will permit.
6. The top of manholes shall be topped out with brick as indicated on the plans.
The number of courses will depend on the required elevation of the top of the
manhole. The maximum number of brick courses allowed shall be three (3).
7. The camera inspection of new sewer lines will not be required, either at
installation or within the warranty period, unless the owner deems it
necessary for problematic evaluation. For problematic evaluation, the owner
may request that any amount or all of the new sewer line be inspected, either
during project construction or in the warranty period. The cost of all
requested camera inspections will be incurred by the Contractor. Upon the
Owner's request, sewer lines shall be inspected through the use of camera
inspection equipment with an Augusta Utilities Department inspector present.
The Contractor is to provide the Augusta Utilities Department with a color
VHS system videotape of the inside of every reach of the sanitary sewer
inspected. The tape shall record the manhole number to manhole number,
date of recording, and distance from start of run. The tap shall include a
distance, and location description of every service line. The cost of vacuum
testing each manhole should be included in the price for each manhole.
(a) Installation:
i) Sewer Pipe Laying: The pipe shall be laid with bell or groove end
upgrade. Pipe shall be tested for soundness, clear interior and
satisfactory joint surfaces before lowering the pipe into the trench.
Pipe shall be laid in straight lines and on uniform grades between
points where changes in alignment or grade are shown. The pipe
barrel shall be uniformly bedded. The line and invert grade of each
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-8
pipe shall be checked from a top line carried on batter boards not over
25 feet apart or by use of a laser beam target inserted in each joint.
Pipes shall be laid to form a smooth, uniform invert. A stopper shall"-..
be installed in the pipe mouth when pipe laying is not in progress.
/
/
/
~,,/-
PVC gravity sewer pipe and force main shall be installed in
accordance to ASTM D2321, latest version. Ductile iron
force main shall be installed in accordance with A WW A
C600, latest version.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ii) Backfilling Around Pipe: As soon as the joint material has set, fine
earth shall be carefully tamped around each joint, and around and
over the pipe to a depth of at least 2 feet above the top of gravity
pipelines. In addition, all PVC sewer pipe shall be bedded in selected
material from the pipe centerline down to a point 3 to 6 inches below
the pipe invert. Selected materials for this purpose shall be Class lor
TI soils as specified in ASTM D2321. Reconstruction of any roadway
section or right-of-way shall be in accordance with the Georgia
Department of Transportation and City of Augusta Specifications.
iii) Sewer Structures: Appurtenant sewer structures shall be constructed
according to one or more of the following methods:
i) Masonry: Brick for manholes and other sewer structures shall
be laid with shove joints completely filled with mortar.
Horizontal joints shall not exceed 1/2 inch, vertical joints 1/4
inch on their interior face. In circular structures, all brick
shall be laid as header with joints broken between courses.
Interior joints shall be struck or wiped smooth with the face
of the wall. The exterior of sanitary sewer manholes shall be
plastered to a thickness of at least 1/2 inch.
ii) Laving Brick and Concrete Block Work: Only clean brick or
block shall be used. The brick or block shall be moistened by
suitable means, as directed, until they are neither so dry as to
absorb water from the mortar, nor so wet as to be slippery
when laid.
Each brick or block shall be laid in a full bed and joint of
mortar without repairing subsequent grouting, flushing, or
filling, and shall be thoroughly bonded as directed.
iii)
Plastering and Curing Brick or Block Masonry: Outside faces
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
iv)
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
of masonry shall be plasteredwith mortar from 1/4 inch to 3/8
inch thick. If required, the masonry shall be properly
moistened prior to application of the mortar. The plaster shall
be carefully spread and troweled so that all cracks are
thoroughly worked out. After hardening, the plaster shall be
carefully checked by being tapped for bond and soundness.
Unbonded or unsound plaster shall be removed and replaced.
Masonry and plaster shall be protected from too rapid drying
by the use of burlap kept moist, or by other approved means,
and shall be protected from the weather and frost, . all as
required.
Manhole Inverts Manhole flow channels shall be constructed
of concrete, sewer pipe, brick or precast, and shall be of
semicircular section. Each manhole shall be provided with
such channels for all connecting sewers.
The inverts shall conform accurately to the size of the
adjoining pipes. Side inverts shall be curved and main inverts
(where direction changes) shall be laid out in smooth curves
of the longest possible radius which is tangent to the
centerlines of adjoining sewers.
v)
Drop Manholes: Drop inlets shall be provided into manholes
on sanitary sewers for incoming lines having inverts 2 feet or
more above the inverts of the manhole outlet lines. Drop pipe
and fittings shall be encased in masonry integral with the
manhole and extending from the manhole base to the top of
the incoming sewer. Diameter of drop manholes to be four
feet at a minimum.
vi)
Setting Manhole Frames and Covers: Manhole frames shall
be set with the tops conforming accurately to the grade of the
pavement or finished concentric with the top of the masonry
and in a full bed of mortar so that the space between the top
of the manhole masonry and the bottom flange of the frame
shall be completely filled and made watertight. A thick ring
of mortar extending to the outer edge of the masonry shall be
placed all around the bottom flange. The mortar shall be
smoothly finished to be flush with the top of the flange and
have a slight slope to shed water away from the frame.
Manhole covers shall be left in place in the frames on
02722-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
completion of other work at the manholes.
vii) Setting Precast Manholes Sections: Precast-reinforced
concrete manhole sections shall be set so as to be vertical and
with sections and steps in true alignment.
All holes in sections, used for their handling, shall be
thoroughly plugged with mortar. The mortar shall be 1 part
cement to 1 1/2 parts sand; mixed slightly damp to the touch
until it is dense and an excess of paste appears on the surface;
and then finished smooth and flush with adjoining surfaces.
iv) Bulkheads and Flushing: The contractor shall build a tight bulkhead
in the pipeline where new work enters an existing sewer. The
bulkhead shall remain in place until its removal is authorized by the
Engineer.
Care shall be taken to prevent earth, water and other materials from
entering the pipe, and when pipe laying operations are suspended, the
Contractor shall maintain a suitable stopper in the end of the pipe and
also at openings for manholes. All sanitary sewer, except building
connections shall be flushed with water in sufficient volume to obtain
free flow through each line. All obstructions shall be removed and all
defects corrected. As soon as possible after the pipe and manholes
are completed on any line, the Contractor shall flush out the pipeline
using a rubber ball ahead of the water. None of the flushing water or
debris shall be permitted to enter any existing sewer.
v) Temporary Plugs: At all times when pipe laying is not actually in
progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by temporary
watertight plugs or by other approved means. If water is in the trench
when work is resumed, the plug shall not be removed until all danger
of water entering the pipe has passed.
vi) Joints and Structure Rightness: All pipe joints shall be made as
nearly watertight as practicable. There shall be no visible leakage at
the joints and there shall be no sand, silt, clay, or soil of any
description entering the pipelines at the joints.
Leaks in the pipelines which cause infiltration or exfiltration to
exceed limits herein specified shall be repaired by replacing defective
pipe. Grouting and/or caulking to repair pipelines where excessive
infiltration or exfiltration is evident will not be permitted.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
vii) Fittings and Stoppers: Branches and fittings shall be laid by the
Contractor as indicated on the drawings and/or as directed by the
Engineer. Open ends of pipe and branches shall be closed with
premolded gasket joint stoppers which conform with the same
requirements as pipe being used.
viii) Sewer Line Relation to Water Lines: Sewer lines and sewer force
mains in relation to water lines shall conform to "Ten States
Standard" Section 29.3 at a minimum. Sewer lines shall have at least
a 10 foot pipe-to-pipe horizontal separation from known or proposed
water mains. When a sewer crosses under a water main, there shall
be at least 18 inches from the crown of the sewer line to the bottom
of the water main.
In all cases where adequate vertical separation as stated above cannot
be achieved (or whenever sewer lines must be installed to cross above
a water main), both the water and sewer lines shall be constructed of
ductile iron pipe a distance of 10 feet on each side of their
intersection with one full length of water main centered on the sewer
line.
ix) Minimum Cover for Sewer Lines: Gravity sewer lines shall have a
minimum of 3 feet of cover at the crown of the pipe. In cases where
this minimum cover cannot be achieved, ductile iron pipe shall be
used.
x) Detectable Tape: Detectable tape as manufactured by Reef Industries
of Houston, Texas, or equal shall be installed during the backfill
operation at a point 1 foot below the final finished grade.
The detectable tape shall be a 5.5 mil composition film containing
one layer of metalized foil laminate between two layers of inert
plastic film specifically formulated for prolonged use underground.
The tape shall be highly resistant to alkalis, acids and other
destructive agents found in the soils.
The detectable tape shall bear a continuous printed message "Caution
Sanitary Sewer Line Buried Below." The message shall be printed in
permanent ink formulated for prolonged use underground. Letters
shall be clearly legible and have a minimum height of 1.2 inches.
xi) Boring and Jacking: Where required by the drawings, the sanitary
sewer line will be installed in a steel casing, placed by boring and
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
jacking.
Where boring is required under highways, the materials and
workmanship will be in accordance with the standards of the Georgia
Department of Transportation or local authority.
Boring and jacking under railroads will be governed by the latest
AR.E.A. Standards, Part 5, "Pipelines" and those of the railroad
involved.
i) Casing Pipe: The casing pipe shall conform to the materials
standards of ASTM Designation A252, with minimum wall
thickness of 0.219 inch. Steefpipe will have a minimum
yield strength of 35,000 psi. Casing pipe shall be joined
together with welded joints.
ii) Carrier Pipe: The carrier pipe shall be ductile Iron as
specified herein.
iii) Installation: The steel casing shall be installed by the "Dry
Bore and Jack" method. If voids develop or if the bored hole
diameter is greater than the outside diameter of pipe by more
than approximately 1 inch, remedial measures will be taken
as approved by the Engineer.
When installing water lines through casing, the Contractor
shall mechanical joint pipe with retainer glands throughout
the length of the casing. The sanitary sewer line shall be
strapped to treated wooden skids with metal straps throughout
the length of the casing. The empty space shall then be filled
with sand and the ends of the casing shall be sealed with
brick and mortar.
iv) Force Main Installation: In general, sewer force main must be
installed in accordance with the water distribution system
specifications.
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) force main must conform to ASTM
D-2241, latest version.
Ductile iron force main must conform to ASTM A-377, latest
verSIOn.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
xii) Removal and Replacement of Existing Pipe and Equipment: where
indicated on the drawings or required to properly place the work
under this contract, as approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
remove and replace such pipe lines and equipment in a manner as
approved by the Engineer.
B. SEWER LINE AND MANHOLE TESTING:
1. Sewer Lines:
(a) Upon completion of a section of the sewer, the Contractor shall
dewater it and conduct a satisfactory test to measure the infiltration
or exfiltration for at least three consecutive days. The amount of
infiltration including "Y" branches, and connections shall not exceed
1 00 gallons per inch diameter per mile of sewer pipe per 24 hours for
gravity sewer pipe. The amount of 50 gallons per inch diameter per
mile of sewer per 24 hours shall not be exceeded for ductile iron pipe.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory watertightness
of the entire section of sewer.
(b) As required, suitable bulkheads shall be installed to permit the test of
the sewer. Where the ground water level is less than 1 foot above the
top of the pipe at its upper end, or as directed by the Engineer, the
sewer shall be subjected to exfiltration testing by plugging the pipe at
the lower end and then filling the pipelines and manholes with clean
water to a height 4 feet above the top of the sewer at its upper end.
The leakage out of the sewer, measured by the volume of the water
necessary to maintain meter level in the highest manhole, shall not
exceed 200 gallons per inch diameter per 24 hours per mile of sewer
for gravity sewer pipe. The amount of 50 gallons per inch diameter
per 24 hours per mile of sewer shall not be exceeded for ductile iron
pIpe.
(c) The sewer shall be tested before any connections are made to
buildings or to active sewers.
(d) The Contractor shall construct such weirs and bulkheads as may be
required, shall furnish all water, labor, test plugs, power, pumps,
meters, and other equipment necessary for the test to be properly
made.
(e) The Contractor may use a low pressure air test as an option to the
hydraulic infiltrationlexfiltration leakage test for gravity lines
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
provided the Contractor established a correlation between the air test
results and the quantity of infiltrationlexfiltration actually being
experienced by the line and the allowable air pressure drop shall be
that corresponding to the allowable hydraulic leakage specified
previously in this section. Such a correlation is to be established
according to a procedure satisfactory to the Engineer. The low
pressure air test shall be performed in accordance with the applicable
sections of the Uni-Bell UNI-B-6-90, latest version.
2. Vacuum Testing Manholes:
(a) All manholes shall be free of visible leakage and shall successfully
complete a vacuum test prior to acceptance.
(b) Plugging all inlets and outlets: Plug all inlets and outlets, excluding
the manhole top access, using pneumatic or mechanical plugs. Plugs
shall be rated for the pressure required in the test. The Engineer or
Authorized Engineers representative shall be notified at least 48 hours
before tests are conducted.
(c) Testing Equipment and Procedure: Contractor is to furnish all
necessary testing equipment and perform tests in a manner
satisfactory to the Engineer. Provide an arrangement of testing
equipment which will provide observable and accurate measurements
of air leakage under specified conditions. Gauges for the vacuum
testing shall be calibrated with a standardized testing gauge prior to
testing. The calibration shall either be witnessed by the Engineer or
Certified as being calibrated by licensed calibration technician.
(d) After all of the plugs are in place and securely blocked, install the
manhole tester on the ring of the manhole and attach the vacuum
pump assembly suction hose to the manhole tester. Start the vacuum
pump and allow the pre-set rpm to stabilize. Open the inlet/outlet
valve and allow the vacuum pump to evacuate the manhole to five
pounds per square inch (5 psigv) or (10 inches Hg). Close the
inlet/outlet valve and monitor the vacuum for the test period specified
on the following table. The manhole will be considered acceptable
if the vacuum drops less than one half per square inch (0.5 psigv) or
(1 inch Hg) within the given test time.
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-15
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DEPTH TIME TIME TIME TIME
FEET SECONDS SECONDS SECONDS SECONDS
48-inch 60-inch 72-inch 120- inch
diam. diam. diam. diam.
8 20 26 33 65
10 25 33 41 79
12 30 39 49 93
14 35 46 57 107
16 40 52 65 121
18 45 59 73 135
20 50 65 81 149
22 55 72 89 163
24 59 78 97 177
26 64 85 105 191
28 69 91 113 205
30 74 98 121 219
(e) Time of Testing: The vacuum test shall be conducted after all the
pipes and manholes have been backfilled, all final grading is
complete, and the base layer of asphalt has been spread.
(f) Repairs: Repair or replace and retest, in a manner approved by the
Engineer, any manhole not meeting the vacuum test requirements, at
no cost to the Owner.
(g) Subsequent Failure: Infiltration of groundwater, following a
successful vacuum test as specified, should be considered good
evidence that the original test was in error or that subsequent failure
of the manhole has occurred. The Contractor will correct such
failures in a manner approved by the Engineer and at no cost to the
Owner should this occur within the I-year warranty period.
END OF SECTION
SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM
02722-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02821
CHAIN LINK FENCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
The extent of chain link fencing is indicated on the drawings. Provide fences and
gates complete, including all erection accessories, fittings and fastenings.
Installer must be experienced in fence installations and must examine conditions
under which fence and gates are to be installed. Notify the Engineer in writing of improper
conditions of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Do not proceed until final grading is completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. POSTS, RAILS AND BRACES
All structural and roll-formed shapes shall conform to provisions of ASTM A123 for
galvanized coating. All tubular members shall comply with provisions of ASTM
A120, Schedule 40, for weight and coating.
1. End, Corner and Pull Post: Fence up to and including 12'-0" in height: 3W'
x 3W' roll-formed corner section shall have a minimum bending strength of
452 pounds. (2.875" O.D., Schedule 40 Pipe with a minimum bending
strength of 381 pounds.)
2. Line Posts: Fabric up to 8'-0" in height: "C"-Section, Standard roll-formed,
1.875" x 1.625" with minimum bending strength of 245 pounds. (1.90" O.D.,
Schedule 40 Pipe with minimum bending of 117 pounds.)
3. Gate Posts:
a.
Gate leaves up to and including 6'-0" wide: 3W' x 3W' roll-formed
section (2.875" O.D., Schedule 40 pipe).
b.
Gate leaves over 6'-0" and up to and including 13'-0" wide: 4" O.D.
Schedule 40 pipe.
c.
Gate leaves over 13'-0" and up to and including 18'-0" wide: 6%"
O.D. Schedule 40 pipe.
d.
Gate leaves over 18'-0" wide: 8%" O.D. Schedule 40 pipe.
CHAIN LINK FENCING
02821-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Top Rail: 1.625" x 1.25" roll-formed section, with minimum bending
strength of 192 pounds. (1.660" O.D., Schedule 40 pipe, with minimum
bending strength of 202 pounds.
Furnish in manufacturer's standard lengths, of approximately 21 '0" with
couplings approximately 6" long for each joint, one coupling in each 5 shall
have expansion spring. Provide means for attaching top rail securely to each
gate, corner, pull and end posts. Top rail shall form continuous brace from
end-to-end to each run of fence.
5. Tension Wire: (In lieu of top rail and/or bottom of fabric) 7 gage galvanized
or aluminum coated coil spring wire.
6. Post Bracing Assembly: Shall match top rail. Brace rail assembly shall be
complete with 3fa diameter rod and adjustable take-up.
B. CHAIN LINK FABRIC
1. One piece of fabric widths for fences up to 12'0"-2" mesh, 6 fa., or 11 ga., as
indicated on contract drawings.
2. Selvage edges: Fabric 72 inches and over shall be knuckled at bottom
selvage and twisted and barbed at top.
3. Finishes: Heavy galvanized - 2.0 ounces zing per square foot, complying
with ASTM A392, Class TI or *aluminum coated - 0.40 ounces aluminum per
square foot, complying with ASTM A491, Class TI.
C. ACCESSORIES
1. All accessories, except tie wires and barbed sires shall be galvanized to
comply with ASTM A153.
2. Barbed Wire Supporting Arms: Heavy pressed steel, complete with
provisions for anchorage to tubular end, corner, and pull posts attaching 3-
rows of barbed wire to each arm. Barbed wire arms are not required on roll-
formed terminal posts. Single arms shall be integral with a post top weather
cap. Intermediate arms shall have hole for passage of top rail. Arms shall be
capable of withstanding, without failure, 250 lbs. downward pull at outermost
end of arm.
3. Barbed Wire: 2-strand, 121/2 ga. wire with 14 ga., 4 point round barbs spaced
approximately 5" O.c. finishes as follows:
Galvanized: ASTM A121, Class 3
Aluminized: ASTM A585, Class 2
CHAIN LINK FENCING
02821-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Post Tops: Pressed steel, or malleable iron, (Designed as aweathertight
closure cap for tubular posts.) Where top rail is used, provide tops to permit
passage of top rail.
5. Stretcher Bars: (For tubular end, corner, pull or gate posts only) One piece
lengths equal to full height of fabric with a minimum cross-section of 3/16" X
%" . Provide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post, and 2 for each
corner and pull post.
6. Stretcher Bar Bands: Heavy pressed steel, spaced not over 15" O.c. to secure
stretcher bars to tubular end, corner pull and gate post.
D. . GATES
1. Fabricate gate perimeter frames of 1.90" O.D. tubular members galvanized,
ASTM A120. Provide additional horizontal and vertical members to insure
proper gate operation and for attachment of fabric, hardware and accessories.
Assemble gate frames by welding or fittings and rivets for rigid connections.
Use same fabric as for fence, unless otherwise indicate. Use same fabric as
for fence, unless otherwise indicated. Install fabric with stretcher bars at
vertical edges, and tie at top and bottom edges. Attach stretcher bars to gate
frame at not more than 15" O.C. Attach hardware with rivets or by other
means which will provide security against removal or breakage. Provide
diagonal cross-bracing consisting of3fa" diameter adjustable length truss rods
on gates where necessary to provide frame rigidity without sag or twist.
a. Gate Hardware: Provide the following hardware and accessories for each
gate; finish - heavy galvanized:
b. Hinges: Pressed steel or malleable iron to suit gate size, non-lift-off-type,
offset to permit 180 F. gate opening. Provide one pair of hinges for each leaf.
c. Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side
of gate. Provide padlock eye as integral part of latch.
d. Keeper: Provide keeper for all vehicle gates, which automatically engages
the gate leaf and holds it in the open position until manually released.
e. Double Gates: Provide gate stops for all double gates, consisting of
mushroom type of flush plat with anchors. Set in concrete to engage the
center drop rod or plunger bar. Provide locking device and padlock eyes as
an integral part of the latch, requiring one padlock for locking both gate
leaves.
CHAIN LINK FENCING
02821-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f. Sliding Gates: Provide manufacturer's standard heavy-duty track, ball
bearing hanger sheaves, overhead framing, and supports, guides, stays,
bracing, and accessories as required.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL AND ACCESSORIES:
A. Wire Ties: For tying fabric to line posts, use 11 ga. steel wire clips for "C"-section
posts and a minimum 9 ga. aluminum wire ties for tubular posts, spaced 14" O.c.
For tying fabric to rails and braces, use 9 ga. aluminum wire ties spaced 24" O.c.
For tying fabric to tension wire, use 11 FA. hog rings spaced 24" O.c.
B. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of Portland cement complying with ASTM
C150, aggregates complying with ASTM C33 and clean water. Mix materials to
obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, using at
least 4 sacks of cement per cubic yard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Do not begin prior to completion of final grading. Drill holes for post footings in
firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes shall have a diameter equal to three times
the diameter of the post. Excavate hole depths approximately 3" deeper than post
bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36" in concrete base. Place concrete
around posts in a continuous pour, tamp for consolidation. Check each post for
vertical and top alignment.
1. Accessories: Set keepers, stops, sleeves and other accessories into c~:mcrete
as required.
2. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is
under proper tension.
3. Tension Wire: Install tension wires before stretching fabric and tie to each
post with ties or clips.
4. Fabric: Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric
on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in
tension after pulling force is released.
5. Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to posts with metal bands
spaced not over 15" O.c.
6. Barbed Wire: Install 3 parallel wires on each extension arm; on security side
of fence, unless otherwise shown. Pull wire taut.
CHAIN LINK FENCING
02821-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02930
GRASSING - BERMUDA
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers the furnishing of all labor and materials and the performance of all
work required to assure the establishment of a dense permanent cover of Bermuda grass
on all areas of the site disturbed by construction operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. The following material shall be as specified by the" Standard Specifications," published
by the State Department of Transportation of Georgia, latest edition.
Agriculture Lime .......................................... Article 882.02
Fertilizer ................................................. Article 891.01
Sod ..................................................... Article 890.03
Seed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Article B90.01
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEED BED PREPARATION
A. Final grades will be established as shown on the plans prior to any seed bed preparation.
Washes, low spots and hillocks or windrows will be evened and the bed will be smoothed
to facilitate uniform drainage after establishment of the turf. Graded surfaces will be
maintained in a smooth and even condition until the required cover is established.
B. After the areas to be seeded have been brought to an even and smooth grade, they shall
be thoroughly loosened to a depth of at least six (6) inches by plowing, discing,
harrowing, or other approved methods until the tillage is acceptable as suitable for
seeding. During tillage operation, the surface shall be cleared of all roots, cable, wire, or
other waste material which might hinder final grading, planting ,or subsequent
maintenance operations. Any operations of the Contractor shall be smoothed out before
seeding operations are begun.
3.2 FERTILIZATION
A. At least two soil samples per acre shall be taken by the Contractor and analyzed to
determine the suitability of the particular soil for planting. Fertilization and lime
application rates shall be set accordingly. The rates given in the following paragraphs
GRASSING BERMUDA
02930-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
shall be used for bidding purposes and differing quantities will become the basis for an
equitable adjustment in the contract price.
B. Fertilizer shall be distributed uniformly at a rate of 1500 pounds of commercial 6-12-12
analysis fertilizer per acre, and shall be incorporated into the soil to a depth of
approximately three (3) inches by discing, harrowing, or other approved methods. The
incorporation of fertilizer may be a part of the tillage operation specified above, or a part
of the hydro seeding procedure as described below.
C. Immediately following, or simultaneously with, the incorporation of fertilizer, lime shall
be distributed at the rate of 3000 pounds per acre and shall be incorporated into the soil
to a depth of at least three inches by discing, harrowing, or other acceptable methods. The
incorporation of lime along with the fertilizer may form a part of the tillage operation
specified above.
D. Not less than 30 days after completion of seeding, the Contractor shall furnish and apply
Nitrate of Soda or Ammonium Sulphate to the planted areas. Nitrate of Soda shall be a
commercial product, containing not less than 16 percent Nitrogen and ammonium
sulphate not less than 20 percent nitrogen. The Nitrogen fertilizer shall be uniformly
spread and distributed with approved equipment at a rate that will give not less than 60
pounds of available Nitrogen per acre. Other commercial types of nitrogenous material
may be substituted at the option ofthe Contractor. The time of application shall be limited
to the season of June through August.
3.3 PERMANENT SEEDING
A. Permanent grass cover will consist of Common Bermuda seeded in accordance with one
of the following methods:
(1) Between the dates of April 1 and June 1, Hulled Common Bermuda seed shall be
applied at a rate of 10 pounds of seed per acre.
(2) Between the dates of October 1 and March 1, Unhulled Common Bermuda seed shall
be applied at a rate of 10 pounds of seed per acre.
(3) If seeding is undertaken between September 15 and February 15, Unhulled Common
Bermuda seed shall be applied at a rate of 6 pounds of seed per acre simultaneously
with Rye seed at a rate of 28 pounds per acre.
B. Seed may be applied by means of a hydro seeder as other means approved by the Engineer.
C. Immediately after seeding operations have been completed, the areas shall be compacted
by means of a cultipacker, roller wood float, or other approved equipment sufficiently
weighted, or compacted by hand methods, to reduce air pockets to a minimum. The
complete planted area shall be left with a fIrm, even surface, free from abrupt humps and
hollows, and to the established grade.
GRASSING BERMUDA
02930-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. All areas planted to a permanent grass shall be uniformly mulched with hay or straw at the
rate of 2-1/2 tons per acre, except where hydroseeding is employed using a cellulose
mulch mixed with the seed and fertilizer.
3.4 TEMPORARY GRASS
Temporary grass shall be used when directed by the Engineer to control erosion where
permanent grassing cannot be planted.
A. Temporary grass shall be a quick growing species such as rye grass suitable to the area
and season. Seeding shall be done in accordance with the permanent grassing
requirements above, except that ground preparation shall be the minimum required to
provide a seed bed where further grading will be required. Areas that require no further
grading shall be prepared as described in "GROUND PREPARATION" above. Lime
shall be omitted unless the area will later be planted in permanent grass without further
grading, in which case lime shall be applied as described above. Fertilizer shall be applied
at the rate of 400 pounds per acre. Nitrogen shall be omitted.
B. In March or April of the following year, as soon as weather is suitable, all areas planted
in temporary grass which are owned by the City of Augusta shall be thoroughly plowed
up and grassed in accordance with the applicable permanent grassing method described
above.
C. MAINTENANCE: The Contractor shall erect necessary warning signs and barriers, mow
grassed areas, and repair or replace grassed areas failing to show a uniform growth of
grass or damaged by his operations, and shall otherwise maintain the grass until final
acceptance of the contract. Replacement of dried out or damaged grass shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE
A. Grassed areas will be accepted when a 95 percent cover by permanent grasses is obtained
and weeds are not dominant.
B. The work may be accepted in whole or in part as directed by the Engineer and the Owner.
END OF SECTION
GRASSING BERMUDA
02930-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03101
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION - CNIL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work included under this section will be all plain and reinforced concrete work of
every description throughout the site work portion of the project and including pavement
slabs resting on earth grade, curb and gutter, and storm and sanitary sewer structures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCED STEEL MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars meeting ASTM A-15 latest for open hearth,
intermediate grade, new billet bars, or ASTM A-16 latest for all rail steel bars. Bars shall
be free from flaws, cracks or other defects of rolling, shall be true to size and shape, and
shall be free from heavy dirt, paint, grease, oil or other destroyers of bond. They shall be
prefabricated to detail and delivered on the job plainly tagged and ready to set. Furnish
shop detail drawings, all according to ACI 315, latest, in quadruplicate and obtain
approval before fabricating bars.
B. All reinforcing steel will be unless otherwise noted herein, of size and spacing as called
for on the drawings.
C. All reinforcing when delivered to the job shall be systematically piled and kept free from
dirt or grease, should any reinforcement become dirty or greasy or objectionably rusty, it
shall be thoroughly cleaned before being placed in the work.
2.2 PORTLAND CEMENT MATERIALS
A. General: All cement used for structural and architectural concrete work shall be Portland
cement conforming to the American Society for Testing materials specificationC-150
(latest edition), Types I, or III, or air entrained cement ASTM C-175 (latest edition), Type
IA or IlIA.
B. Cement shall be delivered on the job in bags containing one cubic foot (approximately 94
lbs.) each (unless a special arrangement to use bulk cement has been developed.). Each
consignment of cement shall be so piled as to be segregated from every other consignment
and shall be housed in a waterproof shed and stored on a floor or platform above the
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION - CNIL
03101-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
general ground level and shall be well protected from dampness. No cement which has
partially hardened or been otherwise damaged shall be used on this job. Retempering of
cement shall not be permitted under any circumstances.
2.3 FINE AGGREGATE MATERIALS
A. Fine aggregate shall preferably be sand and particles shall be coarse, sharp and clean.
Limestone screenings, pulverized rock, or fine gravel will not be accepted. Sand shall be
free from dust, loam, dirt, vegetable matter, or any other foreign or deleterious material.
When dry, sand shall pass a screen having 3" square mesh and not more than 6 percent
shall pass a 100 mesh screen. Decantation tests may be made to limit the amount of loam.
2.4 COARSE AGGREGATE MATERIALS
A. Aggregate used in concrete work shall be either screened, crushed rock, or natural gravel,
washed and graded. In any case, coarse aggregate shall be regularly graded from a
maximum of 1" down to a minimum of 3 ", and shall be clean, hard and durable,free from
any long splintery pieces (or a maximum of 5% by weight), and free from dust, dirt,
vegetable or organic matter. Mixed aggregate will not be permitted, such as a crushed run
stone or bank run gravel, because of the uneven ratio of fine to coarse materials. Coarse
aggregates shall be cleaned, screened and regarded for uniformity.
2.5 AIR ENTRAINMENT
A. The concrete shall be air-entrained with air content from 3 percent to 5 percent total air
as determined by the method of ASTM C231. No other admixture is to be used without
prior approval of Engineer.
2.6 WATER
A. It is anticipated that tap-run water will be used for mixing concrete, but any water that is
potable shall be deemed suitable for this purpose.
2.7 WELDED WIRE FABRIC
A. Welded wire fabric shall be rectangularly welded wire of gauges and spacing specified
and shall be delivered on the job in rolls and there straightened and placed. Tags
designating the wire size and spacing shall be left on each roll until ready for use. Welded
wire fabric shall be with end laps of one full mesh tip to tip for longitudinal selvage wires
and wiring all laps securely together. Tuck ends of welded wire mesh well down into
edge beams or walls. Do not leave unreinforced border strips.
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION - CIVIL
03101-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE
A. The sub grade shall be well drained and compacted and prepared in accordance with other
sections of specifications.
3.2 FORMS
A. All forms, including those for edge slabs, shall be constructed to accurate dimension of
smooth, dressed and seasoned lumber, which shall be free of defects, knots, etc.
B. All forms shall be substantially and solidly placed to prevent movement or deflection.
C. All forms shall be carefully plumbed immediately before the concrete is poured and shall
be constantly checked during time of pouring, so that movements and deflections may be
observed and corrected.
D. The forms shall be constructed that the finished concrete surface when forms are removed,
shall be free of honeycombs.
E. The forms shall be vigorously rapped during the placing of the concrete to eliminate air
pockets, honeycombs, etc.
F. All projecting corners shall be chamfered. Wood for all chamfered corners, etc., shallbe
clear white pine. Earth trenches may not be used without forms unless by the special
permission of the Engineer.
3.3 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT
A. Placing of reinforcing shall be done carefully and accurately and exactly as detailed, and
all properly secured against displacement during the pouring of concrete. All bars shall
be evenly spaced and all work shall be well wired in place with non-slip ties and properly
supported. Where reinforcing rests upon earth grade, it shall be properly and securely
wired together at each intersection and supported on brick bats to permit concrete to flow
under the same.
B. Before being covered with concrete, all reinforcement shall be adjusted to proper height
and location and maintained so until covered.
3.4 CONCRETE
A. Measuring Concrete Materials: The method of measuring the materials including water
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION - CIVIL
03101-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
for concrete or mortar, shall be one which will insure separate and uniform proportion of
each of the materials at all times, controlling by weight.
B. Proportion: Conforming to ACI Standards, concrete shall be proportioned by the water-
cement ratio method. The proportioning of materials shall be based on the requirements
for a plastic and workable mix with the use of not less than 52 sacks of cement per cubic
yard and not more than 6 2 gallons of water per sack of cement, including the surface
water carried by the aggregate. The proportion of fine to coarse aggregate shall be
adjusted to produce maximum workability, but in no case shall the ratio of fine to coarse
aggregate be outside the limits of a to 2 and the coarse aggregate 2 to b of the total fine
and coarse aggregate. Concrete shall be placed with a slump of approximately 4" if
manually spaded into place and 3" if internal vibrators are used.
C. Concrete shall develop an ultimate compressive strength of at least 3,000 pounds per
square inch in standard 6" x 12" cylinders at 28 days moist cured in the laboratory.
D. Placing Concrete: Concrete shall be placed in a manner that will permit the most
thorough compacting and shall be worked into all the recesses. Concrete shall be placed
in its final position as soon as possible after mixing and must be in place within 12 hours
after the water has been added to the dry materials. It should be placed in one continuous
operation from construction joint to construction joint.
E. Joints: Joints shall be formed, not simply stopped off, and such forms shall generally be
perpendicular to stress lines. Construction joints are best made at joints of minimum
shear, as for example midspan of slabs, joist, and beams. If joints are made at any other
point, the Engineer will design a shear-key of concrete with crossed reinforcing bars to
develop the shear.
F. Internal vibration is desirable, providing that it is not overdone. Care should be taken to
keep the vibrators off the reinforcing steel. If internal vibrators are not available,
handspading of the concrete into all recesses will be required.
G. Where work is stopped so that the concrete has hardened before placing is resumed, the
surface shall be left level or square by roughened and covered with wet burlap. When
starting again to place, clean the surface of all foreign matter and 2 laitance, slush with a
thin layer of mortar mix made with one part cement and two parts of sand. Furnish and
set dowels in all construction joints as called for on the plans or as directed by the
Engineer.
3.5 FINISHING
A. All floors shall be finished as follows:
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION - CIVIL
03101-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Interior floor slabs shall have a "Steel Troweled Finish."
2. Exterior slabs, sidewalks, curbs and pads shall have a "Broom or Belt Finish. "
3. Ramps shall be finished with "Detectable Warnings" as specified in AD A (American
with Disabilities Act) paragraph 4.29.
(a) Provide contrasting color with adjoining surfaces.
4. Exterior pasvement, drive or parking lot approaches shall have a uniform gritty
texture produced by two (2) passes of a damp burlap or cotton fabric, unless otherwise
directed by local or state authorities.
5. Light pole bases shall have an architectural concrete "As-Cast" finish, patches shall
match surrounding color and texture.
6. Exterior Garden Shop concrete floor slab finish shall be "Broom Finish."
3.6 CURING
A. All concrete trim shall be protected by wet burlap or canvas covering from sun, wind, and
rain and this shall be frequently wetted in dry and hot weather so that the entire surface
is kept wet for a period of one week, or liquid curing compound satisfactory to the
Engineer shall be used, applied as directed.
3.7 PROTECTION FROM WEATHER
A. All concrete work shall be discontinued during freezing weather. All work recently built
must be properly protected. All work injured by the weather must be taken down and
rebuilt at this contractor's expense.
3.8 CLEANING
A. On completion of this contract, clean down all exposed concrete work and remove from
the premises form lumber, cement sacks, scutan paper and other debris caused by this
work.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION - CIVIL
03101-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic
American Concrete Institute (ACI)
ACI30I-99
ACI304R-00
ACI305R-99
ACI306R-88
ACI318-02
Specifications for Structural Concrete
Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete
Hot Weather Concreting
Cold Weather Concreting
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A185-0l
ASTM A497-01
ASTM A615-01
ASTM A996-01a
ASTM A 706/
A706M-01
ASTM C31/
C31M-00e1
Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,
Deformed, for Concrete
Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement ~
Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement
Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ASTM C33-02
ASTM C94/
C94M-00e2
ASTMC143/
C143M-00
ASTM C150-02
ASTM C171-97a
ASTM C172-99
ASTM C173/
C173M-01 e1
Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
Standard Specification for Portland Cement
Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Volumetric Method
ASTM C231-97e1 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by
the Pressure Method
ASTM C260-01
ASTM C309-98a
ASTM C494/
C494M-99ae1
ASTM C595-02
ASTM C618-01
ASTM C920-02
ASTM C989-99
ASTM Cll16-02
Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete
Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete
Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for
Use in Concrete and Mortars
Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete
ASTM D 1190-97 Standard Specification for Concrete J oint Sealer, Hot-Applied Elastic
Type
ASTM D1751-99 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and
Resilient Bituminous Types)
ASTM D1752-84
(R 1996)el
Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction
Army Corps of Engineers (COE)
Handbook for Concrete and Cement
COE CRD-
C572
1974 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop
COE CRD-
C621
1989 Non-shrink Grout
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. In the ACI publications referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be considered to
be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" has been substituted for "should" wherever it
appears.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit to the Architect the following:
Certificates of Compliance:
Cement
Aggregates
Admixtures
Reinforcement
Joint filler
J oint sealant
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1. CONCRETE:
A. Contractor Mix Design: ACI 301, except as modified herein. Concrete shall have a 28
day minimum compressive strength as follows:
Electrical Building Footings: 3000 psi
Wet Well Walls and Slabs: 5000 psi
Slump shall not exceed 5 inches in accordance with ASTM C143. Provide ASTM C33
aggregate Size No. 57 or 67 and 4 to 6 percent air entrainment for concrete exposed to
freeze-thaw conditions. Accomplish air-entrainment using an air-entraining admixture.
B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: ASTM C94, except as modified herein. Ready-mixed
concrete is defined in this specification as concrete produced regularly by a commercial
establishment and delivered to the purchaser in the plastic state.
2.2 MATERIALS:
A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type lor TI or ASTM C595, Type IP (MS) or IS (MS) blended
cement, except as modified herein. The blended cement shall consist of a mixture of
ASTM C150 cement and one of the following materials: ASTM C618 pozzolan or fly
ash, or ASTM C989 ground iron blast furnace slag. The pozzolan/fly ash content shall
not exceed 25 percent or the ground iron blast furnace slag 50 percent by weight of the
total cementitious material. For exposed concrete, use one manufacturer for each type of
cement, ground slag, fly ash, and pozzolan.
Fly Ash and Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Type N, F, or C, except that the maximum
allowable loss on ignition shall be 6 percent for Type N and F. Add with cement.
Ground Iron Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C989, Grade 120
B. Water: Water shall be potable.
C. Aggregates: ASTM C33; obtain aggregates for exposed concrete surfaces from one
source. Aggregates shall not contain any substance that may be deleteriously reactive
with the alkalis in the cement.
D. Fiber Reinforcement: ASTM C1116 for fiber reinforcement. Polypropylene fibers
engineered and designed for secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs, complying with
ASTM C1116, Type III shall not be less than 3/4 inch.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bilco Fibers, Cormix Construction Chemicals
Durafiber, Durafiber Corporation
Fiberstrand 100, Euclid Chemical Company
Fibermesh, Fibermesh Company, Div. Synthetic Industries, Inc.
Forta, Forta Corp.
Grace Fibers, W.R. Grace & Company
Polystrand, Metalerete Industries
E. Admixtures: ASTM C260 for air-entrained concrete. ASTM C494 for water-reducing
(Type A, D, or E), accelerating (Type C), and retarding (Type B or D), to be used only
when approved. Calcium chloride shall not be used as an admixture.
F. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A706/A706M, Grade 60 or ASTM A615, Grade 60.
G. Materials for Curing Concrete: Impervious Sheeting: ASTM C171; waterproof paper,
clear or white polyethylene sheeting, or polyethylene-coated burlap.
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound: ASTM C309, white-pigmented, Type 2, free of
paraffin or petroleum. Do not use when finished appearance is important. Use where
approved only.
Liquid Chemical Sealer-Hardener Compound: Compound shall not contain petroleum
resins or waxes. Do not use on exterior slabs exposed to freezing conditions. Compound
shall not reduce the adhesion of resilient flooring, tile, paint, roofing, water-proofing, or
other material to be applied to the concrete.
H. Expansion-Joint Filler: ASTMD1751 or ASTMD1752, 1/4-inch thick, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Joint Sealants:
1. Horizontal Surfaces (3 percent slope, maximum):
Outside Buildings: ASTM D 1190
Inside Buildings: ASTM D 1190
2. Vertical Surfaces (greater than 3 percent slope):
ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25
PART3 EXECUTION
3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING:
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Delivery: Do not deliver concrete until ready for concrete placement.
B. Storage: Store concrete aggregates to prevent contamination or segregation. Store
reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or racks raised above
the ground to avoid excessive rusting. Protect from contaminants such as grease,
oil, and dirt. Provide for accurate identification after bundles are broken and tags
removed.
C. Forms: ACI 301 - Set forms true to line and grade and make mortar-tight. Chamfer
above grade exposed joints, edges, and external corners of concrete 3/4 inch, unless
otherwise indicated. Before concrete placement, coat the contact surfaces of forms with a
non-staining form coating compound. Do not use mineral oil on formed surfaces to be
painted. Prevent concrete damage during form removal. Concrete for footings may be
placed in excavations without forms upon inspection and approval by the Structural
Engineer. Excavation width shall be a minimum of 4 inches greater than finished
dimensions indicated on the contract documents.
3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. ACI 301 - Provide bars, wire fabric, and other reinforcing materials, including wire
ties, supports, and other devices necessary to install and secure the reinforcement.
B. Cover and Splicing: ACI 301 - unless otherwise indicated.
C. Setting Miscellaneous Material: Place and secure anchors and bolts, pipe sleeves,
conduits, and other such items in position before concrete placement. Plumb anchor
bolts and check location and elevation. Temporarily fill voids in sleeves with
readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete.
D. Construction Joints: ACI 301 - Continue reinforcement across joints, unless
otherwise indicated. Fusion weld waterstop splices.
E. Expansion Joints and Contraction Joints: ACI 301 - For slabs on grade, provide at
edges of interior floor slabs, adjacent to walls, and as indicated. Make expansion
joints 114-inch wide, except as indicated otherwise. Fill expansion joints not
exposed to weather with preformed joint material. Seal joints exposed to weather
with joint sealant. Do not extend reinforcement or other embedded metal items
bonded to the concrete through any expansion joint, unless an expansion sleeve is
used. Provide contraction joints, either formed or saw cut or cut with ajointing tool
to the indicated depth after the surface has been finished. Sawed joints shall be
completed within 4 to 8 hours after concrete placement. Protect joints from
intrusion of foreign matter.
3.3 MEASURING, MIXING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING CONCRETE
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. ACI 304, except as modified herein. ASTM C94; machine mix concrete and
provide mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready mix concrete.
Begin mixing within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregates.
Place concrete within 90 minutes of either addition of mixing water to cement and
aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates if the air temperature is less than 85
degrees F. Reduce mixing time to 60 minutes if the air temperature is greater than
85 degrees F. Additional water may be added, provided that both the specified
maximum slump and water-cement ratio are not exceeded. If the entrained air
content falls below the specified limit, add a sufficient quantity of admixture to
bring the entrained air content within the specified limits. Do not place concrete
when weather conditions prevent proper placement and consolidation in uncovered
areas during periods of precipitation or in standing water. Prior to placing concrete,
remove dirt, construction debris, and water from within the forms. Consolidate
concrete slabs greater than 4 inches in depth with high frequency, internal,
mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading and tamping.
Consolidate concrete slabs 4 inches or less in depth by tamping, spading, and
settling with a heavy leveling straight edge.
B. Cold Weather: ACI 306R - Provide and maintain 50 degrees F minimum concrete
temperature. Do not place concrete when the ambient temperature is below 40
degrees F. Cover concrete and provide with a source of heat sufficient to maintain
50 degrees F minimum while curing.
C. Hot Weather: ACI 305R - Concrete temperature from initial mixing through final
cure shall not exceed 90 degrees F. Cool ingredients before mixing, or substitute
chip ice for part of required mixing water or use other suitable means to control
concrete temperature to prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. Shade the
fresh concrete and start curing as soon as the surface of the fresh concrete is
sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage.
3.4 SURFACE FINISHES
A. ACI 301 for repair and finish, unless otherwise specified. Slope floors uniformly to
drains where drains are provided. After troweling is completed, apply a liquid
chemical sealer-hardener to interior slabs that do not receive floor covering.
B. Defects: Repair formed surfaces by removing minor honeycombs, pits greater than
1 square inch surface area or 0.25 inch maximum depth, or otherwise defective
areas. Provide edges perpendicular to the surface and patch with non-shrink grout.
Patch tie holes and defects when the forms are removed. Concrete with extensive
honeycomb (including exposed steel reinforcement, cold joints, entrapped debris,
separated aggregate, or other defects) which affect the serviceability or structural
strength will be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval
of corrective action prior to repair. The surface of the concrete shall not vary more
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
than the allowable tolerances of ACI 301. Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in
appearance and finished to a smooth form finish, unless otherwise specified.
C. Floated Finish: Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain
proper contour, grade, and elevation before bleedwater appears. Permit concrete to
attain a set sufficient for floating and supporting the weight of the finisher and
equipment. If bleedwater is present prior to floating the surface, drag the excess
water off or remove by absorption with porous materials. Do not use dry cement to
absorb bleedwater. Surface shall be levelto within 1/4 inch in 10 feet where floor
drains are not provided.
D. Steel Troweled Finish: First, provide a floated finish. When slab has attained a
proper set, trowel to a smooth, hard, dense finish. Finished surfaces shall be free of
trowel marks, uniform in texture, flat within 0.01 foot (approximately 1/8 inch) in
10 feet. Hand-finish portions of the slab not accessible to power finishing
equipment (e.g., edges, corners) to match the remainder of the slab. Power trowel
once and finally hand trowel where a finished floor covering (e.g., tile, carpet) is
specified. Power trowel twice and finally hand trowel for exposed concrete floors.
E. Broomed Finished: Provide for exterior walks, platforms, patios, and ramps, unless
otherwise indicated. Provide a floated finish, and then finish with a flexible bristle
broom. Permit surface to harden sufficiently to retain the scoring or ridges. Broom
transverse to traffic or at right angles to the slope of the slab.
F. Pavement Finish: Screed the concrete with a template advanced with a combined
longitudinal and crosswise motion. Maintain a slight surplus of concrete ahead of
the template. After screeding, float the concrete longitudinally. Use a straight edge
to check slope and flatness; correct and refloat as necessary. Obtain final finish by
belting. Lay belt flat on the concrete surface and advance with a sawing motion;
continue until a uniform but gritty non-slip surface is obtained. Round edges and
joints with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch.
3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. ACI 301 - Protect concrete from injurious action by sun, rain, wind, flowing water,
frost, mechanical injury, tire marks, and oil stains. Do not allow concrete to dry out
from time of placement until the expiration of the curing period. Forms may be
removed 48 hours after concrete placement.
B. Moist Curing: Provide for the removal of water without erosion or damage to the
structure.
C. Ponding or Immersion: Continually immerse the concrete throughout the curing
period. Water temperature shall not be higher than 20 degrees F more than the
temperature of the concrete. For temperature between 40 and 50 degrees F, increase
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the curing period by 50 percent.
D. Fog Spraying or Sprinkling: Provide uniform and continuous application of water
throughout the curing period. For temperatures between 40 and 50 degrees F,
increase the curing period by 50 percent.
E. Pervious Sheeting: Cover the entire surface of the concrete with two thicknesses of
wet sheeting. Mats shall be at least as long as the width of the surface to be cured.
During application, do not drag the mats over the finished concrete or over mats
already placed. Completely cover surface and edges of the concrete, with a 6-inch
overlap over adjacent mats. Wet mats thoroughly and keep continuously wet
throughout the curing period.
F. Impervious-Sheeting Curing: Wet the entire exposed surface thoroughly with a fine
spray of water and cover with impervious sheeting throughout the curing period.
Lay sheeting directly on the concrete surface and overlap edges 12 inches minimum.
Provide sheeting not less than 18 inches wider than the concrete surface to be
cured. Secure edges and transverse laps to form closed joints. Repair torn or
damaged sheeting or provide new sheeting.
G. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound Curing: Seal or cover joint openings prior to
application of curing compound. Prevent curing compound from entering the joint.
Provide and maintain compound on the concrete surface throughout the curing
period. Provide a continuously wetted, permeable cover as specified in paragraph
entitled, "Hot Weather."
H. Application: Unless the manufacturer recommends otherwise, apply compound
immediately after the surface loses its water sheen and has a dull appearance, and
before joints are sawed. Mechanically agitate curing compound thoroughly during
use. Use approved power-spraying equipment to uniformly apply two coats of
compound in a continuous operation. The total coverage for the two coats shall be
200 square feet maximum per gallon of undiluted compound, unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer's written instructions. The compound shall form
a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel. Immediately
apply an additional coat of compound to areas where the film is defective. Respray
concrete surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound
application.
1. Protection of Treated Surfaces: Prohibit foot and vehicular traffic and other sources
of abrasion for not less than 72 hours after compound application. Maintain
continuity of the coating for the entire curing period and immediately repair any
damage.
J. Liquid Chemical Sealer-Hardener Curing: Provide for interior floors that do not
receive a floor covering, or in lieu ofliquid membrane-forming compound curing for
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5 SAMPLING AND TESTING
A. Sampling: ASTM C172 - Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests
specified.
B. Testing:
1. Slump Tests: ASTM C143 - Take samples during concrete placement. The
maximum slump may be increased as specified with the addition of an
approved admixture provided that the water-cement ratio is not exceeded.
Perform tests at commencement of concrete placement and for each batch
(minimum) or every 10 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete.
11. Air Content: ASTM C173 or ASTM C231 - Test air-entrained concrete for air
content at the same frequency as specified for slump tests.
111. Compressive Strength Tests: Make five test cylinders for each set of tests in
accordance with ASTM C31. Test two cylinders at 7 days, two cylinders at 28
days, and hold one cylinder in reserve. Samples for strength tests shall be
taken not less than once a day, or less than once for each 50 cubic yards of
concrete, nor less than once for each 5000 square feet of surface area for slabs
or walls. For the entire project, there shall be no less than five sets of samples
taken and strength tests performed for each mix design of concrete placed.
Each strength test result shall be the average of two cylinders from the same
concrete sample tested at 28 days. If the average of any three consecutive
strength test results is less than the specified design strength, or if any strength
test result falls below the specified design strength by more than 500 psi, take a
minimum of three ASTM C42 core samples from the in-place work
represented by the low test cylinder results and test. Concrete represented by
core test shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of three cores
is equal to at least 85 percent of the specified design strength and if no single
core is less than 75 percent of the specified design strength. Locations
represented by erratic core strengths shall be retested. Remove concrete not
meeting strength criteria and provide new acceptable concrete. Repair core
holes with non-shrink grout. Match color and finish of adjacent concrete.
END OF SECTION
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
Submittals:
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product
indicated.
Masonry Unit Certification: The unit manufacturer shall certify that the units delivered to
the job site meet the requirements specified herein and shall submit test reports to the
Architect from each lot furnished. The reports shall give compressive strength in #/sq. in.;
water absorption in #/cu. ft.; moisture content in % of total absorption.
Samples for initial selection purposes of the following:
Unit masonry samples in small-scale form showing full extent of colors and textures
available for each different exposed masonry unit required.
Masonry mortar samples showing full extent of colors available.
Quality Assurance:
Single Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform
texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics,
from one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or
visually related surfaces.
Single Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform
quality, including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitous
component and from one source and producer for each aggregate.
Retain mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed masonry work.
When directed, demolish mock-ups and remove from site.
Delivery, Storage, And Handling:
Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Store and handle masonry units to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion or other causes.
Limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units during delivery and until time of
installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual
relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau Station nearest project site.
Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in dry location. Cover with
waterproof tarpaulins. Deliver and store materials in original, unbroken packages and
containers, with manufacturer's label thereon, to prevent damage and permit identification.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained. Store
aggregates to prevent inclusion of foreign materials.
Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent deterioration by corrosion and
accumulation of dirt.
Project Conditions:
Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof sheeting at
end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in
place.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls
or columns.
Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns.
Staining: Prevent grout, mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed
or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of
coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.
Cold Weather Protection:
Do not lay masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. on a falling
thermometer, or when it appears probable that temperatures below 40 degrees F. will be
encountered before mortar has set. When mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F., or
that temperature or lower is forecast to occur within 48 hours, make provisions for heating
UNIT MASONRY
04200-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
and protecting masonry materials and work from freezing for 72 hours after laying masonry.
Heat and maintain temperature of masonry materials to at least 40 degrees F. but not more
than 160 degrees F.
Heat and maintain uniform air temperature above 40 degrees F. on both sides of masonry
work. Use fireproof protective coverings and approved UL space heaters.
Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully applying heat until top surface
is dry to the touch.
Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Concrete Masonry Units:
General: Comply with referenced standards and other requirements indicated below
applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required.
Provide special shapeswhere required for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
Provide square-edged units for outside corners, except where indicated as bullnose.
Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exterior
exposed units.
Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that
does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent,
when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent
manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended
to 24 hours, show no visible water or leak on the back of test specimen.
Available Products:
Addiment Incorporated; Block Plus W -10.
Grace Construction Products, a unit of W.R. Grace & Co. - Conn.;
Dry-Block
Master Builders, Inc,; Rheopel.
Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below
for size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances
UNIT MASONRY
04200-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
specified in the applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units.
Concrete Masonry Units: Shot Blast Units Manufactured to specified
dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by
nominal lengths indicated on drawings.
Provide Type 1, moisture-controlled units.
Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture for interior conditions,
unless otherwise indicated.
Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90, Grade N, and as follows:
Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area
compressive strength of 1900 psi.
Weight Classification: Lightweight. Aggregate shall be 100% lightweight
material and shall not contain coal cinder, bottom ash or similar waste products.
Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8"
high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual) x thicknesses indicatedon the Drawings (4", 6",8", &
12").
Mortar Materials:
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, except Type III may be used for cold weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar
color.
Masonry Cement:
ASTM C 91.
Hydrated Lime:
ASTM C 207, Type S.
Aggregate:
ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate
graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.
Water-Repellent Admixutre: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by
same manufacturer.
Water:
Clean and potable.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Coarse Masonry Grout Materials:
Portland Cement:
ASTM C150-77, Type 1.
Sand:
ASTM C144-76.
Coarse Aggregate:
ASTM C33, GA. D.O.T. #87 stone or pea gravel, 1/2"
maxImum.
Water:
Clean and potable.
Joint Reinforcement:
Materials: .. Comply with requirements indicated below for basic materials and with
requirements indicated under each form of joint reinforcement for size and other
characteristics:
Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire.
Wire Finishes: Provide the following wire finish for the application indicated:
Mill Galvanized ASTM 641 Class 1 (0.4 oz. zinc coating per sq. ft.) for all interior
concrete masonry unit walls.
Hot Dipped Galvanized ASTM A 153 Class B 2 (1.5 oz. zinc coating per sq. ft.) for
all exterior masonry cavity walls.
Description: Provide welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods
and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10', with prefabricated corner and
tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below:
Width: Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths of approximately 2" less
than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to provide mortar coverage of
not less than 5/8" on joint faces exposed to exterior and 1/2" elsewhere.
Wire Diameter for Side and Cross Rods: 9 Gauge.
For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods:
Truss design with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16" O.c.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
UNIT MASONRY
04200-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Single- Wythe Masonry
AA600 "Block Truss", AAWire Products Co.
"Truss", Duro- W al, Inc.
"Lox All Truss Mesh", HB (Hohmann & Barnard), Inc.
"Truss", National Wire Products Corp.
Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories:
Non-Metallic Expansion Joint Strips: Premolded, flexible cellular neoprene rubber filler
strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade RE41E1, capable of compression up to 35%,
of width and thickness indicated.
Premolded Control Joint Strips: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash
block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
Styrene-butadiene rubber compound complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation
2AA-805.
Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,
Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt felt).
Masonry Cleaners:
Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength general purpose cleaner designed for new
masonry surfaces of type indicated; composed of blended organic and inorganic acids
combined with special wetting systems and inhibitors; expressly approved for intended use
by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
"Sure Klean" No. 600 Detergent; ProSoCo, Inc.
Mortar And Grout Mixes:
General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water repellant agents, anti-freeze compounds or other admixtures,
unless otherwise indicated.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitous, water and aggregates in a mechanical
batch mixer; comply with referenced ASTM standards for mixing time and water content.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types
of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated.
Use Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact with earth, and where
indicated.
Use Type S mortar for exterior, above-grade loadbearing and non-Ioadbearing walls;
for interior loadbearing walls; and for other applications where another type is not
indicated.
Groutfor Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for grout for use in construction of
reinforced and nonreinforced unit masonry. Use grout of consistency indicated or if not
otherwise indicated, of coarse consistency at time of placement which will completely fill
all spaces intended to receive grout. Grout used shall be the following material parts by
volume:
Material
Parts by Volume
Portland Cement
1
Fine Aggregate (Sand)
2-1/4 to 3
Coarse Aggregate (pea gravel or
crushed stone, 1/2" max.)
1 to 2
Water
Sufficient to cause the mixture
to flow readily, without segregation
Materials are to be proportionally mixed, within the limits shown above, to produce a grout
with a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi at 28 days.
Use liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units,
containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Examination:
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit
masonry.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of unit masonry.
Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections
prior to installation.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Installation, General:
Do not wet concrete masonry units.
Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and other coatings from
reinforcing.
Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of other trades. Provide not less
than 8" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent
chases and recesses.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry work. After
installation of equipment, complete masonry work to match work immediately adjacent to
the opening.
Cut masonry units using motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut
units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size units
without cutting where possible.
Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units.
Construction Tolerances:
Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arrises do not
exceed 1/4" in 10', or 3/8" in a story height not to exceed 20', nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For
external corners, expansion joints, control joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed
1/4" in any story or 20' maximum, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of head
joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 10', 1/2" maximum.
Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 1/2"
in 40' or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor
elements in 10' or 1/16" within width of a single unit.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plain and related portion of
columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40'
or more.
Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from
dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4" nor plus 1/2".
Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/8", with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2". Do not exceed head joint
thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8".
Laying Masonry Walls:
Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint
widths and to accurately locate opening, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid
the use ofless-than-half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations.
Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with courses accurately
spaced and coordinated with other work.
Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown or, if not shown, lay in
running bond with vertical j oint in each course centered on units in courses above and below.
Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not
less than 2". Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with
les's than nominal 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back l/2-unit length in each course; do not tooth.
Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required) and remove loose
masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
Built-in Work: As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections
of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless
otherwise indicated.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in or attached to cores of hollow masonry
units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.
Fill cores in hollow masonry units with grout 3 courses (24") under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
Mortar Bedding And Jointing:
UNIT MASONRY
04200-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face
shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns
and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete
or grout. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar
bed including areas under cells.
Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond
alignment. If not shown, lay walls with 3/8" joints.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other
materials, unless otherwise indicated.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound
corners or jambs to shift adjacent stretcher units which have been set in position. If
adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar.
Placing Grout:
Use grout to fill vertical cells of concrete masonry units (CMU) where shown or specified
to be filled and/or reinforced on the Drawings. Use grout to fill bond beams of concrete
masonry units (CMU). Fills cells of CMU wall to avoid any pockets or disproportionate
settlement of the grout.
Do not retemper grout. Use no grout after setting has begun or after 2-1/2 hours of initial
mIXIllg.
In lieu of grout, 3000 psi concrete may be used to fill all reinforced masonry cells.
Structural Bonding Of Masonry:
Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints. Install
at not more than 16" o.c. vertically.
Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless otherwise
shown.
Provide continuity at corners with prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry
bonding.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at
juncture, provide same type of bonding specified above and as follows:
Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement using prefabricated "T" units.
Intersecting Load-bearing Walls: If carried up separately, block or tooth vertical joint with
8" maximum offsets and provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" o.c.
vertically, or omit blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2'-0" o.c.
vertically. Form anchors of galvanized steel not less than 1-1/2" x 1/4" x 2'-0" long with
ends turned up not less than 2" or with cross-pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed
ends in mortar-filled cores.
Non-bearing Interior Partitions: Build wall to height of 8" min. above finish ceiling unless
shown otherwise.
Masonry-Cell Insulation:
Pour granular insulation into the cores of all exterior hollow masonry unit walls as shown
to fill void spaces completely. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at
extremities of each pour area. Close ports after complete coverage has been confirmed.
Limit fall of insulation to one story in height, but not to exceed 20'-0". The insulation shall
be poured into the wall at any convenient interval. Wall section under doors and windows
shall be filled before sills are placed.
All holes and openings in the wall through which insulation can escape shall be permanently
sealed or caulked prior to installation of the insulation. Non-corrosive screening shall be
used in all weep holes.
Horizontal Joint Reinforcement:
General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Installlongitudinal
side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" exterior side of
walls, 1/2" elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6".
Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise
indicated.
Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically noted to be
omitted.
Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T"
sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at
returns offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Space continuous horizontal reinforcement as follows:
For single-wythe walls, space reinforcement at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise
indicated.
Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint
reinforcement placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, immediately
above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum
of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints.
In addition to wall reinforcement, provide additional reinforcement at openings as
required to comply with the above.
Control And Expansion Joints:
General: Install control and expansion joins in unit masonry where indicated. Build in
related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement
joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.
Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:
Fit bond breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of
control joint. Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces.
Form expansion joints in concrete masonry as follows:
Build in joint fillers where indicated.
Form open joint of width indicated but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of
sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." Maintain joint
free and clear of mortar.
Lintels:
Install steel lintels where indicated.
Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 2'-0" for block
size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or
formed-in-place masonry lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation.
Temporarily support formed-in-Iace lintels.
For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintel units
with reinforcement bars placed as shown filled with coarse grout.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Flashing Of Masonry Work:
General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at or above shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other
obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated.
Prepare masonry suifaces so that they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with
mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive/sealant/tape as recommended by flashing
manufacturer before covering with mortar.
Install flashings as follows:
At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at
each end. Extend flashing from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the
outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches, and through the inner wythe to within
1/2 inches of the interior face of the wall in exposed masonry.
Cut off flashing flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed.
Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry
immediately above ledges and embedded flashings and as follows:
Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. max.
Field Quality Control:
Testing Frequency: Tests and evaluations listed in this article will be performed during
construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
Grout compressive strength will be sampled and tested per ASTM C 1019.
Repair, Pointing, And Cleaning:
Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise
damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners, openings and adjacent
work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of sealants.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-13
I
I
1
I'
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
1
1
I
I
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows:
Remove large mortar particleiJy hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before
proceeding with cleaning of masonry. Apply acidic cleaner in compliance with
directions of cleaner manufacturer.
Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film or waterproof
masking tape.
Saturate wall suifaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners
promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to
Installer, which ensures unit masonry work being without damage and deterioration at time
of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
UNIT MASONRY
04200-14
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
I
1
1
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A304
Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Bars
Subject to End-Quench Hardenability Requirements.
ASTM C150-02
Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C404-97
Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. This Section covers fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on
drawings including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of
members, typical connections, and types of steel required.
B. General:
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
C. Product Data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for the
following products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show
compliance with specifications (including specified standards).
1. High-strength stainless steel bolts (each type), including nuts and washers.
2. Non-Shrink grout.
D. Shop drawings shall include complete details and schedules for fabrication and
assembly of structural steel members, procedures, diagrams, and shall identify the
specific product, list all design criteria, list all material types and paint specifications.
1. Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.
Indicate welds by standard A WS symbols and show size, length, and type of
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-1
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
each weld.
2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor
bolts and other anchorages to be installed by others.
3. Shop drawings shall show all connection details. Connection details and
design calculations for all connections not specifically detailed on the
drawings shall be designed, signed and sealed by a registered professional
engineer licensed by the State of Georgia.
4. Fabrication shall not commence until shop drawings have been marked
reviewed by the structural engineer.
5 . Welder's Certification:
Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily
passed A WS qualification tests within the previous 12 months.
6. Bolting and Welding:
Inspection and test reports shall be reported in writing to the Owner,
Engineer, and Contractor.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards:
Comply with provisions of the following, except as otherwise indicated:
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Code of Standard Practice
for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including
"Commentary. "
B. Qualifications for Welding Work:
1. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with A WS
"Qualification" requirements.
2. If re-certification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor's
responsibility.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-2
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-
place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay work.
c.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel
members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. Ifbolts and nuts
become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use.
D.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage
to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or
structures as directed.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General:
For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use only materials that are
smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by
grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and applying surface
finishes.
B. Stainless Steel Plate and Angle Shapes:
ASTM A304
C. Steel Pipe:
ASTM A304
D. Anchor Bolts:
Hilti HIT, Stainless, w/HY150 Adhesive or Approved Equal
E. Stainless Steel Fastener Bolts:
ASTM A316 stainless steel bolts and nuts. Provide either hexagonal or square heads
and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for exposed connections.
F. Electrodes for Welding:
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. Comply with A WS CodeCement Grout:
Portland cement (ASTM C150, Type I or Type ill) and clean, uniformly graded,
natural sand (ASTM C404, Size No.2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts
sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
H. Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:
Premixed, nonmetallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica
sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-
reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly:
Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible.
Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as
indicated on final shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where
indicated. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for
delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of
materials
B. Connections:
1. Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.
2. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections
are indicated.
3. Provide threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections.
4. All connections, bolt field and shop, shall be designed to support one-half the
total uniform load capacity shown in the tables of uniform load constants,
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Part 2 of the Manual of Steel Construction, unless specific connections,
additional forces or reactions are shown on drawings.
5. Bolted Construction:
Install threaded fasteners in accordance with the turn-of-the-nut method per
AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts. "
6. Welded Construction:
Comply with A WS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds,
and methods used in correcting welding work.
7. Holes for Other Work:
Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and
for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final
shop drawings.
8. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as
indicated to receive other work.
9. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut
holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in
mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such
inspections and tests will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
providing materials and fabrication procedures in compliance with specified
requirements.
2. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not
comply.
B. Design of Members and Connections:
1. Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless
otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without
causing delay in the work.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Promptly notify the Structural Engineer whenever design of members and
connections for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Erector must examine areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be
installed, and notify the Contractor, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until the unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the erector.
B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing:
Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient
strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when
permanent members are in place and final connections are made. Provide temporary
guy lines to achieve proper alignment of structures as erection proceeds.
C. Temporary Planking:
Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively
complete work.
D. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates:
1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and
roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom
surface of base and bearing plates.
2. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members
on wedges or other adjusting devices.
3. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush
with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
4. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that
no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and
allow curing.
E. Field Assembly:
Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently
fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent
contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for
discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
F. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances.
G. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings.
H. Erection Bolts:
1. On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug
welds, and grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
2. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary
connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field
welds.
3. Do not enlarge holes in members by burning or by using drift pins, except in
secondary bracing members. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit
bolts.
1. Gas Cutting:
Do not use gas cutting torches in field for. correcting fabrication errors in primary
structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not
under stress, as acceptable to the Structural Engineer. Finish gas-cut sections equal
to a sheared appearance when permitted.
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test
reports have indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional
tests, at Contractor's expense, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of
original work and to show compliance of corrected work.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-7
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Shop-Bolted and Field-Bolted Connections:
Inspect or test in accordance with AISC Specifications.
C. Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and
locations of defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct
deficiencies.
D. Perform visual inspection of all welds in accordance with A WS specifications.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent
referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A572/
A572M-OJ
Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy
Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel
ASTM A653/
A653M-OJ a
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A7BO-OJ
Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas
of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections:
1. Shop Drawings showing gauge, size, finish, support locations, length and
width, layout and types of deck units, connection details, and conditions
requiring closure strips, supplementary framing, openings and other
accessories. Shop drawings shall identify the specific project, shall list all
design criteria, and show all details necessary for proper erection.
2. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specification, installation instructions,
load tables for gravity loads and diaphragm shear strength and stiffness in
accordance with the "Steel Deck Institute Design Manual" and the "Steel
Deck Institute Diaphragm Manual."
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards,
except as otherwise indicated:
STEEL DECK 05310-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI), "Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
2. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form
Decks and Roof Decks."
B. Qualification of Field Welding: Use qualified welding processes and welding
operators in accordance with "Welder Qualification" procedures of A WS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of
the following:
Epic Metals Corporation
Consolidated Systems, Inc.
Verco Manufacturing Company
Wheeling Corrugating Company
Vulcraft Div., Nucor Corporation
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel deck shall be of size, gauge, diaphragm shear strength and stiffness, and finish
as indicated on the contract documents.
B. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units:
ASTM A-653/653M, having a minimum yield strength of 33 ksi. Grade as required
to comply with SDI specifications. Properties shall conform to AISI "Specification
for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members."
C. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes:
ASTM A572, Grade 50
D. Screws:
Self-drilling type, cad plated.
E. Sheet Metal Accessories:
ASTM A653/653M, commercial quality, galvanized.
STEEL DECK
05310-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. Fasteners: Powder actuated fasteners shall be ENKK Pin as manufactured by Hilti,
or approved equal.
G. Galvanizing: ASTM A653/653M
H. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and
repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, with flush,
telescoped, or nested 2- inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal
thickness, depth, and width as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations, shop drawings, and as specified herein.
B. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends
accurately aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently
fastened. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. Inaccuracies in alignment or
leveling of supports shall be corrected before the deck is permanently fastened into
place. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or
deflection.
C. End lap of units shall occur over supports only. Minimum lap shall be 2". The deck
unit shall extend over three or more supports, unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings.
D. Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between
cells at ends of abutting units.
E. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to
prevent overloading of structural members.
F. Fastening Deck Units:
1.
Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as indicated on drawings.
2.
Mechanical fasten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports as
indicated on drawings.
STEEL DECK
05310-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
1
1
1
I
1
G. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work
projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as shown.
H. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure
pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work
shown. Openings through deck shall be reinforced and framed for rigidity and load
carrying capacity. Holes or other openings required for work of-other trades shall be
drilled out or cut and adequately reinforced by the respective trade; such holes or
other openings larger than 12" square or diameter or over shall be scheduled or
detailed but in no case shall it be less than L1 Y2 x 1 Y2 x 1/4 each side between
supports with L1 Y2 x 1 Y2 x 1/4 headers at edges of openings.
1. Joint Covers: Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of
deck units. Covers shall be formed from steel of the same quality as deck and gauge
indicated on contract documents. Covers shall have a minimum width of9" and shall
be bent to provide tight fitting closure with deck units.
J. Closure Strips: Provide steel closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof
decking and in voids between decking and other construction. Weld into position to
provide a complete decking installation.
K. Touch-Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred
areas, welds, and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and
supporting steel members.
L. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION
STEEL DECK
05310-4
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
I
1
SECTION 05400
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAUGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 . SUMMARY
A. Section includes all work and supplementary items required to complete the
proper installation of the pre-engineered light gauge roof trusses as shown on the
contract documents and specified herein including headers, outriggers,
supplemental rafters and incidental framing for a complete assembly within the
extent shown on the drawings.
B. Pre-engineered light gauge steel trusses include planar structural units consisting
of welded, screwed or bolted connected members which are fabricated, cut and
assembled prior to delivery or at the job site.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The following documents of the issue in effect on the date of material
procurement, referred to thereafter by basic designation only form a part of this
specification to the extent indicated by reference thereto.
1. American Iron and Steel Institute:
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members
2. American Society of Test Materials:
ASTM A446: "Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by
the Hot-Dip Process, Physical (Structural) Quality."
Grade A, Fy ,.. 33 ksi: 18 gauge and lighter
Grade D, Fy - 50 ksi: 16 gauge and heavier
Galvanizing: G-60 Coating Class
3. American Welding Society:
A WS D1.0 "Code for Welding in Building Construction"
ANSI Z49.1 "Safety in Welding and Cutting"
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The light gauge steel subcontractor shall have expenence III fabrication and
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAUGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
05400-1
1
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
erection of light gauge steel truss and framing systems of scope and design similar
to the required work.
1.4 FABRICATOR'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. Trusses shall be designed, fabricated, and erected by a firm which has a record
including a minimum of five years of successfully designing, fabricating and
erecting trussed assemblies similar to scope required and which practices a quality
control program which includes inspection by an independent inspection and
testing agency acceptable to architect and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Fabricators who wish to qualify for approval under this Section of the
specification shall submit evidence of compliance with this specification no later
than ten (10) days prior to the bid date. Only' those fabricators approved in
writing by the Architect prior to the bid date will be accepted.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Requirements: Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
B. Product Data: Submit fabricator's technical data covering materials, shapes,
hardware, fabrication process, handling and erection.
C. Submit certificate, signed by an officer of subcontractor or fabricating firm,
indicating that trusses to be supplied for project . comply with indicated
requirements.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit engineered stamped and sealed shop drawings showing
shapes and dimensions of members to be used including pitch, span, camber
configuration and spacing for each type or configuration of truss required. Show
all bearing and anchorage details. Specify and detail all supplemental
strapping, truss to truss connections, truss to structure connections,
including all bracing and bridging, structurally supporting hip and valley
plates, perimeter eave and ridge plates, bracing clips and other accessories
required for proper installation and support of composite roof decking. Shop
drawings shall include all placement sequences and instructions.
E. To the extent engineering design considerations are indicated as fabricator's
responsibility, submit design analysis and test reports indicating wind and gravity
loading, section properties, allowable stress, stress diagrams, calculations,
connections between trusses, connections to structure, and similar information
needed for analysis and to insure trusses comply with requirements. All designs
shall bear the name and seal of a Structural Engineer licensed to practice in the
state where the trusses are to be erected.
F. Basis of Design: Basis of Design is indicated on drawings.
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAUGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
05400-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery, store and handle products in exact accordance with the manufacturer's
latest published requirements and specifications to avoid damage from bending,
overturning, or other cause for which truss is not designed to resist or endure.
Storage shall be off-ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with water proof
covenngs.
B. Time the fabrication and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and
to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of
trusses.
PART 2 - ASSEMBLY
2.1 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The pre-engineered light gauge steel truss system shall exhibit the following
performance characteristics.
1. Uniform Total Load Capacity 200 lbs./linear foot
2. Truss Spacing 4' - 0" O.c.
3. Assembly Weight 10.0 lbs.lsf. Maximum
4. Wind Uplift Rating 93 mph
5. Fire classification Non-combustible
6. Factory Mutual Classification PM Class I
7. Diaphragm Shear Strength 250 PLF in plane
8. Screwed Connections Yes
9. Interior Bearing Yes at Panel Points Only
10. Uplift 40 PSF
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. All calculations and procedures pertaining to design, analysis, and computation of
section properties shall be in accordance with the Specification for the Design of
Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members of the American Iron and Steel Institute.
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAUGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
05400-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. All Structural components shall be galvanized with a zinc coating conforming to
Coating Class G-60 and shall be manufactured from steel that conforms to the
requirements of ASTM A-446, Grade A (33 ksi min. yield) for 18 gauge and
lighter and ASTM A 446, Grade D (50 ksi min. yield) for 16 gauge and heavier.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. Framing components shall be field or shop fabricated and joined to one another
by means of welding of through the use of screws as recommended by the
component provider.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Visually examine and verify that receiving surfaces of the substructure have no
apparent defects or errors which would result in substandard workmanship.
Additionally, the following items shall be installed and inspected prior to roof
truss installation.
Conditions of Surfaces.
1. Exterior bearing plates:
A. Properly positioned within bearing surface.
B. Installed so as to allow complete and adequate contact with truss
connection member.
2. Interior bearing plates:
A. Properly positioned within bearing surface.
B. Installed so as to allow complete and adequate contact with truss
connection member.
3. Exterior and Interior Bearing Plates installed in proper elevations so as to
permit the installation of the truss system without the use of shims or
adjustability.
C. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Architect.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Structural Adequacy: Contractor shall prepare the structure to insure proper and
adequate structural support for the materials specified.
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAUGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
05400-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.3 FABRICATION
A. Light gauge steel trusses may be fabricated either on the jobsite or at the
fabricator's shop.
B. All trusses shall be fabricated and erected in strict accordance with the current
printed instructions of the approved subcontractor or fabricator.
C. All truss components shall be straight and true prior to fabrication. Flattening or
straightening components, when necessary, shall be accomplished in a manner so
as to not damage the component.
D. All truss components shall be cut neatly to fit snugly against adjacentmembers.
E. No splices will be allowed in trusses except as authorized in writing by the
Architect or as shown on the approved shop drawings.
F. Provide all clips, angles, henways and other miscellaneous pieces necessary to
attach light gauge steel trusses to the substructure or to attach other components
within this section to one another.
G. All trusses shall be erected true and plumb and properly bridged and braced in
accordance with the approved shop drawings.
H. All truss components shall be connected to one another by means of screw
attachment or by welding.
1. Completed trusses shall be free from twists, bends or open joints with all
members straight and true to line.
J. If the truss components have been welded to one another then all welds must be
thoroughly cleaned and wire brushed and primed and painted with a high zinc
content paint capable of providing an equal or greater degree of protection than
the original G-60 galvanized coating.
3.4 ERECTION
A. Prefabricated trusses shall be braced against racking. Lifting of trusses shall be
done so as to not cause local distortion in any member.
B. All light gauge steel framing shall be erected by approved methods USIllg
equipment of adequate capacity to safely perform the work.
C. The contractor is responsible for checking the dimensions and assuring the fit of
all members and trusses before erection begins.
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAUGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
05400-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. All work shall be erected plumb and level and to dimensions, spacings indicated
on the drawings.
E. Components shall be of the SIze and spacIllg shown on the approved shop
drawings.
F. Provide web stiffeners and reinforcement at reaction points where required by
analysis or to suit details.
G. Hoist units in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of
trusses required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator,
exercising care not to damage truss members.
H. Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in
location indicated, until permanent bracing is installed.
1. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details
indicated.
J. Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain
design spacing, withstand live and dead loads, and comply with other indicated
requirements.
K. Do not cut or remove truss members.
END OF SECTION
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAUGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
05400-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07190
VAPOR BARRIER
PART 1 - GENERAL
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and instructions for vapor barrier
material and mastic.
Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original packaging or containers.
Store to prevent damage, deterioration, or contamination.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Vapor barrier to be one of the following or approved equal (reinforced):
Moistop manufactured by Fortifiber Corp.
Griffolyn T -65 manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc.
Rufco 300 manufactured by Raven Industries.
Adhesive and joint tape: Recommended by manufacturer of vapor barrier.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Install vapor barrier beneath all concrete floor slabs over compacted, clean subgrade
material free of debris and protrusions.
Lay vapor barrier over entire interior building area to receive concrete slab; lap edges 6
inches and seal with mastic over entire lap. Apply membrane in 8'-0" width. Lay
membrane with seams perpendicular to and lapped in direction of pour. Turn edges of
membrane up to within 1/2 inch of top of slab at intersection with vertical surfaces.
Where expansion or control joints are indicated in slab, lay vapor barrier continuous
under joint filler.
Seal openings in vapor barrier around pipes and other protrusions with mastic. Fold at
corners to form envelope.
Protect vapor barrier installation from damage until concrete slab is in place.
END OF SECTION
VAPOR BARRIER
07190-1
1
I
1
I
I
1
I
1
I
1
1
1
1
I
1
I
I
1
1
SECTION 07195
WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
This Section includes surface preparation and application of clear water repellent coating
to the following vertical and nontraffic horizontal exposed surfaces above grade:
All Exterior face brick
All Exterior precast concrete/cast stone
All Exterior Ground face concrete masonry units, all exterior shot blast
concrete masonry units and all exterior split face concrete masonry units.
Exterior exposed concrete
Submit Product data including manufacturer's specifications, surface preparation and
application instructions, recommendations for water repellents for each surface specified,
and protection and cleaning instructions. Include data substantiating that materials are
recommended by manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with requirements.
Project Mockup: Apply water repellent to mockup for architect's approval before proceeding
with installation. Comply with installation requirements of this Section.
Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent under any
of the following conditions:
Ambient temperature is less than 40 deg F. (4 deg C).
Substrate surfaces have cured for less than one month.
Rain or temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C) are predicted for a period of 24 hours.
Earlier than 24 hours after surfaces became wet.
Windy condition such that repellent may be blown to vegetation or substrates not
intended.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Prime-A-Pell200, Chemprobe Corporation
Euco Weather-Guard, The Euclid Chemical Company
Klere-Seal 908-SX, Pecora Corporation
WATER REPELLENTS
07195-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
1
Weather Seal Siloxane, ProSoCo, Inc.
Stontite SX9, Stonhard, Inc.
Siloxanes: Penetrating water repellent. Alkylalkoxysiloxanes that are oligomerous with alcohol,
ethanol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier. Clear, non-glass, non-
yellowing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of
water repellents. Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's
instructions to ensure that surface sufficiently dry.
Test for pH level, according to repellent manufacturer's instructions to ensure chemical
bond to silicates minerals.
Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of
water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where there
is the possibility of the water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and
grass. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces, complying with
manufacturer's cleaning recommendations.
Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until the sealants for joints adjacent to
surfaces receiving water repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
Water repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant
adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate,
water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work.
Test Application: Prior to performing water repellent work, including bulk purchase or delivery
of products, prepare a small application in an unobtrusive location and in a manner acceptable to
the Architect to demonstrate the final effect (visual, physical, and chemical) of planned
installation. Proceed with work only after Architect accepts test application.
Apply a heavy-saturation spray coating of water repellent on all surfaces indicated for
treatment in Paragraph A.1 above, using low-pressure spray equipment. Comply with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations using airless spraying procedure unless
otherwise indicated.
Precast Work: At Contractor's option, first application of water repellent on cast stone or precast
concrete units may be completed prior to installing units. Mask sealant-bond surfaces to prevent
water repellent from migrating onto joint surfaces.
Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION
WATER REPELLENTS
07195-2
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07411
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
This Section includes the following:
Standing-seam roof panels, single length ridge to eaves.
Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies complying with performance requirements indicated
and capable of withstanding structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to
weather without failure or infiltration of water into the building interior.
Air Infiltration: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies with permanent resistance to air
leakage through assembly of not more than 0.09 cfmlsq. ft. (0.45 Us/sq. m) of fixed. roof area
when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at a static-air-pressure difference of 4.0 lbf/sq. ft. (192
Pa).
Water Penetration: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies with no water penetration as
defined in the test method when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at a minimum differential
pressure of 20 percent of inward acting, wind-load design pressure of not less than 6.24Ib/sq.
ft. (300 Pa) and not more than 12.0 lb/sq. ft. (575 Pa).
Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide roof panel assemblies that meet requirements ofUL 580 for
Class 90 wind-uplift resistance.
Structural Performance: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies capable of safely
supporting design loads indicated under in-service conditions with vertical deflection no
greater than the following, based on testing manufacturer's standard units according to ASTM
E 1592 by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.
Maximum Deflection: 1/180 of the span.
Submit the following:
Product Data: Include manufacturer's product specifications, standard details, certified
product test results, and general recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for
each component and for total panel assemblies.
Shop Drawings: Show layouts of panels on roofs, details of edge conditions, joints, panel
profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, flashings, underlayment, closures, snow guards, and
special details. Distinguish between factory and field assembled work.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
07411-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts or chips showing the full range of colors,
textures, and patterns available for roof panels with factory applied finishes.
Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or deformed. Package panels for
protection against damage during transportation or handling.
Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting roof panels to prevent bending, warping,
twisting, and surface damage.
Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and
ventilated covering. Store panels to ensure dryness. Do not store panels in contact with other
materials that might cause staining, denting, or other. surface damage.
Field Measurements: Verify location or structural members and openings in substrates by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
Special Finish Warranty: Submit a written warranty, signed by manufacturer, covering failure of the
factory-applied exterior finish on metal roof panels within the specified warranty period and agreeing
to repair finish or replace roof panels that show evidence of finish deterioration. Deterioration of
finish includes, but is not limited to, color fade, chalking, cracking, peeling, and loss of film
integrity.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Weathertight Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to
repair or replace metal roof panel assembly that fails to remain weathertight within the specified
warranty period.
Weathertight Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755 (ASTM A 755M)
and the following requirements:
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 (ASTM A 653M, Z275); structural quality.
Thickness: 0.028 inch (0.7 mm), unless otherwise indicated.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
07411-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Finish: Apply the following organic coating in thickness indicated. Furnish. appropriate air-
drying spray finish in matching color for touchup.
Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured
system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color
topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight with
a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 mil (0.023 mm) and 30 percent reflective gloss
when tested according to ASTM D 523.
Durability: Provide coating field tested under normal range of weather conditions
for a minimum of 20 years without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack, or
check in finish; without chalking in excess of a chalk rating of 8 according to
ASTM D 4214; and without fading in excess of 5 Hunter units.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and
resin manufacturer's written instructions.
Standing-Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory-formed, standing-seam roof panel
assembly designed for concealed mechanical attachment of panels to roof purlins or deck. Provide
soffit panels and vented soffit panels as indicated and provide cap and ridge vents.
Clips: Provide minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) thick, stainless-steel panel clips designed to
meet negative-load requirements.
Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250 inch (0.65 mm) thick,
stainless-steel or nylon-coated aluminum sheets.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: 2 - 1/2" Rigid, cellularpolyisocyanurate thermal insulation with
core formed by using 4CFC's as blowing agents complying with ASTM C1289.
Facing: Vinyl-reinforced polyester.
Retainer Strips: 0.019 inch (0.5 mm) thick, formed, galvanized steel retainer clips colored to
match insulation facing.
Provide materials and accessories requiredfor a complete roof panel assembly and as recommended
by panel manufacturer.
Thermal Spacers: Where panels attach directly to purlins, provide thermal spacers recommended by
panel manufacturer.
Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other
suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
07411-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Use stainless-steel fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized steel fasteners for interior
applications.
Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of panel by means of plastic caps or
factory applied coating.
Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of panels
Locate and space exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools
to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer.
Accessories: Unless otherwise specified, provide components required for a complete roof panel
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, ridge closures, clips, seam
covers, battens, flashings, gutters, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match
materials and finishes of panels. Provide ridge vents and finials. Provide soffit panels and vented
soffit panels.
Closure Strips: Closed-cell, self-extinguishing, expanded, cellular, rubber or cross-linked,
polyolefin-foam flexible closure strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of panels.
Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, of base polymer, type, grade, class, and use
classifications required to seal joints in panel roofing and remain weathertight. Provide sealant
recommended by panel manufacturer.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compound for 15-mil (0.4 mm)
dry film thickness per coat, unless otherwise indicated. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound
free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
Expansion-Joint Sealant: For hooked-type expansion joints that must be free to move, provide
nonsetting, nonhardening, nomigrating, heavy-bodied polyisobutylene sealant.
Primer: Rust-inhibitive primer recommended by panel manufacturer for finish coat.
Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with
dimensional and structural requirements.
Fabricate panel joints with captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent
metal-to-metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise from movements within panel
assembly.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
07411-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Secondary Framing: Provide components complying with the Light Gage Structural Institute's
"Guide Specifications," Section 07410, "Manufactured Roof and Wall Panels."
Roof Purlins: C or Z shaped sections fabricated from 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm) thick, shop-
painted, roll-formed steel. Purlin spacers fabricated from 0.079 inch (2~0 mm) thick, cold-
formed, galvanized steel sections.
Eave Struts: Unequal flange, C-shaped sections formed to provide adequate back-up for roof
panels. Fabricate from 0.0598 inch (1.5 mm) thick, shop-painted, roll-formed steel.
Flange and Sag Bracing: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inch (41 by 41 mm) angles, fabricated from 0.0598
inch (1.5 mm) thick, shop-painted, roll-formed steel.
Base or Sill Angles: Fabricate from 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick, cold-formed, galvanized steel
sections.
Secondary structural members, except columns and beams, shall be manufacturer's standard
sections fabricated from 0.079 inch (2.0 mm) thick, cold-formed galvanized steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements indicated for conditions
affecting performance of metal panel roofing.
Panel Supports and Anchorage: Examine roof framing to verify that purlins, angles, channels,
and other secondary structural panel support members and anchorage have been installed
according to written instructions of panel manufacturer.
Do not proceed with roof panel installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Coordinate metal panel roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks,
parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive
installation.
Promptly remove protective film, if any, from exposed surfaces of metal panels. Strip with care to
avoid damage to finish.
Secondary Structural Supports: Install purlins, bracing, and other secondary structural panel support
members and anchorage according to the Light Gage Structural Institute's Guide Specifications,
"Section 07410, Manufactured Roof and Wall Panels."
Comply with panel manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installation, as
applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other components of
the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
07411-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Install panels with concealed fasteners.
Install panels with exposed exterior and interior fasteners, prefinished to match panel finishes.
Install metal building insulation directly beneath metal roof panels.
Accessories: Install components required for a complete roof panel assembly including trim, copings,
fasciae, ridge closures, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure
strips, and similar items.
Separate dissimilar metals by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous
coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each metal surface, or by other permanent
separation as recommended by manufacturers of dissimilar metals.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where required for weatherproof performance
of panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants recommended by panel
manufacturer.
Install weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal panels at eave and rake with rubber,
neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather.
Seal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints
where recommended by panel manufacturer.
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants.
Standing-Seam Roof Panel Assembly: Fasten panels to supports with concealed clip according to
panel manufacturer's written instructions.
Install clips at each support with self-drilling/self-tapping fasteners.
At end laps of panels, install tape calk between panels.
Seaming: Complete seaming of panel joints by operating portable power-driven equipment of
type recommended by panel manufacturer to provide a weathertight joint.
Replace panels and other components of the Work that have been damaged or have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as soon as each panel
is installed. On completion of panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel
manufacturer and maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
07411-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories:
Roof-drainage systems: Gutters and downspouts
Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fascia
Metal flashing
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally
induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.
Submit Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, color charts, installation
instructions, and general recommendations.
Submit Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish.
Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each
installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability ofW ork, and protection of materials
and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and
finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated
below:
Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), 3003-H14, with a
minimum thickness of 0.0320 inch.
Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet
metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened.
Asphalt Mastic.: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing
no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (0.4 mm) dry film thickness per coat.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07620-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of
components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division
7 Section "Joint Sealants".
Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by
aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-
resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.
Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb/square (0.244 kg/sq.m) red rosin, sized building paper conforming to FS UU-
B-790, Type I, Style lb.
Polyethylene Underlayment: ASTM D 4397, minimum 6-mil (0.15 mm) thick black polyethylene
film, resistant to decay when tested according to ASTM E 154.
Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units
as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed;
noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance.
Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I, asbestos free, asphalt based.
Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design,
dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated.
Comply with details to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in
waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of
surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
F onn exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and
that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet wit no joints allowed within
24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work
cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within
joints).
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07620-2
I
I
I
1
I
1
1
1
1
I,
I
I
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant
to comply with SMACNA standards.
Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at
locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on
faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.
Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but
never less than thickness of metal being secured.
Comply with Aluminum Association ' s (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum Finishes" for finish
designations and application recommendations.
High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: Cleaned with
inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic
Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions.
Fluoropolymer 2 -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system
composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with
AAMA 605.2.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for
color and gloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and
verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA' s "Architectural Sheet Metal
manual". Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal
expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07620-3
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
1
I
I
1
1
1
1
I
I
I
I
1
indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
weathertight and weatherproof.
Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and
that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet
metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement
joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where
lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomericsealant
to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal
sealant.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed
surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended
by manufacturer.
Underlayment: Where installing aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install
a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment.
Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof
performance.
Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be
protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof
manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded
seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with
sealant. '
Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and
anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most
efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof-drainage system installation.
Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing installation.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07620-4
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and
equipment installation. Seal flashing to equipment support member.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and
installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows:
Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with
flashing.
Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping.
Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or
deterioration of finishes.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim work during
construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07620-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Submit Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction,
materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, profiles, and finishes.
Submit Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details
of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction,
location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details
of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI!SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFP A 80 and are labeled and listed by UL,
Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job
storage.
Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided
refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace
damaged items as directed.
Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on wood blocking. Avoid using
non vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on
doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4 inch spaces between stacked
doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A vailable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Steel Doors and Frames:
Amweld Building Products, Inc.
Benchmark Commercial Doors
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Ceco Door Products
Copco Door Co.
Curries Co.
D & D Specialties, Inc.
Deansteel Manufacturing Co.
Fenestra Corp.
Kewanee Corp.
Mesker Door, Inc.
Pioneer Industries
Republic Builders Products
Steelcraft
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying
with ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M).
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), commercial
quality, or ASTM A 620 (ASTM A 620M), drawing quality, special killed.
Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel complying with ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M),
commercial quality, or ASTM A 642 (ASTM A 642M), drawing quality, hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 525, with A 60 or G 60 (ASTM A 525M, with Z 180 or ZF 180) coating
designation, mill phosphatized.
Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478 inch thick steel sheet; 0.0516 inch thick
galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel frames.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into
exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4 inch thick doors of materials and ANSI!SDI 100 grades and models
specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules:
Exterior Doors: Grade TI, heavy-duty, Modell, full flush design, minimum 0.0516 inch (1.3
mm) thick galvanized steel sheet faces.
Provide metalframes for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, windows, gridwalls, and other
openings, according to ANSI!SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown on Drawings and schedules.
Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of minimum 0.0478 inch thick cold-
rolled steel sheet. Provide double egress frames where indicated.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners, continuously welded construction for
exterior applications and knocked down for field assembly at interior applications.
Form exterior frames from 0.0635 inch thick galvanized steel sheet.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs
of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames.
Plaster Guards: Provide steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where
mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings.
Grout: When required in masonry construction, as specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry".
Fabricate steel door andframe units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or
buckle.
Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials
according to SDI standards:
Resin-impregnated paper honeycomb
Rigid polyurethane conforming to ASTM C 591
Rigid polystyrene conforming to ASTM C 578
Unitized steel grid
Vertical steel stiffeners
Rigid mineral fiber with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets.
Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch
between non-fire-rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.
Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFP A 80.
Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
Fabricate concealed stiffenersreinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold
or hot-rolled steel sheet.
Galvanized Steel Doors, Panels, and Frames: For the following locations fabricate doors, panels,
and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors
flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 0.0635 inch thick
galvanized steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in
top edges of doors against water penetration.
At exterior locations.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware
according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply
with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI Al15 Series specifications for door and frame
preparation for hardware.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-
applied hardware may be done at Project site.
Locate hardware according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations
for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".
Glazing Stops: Minimum 0.0359 inch thick steel or 0.040 inch thick aluminum.
Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors
for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels
in doors.
Comply withNAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes.
Apply primers to doors and frames after fabrication.
Galvanized Finishes:
Suiface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or
other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic
coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply
galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in
galvanized steel, wit dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and
complying wit DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20.
Factory Primingfor Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply
air-dried primer specified below immediately after cleaning pretreatment.
Steel Sheet Finishes:
Suiface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease,
and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from
uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling).
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
0811 0-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to
organic coating applied over it.
Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1
acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide
a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
data, and as specified.
Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed,
aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed,
remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location
on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include
masonry wire anchors and masonry T -shaped anchors.
Install fire-rated frames according to NFP A 80.
Door Installation: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in
ANSI/SDI100.
Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFP A 80.
Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime
coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110-5
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDW ARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
Submit final hardware schedule organized by "hardware sets", to indicate specifically the product
to be furnished for each item required on each door.
Furnish templates to each fabricator of doors and frames as required for hardware
preparation.
For fire-rated openings provide hardware tested and listed by UL or FM (NFPA Standard 80). On
panic exit devices provide UL or FM label indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by manufacturers for
various products listed below. Such products are listed in the schedule by specific reference to
manufacturer's catalog numbers. Except as otherwise indicated, products of equivalent quality,
design, and function by other listed manufacturers may be used, subject to approval of Architect.
Schlage Lock Company, Sargent Co., Stanley - Locksets, Latchsets, Privacy sets
Sargent & Company, Yon Duprin, Precision - Exit devices, mullions
Sargent & Company 350/351, LCN 4040/4041 - Closers
Hager, Stanley, McKinney - Hinges
Baldwin, Rockwood, Quality - Push plates, pull plates, kick plates, flush bolts, door stops
& silencers
Pemko, National Guard, Zero - Thresholds, weatherstrip, sweeps
Glynn-Johnson, Sargent, Rixson - Overhead stops
Ives, Rockwood, Baldwin - Automatic flush bolts, coordinators
Finish and base material designations are indicated in accordance with ANSI BHMA A156.18 or
the nearest traditional U.S. commercial finish.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PACKING AND MARKING
All hardware shall have the screws, bolts, and fastenings for its installation, packed in the same
package with the hardware. All packages shall be legible and adequately labeled, indicating the
location for which they are needed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Install hardware in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and templates. Set hardware
accurately and securely anchor with attachment devices; set screws level, flush and draw up tight.
Upon completion, hardware shall operate freely with proper tolerances to prevent binding and/or
malfunctioning.
Make necessary adjustments and leave clean.
Cut and fit thresholds to profile of door frames, with mitered comers and hairline joints. Cut smooth
openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, if any.
Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws of the proper type for permanent
anchorage and/or bronze or stainless steel which will not corrode in contact with the threshold metal.
Set thresholds in a seal of butyl rubber sealant or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. Install sealant
under interior edge allowing any water entering through screw holes to weep out exterior edge.
FINISH
Locksets and butts shall be US26D. Exit devices to be US32D; aluminum and/or US26D NOT
ACCEPTABLE.
KEYING
The key side of all locks will be on the public side.
Four keys will be provided for each keyed lock.
DOOR HARDW ARE
08710-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
WEATHERSTRIPPING
All new exterior doors shall receive extruded aluminum weatherstripping at jambs and sills and
thresholds.
FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE
No local keying will be accepted, only factory registered keys shall be used.
Locksets to be Type 1000 Grade 1.
The hardware supplier on this job shall have in his employ a regular member of the American
Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants (ARC). This consultant shall be available for
consultation on the job site when requested by the Architects and/or contractor.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
EACH TO HAVE:
1-1/2 Pair Butts
(ST)
1 Mortise Lockset
1 Closer
2 Kick Plate
1 Wall Stop
1 Set Weatherstrip
1 Threshold
2 Sweep
6 Silencers
608
1 Lock Guard
1 O.H. Holder
1 Rain Drip Strip
(SG)
(SG)
(RW)
(RW)
(PK)
(PK)
(PK)
(RW)
(SG)
(PK)
END OF SECTION
DOOR HARDW ARE
FBB 179- US26D 4-112 x 4-112 NRP
8225 LNJ-US26D x MK
EN350-UH x TB
8" x 2" LDW x US32D .050ga
440-US26D
303A V -72" x 86"
170A-72"
315CN-36"
(RW)
320-32D
EN 1540-H
17 A x Door width
08710-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 09900
PAINTING AND CAULKING
PART 1- GENERAL
A. GENERAL:
A. The work of this section comprises all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to
complete all painting and caulking as scheduled on the drawings or specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. PACKAGING: All materials shall be delivered to the project in unbroken packages.
They shall be used without adulteration and with only such thinning as provided for
in the manufacturer's directions. Seals shall not be broken until contents are to be
used. All mixing shall be done on the premises.
B. QUALITY: All materials shall be ofthe highest grade products of nationally known,
reputable manufacturers, such as Benjamin Moore, Glidden, Sherwin-Williams,
Pittsburgh, du Pont, etc., and the Engineer's approval on make of paint shall be
obtained.
C. STORAGE: Materials shall be stored in one place, the same to be kept neat and
clean. Adequate care shall be taken to prevent the danger of fire. The Engineer shall
have access to the materials, as well as every reasonable facility for determining
whether they are in accordance with these specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP:
A. All work shall be done in a workmanlike manner by skilled mechanics. All materials
shall be evenly spread and smoothly flowed on and free from runs and sags and no
paint, varnish, or enamel shall be applied until the preceding coat is thoroughly dried
and hard. All finished surfaces shall be left free from brush marks or other defects,
and edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be cut sharp and clean
without overlapping. No exterior painting shall be done in rainy, damp, or frosty
weather, or until the surface is thoroughly dry, and no interior painting or finishing
shall be done until the building has been thoroughly dried out. All paints, stains, and
varnishes shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's directions.
PAINTING AND CAULKING
09900-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES:
A. The painting contractor shall be wholly responsible for finish of his work, and
therefore shall not commence any part of it until surface is in proper condition in
every respect. If painting contractor considers any surface so unsuitable for proper
finish for his work that it cannot be rectified by normal sanding, he shall notify the
Engineer of this fact before any material is applied and he shall not apply any
materials until the condition of the surfaces is made satisfactory.
B.. No exterior painting shall be done in rainy, damp or frosty weather or until surfaces
are thoroughly dry and no interior painting or finishing shall be done until building
has been thoroughly dried out.
C. All knots or sappy spots in wood to be painted shall be given one coat of shellac at
least ten hours before priming; in wood to be varnished, knots and sap stains shall be
treated after filing and staining. All pencil marks and other foreign matter shall be
removed before applying any finish.
D. All greasy or oily metal surfaces shall be cleaned with turpentine or benzine before
applying any materials. All scale or rust shall be removed by scraping, wire brushing
or sand blasting.
(1) WOOD: All wood surfaces shall be sanded to a smooth, even finish and dusted
off. After primer or stain has been applied all nail holes and cracks shall be filled
with plastic wood or putty, tinted to match stained wood, and all surfaces sanded
smooth between coats.
(2) STEEL AND IRON: All shop coats shall be touched up and no field or finished
painting is to be done until surfaces are satisfactory.
(3) GALVANIZED METAL: Surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with
a galvanized primer, Lithofoam metal etch or solution containing four ounces of
copper sulphate per gallon of water. Coating shall remain at least twelve hours,
after which it shall be dusted off with stiff brushes.
(4) ALUMINUM: All aluminum surfaces to be painted shall be prepared according
to the recommended practice for preparing aluminum for painting given in
ASTM Standard D-1730.
(5) PROTECTION OFHARDW ARE AND FIXTURES: Before painting is started
in each area, hardware, accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in
that area shall be removed and shall not be replaced until the last coat of paint is
dry. Where exceptions are permitted, as on hardware necessary to keep all
premises locked, such items shall be carefully protected. Doors shall be
PAINTING AND CAULKING
09900-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
temporarily removed to permit painting of the bottom edges. The removal and
replacing of the above items shall be done only by skilled mechanics.
(6) DISSIMILAR METALS: Contact surfaces between dissimilar metals shall be
painted with a heavy coat of proper primer or asphalt paint.
3.3 CAULKING:
A Furnish and install all caulking indicated on the drawings, specified herein, or as
necessary to provide a watertight building, including masonry joints, concrete joints and
all building penetrations.
(1) MATERIALS: Materials for caulking joints shall be Tremco Lasto-Maric
manufactured by the Tremco Mfg. Co., Hornflaz LP-32 manufactured by AC.
Horn Co., or Sonolastic Sealant Gun Grade manufactured by Sonneborn Building
Products, Inc. Thickol Caulking compound shall be in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.
(2) DELIVERY AND STORAGE: The entire quantity of caulking materials shall
be delivered to the project site and stored in sealed and labeled containers.
(3) PREPARATION OF SURFACES: All openings orjoints to be caulked shall be
prepared by cleaning thoroughly and making sure that they are dry. Where
necessary to provide a suitable backup, the back of grooves shall be packed
tightly with Tremco white joint backing, and shall be 50 percent larger than joint.
(4 ) APPLICATION: Caulking compound shall be applied with gun, using nozzle of
proper size to fit the joint width, and shall be forced into grooves with sufficient
pressure to expel all air and fill the groove solidly. Caulking shall be uniformly
smooth and free of wrinkles, and unless otherwise indicated on the drawings,
shall be left sufficiently convex to result in a flush joint when dry. Caulking
around openings in masonry shall include the entire perimeter of each opening.
(5) CLEANING: The surfaces adjoining caulked joints shall be cleaned of smears
resulting from the caulking application.
3.4 COLORS:
A Contractor is to submit color charts of the selected manufacturer for review by the owner
and the engineer. A color schedule will be provided to the contractor based on the
submitted color charts.
3.5 PAINTING SCHEDULE:
A In order to follow the schedule of finishes, the painting contractor shall be furnished a
set of required drawings and a copy of these specifications. All questions should be
PAINTING AND CAULKING
09900- 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
referred to the Engineer for clarification before work proceeds. The types of paints and
numbers of coats required under various surfaces shall be as follows:
1. EXTERIOR: All exterior paint shall be oil based enamel suitable for the materials to be
painted, as recommended by the paint manufacturer.
A. SteeL Cast Iron and Ductile Iron: One coat of rust inhibitive primer. Two coats
of gloss industrial enamel.
B. Galvanized Metal: One coat of galvanized metal primer, or special treatment.
Two coats of gloss industrial enamel.
C. Stainless Steel: Shall not be painted on exterior.
D. Aluminum: Shall not be painted on exterior.
E. Woodwork: One coat of exterior oil primer. Three coats of gloss acrylic house
paint.
F. Metal Doors: One coat of metal primer. Two coats of gloss industrial enamel.
Top and edges of doors shall receive one coat.
G. Stucco and Masonry: Shall not be painted on exterior.
2. INTERIOR: All interior trim shall be finished with oil base enamel paint.
A. Wood: One coat of quick drying oil undercoater. Two coats semi-gloss paint.
B. Metal: One coat of metal primer. Two coats of low luster enamel.
C. Piping:, Conduit. Ducts, and Supports: One coat of rust inhibitive primer. Two
coats of semi-gloss enamel.
D. Sheetrock and Plaster: Two coats of latex wall paint.
E. Masonry Surfaces: One coat of quick drying oil undercoater. Two coats of semi-
gloss enamel.
F. Electrical Panels and Switchgear: Shall not be painted.
G. Stainless Steel and Aluminum: Shall not be painted on interior.
3.6 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION:
A. Upon completion of the work, all paint spots and stains shall be removed. Finishes
where damaged shall be restored and left in good condition. Exposed edges of doors
PAINTING AND CAULKING
09900-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
shall be touched up where refitting has been necessary. All discarded paint materials,
rubbish, cans, and rags shall be removed. The work of other trades, whether to be
painted or not, shall be protected against damage by painting and finishing work. Any
damages shall be corrected cleaning, repairing or replacing and repainting as directed.
3.7 TOUCH-UP PAINT:
A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner one extra unopened gallon of each color and
type of paint used on the project for future touch-up.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING AND CAULKING
09900- 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 11200
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section of the specification describes the sewerage grinder, hydraulic power
pack, and motor controller. The equipment shall be installed where shown on the
plans, as recommended by the supplier, and in compliance with all OSHA, local,
state, and federal codes and regulations.
B. The number of grinders and motor controllers shall be one (1).
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Grinder shall, as applicable, meet the requirements of the following industry
standards:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A 36: Standard
Specification for Carbon Steel Plate
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A 536-84: Standard
Specification for Ferritic Ductile Iron Castings
3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 303 Stainless Steel
4. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 304 Stainless Steel
5. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4130 Heat Treated Alloy Steel
6. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4140 Heat Treated Hexagon Steel
7. Rockwell C
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Supplier shall submit eight (8) sets of shop drawings. Shop drawings shall
include equipment descriptions, specifications, dimensional and assembly
drawings, parts lists, and job specific drawings.
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
11200-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Closeout Submittals
1. Supplier shall submit eight (8) Operation and Maintenance manuals. The
manuals shall include equipment descriptions, operating instructions,
drawings, troubleshooting techniques, a recommended maintenance
schedule, and the recommended lubricants.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Qualified suppliers shall have a rmmmum 5 years experience at
manufacturing two-shafted grinding equipment and motor controls with a
minimum of 400 installations as well as 20 installations within the State of
Georgia with similar equipment. Supplier shall provide a list of names and
dates of installations for verification by the Engineer or Owner's
Representative.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Motor controllers shall as applicable, meet the
requirements of the following Regulatory Agencies.
1. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) Standards
2. National Electrical Code (NEC)
3. Underwriters Laboratory (UL and cUL)
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The equipment shall be packaged in containers constructed for normal shipping,
handling and storage.
B. The containers shall provide adequate protection for the equipment in a dry
indoor environment between +40oF (+4.50C) and +100oF (+37.80C) until time
for installation.
1.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each unit of equipment shall be identified with a corrosion resistant nameplate,
securely affixed in a conspicuous place. Nameplate information shall include
equipment model number, serial number, supplier's name, and location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Support system, grinder, hydraulic power pack and motor controller shall be a
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
11200- 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Model CDD-5016-AD Channel Monster as designed and manufactured by JWC
Environmental of Costa Mesa, CA. Each Channel Monster shall handle a peak
flow of 23 MGD at a headloss of less than 35 inches.
B. The manufacturer must certify that the unit can be returned for maintenance to
the factory or a local repair facility. The certification shall include a statement
that there will be no charge for repair labor.
2.2 SUPPORT SYSTEM
A. GENERAL
1. A grinder support frame with adjustable mounting brackets shall be provided
for a 5 feet inch wide and a 18.5 feet inch deep channel.
B. COMPONENTS
1. The support frame and additional supports shall be of welded square tube,
angle, and plate construction. The construction material shall be 304
stainless steel.
2.3 GRINDER
A. GENERAL
1. Each Channel Monster@ grinder shall include cutters, spacers, shafts,
perforated screen drums, bearings and seals, side rails, end housings, covers,
reducer, and hydraulic torque motor.
2. The grinder shall be of two-shaft design and be capable of continuous
operation, processing wet or dry. Bar screens or single shaft devices
utilizing a single rotating cutter bar with stationary cutters shall not be
acceptable. Grinder designed with cutter and spacer cartridges rather than
individual cutters and spacers, shall not be acceptable.
3. Two-shaft design shall consist of two parallel shafts alternately stacked with
individual intermeshing cutters and spacers positioned on the shaft to form a
helical pattern. The two shafts shall counter-rotate with the driven shaft
operating at approximately two-thirds (2/3) the speed of the drive shaft.
4. The rotating perforated screen drums shall consist of a cylindrical perforated
sheet, support rings and stub shafts. The rotating drums shall direct all
solids toward and into the counter-rotating dual-shaft grinder. The drums
shall be driven by the grinder drive mechanism.
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
11200-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. COMPONENTS
1. Individual Cutters and Spacers
a. The cutting chamber shall be a nominal height of fifty (50) inches.
b. Individual cutters and spacers shall be 4130 heat treated alloy steel,
surface ground for uniformity and through-hardened to a minimum
45-50 Rockwell C.
c. The inside configuration of both the individual cutters and the
individual spacers shall be hexagonal so as to fit the shafts with a total
clearance not to exceed 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) across the flats to assure
positive drive, minimize wear on the cutters, and increase the
compressive strength of the spacers.
d. Cutter configuration shall consist of individual 11 tooth cam cutters on
both shafts. To maintain particle size, the height of the tooth shall not
exceed 1/2 inch (13 mm) above the root diameter. Cutter to cutter root
diameter overlap shall be not less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or greater
than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to maintain the best possible cutting efficiency
while incurring the least amount of frictional losses.
e. The cutters shall exert a minimum force at the tooth tip of 687 lbs./hp
(4,100 N/kW) during momentary load peaks.
2. Shafts
a. Grinder drive and driven shafts shall be made of 4140 heat treated
hexagon steel with a tensile strength rating of not less than 149,000 psi
(1,027 kPa).
b. Each hexagonal shaft shall measure a nominal 2 inches (51 mm) across
parallel surfaces.
3. Intermediate Shaft Support
a. An intermediate shaft support shall be provided in the center of the
cutter stack for all grinders with 24 inch (610 mm), 32 inch (813 mm),
or 40 inch (1,016 mm) cutter stacks. Grinders with 50 inch (1,270 mm)
or 60 inch (1,524 mm) cutter stacks shall have two intermediate shaft
supports.
b. The intermediate shaft support shall provide additional support for
heavier than normal influent grinder demand loads and protection for
the seal assemblies.
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
11200-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. The intermediate shaft support shall be made of a cast 303 stainless steel
collar and two bushings. The bushings shall act as bearings to allow the
free rotation of the shafts.
4. Perforated Screen Drums
a. The screen drums shall be made of 11 ga. 304 stainless steel sheet. The
perforated sheet shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter holes on a 3/8 inch
(9.5 mm) stagger.
b. The drums supports shall be made of 304 stainless steel sheet. The end
supports shall include stub shafts for the mounting of seal assemblies.
Center supports shall provide additional structure to the center of the
drums.
c. Drum stub shafts shall be made of Grade 304 stainless steel with a
tensile strength of not less than 95,000 psi (654,550 kPa). The shaft
diameter shall be a minimum of 1-1/2 inch (38 mm).
5. Shaft Bearings and Seals
a. The radial and axial loads of the cutter and coil drum stub shafts shall be
borne by sealed, oversized, deep-groove ball bearings at each end.
b. The bearings shall be protected by a combination of a replaceable and
independent tortuous path device and mechanical seals.
c. Face materials shall be of tungsten carbide to tungsten carbide.
d. O-rings shall be made of Buna-N elastomers.
e. Products requiring continuous or occasional lubrication or flushing shall
not be accepted.
f. The mechanical seal shall be rated at 90 psi (620 kPa) continuous duty
by the seal supplier. .
g. The bearings shall be housed in a replaceable cartridge that supports and
aligns the bearings and seals, as well as protects the shafts and end
housings. The seal elements shall be independent of the stack height,
therefore cutter stack tightness shall not affect seal performance. The
seal elements shall maintain their factory set preload independent of the
cutter stack tightness.
h. Seals shall meet required pressure rating regardless of cutter stack fit.
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
11200-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The seal cartridge shall provide seal protection against axial loading on
shafts and bearings during shaft deflection.
1. Each seal element shall be positively locked to its corresponding
rotating or static cartridge element. This positive lock on the seal
elements is critical to long seal life in applications where grit or other
abrasive materials are present.
6. Side Rails
a. The inside profile of the drum side rails shall be concave, with an
adjustable UHMW plastic extension strip to minimize clearance at the
front of the drums. This clearance shall not exceed 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
from the major diameter of the perforated screen drums.
b. The drum side rails shall be cast of A 536-84 ductile iron.
7. End Housings and Covers
a. Grinder end housings shall be of cast A 536-84 ductile iron with a east-
in-place flow deflector, designed to protect the bushings while guiding
particles directly into the cutting chamber. '.
b. Top covers shall be A 536-84 ductile iron and bottom covers shall be
A 36 hot rolled plates.
8. Reducer
a. The speed reducer shall be a grease-filled planetary-type of reducer with
a 500% shock load capacity. The reduction ratio shall be 11: 1.
b. The input shaft of the reducer shall be directly coupled to the motor
using a three-piece coupling, and the output shaft of the reducer shall be
directly coupled with the grinder using a two-piece coupling.
9. Hydraulic Motor
a. The grinder motor shall be a low-speed, high-torque, rotary-power
hydraulic torque motor that utilizes the hydraulic pressure developed by
the hydraulic power pack.
10. Required Running Torque per Horsepower (kW):
a. At Momentary Load Peaks: 1,594 in-Ibs/hp (242 NmlkW).
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
11200-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4 GRINDER HI-TORQUE HYDRAULIC POWER PACK
A. GENERAL
1. The hydraulic power pack shall provide hydraulic pressure and flow to
operate the grinder. The hydraulic power pack shall provide pressure,
temperature, and level outputs to the controller. The power pack and grinder
hydraulic motor shall be designed for smooth operation . during frequent
starts, stops and reversals.
2. The entire hydraulic system, shall be designed for 3,000 psi (20,690 kPa)
maximum pressure. Under no load conditions the system operating pressure
shall be in the 200 to 400 psi (1,370 to 2,759 kPa) range. Continuous
operating pressure greater than 2,000 psi (13,793 kPa) shall not acceptable.
3. As solids are encountered, pressure shall be automatically increased on a
demand basis providing the required torque necessary to continue rotation of
the cutters and drums.
a. Should an obstruction cause the grinder demand pressure to exceed
2,250 psi (15,517 kPa), a pressure switch shall be activated and a 2-way
valve shifted. The rotation of the cutters and drums shall immediately
reverse for about one-half (1/2) to one (1) revolution. Following this,
the valve shall be shifted and the cutters and drums returned to forward
rotation.
b. When the obstruction is cleared the unit shall continue to operate in the
forward direction.
c. If the obstruction is not cleared, the reversing sequence shall repeat until
the obstruction is cleared or 9 reversals have occurred within 45-
seconds. If the reversing sequence has completed and the obstruction
has not been cleared, the controller shall de-energize the hydraulic
power pack electric motor and activate an overload relay and a fail
indicator.
4. The hydraulic power pack shall be rain-resistant and suitable for mounting in
a remote location, as required by design parameters of the project.
5. A stand shall be provided to mount the power pack above grade.
B. COMPONENTS
1. Power packs shall include the following components:
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
11200-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a. 20 inch (508 mm) x 19 inch (483 mm) x 29 inch (737 mm), epoxy
coated, 40 gallon (151 liter) capacity reservoir
b. Suction strainer
c. Positive displacement pump driven by a vertically mounted
15 hp (11.9 kW), TEFC, C face, electric motor
d. Relief valve preset at 2,600 psi (15,517 kPa)
e. 2-1/2 inch (64 mm), 0 to 5,000 psi (34,450 kPa) oil filled gauge
f. Pressure switch preset at 2,250 psi (15,517 kPa)
g. 110 volt two-port directional valve
h. In-tank return line filter
1. Combination oil level and oil temperature gauge
J. Combination oil level switch and oil temperature limit switch
k. Temperature switch set at 1600F (71 OC)
1. Filler breather
m. Electrical enclosure
2. Hydraulic connections between the torque motor and the power pack shall
consist of two 3/4 inch (19 mm) flexible hoses.
a. The flexible hoses shall be rated for a minimum 2,250 psi (15,517 kPa)
working pressure with a 9,000 psi (62,069 kPa) burst pressure.
b. The hose pressure loss between the hydraulic power pack and the
grinder torque motor shall not exceed 80 psi (551 kPa) at 500F (100C)
above ambient temperature.
3. The hydraulic power pack shall be filled with a high quality hydraulic fluid.
a. The hydraulic fluid shall have a viscosity of approximately 100 to
250 SSU at 1000F (380C) with good chemical stability and anti-foaming
properties.
b. The grades of hydraulic fluid shall be in accordance with the supplier's
recommendations.
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
11200-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.5 MOTOR CONTROLLER
A. GENERAL
1. The controller shall provide independent control of the hydraulically driven
grinder
2. Controller shall be the supplier's standard UL/cUL listed Model PC2200.
3. The controller shall be rated for 15 hp, 460 volts, 3 phase, 60Hz.
B. OPERATION
1. The controller shall be equipped with a GRINDER ON-OFF/RESET-AUTO
three (3) position selector switch.
a. In the OFF/RESET mode the grinder shall not run. In the ON mode the
grinder will run.
b. In the AUTO mode the grinder shall start and stop as controlled by a
remotely-located dry contact.
c. The grinder shall only be reset by switching the GRINDER ON-
OFF/RESET-AUTO switch to the OFF/RESET position.
C. SAFETYFEATURES
1. When a grinder jam condition occurs in the grinder ON or AUTO mode the
controller shall stop the grinder, then reverse the grinder rotation to clear the
obstruction. If the jam is cleared, the controller will return to normal
operation. If the jam condition still exists, the controller will go through eight
additional reversing cycles within 45 seconds (nine times total) before
signaling a grinder overload condition. Upon a grinder overload condition, the
controller will shut the grinder off and activate an overload contact.
2. If a power failure occurs while the grinder is running, operation will resume
running when power is restored.
3. If a power failure occurs while the grinder is in a fail condition the fail
indicator shall be reactivated when power is restored.
4. The controller shall provide overload protection for the motor through an
overload relay mounted directly on the grinder starters.
5. Short-circuit protection requires that a properly-sized circuit breaker or fuses
be installed by others.
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
11200-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. Controller reset shall be from the local panel controls only.
D. COMPONENTS
1. Enclosure
a. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X, fabricated of fiberglass-reinforced
polyester resins, and shall be suitable for wall mounting. Doors shall
have hinges and corrosion resistant latches.
b. Enclosure shall house the control devices, relays, terminal blocks, and
grinder non-reversing hydraulic power pack oil pump motor starter.
2. Control Devices
a. Operator interface and pilot devices shall be mounted on the enclosure
front panel door.
b. The controller shall have indicator lights for GRINDER RUN, and
FAIL.
c. Indicator lights shall be of an integral-transformer type with 6-volt
lamps. Lamps and the selector switches shall be heavy duty NEMA 4X
type.
d. Control transformer shall be protected by two primary fuses and one
secondary fuse. The 120 volt secondary shall have one leg grounded.
e. Relay contacts shall be included for GRINDER RUN and FAIL signal
outputs. The contacts shall be rated 2 amp, 240 V AC, resistive load.
3. Motor Starter
a. A non-reversing contactor type motor starter shall be provided for the
hydraulic power pack oil pump motor.
b. Overload relay (OL) shall be adjustable so that the range selected
includes the FLA (full load amperes) rating and service factor.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Each grinder, hydraulic power pack, and controller shall be factory tested to
ensure satisfactory operation.
B. The manufacturer shall maintain a complete inventory of spare parts within 250
miles of the pump station.
C. The manufacturer shall provide an exchange program so that a replacement cutter
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
11200-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
cartridge assembly can be at the plant site prior to removing an operating unit
from service.
D. The manufacturer shall provide an exchange program so that a replacement cutter
cartridge assembly can be at the plant site prior to removing an operating unit
from service.
E. If the manufacturer does not comply with paragraphs B, C and/or D above, the
manufacturer shall furnish a complete unit for spare.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Grinder, hydraulic power pack and motor controller shall be installed in
accordance with the supplier's installation instructions, and in compliance with
all OSHA, local, state, and federal codes and regulations.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Supplier shall provide the services of a factory-trained representative to check the
installation and to start-up each grinder and controller. The factory
representative shall have complete knowledge of proper installation, operation,
and maintenance of equipment supplied. Representative shall inspect the final
installation and supervise a start-up test of the equipment.
END OF SECTION
HYDRAULIC GRINDER
11200-11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 11300
VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE:
A. Furnish all labor materials, equipment, and incidentals required to install, test and
make ready for operation control valves, plug valves, knife gate valves, sluice gates, .
check valves, and air release valves. All gate valves and smaller incidental valves
shall be covered either on the contract drawings or in Section 02713 of these
specifications.
B. Valves shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with applicable
AmericanW ater Works Association Standards.
C. The valves shall be located as shown on the Contract Drawings.
D. All plug valves, control valves and sluice gates shall be designed for 460 volt, 3-
phase operation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit detailed product data and descriptive literature including dimension, headloss
data (where applicable), pressure rates and materials of construction for valves.
B. Provide shop drawings which clearly illustrate the general arrangements of the
equipment and dimensioned cross sectional views of the components complete with
all piping accessories and appurtenances. A complete piping plan with detailed
dimensions shall be required for the wet well and valve vault.
C. Submit control panel information, control diagrams, operation sequence and wiring
diagrams (where applicable).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL VALVES:
A.
Control valves shall be 90 degree turn non-lubricated eccentric type with resilient
faced plugs as manufactured by DeZurik or approved equal, shall be rated at a minium
of 150 psi, and shall be suitable for sanitary sewer wastewater.
B.
Valves shall also be suitable for throttling services and services where valve operation
is infrequent.
c.
Valves shall have modulating electric operators complete with position limit switches,
remote position indicators, mechanical overload torque switches, mechanical dial
position indicators and manual (handwheel) over-rides. Actuators shall be housed in
VALVES
11300-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosure and shall be equipped for remote modulation and
position monitoring as well as local operation. Electric actuators shall be
manufactured by EIM Company, AUMA Actuators or approved equal.
D. Three (3) - 16" control valves shall be provided under this contract.
2.2 PLUG VALVES:
A. Valves shall be of the 90 degree turn, non-lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced
plugs and shall be DeZurik Eccentric Plug Valves or approved equal, shall be rated
at a minimum of 150 psi, and shall be suitable for sanitary sewer wastewater.
B. Manual valves shall be gear actuated and shall have an extended 2" nut which shall
be vertically located in the field. Actuators shall clearly indicate valve position with
a mechanical dial position indicator.
C. Electrically actuated valves shall have electric operators complete with position limit
switches, mechanical overload torque switches, mechanical dial position indicators,
and manual (handwheel) over-rides. Actuators shall be housed in a NEMA 4
weatherproof enclosures and shall be equipped for both remote and local operation.
Electric actuators shall be manufactured by EIM Company, AUMA Actuators or
approved equal.
D. Three (3) - 20" manual plug valves, four (4) -14" manual plug valves, and two (2) -
20" electrically actuated plug valves shall be provided under this contract.
2.3 KNIFE GATE VALVES:
A. Knife gate valves shall be Flexgate as manufactured by Red Valve, or approved equal,
and shall be suitable for working pressures up to 100 psi.
B. Materials of construction shall be 316 stainless steel for the body and gate. The slurry
sleeves shall be suitable for sanitary sewer wastewater application as recommended
by the manufacturer.
C. Valves shall be provided with a 4: 1 bevel gear actuator or equivalent to ease
operation, and a clean out port on the base.
D. Two (2) - 16" knife gate valves shall be provided under this contract.
2.4 SLUICE GATES:
A.
Sluice gates shall be Fontaine Series 20 Model 204 or approved equal.
B.
Actuators shall be pedestal mounted electric operators with position limit switches,
mechanical overload torque switches, mechanical dial position indicators, manual
(handwheel) over-rides, and NEMA 4 weatherproof enclosures.
c.
Electric actuators shall be manufactured by EIM Company, AUMA Actuators, or
approved equal.
V ALVES
11300-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Actuators shall be equipped for both local and remote operation.
E. See the Schedule of Sluice Gates on Sheet C6.1 of the Contract Drawings for list of
gates and additional specifications.
2.5 CHECK VALVES:
A. The discharge line check valves shall be the Surgebuster Check Valve Series 7200 as
manufactured by Val-Matic or approved equal, and shall be suitable for working
pressures of 250 psi in sanitary sewer wastewater.
B. Valves shall be provided with a screw-type backflow actuator, or equivalent, to allow
opening of the valve during no-flow conditions.
c. Valves shall also be provided with a mechanical indicator to provide disc position
indication.
D. Three (3) - 16" check valves shall be provided under this contract.
2.6 AIR RELEASE VALVES:
A. The sewage air release and vacuum break valves shall be Vent-O-Mat Series RGXAir
Valve, or approved equal, and shall be suitable for working pressures of 150 psi in
sanitary sewer wastewater.
B. The valves shall have an integral "anti-surge" feature which shall be operate
automatically to limit surge pressure rise or shock induced by closure to less than 2
times rated working pressure.
C. Valve bodies shall be stainless steel.
D. See table below for sizes, quantities and locations:
Air Release Valve Summary Table
Model Size
Parent Pipe
Location Diameter Min. Pressure Qty.
Force Main 14" 7.5 psi 2
Discharge Pipe 16" NIA 3
Header Pipe 20" 15 psi 2
RGX 3"
RGXb 3"
RGX 4"
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A.
Valves and all required appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturers specifications.
V ALVES
11300-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. See Section 11900 for further control wiring installation guidelines.
C. All equipment shall be provided with a stainless steel equipment tag with the complete
identification number engraved. The Contractor shall submit a list equipment with
location and complete tag number for approval prior to fabrication of the tags.
3.2 TESTS:
A. All valves shall be hydrostatically and seat tested in the factory to demonstrate zero
leakage. Upon request, the manufacturer shall provided test certificates, dimensional
drawings, parts list drawings, and operation and maintenance manuals.
3.3 PAINTING:
A. All valves shall have exterior and interior coatings in accordance applicable ANSI,
NSF and ANW A Standards as well as Section 09900 of these specifications.
END OF SECTION
V ALVES
11300-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 11500
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
This section shall cover all work necessary to furnish, install and place into
operation the electrical submersible pump(s) required to complete this project.
This section includes electric submersible pump(s) to be supplied with motor,
close coupled volute, cast iron discharge elbow, guide bar brackets, power cable,
and accessories.
PART 2 - REQUIREMENTS
2.1 SCOPE
Furnish and install 2-350 HP and 1-40 HP submersible non-clog wastewater
.pump(s) in accordance with the chart below and as manufactured by ITT Flygt
Corporation. Each pump shall be equipped with a close coupled submersible
electric motor connected for operation on 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz, 4 wire
service with 35 linear feet of submersible cable (SUBCAB) suitable for
submersible pump applications. The power cable shall be sized according to NBC
and ICEA standards. Also, 35 linear feet of multi-conductor submersible cable
(SUBCAB) will be used to convey pump monitoring device signals. The pump
shall be supplied with a mating cast iron 8 inch discharge connection and be
capable of operating at the following proposed and future conditions: .
Proposed Conditions (1-20" Force Main)
Pump Scenario Pump Size GPM TDH Shutoff Head Note
1 Pump Running 350 HP 1600 75 390 ft. Initial Pump on Frequency
1 Pump Running 350 HP 5300 120 390 ft. Pump at Full Speed
2 Pumps Running 350 HP 3500 250 390 ft. Both Pumps at Full Speed
1 Pump Running 40HP 350 56 89 ft. Initial Pump on Frequency
1 Pump Running 40HP 1750 63 89 ft. Pump at Full Speed
Future Conditions (1-20" Force Main & 1-24" Force Main)
Pump Scenario
2 Pumps Running
5 Pumps Running
Pump Size GPM
350 HP 6000
350 HP 3100
TDH
145
260
Note
Both Pumps at Full Speed
All Pumps at Full Speed
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11500-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Each pump shall be fitted with 35 feet of stainless steel lifting chain or stainless
steel cable. The working load of the lifting system shall be 50% greater than the
pump unit weight.
2.2 SUBMITTALS
Submittal data shall be provided to show compliance with these specifications,
plans or other specifications that will influence the proper operation of the
pump(s).
Standard submittal data for approval must consist of:
a. Pump Performance Curves.
b. Pump Outline Drawing.
c. Station Drawing for Accessories
d. Electrical Motor Data.
e. Control Drawing and Data.
f. Access Frame Drawing.
g. Typical Installation Guides.
h. Technical Manuals.
1. Parts List.
J. Printed Warranty.
k. Manufacturer's Equipment Storage Recommendations.
I. Manufacturer's Start-Up Report Form.
2.3 TESTING
Testing performed upon each pump include the following inspections:
a. Impeller, motor rating and electrical connections shall be checked for
compliance with this specification.
b. Prior to submergence, each pump shall be run dry to establish correct
rotation.
c. Each pump shall be run submerged in water.
d. Each pump shall be factory tested with its respective control panel.
e. Motor and cable insulation shall be tested for moisture content or
insulation defects.
Upon request, a written quality assurance record coIifirming the above
testinglinspections shall be supplied with each pump at the time of shipment.
Each pump (when specified) shall be tested in accordance with the lastest test
code of the Hydraulic Institute (H.I.) at the manufacturer to determine heads vs.
capacity and kilowatt draw required. Witness tests shall be available at the
factory upon request. The pump(s) shall be rejected if the above requirements are
not satisfied.
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11500-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4 START-UP SERVICE
The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified factory
trained field service engineer for a minimum of two 8-hour working days(s) at the
site to inspect the installation and instruct the owners's personnel on the operation
and maintenance of the pumping units. After the pumps have been completely
installed and wired, the contractor shall have the manufacturer do the following:
a. Megger stator and power cables.
b. Check seal lubrication.
c. Check for proper rotation.
d. Check power supply voltage.
e. Measure motor operating load and no load current.
f. Check level control operation and sequence.
During this initial inspection, the manufacturer's service representative shall
review recommended operation and maintenance procedures with the owner's
personnel.
2.5 FACTORY SERVICE
Factory-Approved service facilities with qualified factory-trained mechanics shall
be available for prompt emergency and routine service.
2.6 GUARANTEE
In addition to the general guarantee required elsewhere in these specifications, the
pump manufacturer shall furnish the Owner with a written warranty to cover the
pump(s) and motor(s) against defects in workmanship and material for a period of
five (5) years or 10,000 hours of operation under normal use and service.
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1 PUMP DESIGN
The pump(s) shall be automatically and firmly connected to the discharge
connection, guided by no less than two parallel guide bars extending from the top
of the station to the wet well mounted discharge connection. There shall be no
need for personnel to enter the wet-well. Sealing of the pumping unit to the
discharge connection shall be accomplished by a machined metal to metal
watertight contact. Sealing of the discharge interface with a diaphragm, O-ring or
profile gasket will not be acceptable. The entire weight of the pumplmotor unit
shall be borne by the pump discharge elbow. No portion of the pumplmotor unit
shall bear on the sump floor directly or on a sump floor mounted stand.
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11500-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Power and pilot cable supports shall be provided and consist of a wire braid
sleeve with attachment loops or tails to connection to the under side of the access
frame.
3.2 PUMP CONSTRUCTION
Major pump components shall be of gray cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B, with
smooth surfaces devoid of blow holes or other casting irregularities. All exposed
nuts or bolts shall be AISI type 316 stainless steel. All metal surfaces coming into
contact with the pumped media, other than stainless steel, shall be protected by a
factory applied spray. coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with a
polyester resin paint finish on the exterior of the pump.
Sealing design shall incorporate metal,;,to-metal contact between machined
surfaces. Pump/Motor unit mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required
shall be machined and fitted with Nitrile or Viton rubber O-rings. Joint sealing
will be the result of controlled compression of rubber O-rings in two planes and
O-ring contact of four sides without the requirement of a specific bolt torque
limit. Rectangular cross sectioned rubber, paper or synthetic gaskets that require
specific torque limits to achieve compression shall not be considered as adequate
or equal. No secondary sealing compounds, elliptical O-rings, grease or other
devices shall be used.
3.3 COOLING SYSTEM
Each pumplmotor unit shall be provided with an integral, self-supplying cooling
system. The motor water jacket shall encircle the stator housing and. shall be of
cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B. The water jacket shall thus provide heat
dissipation for the motor regardless of whether the motor unit is submerged in the
pumped media or surrounded by air. After passing through a classifying labyrinth,
the impeller back vanes shall provide the necessary circulation of the cooling
liquid, a portion of the pumpage, through the cooling system. Two cooling liquid
supply pipes, one discharging low and one discharging high within the jacket,
shall supply the cooling liquid to the jacket. An air evacuation tube shall be
provided to facilitate air removal from within the jacket. Any piping internal to
the cooling system shall be shielded from the cooling media flow allowing for
unobstructed circular flow within the jacket about the stator housing. Two cooling
liquid return ports shall be provided. The intemals to the cooling system shall be
non-clogging by virtue of their dimensions. Drilled and threaded provisions for
external cooling and, seal flushing or air relief are to be provided. The cooling
jacket shall be equipped with two flanged, gasketed and bolted inspection ports of
not less than 4"0 located 1800 apart. The cooling system shall provide for
continuous submerged or completely non-submerged pump operation in liquid or
in air having a temperature of up to 400C (1040F), in accordance with NEMA
standards. Restrictions limiting the ambient or liquid temperatures at levels less
than 400C are not acceptable.
SUBMERSffiLE PUMPS
11500-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4 CABLE ENTRY SEAL
The cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure a
watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall consist of dual cylindrical
elastomer grommets, flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance fit against
the cable outside diameter and the cable entry inside diameter. The grommets
shall be compressed by the cable entry unit, thus providing a strain relief function.
The assembly shall provide ease of changing the cable when necessary using the
same entry seal. The cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be sealed
from each other, which shall isolate the stator housing from foreign material
gaining access through the pump top. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary
sealing systems shall not be 'considered acceptable.
3.5 MOTOR
The pump motor shall be a NEMA B design, induction type with a squirrel cage
rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. The stator
windings shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class H insulation rated for
1800C (3560F). The stator shall be insulated by the trickle impregnation method
using Class H monomer-free polyester resin resulting in a winding fill factor of at
least 95%. The motor shall be inverter duty rated in accordance with NEMA
MG 1, Part 31.The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the cast iron stator
housing. The use of multiple step dip and bake-type stator insulation process is
not acceptable. The use of bolts, pins or other fastening devices requiring
penetration of the stator housing is not acceptable. The motor shall be specifically
designed for submersible pump usage and designed for continuous duty pumping
media of up to 400C (1040F) with an 800C temperature rise and capable of at least
15 evenly spaced starts per hour. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be
made of cast aluminum. Pumps using 9xx series drive units are capable of 8
evenly spaced starts per hour. Thermal switches shall be embedded in the stator
end coils to monitor the temperature of each phase winding. These thermal
switches shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor
overload protection and shall be connected to the control panel. The junction
chamber shall be sealed off from the stator housing and shall contain a terminal
board for connection of power and pilot sensor cables using threaded compression
type terminals. The use of wire nuts or crimp-type connectors is not acceptable.
The motor and the pump shall be produced by the same manufacturer.
The combined service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency and specific
gravity) shall be a minimum of 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of
plus or minus 10%. The motor shall be designed for operation up to 400C (1040F)
ambient and with a temperature rise not to exceed 800e. A performance chart
shall be provided upon request showing curves for torque, current, power factor,
input/output kW and efficiency. This chart shall also include data on starting and
no-load characteristics.
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11500-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The power cable shall be sized according to the NEC and ICEA standards and
shall be of sufficient length to reach the junction box without the need of any
splices. The outer jacket of the cable shall be oil resistant chlorinated
polyethylene rubber. The motor and cable shall be capable of continuous
submergence underwater without loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 65 feet
or greater.
The motor horsepower shall be adequate so that the pump is non-overloading
throughout the entire pump performance curve from shut -off through run-out.
3.6 EXPLOSION-PROOF PUMPS
The power system including the pump, motor and power cable shall be approved
for use in areas classified as hazardous locations in accordance with the NEC
Class I, Div. 1, Group C and D service as determined and approved by a U.S.
nationally recognized testing laboratory (U.L., FM, CSA) at the time of the
bidding of the project. As required by Factory Mutual (FM) the motor shall be
capable of operating in pumped media up to 104 DEGREES F. Motor thermal
switches shall monitor and protect the motor from excessive temperature. An
internal Float Switch shall be available, as an option, in the motor chamber.
Service of explosion-proof submersible units shall be performed by qualified FM
experienced personneL The pump manufacturer must provide training
schools to qualify personnel in the proper service and repair of explosion-
proof pumps.
3.7 PILOT CABLE
The pilot cable shall be designed specifically for use with submersible pumps and
shall be type SUBCAB (SUBmersible CABle). The cable shall be multi-
conductor type with stainless steel braided shielding, a chlorinated polyethylene
rubber outer jacket and tinned copper conductors insulated with ethylene-
propylene rubber. The conductors shall be arranged in twisted pairs. The cable
shall be rated for 600 Volts and 900C (1940F) with a 400C (1040F) ambient
temperature and shall be approved by Factory Mutual (FM). The cable length
shall be adequate to reach the junction box without the need for splices.
3.8 BEARINGS
The pump shaft shall rotate on at least three grease-lubricated bearings. The upper
bearing, provided for radial forces, shall be a single roller bearing. The lower
bearings shall consist of at least one roller bearing for radial forces and one or two
angular contact ball bearings for axial thrust.
The minimum LlO bearing life shall be 100,000 hours at any point along the
usable portion of the pump curve at maximum product speed.
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11500-6
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11500-7
The lower bearing housing shall include an independent thermal sensor to monitor
the bearing temperature. If a high temperature occurs, the sensor shall activate an
alarm and shut the pump down.
3.9 MECHANICAL SEAL
Each pump shall be provided with a tandem mechanical shaft seal system
consisting of two totally independent seal assemblies. The lower seal shall be
independent of the impeller hub. The seals shall operate in a lubricant reservoir
that hydro dynamically lubricates the lapped seal faces at a constant rate. The
lower, primary seal unit, located between the pump and. the lubricant chamber,
shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant
tungsten-carbide seal ring. The upper, secondary seal unit, located between the
lubricant chamber and the motor housing, shall contain one stationary and one
positively driven rotating corrosion resistant tungsten-carbide seal ring. Each
seal interface shall be held in contact by its own spring system. The seals shall
require neither maintenance nor adjustment and shall be capable of operating in
either clockwise or counter clockwise direction of rotation without damage or loss
of seal. For special applications, other seal face materials shall be available.
Should both seals fail and allow fluid to enter the stator housing, a port shall be
provided to direct that fluid immediately to the stator float switch to shut down
the pump and activate an alarm. Any intrusion of fluid shall not come into
contact with the lower bearings.
The following seal types shall not be considered acceptable or equal to the
dual independent seal specified: shaft seals without positively driven rotating
members, or conventional double mechanical seals containing either a common
single or double spring acting between the upper and lower seal faces. No system
requiring a pressure differential to offset pressure and to affect sealing shall be
used.
Each pump shall be provided with a lubricant chamber for the shaft sealing
system. The lubricant chamber shall be designed to prevent overfilling and to
provide lubricant expansion capacity. The drain and inspection plug, with positive
anti-leak seal shall be easily accessible from the outside. The seal system shall not
rely upon the pumped media for lubrication. The motor shall be able to operate
continuously while non-submerged without damage while pumping under
load.
Seal lubricant shall be FDA Approved, nontoxic.
3.10 PUMP SHAFT
Pump and motor shaft shall be a solid continuous shaft. The pump shaft. is an
extension of the motor shaft. Couplings shall not be acceptable. The pump shaft
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11500-8
shall be of carbon steel ASTM A 572 and shall be completely isolated from the
pumped liquid. Shaft material on 6x5 and 7x5 drive units shall be stainless steel -
ASTM A479 S43100-T.
3.11 IMPELLER
The impeller(s) shall be of gray cast iron, Class 35B, dynamically balanced,
multiple vaned, double shrouded non-clogging design having long throughlets
without acute turns. The impeller(s) shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous
materials, heavy sludge and other matter found in wastewater. Impeller(s) shall be
keyed to the shaft, retained with an expansion ring and shall be capable of passing
a minimum 6 inch diameter solid. All impellers shall be coated with an acrylic
dispersion zinc phosphate primer.
3.12 WEAR RINGS
A wear ring system shall be used to provide efficient sealing between the volute
and suction inlet of the impeller. Each pump shall be equipped with a Nitrile
rubber coated steel or brass ring insert that is drive fitted to the volute inlet.
This pump shall also have a stainless steel impeller wear ring heat-shrink fitted
onto the suction inlet of the impeller.
3.13 VOLUTE
Pump volute(s) shall be single-'piece gray cast iron, Class 35B, non-concentric
design with smooth passages large enough to pass any solids that may enter the
impeller. Minimum inlet and discharge size shall be as specified.
3.14 PROTECTION
All stators shall incorporate thermal switches in series to monitor the temperature
of each. phase winding. Should high temperature occur, the thermal switches shall
open, stop the motor and activate an alarm.
A lower bearing temperature sensor shall be provided. The sensor shall directly
contact the outer race of the thrust bearing providing for accurate temperature
monitoring.
A leakage sensor shall be provided to detect water in the stator chamber. The
Float Leakage Sensor (FLS), a small float switch, shall be used to detect the
presence of water in the stator chamber. When activated, the FLS will stop the
motor and activate an alarm. USE OF VOLTAGE SENSITIVE SOLID STATE
SENSORS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED.
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11500-9
The thermal switches, FLS and the lower bearing temperature monitor shall be
connected to a MAS (Monitoring and Status) monitoring unit. The MAS shall be
designed to be mounted in the control paneL
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1 INSTALLATION
A. The pump(s) and all required appurtenances shall be installed in accordance
with manufacturer's specifications.
END OF SECTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PANELS FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11501-1
SECTION 11501
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PANELS FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section provides specification requirements for two (2) 350 HP 18 Pulse
adjustable frequency drives rated at 414 amps, herein referred to as AC Drives, for
use with NEMA B, design AC motors rated at 335HP @ 385 amps and for one (1)
40 HP 6 Pulse adjustable frequency drives with 5% input line reactors rated at 65
amps, herein referred to as AC Drives, for use with NEMA B, design AC motors
rated at 40 HP @ 50 amps.
B. The Pump manufacturer shall supply enclosures housing the AC Drives and
associated pump control equipment in this section for this project. The AC Drive
manufacturer shall, field test, adjust and certify all installed AC Drives for
satisfactory operation.
C. The equipment listed below is a guideline and does not relieve the supplier from
supplying a system that will function as required in conjunction with the PLC and
SCADA.
D. Any exceptionsldeviations to this specification shall be indicated in writing and
submitted with the quotation.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
B. ANSI C84.1 - Voltages Tolerances for North America.
C. IEC 68 Part 2-3 - Basic Environmental Testing Procedures Part 2: Tests - Test
Ca:Damp Heat.
D. IEC 146.1 - Semiconductor Converters - General Requirements and Line
Commutated Converters Part 1-1: Specifications of Basic Requirements.
E. IEC 664 - Insulation Coordination for Equipment Within Low-Voltage Systems.
F. IEC 447 - Man-Machine Interface Actuating Principles.
G. IEC 439 Part 1 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Assemblies.
H. IEC 947 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Components.
1. IEC 364 - Electrical Installation of Buildings.
J. IEC 204INFP A 79 - Electrical Equipment of Industrial MachineslIndustrial
Machinery.
K. IEC 106 - Guide for Specifying Environmental Conditions for Equipment
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PANELS FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11501-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Performance Rating.
L. IEC 529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosure.
M. IEC 1000 - Electromagnetic Compatibility.
N. IEC 721 - Classification of Environmental Conditions.
O. IEC 255-8 Overload Relays.
P. IEC 801-2,-3,-4,-5 - Immunity Tests.
Q. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures.
R. NEMA ICS, Part 4 - Overload Relays.
S. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
T. NEMA ICS 2-321 - Electrical Interlocks.
U. NEMA ICS7 - Industrial Control and Systems Adjustable Speed Drives.
V. NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection
Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drives.
W. UL 50 - UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
X. UL 98 - UL Standard for Disconnect Switches.
Y. UL 507 - UL Standard for Safety Electric Fans.
Z. UL 508 - UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment.
AA. UL 508C - UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment.
BB. UL 991 - UL Standard for Safety Tests for Safety Related Controls employing Solid-
State Devices.
Ce. OSHA 1910.95 - AC Drive Controller Acoustical Noise.
DD. Conforming to National Safe Transmit Association and International Safe
Transmit Association Test for Packages Weighing 100 lbs. or Over.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Six submittal packages including drawings shall be furnished for Engineers approval
prior to factory assembly of the AC Drives. These packages shall consist of
elementary power and control wiring diagrams on one drawing and enclosure outline
drawings. The enclosure drawings shall include front and side views of the
enclosures with overall dimensions and weights shown, conduit entrance locations.
Standard catalog specification sheets showing voltage, horsepower and maximum
current ratings shall be furnished as part of the submittal package.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. A 3-year parts and labor warranty shall be provided on materials and workmanship
from the date of shipment.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The manufacturer of the AC Drive shall be a certified ISO 9002 facility.
C. The AC Drive shall be designed, constructed and tested in accordance with NEMA,
NEC, and IEC standards.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. The AC Drive power module shall be UL Listed according to UL 508 C - Power
Conversion Equipment. As verification, a UL label shall be attached on the inside
nameplate of the combination enclosure.
D. Every power converter shall be tested with an AC induction motor while loaded and
temperature cycled within an environment chamber at 400C (1040F).
E. All pilot devices shall be industrial rated and tested to verify proper operation.
F. All panels shall be factory tested, in conjunction with its respective submersible
pump, to the power requirements as shown on the plans to assure proper operation
of all components. Each control function shall be activated to check for proper
indication.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The AC Drive shall be manufactured by the Square D Company, Class 8839CPD for
the 350 HP and Altivar 58TRX units for the 40 HP, or approved equal.
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. The AC Drive shall convert the input AC mains power to an adjustable frequency and
voltage, as defined in the following sections.
B. The input power section shall utilize (18 Pulse for the 350 HP and 6 pulse for the 40
HP) three full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers. The diode rectifiers
shall convert fixed voltage and frequency, AC line power to fixed DC voltage. This
power section shall be insensitive to phase rotation of the AC line. The 18-Pulse ,
multiple bridge rectifier system shall include an integral reactor I phase shifting
transformer. The 18-Pulse configuration shall result in a multiple pulse current
waveform that approximates near sinusoidal input current waveform.
C. The output power section shall change fixed DC voltage to adjustable frequency AC
voltage. This section shall utilize intelligent power modules (IPMs), as required by
the current rating of the motor.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PANELS FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11501-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. The AC Drive power converter shall be enclosed in a Nema-12 enclosure with top
and bottom conduit entry with a circuit breaker disconnect, industrial rated operator
controls, user terminal strip connections.
B. The enclosure shall provide dedicated user terminals for power and control device
connection.
e. Provisions shall be included for locking the disconnect in the OFF position with a
padlock.
D. All enclosure fans shall be front accessible.
E. The enclosure door shall open a minium of 1800.
2.4 MOTOR DATA
A. The AC Drive shall be sized to operate the following AC motor:
1. Motor horsepower 335 and 40 HP.
2. Motor full load ampere 385 amps and 50 amps.
3. Motor voltage will be 460.
4. Motor service factor will be 1.15 on sine wave and 1.0 SF on inverter power.
2.5 APPLICATION DATA
A. The AC Drive shall be sized to operate a Variable Torque load.
B. The speed range shall be from a minimum speed of 1.0 Hz to a maximum speed of
60Hz.
2.6 ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
A. The AC Drive shall meet IEC 664-1 and NEMA ICS 1 Standards.
B. The AC Drive shall be designed to operate in an ambient temperature from ooe to
400C (320 F to 1040F).
C. The storage temperature range shall be -250C to 650C (-130F to 1490F).
D. The maximum relative humidity shall be 95% at 400C (1040F), non-condensing.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PANELS FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11501-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. The AC Drive shall be rated to operate at altitudes less than or equal to 3,300 ft
(1000m). For altitudes above 3,300 ft (1,000 m), de-rate the AC Drive by 1 % for
every 330 ft (100m).
F. The AC Drive shall meet the IEC 721-3-3-3M3 operational vibration specification.
2.7 RATINGS
A. The AC Drive shall be designed to operate from an input voltage of 460 V AC -15%
+20%.
B. The AC Drive shall operate from an input frequency range of 60 (:t) 5%.
e. The displacement power factor shall not be less than 0.98 lagging under any speed
or load condition.
D. The efficiency of the AC Drive at 100% speed and load shall not be less than 97%.
E. The Variable torque rated AC Drive over current capacity shall be not less than 110%
for 1 minute.
F. The output carrier frequency of the AC Drive shall be programmable at 0.5, 1,2 Khz
for more than 100 HP VT and up to 8Khz for 100 HP VT and below and 75 HP and
below for CT applications. In addition, the output carrier frequency shall be
randomly modulated about the selected frequency.
2.8 PROTECTION
A. Upon power-up, the AC Drive shall automatically test for valid operation of memory,
loss of analog reference input, loss of communication, DC-to-DC power supply,
control power and pre-charge circuit.
B. The enclosure shall provide a fully coordinated 100KAIC rating for 125 HP VT and
higher marked on the enclosure nameplate. Short circuit coordination to UL508C
Power Conversion Equipment and NEMA ICS 7.1.
C. The AC Drive shall be protected against short circuits, between output phases and to
ground.
D. The AC Drive shall have a minimum AC under-voltage power loss ride-through of
200 milliseconds (12 cycles).
E. The AC drive shall have a programmable ride through function, which will allow the
logic to maintain control for a minimum of one second (60 cycles) without faulting.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PANELS FOR SUBMERSffiLE PUMPS
11501-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. For a fault condition other than a ground fault, short circuit or internal fault, an auto
restart function will provide up to 6 programmable restart attempts. The time delay
before restart attempts will be 30 seconds.
G. Upon loss of the analog process follower reference signal, the AC Drive shall be
programmable to display a fault.
H. The AC Drive shall have solid-state is UL 508 C listed overload protective device
and meets IEC 947.
1. The output frequency shall be software enabled to fold back when the motor is
overloaded.
J. There shall be one skip frequency range that can be programmed to a bandwidth of
:f: 2.5Hz.
K. Provide TVSS , type 1310 XWF series surge suppressor, hard wired and factory
mounted, 100,000 peak volts of surge suppression.
L. Motor protection/management relay shall be supplied by the pump supplier, and
installed by the VFD manufacturer or its authorized panel shop.
2.9 ADJUSTMENTS & CONFIGURATIONS
A. The AC Drive will be factory programmed to operate all specified optional devices.
B. The acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable from 0.05 to 999.9
seconds.
e. The memory shall retain and record run status and fault type of the past 8 faults.
D. The software shall have a Energy Economy function that, when selected, will reduce
the voltage to the motor when selected for variable torque loads. A constant volts/Hz
ratio will be mairitained during acceleration. The output voltage will then
automatically adjust to meet the torque requirement of the load.
2.10 KEYPAD DISPLAY INTERFACE
A. The keypad - Message Display interface (MDC) shall offer the modification of AC
Drive adjustments via a touch keypad. All electrical values, configuration parameters,
I/O assignments, application and activity function access, faults, local control, and
adjustment storage, and diagnostics shall be in plain English. There will be a standard
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PANELS FORSUBMERSffiLE PUMPS
11501-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
selection of 4 additional languages built-in to the operating software as standard. The
keypad shall have the ability to store 4 parameter programs.
B. The display will be a high resolution, 4 LINE Alpha numeric LCD back-lit screen.
e. The AC Drive model number, torque type, software revision number, horsepower,
output current, motor frequency and motor voltage shall be listed on the drive
identification portion of the LCD display.
D. The keypad display shall consist of programmable function keys that allow both
operating commands and programming options to be preset by the operator. A
hardware selector switch shall allow the terminal keypad to be locked out from
unauthorized personnel.
2.11 OPERATORS AND CONTROL WIRING
A. The control power for the digital inputs and outputs shall be 24 VDe.
B. The internal power supply shall incorporate automatic current fold-back that protects
the internal power supply if incorrectly connected or shorted. The transistor logic
outputs will be current limited and will not be damaged if shorted.
e. Pull-apart terminal strips shall be used on all logic and analog signal connections in
the power converter.
D. Two voltage-free relay output contacts will be provided. One of the contacts will
indicate AC Drive fault status. The other contact shall indicate a drive run status.
E. One analog output shall be provided. Programmable for either 0-20 ma or 4-20 ma.
The output shall be programmable for Motor Frequency, KW and Motor Current.
F. The combination enclosure shall have the following dedicated operator controls with
position indicating legend plates:
· Hand-Off-Auto switch (Communications, when used)
· Manual Speed Potentiometer
· Power On (red) LED indicator
· Drive Run (green) LED indicator
· Drive Fault (yellow) LED indicator
· Auto Mode (yellow) or Bypass Run (yellow) LED indicator
G. A WINDOWS@ software based interface shall be available for remote programming,
diagnostics and troubleshooting, and I/O Map display of terminal connections. This
device can be a laptop or hand-heldWINDOWS@ CE operator interface. It shall
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PANELS FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11501-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
allow storage of set -up configurations, allow for the uploading and downloading of
configurations between AC drives or to a personal computer. Memory shall be non-
volatile. This software user interface shall be available that is WINDOWS@
software based for use with personal computer, serial communication link, or
detachable operator interface.
H. All Enclosed AC Drives shall have 115V AC interface and control sequencing. A
Run Command Relay (RCR) shall function as a "request to run I run permissive" and
close only when all customer wired safeties and control operator conditions calling
for run are satisfied. The RCR relay shall prevent drive operation in any operating
mode including network communication if the RCR relay conditions are not satisfied.
A Drive Run Relay (DRR) shall provide run indication and interfacing to bypass (if
used) and other system control sequencing as specified.
1. An elasped time meter shall be mounted inside the panal and a signal shall be relayed
to the PLe. The meter shall operate on 120 V AC, shall indicate in hours (6 digits)
and tenths and shall not be re-settable.
J. Control transformer shall be provided to produce the 120 V AC and/or 24 VDC for
control circuits. Transformers shall be fused on the primary and secondary circuits.
The secondary circuits shall be grounded.
K. See the Electrical Engineering Drawings for details on the requirements to interface
to the controls. systems of the project.
2.12 HARMONIC ANALYSIS
A. The harmonic distortion at the point of common coupling (PC C) shall be predicted
through computer modeling of the distribution system and connected AC drives as
specified. The PCC for voltage and current distortion shall be at the secondary of the
480 V distribution transformer. These harmonic distortion values must not exceed
as those as listed in IEEE 519-1992, Table 10.3 for the current distortion. If the
calculations determine that harmonic distortion values are higher than the voltage and.
current values specified, the drive manufacturer shall provide either line reactors,
isolation transformers, multi-pulse input drives or trap filters to meet the intent of
IEEE 519-192 guidelines. This harmonic analysis report shall be part of the approval
drawing process, submitted to the engineer for approval.
2.13 DRIVE ENCLOSURE DIMENSIONS
A. The 100 HP and below shall be no more than 32" wide, 95" high and 26" deep, the
350 HP shall be 95" h x 48" w x 26" d.
V ARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PANELS FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11501-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.14 EMERGENCY FULL SPEED REQUIREMENTS (40 HP only)
A. The AC Drive shall include fully rated isolation and bypass contactors complete with
Class 20 thermal overload relay protection for emergency full speed capability.
Bypass and isolation contactor shall be mechanical and electrical interlocked.
Emergency full speed bypass shall befull voltage cross the line. Bypass and isolation
contactors shall be in Integrated construction.
Integrated bypass shall consist of integrating bypass and isolation contactors into the
same enclosure compartment as the AC drive controller if space permits. One
disconnect shall be common to the drive controller and bypass contactor.
B. A TEST-NORMAL selector switch shall be used with bypass to allow testing ofthe
AC Drive without running the motor. In the "Test" position the isolation contactor
shall remain open preventing motor operation while operating the AC drive.
e. The operator shall have full operational control of the bypass starter using a door
mounted AFCIOFF/BYP ASS selector switch.
D. Auto transfer to bypass function shall be provided in the event of drive fault or
failure. This feature shall be enabled or disabled by an internally mounted selector
switch. An adjustable timer shall provide control of the delay time between fault and
transfer to bypass.
2.15 SPARE PARTS
A. The AC drive manufacturer shall supply the following spare parts with this project.
Two complete sets of all fusing
One Main control board
One of any option boards
One spare keypad
One spare Enclosure fan.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that the location is ready to receive work and the dimensions are as indicated.
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PANELS FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
11501-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Before and during the installation, the AC Drive equipment shall be protected from
site contaminants.
3.3 INSTALLATION AND START-UP
A. Installation shall be in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, drawings and
recommendations.
B. The AC Drive manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized technical
representative to inspect the contractor's installation, test and start -up the AC Drive(s)
furnished under this specification for a total of 1 trip per VFD.
3.4 TRAINING
A. An on-site training course of 1 training day shall be provided by a representative of
the AC Drive manufacturer to plant and/or maintenance personnel.
3.5 DOCUMENTATION
A. The AC Drive manufacturer shall supply comprehensive 8-112"x11" bound
instruction/installation manuals that includes wiring diagrams, layout diagrams, and
outline dimensions. This manual must be 3-hole punched for insertion in a shop
manual supplied by the installing contractor. (A CD ROM with the same information
on it, could be used in its place if acceptable to the owner)
3.6 DRAWINGS
A. Final, "As-Built" drawings encapsulated in mylar shall be attached to the inside of
the front doors. A list of all legends shall be included.
3.7 PANALMAKINGS
A. All component parts in the control panal shall be permantely marked and identified
as specified by the Owner's Representative. Marking shall be on the back plate
adjacent to the component. All control conductors shall be identified with wire
markers at each end, as close as practical to the end of the conductor.
END OF SECTION
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE PANELS FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS
Itll1-1O
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 11600
GRIT PUMP SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This section is for a portable self contained hydraulic grit pump system that is easily operated
by one person.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A complete list of equipment along with product data sheets and performance criteria shall
be submitted for approval.
PART 2 - EQUIPMENT
2.1 PUMP AND ACCESSORIES
A. The grit pump system shall be a "Pit Panther" as manufactured by Garner
Environmental Services, Inc. and shall include the following, at a minimum:
a. 140 HP (Diesel Powered) Trailer mounted power unit.
b. 3 inch hydraulically driven submersible trash/slurry pump head cab able of
pumping up to 750 gpm and handling 2-7/8 solids.
c. 6 inch hydraulically driven submersible trash/slurry pump head cab able of
pumping up to 2500 gpm and handling 5 Y2 solids.'
d. 100 gallon diesel fuel tank.
e. 100 gallon hydraulic reservoir.
f. Hydraulic hose reel and 50' hydraulic line set with quick disconnects.
g. Crane to facilitate placement of grit pump.
h. All equipment shall be assembled in a self contained unit and trailer mounted.
END OF SECTION
GRIT PUMP SYSTEM
11600-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 11900
INSTRUMENTATION, CONTROLS AND SCADA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 OVERVIEW:
The owner's pre-designated sub shall provide the design and then furnish all
necessary materials, labor and equipment for a complete installation of an
instrumentation, controls and SCADA system for the Spirit Creek Pump Station
as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Additionally, each piece of
equipment shall be connected to a programmable logic controller (PLC) located
on the main control panel in the electrical building that will operate and/or
monitor the equipment being supplied under this project, as well as the future
equipment indicated on the drawings. The PLC shall also be compatible with the
Owner's SCADA system, to be supplied and installed under this contract, such
that the equipment can be operated and/or monitored remotely.
The instrumentation, controls and SCADA contractor shall be MR. Systems, Inc.
and shall be paid through an allowance as described in special conditions Section
SC-028. In general this sub shall be responsible for the all field equipment, low
voltage cable, and the main control panel including SCADA equipment, PLC and
all programming.
See 11900 Appendix "A" for a Preliminary Bill of Materials and I/O Listing from
MR. Systems, Inc.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A complete control/instrumentation package shall be submitted to the Owner for
review and approval prior to fabrication or installation of any part of the system.
The submittal package shall include the following, at a minimum:
A. Equipment list and cut sheets for all items comprising the system.
B. Written narrative of the proposed control logic.
e. Complete wiring diagrams.
D. Prior to final acceptance, Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be
submitted and approved.
INSTRUMENTATION, CONTROLS AND SCADA
11900-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SCOPE
2.1 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER:
The PLC shall be manufactured by Allen Bradley, shall be able to speak MOD-
BUS, and shall have "touch screen" operation capabilities with graphics to
illustrate the status of all proposed and future equipment. The PLC shall be
capable of accepting analog and digital signals . for each of the following
equipment conditions, along with a minimum 20% pre-wired spares, and then
relaying these same signals to a remote location via the SCADA system:
A. Pumps: All pumps shall be controlled by variable frequency drives that
receive analog signals from the PLC which receives level readings from
Milltronics Ultrasonic Level Sensors mounted in the wet wells. Pumps
shall be ramped up and down based on the level in the wet well. The
"Lead Pump" and subsequent "Lag Pumps" shall be alternated so that the
same pumps do not turn on in the same sequence. When the wetwell
sluice gate (SLG-0600) is closed, there shall be separate lead and lag
pumps for each wetwell. Mechanical by-passes shall also be installed on
all pumps in case of instrumentation failure. The level settings for the
pumps shall be easily programmable and the initial level settings shall be
as follows:
Condition 1: Free Flowing Wetwell (Sluice Gate SLG-0600 open)
Description
Lead Pump
Lag Pump 1
Lag Pump 2
Lag Pump 3
Lag Pump 4
Lag Pump 5 (Spare)
Pump On
Elevation
95.00
98.00
100.00
102.00
103.00
104.00
Pump Full
Speed Elev.
98.00
100.00
102.00
104.00
104.00
105.00
Pump Off
Elevation
93.00
97.00
98.00
100.00
10 1.00
102.00
Condition 2: Isolated Wetwells (Sluice Gate SLG-0600 closed)
Pump On Pump Full Pump Off
Description Elevation Speed Elev. Elevation
Lead Pumps 95.00 98.00 93.00
Lag Pumps 1 98.00 100.00 97.00
Lag Pumps 2 100.00 102.00 98.00
Each pump shall have a pressure switch with isolation valve and a pressure
gauge with transducer and isolation valve installed where shown on the plans.
INSTRUMENTATION, CONTROLS AND SCADA
11900-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Pump Control Valves: Actuated plug valves (VLV-1120, 1220, 1320,
1420, 1520, 1620) acting as pump control valves shall be monitored from
its fully closed position to its fully open position via the position indicator
on the valve. The valve shall close upon pump failure.
e. Header Plug: Valves: Interior plug valves located on the pipe header
(VLV-1910 and 1920) shall have the capability of being locally operated
by a hand/offlautomatic switch, as well as remotely through the PLC. The
header plug valves shall also be monitored via its limit switches.
D. Exterior Plug Valves: Exterior plug valves (VL V -1930, 1940, 1950, 1960,
1970 and 1980) will be manually operated and therefore, no monitoring or
control of the valves is required.
E. Sluice Gates: All sluice gates shall have the capability of being locally
operated by a hand/offlautomatic switch, through the PLC and remotely
through SCADA. The sluice gates position shall also be monitored via
limit switches.
F. Grinder System: The grinder system (GRD-2200) shall be continuously
monitored and shall send an alarm when any part of the system fails or
errors.
G. Sump Pump: The sump pump shall be monitored for a high water alarm
of 108.0.
H. Flow Meters: All flow meters will be continuously monitored by an
analog signal sent from its transmitter back to the PLe. The signal shall
then be converted into gallons per minute and constantly displayed on the
graphics of the PLe.
1. Security System: The motion detectors and the entrance keypad in the
Electrical Building shall be continuously monitored for a remote alarm.
J. HV AC System: The temperature in the Electrical Building shall be
continuously monitored for a remote alarm if the temperature rises above a
predetermined setting.
2.2 PUMP AND CONTROL VALVE INTERLOCK:
Each of the pump circuits shall interlock with the limit switch on the associated
pump control valve to ensure the pump is started and stopped against a closed
valve. A pump start command, whether in the hand or automatic mode, shall
energize the pump motor starter (only if the valve is closed as sensed by the valve
position indicator) and simultaneously energize the valve control motor to open
INSTRUMENTATION, CONTROLS AND SCADA
11900- 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the valve. When the pump is to be shut down, the valve motor will be energized
to close and the valve shall begin to close. Only after the valve is fully closed
shall the motor starter be de-energized, stopping the pump motor. Circuitry shall
be included to detect a "valve failure to open" condition for each pump control
valve.
2.3 SLUICE GATE INTERLOCKS:
The "Grinder Sluice Gate" (SLG-O 1 00) and the "Grinder Bypass Sluice Gate"
(SLG-0200) shall be interlocked to prevent closing both gates at the same time.
One gate must always be open.
The "Grit Trap Sluice Gates" (SLG-0800, 0900 and 1000) shall be interlocked to
prevent having SLG-0800 closed at the same time that either SLG-0900 or SLG-
1000 is closed.
The "Wet Well Sluice Gates" (SLG-0200, 0300 and 0400) shall be interlocked to
prevent having all closed at the same time unless SLG-0700 (overflow service
gate) is opened.
2.4 OVERFLOW GATE:
The "Overflow Sluice Gate" (SLG-0700) shall be automatically opened upon an
elevation of 107.00 in either wetwell and then closed upon an elevation of 105.00.
There shall also be an alarm condition when the SLG-0700 is opened.
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
The instrumentation and controls contractor shall be on-site as required to
coordinate and verify the installation of all required instrumentation and control
conduits.
The instrumentation and. controls contractor shall be responsible for the
installation of field instruments and control wire terminations at both ends. The
instrumentation and controls contractor shall provide the low voltage cable for
controls and the electrical contractor shall pull the cable through the conduits as
coordinated by the instrumentation and controls contractor.
PART 4 - START UP SERVICES
The services of a factory trained, qualified representative shall be provided to
supervise the installation and initial operation of the system, as well as train the
Owner's personnel in the proper care and operation of the system.
END OF SECTION
INSTRUMENTATION, CONTROLS AND SCADA
11900-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Systems, hte.
Service 8. System Integration
July 5, 2005
Lockwood Greene
Enterprise Mill
1450 Greene Street, Suite 200
Augusta, GA 30901
Attn: Mr. Robert Harmon
RE: City of Augusta - Spirit Creek Pump Station Telemetry System
Q05-068
Dear Bob,
M/R Systems, Inc is very pleased to have the opportunity to offer this proposal for providing
an additional Remote Telemetry Units (RTUs) for Augusta's existing SCADA system to
monitor and control the Spirit Creek Pump Station.
The attached Bill of Materials further details the equipment and services we offer to supply
under the scope of this quotation.
Please note that M/R Systems, Inc. has included project management, project engineering,
manufacturing, PLC programming, and SCADA System configuration to design, build, and
commission these new RTUs. We have also included Field Service Labor to provide wire
terminations within the RTU panel, antenna installation, I/O testing, and training.
This pricing is valid for a period of 90 days from this proposal date.
We appreciate having the opportunity to submit this proposal for your review, and we
sincerely hope to work with your team on this project. Please call with any questions or
comments.
Very truly yours,
M/R Systems, Inc.
Jim Bercik
1
One Meca Way. Norcross, Georgia 30093 . Phone 770-564-5688 . Fax 770-564-5689
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.0
Spirit Creek - Remote Telemetry Unit
The new remote telemetry units will be provided at the Spirit Creek Pump Station.
The units will be provided with a Modicon PLC to provide the Monitoring and
Control functionality required. The unit will be housed in a Nema 12 Painted
Carbon Steel Enclosure. The Remote Telemetry Units will be comprised of the
following:
Remote Telemetry Units (RTU)
Enclosure
Hoffman Nema 12 Painted Carbon Steel Enclosure with Suboanel
Single-Door FS Enclosure-(n x 36 x 24)
Door Subpanel,
MicroSwitch Door Limit Switch
Modicon Momentum PLC/RTU Hardware
Field Sienal Input/Output Reauirements.
Digital Inputs: Available: 80 Wired: n
Digital Outputs: Available: 48 Wired: 35
Analog Inputs: Available: 8 Wired: 5
Analog Outputs: Available: 8 Wired: 7
Power Supplies & SUr!!e Arrestion
Power Supplies
RS-232 Inline Surge Protector
AC Power Surge Protector & Mtg Bracket, Square D
Isolation Relays & Sockets
M/R Systems Kamikaze Surge Board for Analog Signals
UPS
Radio Eauipment
MDS 9810 900 MHz Spread Soectrum Radio
Cable Connectors
Coaxial Cable
Bulkhead Adapter
Mise
Fuse Blocks with Indicators
Circuit Breakers
Wire Terminals
Wire Duct
2
One Meca Way. Norcross, Georgia 30093 . Phone 770-564-5688 . Fax 770-564-5689
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.1
Remote Telemetry Unit Antennas and Accessories
At the Remote 'Site Antenna Hardware and cabling will be provided as described
below:
1.2
Polyphaser Enclosure
At all sites where antennas are provide a polyphaser enclosure will be provided
for optimal surge suppression:
1.3
Magnetic Flowmeters
The following Magnetic Flowmeters will be supplied. Proposal is based on
Siemens/Danfoss Magnetic Flowmeters:
FIT -2000 - Flow to Messed WWTP - 20 Inch Ma etic Flowmeter
FIT -2010 - Flow to S irit Creek WWTP - 24 Inch Ma etic Flowmeter
1.4
Ultrasonic Level Transmitters
The following Ultrasonic Transmitters will be supplied. Proposal is based on
Siemens/Milltronics Probe Ultrasonic Transmitters:
LIT-2100 - Wet Well #1
LIT -2110 - Wet Well Level #2
3
One Meca Way. Norcross, Georgia 30093 . Phone 770-564-5688 . Fax 770-564-5689
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.5
Float Switches
The following Float Switches will be supplied.
Wet Well # 1 - Float Switch - Low Level
Wet Well # 1 - Float Switch - Hi h Level
Wet Well #2 - Float Switch - Low Level
Wet Well #2 - Float Switch - Hi h Level
2.0
SCADA Systems Configuration
SCADA System Integration will be provided for the new Remote Telemetry Unit.
M/R Systems will work very closely with the owner and design engineers to ensure
that the configurations accurately depict and interface to the system. Complete
SCADA System, (MMI), Integration & Configuration will be provided to include:
A. Point Database Creation/Entry
The Input/Output, I/O, Database will be entered into the Wonderware
MMI software. This will include all real and pseudo tags necessary to
achieve the desired functionality.
B. Graphic Display Configuration
User Friendly Graphics will be developed for the remote site. The graphic
screen development will be comprised of
1. System Map Overview Additions
2. Individual Displays for each remote site
C. Real Time and Historical Trend Graph Configuration
Real time and historical trend graphs will be provided for all process
parameters
D. Security Configuration
Various Operation Personnel password security will be configured for the
system.
4
One Meca Way. Norcross, Georgia 30093 . Phone 770-564-5688 . Fax 770-564-5689
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.1
2.2
2.3
E. Alarm and Event Logging
All alarms and Events, (starting and stopping of equipment, change in set
points etc.) will be logged and time/date stamped by the control system.
Project Engineering
Project Engineering, Electrical Design, Mechanical Design, Drafting, and other
miscellaneous Administrative Labor (including Travel & Living expenses) as
required to perform system design and issue Record Drawings.
Field. Service Engineering
Field Service Engineering (including Travel & Living expenses) to provide RTU
commissioning, RTU panel wire terminations, startup, and training.
Onsite Comprehensive Warranty
A one-year Onsite Comprehensive Warranty (including Travel & Living
expenses) will be supplied with the system.
2.4
Terminations
M/R Systems will provide Field-Terminations for the Low-Voltage
Instrumentation and Control System
2.5
Terminations
M/R Systems will coordinate with the successful contractor to verify conduit
requirements for the Instrumentation and Control System
2.6
Pricing
Total System Pricing,..........................................................
Deduct for Field Instruments.. ..... ...... .............. .......... ..........
Note: pricing does not include sales taxes.
One Meca Way. Norcross, Georgia 30093 . Phone 770~564-5688 . Fax 770-564-5689
5
I
I
I
I
2.7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
N of Included
Except as noted above, the following items are not within this proposal.
Item
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9:
Com onent
Motor Control Center
VFDs
Installation of E ui ment
Wire, Conduit, Installation
Local Control Panels, Local Disconnects and Emer enc
Isolation Valves
Unistut or Anchor Bolts
Providing unloading, handling, setting, or installation of any of the provided
equipment unless otherwise noted in the Work Included section of this
ro osal.
Removal of any existing equipment unless otherwise noted in the Work
Included section of this ro osal
6
One Meca Way. Norcross, Georgia 30093 . Phone 770-564-5688 . Fax 770-564-5689
I
I
I
I
I
I
Gi
c
III
ll..
'0
::
c
o
U
...
Gl
Ui
III
:E
U
...J
ll..
I
I
I
I
-
o
It)
o
CD
o
z
tl
..
"S'
C.
't>
C
o
m
I
I
s
..
,.
'"
,.
<
'l5
~
(3
c
"2
1ii
iii
...
E
,.
...
...
~!
~~
-' ~
g~
I
I
I
VI
c
g'E
-.:!
i"S
..
a:
ZZZZZ
Il:J::I::I:
:r::CJ::I:J:
I-t-t-I-t-
vvvvv
;;;;;
tHO tl tl tl
NNNNN
c
.2
1ii
E
;;
..
Q
tltltl
-' -' -'
ll.ll.ll.
QiQ51ii
c c c
"'''''''
ll.ll.ll.
~gg~~
65522
':':':.:f.:f
*!!~~
~~~~~
..
e
"
o
U)
~~
ll.ll.
(ij(jj
c c
'" '"
ll.ll.
00000
mmmEE
~~~~~
Q;lQ)Q),S;!~
> > > U') en
~~~~~
o VI
i!
VI_
1l.U)
>->->->->-
>>>>>
WWWLUW
VI
"
VI-
"'s
cUI
=>c
o
VI
..3
"''''
c-
..U)
a:=
o
'0'0000
~~~~~
00000
ouoo(,)
00000
___00
oocco
00000
00000
00000
66666
.J-l....J-l...J
rJ}(J)CJ)Cf)C/J
c
"i
E
Q
MMMt")t"')
cciccicciccicci
uOC,JOl)
~
>-
00
00 00
....-000
oeo.........
60099
C/H/J .!. en rn
NNXJ:J:
'C'C
VI ~~
~~ eE
Em gg
'g-g~~~
Q)~iiCP~
oGiiioG
ciodcio
00000
00000
c
~
Q) eLl Cl:I Q) CD
'tU<<iaimai
C!lC!lC!lC!lC!l
CD CD Q) CI:I Q)
:2E:2EE
U5Ci5U5U5Ci)
t;
VI
..
Q
ZZZZZ
II:J:II
:r::CJ:::t:I
1-1-1-1-1-
vvvvv
;;;;;
tltltltltl
NNNNN
ggg
ll.ll.ll.
Q)Q)'Q)
c c c
.... ..
ll.ll.ll.
ggg~~
555.2.2
'2'2'2~~
!!*~~
~~~~~
~~
.. ..
ll.ll.
~~~gg
.a.a.a55
~.:t~'2<2
~~~!!
~~~~~
1;1;1;1;1;
WWLUWLU
u'Oot)u
~~~~~
00000
t.)()UC)U
zzzzz
IIIIJ:
IIIIJ:
1-1-1-1-....
vvvvv
;;;;;
U()u(.)u
NNNNO;J
tltltl
-' -' -'
a.. a.. a;.
1i)1ii'Q)
fijfijfij
ll.ll.ll.
015000,
EEE~~
~~~n
~~~i~
::;;::;;::;;> >
tltl
-' -'
ll.ll.
g:3
ll.ll.
Q51ii
C c
.. '"
ll.ll.
~~~gg
.3.3.355
.:f.:f.:f':':
Q)(1)Q)~~
~~~;~
1;1;1;1;1;
wwwww
OOOOCl ClClClClCl
-----
uuuuu
ca m: m: m: m:
'E'E'Ecc
00000
tltltltltl
___00 ___00
00000 00000
00000
00000
~~~~~
66666
...J...J...J...J-l
0000000000
(")(")(")C")(")
cOcOc6cricri
uuuuu
08
~C\l088
66~99
ooen..!...OOUJ
NNXJ:J:
cioooo
00000
C\lC\lC\lC\lC\l
00000
Q)Q)Q)Q)Q)
10 "to a; a; a;
C!lC!lC!lC!lC!l
Q)Q)Q)Q)Q)
:2:2:g:g:g
us uHf.) us us
00000
00000
C")C")C")C")(')
00090
666C!l6
...J-l...J...J...J
00 en 00 00 en
(")C")C")C")(')
<Dc.Occicric6
uuuuu
00
~g088
668~~
oooo..!...cnen
NNXJ:J:
'C'C
C C
VI ....
en:J E E
~~ ~ ~
~i~~~
Q)~a;/J)~
oGiiioG
00000
00000
C")(")C")C")('f)
00000
Q,lQ,l/J)Q)/J)
a;a;a;"tOai
C!lC!lC!lC!lC!l
Q) Q) CD Q) Q)
BB:5!BB
USCi5Ci5Ci5U5
zzzzz
:::I: J:J: IJ:
J:J:J:J:J:
1-1-1-1-1-
'o:t"'o:t" 'It 'It v
;;;;;
tltltltltl
NNNNN
tltltl
-' -' -'
ll.ll.ll.
"Q)Q)Q)
~ a ~
ll.ll.ll.
:ggg~~
55522
~~~~~
*!*~~
~~~~~
~:1
ll.ll.
Q)Q)
c c
"''''
ll.ll.
~~~gg
.22.355
~~:e~~
mCD/J),S2
~~~~~
1;1;1;1;1;
WWWWW
~~~~M
c:: l:: c:: c:: c::
00000
UUUUU
zzzzz
J:J:J:IJ:
:I:J:J:II
1-1-1-1-1-
'ltv'lt'<tv
;;;;;
~~~~~
:3~~
ll.ll.ll.
Q)Q)Q)
c c c
.... ..
ll.ll.ll.
00000
ggg~~
':':':.:f.:f
.s!2SO)m
~~~~~
~~~gg
.2.2.agg
~~~~~
~~~~i
>>>::!:::!:
1;1;1;1;1;
WWWWW
ooot5U
co as ca ca m
'Ec'E'E'E
00000
tltltltltl
zzzzz
J:J:J:J:I
J:J:J:J:J:
1-1-1-1-1-
vvvvv
;;;;;
tltltltltl
NNNNN
tltltl
-'-'-'
ll.ll.ll.
Q)Q)Q)
c c c
'" "'..
ll.ll.ll.
ggg~~
555.2.3
':':':.:f.:f
ii~~~
::;;::;;::;;> >
tltl
-' -'
ll.ll.
Q)Q)
c c
"''''
ll.ll.
tltl
-' -'
ll.ll.
Q)Q)
c c
'" ..
ll.ll.
00000
~~~gg
.:f.:f.:f':':
mCl)Q,l.s!'s
~~~~~
1;1;1;1;1;
wwwww
00000 00000 00000
~~~~~
l:: c: c: c:: c:
00000
uuuuu
___00 ___00 ___00
00000 00000 oocoo
00000
~~~~~
00000
66666
...J...J...J...J...J
cncncnencn
C")C")C")C")C")
cria:icriccicO
uouuu
00
~~ooo
66~~~
cnC/'J..!...C/'Jcn
NNX:r:J:
'C'C
C C
VI ....
~~ EE
Sm ~~
~i~~c;
<D~7i;CD~
oGcnoC3
ggggg
vvv'ltv
00000
m Q) /J) Q) Q)
a;a;a;ai7i;
C!lC!lC!lC!lC!l
Q) Q) (ll Q) m
B:5!:g:2:g
U5U5U5U5U5
88888
LOLOLOLOLO
00000
66666
...J-l...J...J...J
ClH/H/J C/'J en
C")(")C")(")(")
cciccicOc.OcO
uuuuu
00
f5f5088
66~99
ClJcn..!..cncn
NNXJ:J:
'C'C
C C
VI ",,,,
en2 EE
~h5 ~~
~i~~c;
Q)~a;Q)~
oGiiioG
ooocio
00000
LOLOLOLOLO
00000
Q) CD Q) Q) CD
Ciiii1iico(\i
C!lC!lClC!lC!l
m /J) /J) Q) CD
B:2:5!:5!:g
U5U5U5oooo
00000
00000
CD CO CD to to
00000
66666
...J...J...J...J...J
enCIJenCIJCIJ
C")C")C")(")C")
cci<cia:i<cicci
uuuuo
00
g~088
990tOCO
oo~99
encn..!...cncn
NNXIJ:
'C'C
C C
'" '" '"
.3~ EE
;goo ~~
~i~~c;
/J):gtOQ)~
oGiiioG
ggggg
to tOtO to co
00000
CD CD Q) Q) CD
(\ico(\iaiai
C!lC!lC!lC!lC!l
CI)(l)Q)Q)Q)
B:EBBB
cnooU5Ci5Ci5
zzzzz
J:J:J:J:J:
IJ:J:J:I
1-1-1-1-1-
'Ot'Otv'o:t"'Ot
;;;;;
uuuuu
NNNNN
tltltl
-' -' -'
ll.ll.ll.
Q)Q)Q)
c c c
"'..'"
ll.ll.ll.
~~~~~
000.2:.3
':':':.:f.:f
~ii~~
::;;::;;::;;> >
~~
"''''
ll.ll.
~~~gg
2.a.agg
.:f.:f.:f':':
mQ)m's's
> > > Cf.I (/)
~~~~~
1;1;1;1;1;
wwwUJW
U'UUoo
ca m: a:I ttl rtl
'Eccc'E
00000
uuuuu
00000
___00
00000
00000
00000
r--.r--.r--.r--.r--.
00000
99999
C/)enC/)cncn
MMC")C")(")
cOcOcciccicci
tltltltltl
00
~~8~~
6cd~~~
f3f!3XIJ::
'C'C
C C
VI ",,,,
(fJ2 EE
2;g EE
.!en 00
Cf.l'Oenuu
c: Q)::l c: m
CD~CO/J)~
oGOOou
ocicic5o
00000
r--.,....,....r--.r--.
00000
CDCDmQ)m
1Omaim1O
C!lC!lC!lC!lC!l
Q) Q) Q) CD m
B:5!:gB:g
cncnooooUS
zzzzz
J::J: II J:.
J:J:J:J:J:
I-I-I-I-+-
'Ot'Ot'Ot'Ot'o:t"
;;;;;
uuuuu
NNNNN
tltltl
-'-'-'
ll.ll.ll.
aiQ)Q)
c c c
"''''..
ll.ll.ll.
gee-92
ggg22
':':':.:f.:f
~i~~~
::;;::;;::;;>>
gg
ll.ll.
tltl
-'-'
ll.ll.
aiai
c c
"''''
ll.ll.
~~~~~
~~~~~
CD CD Q)jgjg
> > > (fJ CIl
~~~~~
1;1;1;1;1;
LUWWWW
-----
oouuu
cacamcortl
ccccc
00000
c..>UUUU
OOOCO
___00
00000
00000
00000
co co co co co
00000
66666
...J...J...J...J...J
(J)ClJC/)Cf.lCf.l
(")(")(")C")M
cPcOcPccicci
OUUC,)U
00
~~088
66~99
ClJoo..!..Cf.len
NNXJ:J:
'C'C
'" ~~
~~ EE
siii ~~
~$~~~
Q)omQ)o
oGiiioG
ciooc5ci
00000
co co co co co
00000
CDQ)Q)Q)m
mttittimco
C!lC!lC!lC!lC!l
Q) m Q) CD CD
:g:g:g:s!:g
US USU5 U5US
zzzzz
J:J:J::r::::c
IIIJ:I
1-1-1-1-1-
~'Otvv'Ot
;;;;;
tltltltltl
NNNNN
tltltl
-' -' -'
ll.ll.ll.
Q)aiai
c c c
"'''''''
ll.ll.ll.
ggg~~
c: c: C::J ='
~~~IlIl
!!!~~
~~~~~
tltl
-'-'
ll.ll.
aiai
~ ~
ll.ll.
sBsee
~.a2~g
.:f.:f.:f':':
~~~!!
~~~~~
I-I-~l-I-
>>>>>
LUWUJWW
~~~~~
ccc'E'E
00000
OUUU()
00000
___00
00000
00000
00000
CF>CF>CF>CF>CF>
00000
9~9~9
ClJClJCf.lCIJCIJ
C")C"'J(")(")(")
cci<ci<cicOcci
U()UUU
00
~~888
66gs99
ClJCIJ..!...CIJCIJ
NNX::r:::r:
'C'C
Cc
'" ",..
~~ ~~
;gCl) 00
~-g~~~
Q)~mQ)~
oGiiioG
ciooc5c5
00000
O)CF>CF>O)CF>
00000
Q)Q)mQ)m
"aimmmtti
C!lC!lC!lC!lC!l
Q)CDmQ)m
:s!:s!B:5!:s!
USUSU5U5U)
zzzzz
J:IJ:J:J:
IJ:IJ::r:
+-1-1-1-1-
~'Ot'Ot'Ot"l;t
;;;;;;
uuuuu
NNNNO;J
tltltl
-' -' -'
ll.ll.ll.
Qi'Qi'Qi
c c c
"'.. ..
ll.ll.ll.
eeeoo
'E'E'Emm
~~~~~
i**~~
::!:~~~~
g~
ll.ll.
m'Qi
c c
.. ..
ll.ll.
~~~~~
~~~~~
m([)m,Sjg
~~~~~
1;1;1;1;1;
wwwww
~~~~~
cccE'E
00000
uuuuu
00000
___00
00000
88888
~~~e~
66666
...J ...J ...J -' ...J
Cf.lCIJClJCf.lCIJ
cnC")C")(")M
<cicO<cicOcO
ouuuu
00
88088
66g~e
cnCf.l:i:.cbch
NNXI:I:
'C'C
C C
'" ",,,,
~~ EE
Eoo ~~
~-g~~~
Q)~aiQ)~
oGiiioG
ggggg
ee~;:~
<DQ,)mCDCD
commmai
C!lC!lC!lC!lC!l
m Cl) CD m CD
:2BB:s!:s!
U)U5U5USU5
ZZ
II
II
>->-
......
;;
~~
tltl
-' -'
ll.ll.
Qi15
c c
'" ..
ll.ll.
ee
'E'E
00
tltl
~a:;
ViUi
'" ..
::;;::;;
Q)Q)
cc
..'"
ll.ll.
ee
'Ec
00
tltl
<D"
'C'C
.5.S
""
~
tl
ti
o
ll.
,.:
a:
o
,.:
tl
>-
tl
t5
>-
tl
o
ll.
t5
>-
tl
~I;
ww
155
00
00
"""
"''''
66
a: a:
C!lC!l
"''''
cOcci
tltl
88
",gj
~<i:
x>-
c
g
'C
c
o
tl
~E
cote
00<
ID Q;
'C 'C
.5.E
""
aim
c c
" c
"''''
., .,
tltl
"
.~
;;
~
li
Q
~
~
!
~
o
"
0,
iI
M
15
~
~
~
~
'"
"
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I Qi
c
III
D.
I '0
...
C
0
u
...
Gl
I '0
III
::
c.J
....I
D.
I
;;
I II)
C>
CO
ci
z
't;
ell
'0'
I II.
"0
C
0
III
.
S
II>
I '"
ell
'"
oct
'0
.a-
U
I c
.2
iii
iii
Cl.
E
'"
I Cl.
...
g'~
~~
.J '':
o '5.
I :::1Il
..
c
~E
't:! zz
~~ :I::I:
:I::I:
0: f-f-
....
;;
uu
"''''
g~
0.0.
" 'Q)CD
.!! " "
.. ..
OJ 0.0.
" ~~
.,
..
..
c 00
uu
~*
.. ..
::;::;
..
"
~ .c:
0 $
Vl ~ "i
QiCll
a:c:
-.2
~2
0-
o.C:
0..
'eiij
:~
<>.Vl
f-f-
>>
WW
.. ....
" .. ..
00
~S ..J..J
"Vl d:i ii3
=>" 3: 3:
0 00
0.0.
..
"a
~~
a:- taca
0 E E
00
zz
iij " "
~~
~ 00
Vl uu
- ~
00
"
~ 50
g
C
"
.~
,g
g caca
Ii c: c:
cu03
l! :S:S
c
!i
f-
c:
-.2
" ..
3: "
0>=
o.E
c: c:
~~
:0:0
c: c:
00
uu
E E
.. ..
<<
'c '2
=>=>
I~>=
" "
E E
c: " "
Cli1ii
.9 f-f-
.g '" "
015
" ~ ~
..
"
c a: a:
E E
QlEE~Cij
~.~ E~~
~~:S~~
<::E::E-l~
~~~~~
ODOI..J
<~~~:J
"
~
'>
~
3
Q
i
~
]
~
i
J.
~%s~
; ~.so
~~ gg
~.~ ~~
00<<(
~
'5
~
t
_0_0
00<(<
"
C>
c:
~ - ~ B
~ ~~ ~~~ m
.2 0"- ~1-tt1 ~UlO"
1ti mu::~Q)a::c:li3.....:;,
.~ '0 ~o::: E ~~ '0 ~.5
g ';~ ~i=8 ~2L~~g
<( .2~g5~ga5~~(.)
~.~:S ';.~:S Jj c;,~ ~
~d:8~6:83~~~
I-bl-~b:b:~~~t;
Oa..Uo~uwU5:t;
J!
I
~
16000 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16000
GENERAL
1.01 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
A. All work of this Section shall comply with the requirements of:
1. General Conditions
2. SpedalCondWons
3. General Requirements
4. Specifications
5. Drawings
6. Modifications incorporated in the documents before their execution.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. This section of the specifications covers the complete interior and exterior electrical
system for all work shown on the drawings as spedfied herein providing all material,
labor and equipment required for the installation of the electrical systems complete and
in operating condition.
B. Include in the electrical work all the necessary supervision and the issuing of all
coordinating information to any other trades who are supplying work to accommodate
the electrical installations.
1.03 DRAWINGS
A. The drawings for electrical work utilize symbols and schematic diagrams which have no
dimensional significance. The work shall therefore, be installed to fulfill the
diagrammatic intent expressed on the electrical drawings.
B. Coordinate electrical work with the enlarged details, floor plans, elevations, and
structural drawings. Provide fittings, junction boxes and accessories to meet conditions.
C. Do not scale drawings. Dimensions for layout of equipment, or spaces shall be obtained
from architectural, structural or mechanical drawings unless spedfically indicated on the
electrical drawings.
D. Discrepandes shown on different drawings, between drawings and specifications or
between drawings and field conditions shall be promptly brought to the attention of the
Engineer.
E. Provide as used on the drawings and in the spedfications shall mean, furnish, install,
connect, adjust and test.
F. The drawings and spedfications are complimentary and any work or material shown in
one and omitted in the other, or described in the one and not shown in the other, or
EDC# 05004
16000 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
which may be implied by both or either, shall be furnished as though shown on both, in
o~der to give a complete and first class installation.
1.04 SITE INVESTIGATION
A. Potential Contractors shall visit the project site prior to bid date to satisfy themselves as
to the existing conditions and distances which may effect the cost of the project.
1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit for approval by the Engineer all materials and equipment to be incorporated in
the electrical work.
B. Submit only shop drawings which comply with the contract documents. Shop drawings
shall be checked and corrected by the Contractor before they are submitted to the
Engineer. Shop drawings that are not corrected by the Contractor shall be returned for
correction without detailed notations by the Engineer as to the necessary corrections.
C. Mark each individual submittal item to show specification section which pertains to the
item.
D. Submit information as required under SUBMITTALS, for each of the individual electrical
sections of the specifications.
E. Data submitted shall contain all information required to indicate compliance with
equipment specified.
F. Submit field information drawings to explain fully all procedures involved in erecting,
mounting and connecting all items of equipment which differ from that specified.
G. When Shop Drawings are reviewed, some errors may be detected but others may be
overlooked. This does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error.
Regardless of any information contained in the Shop Drawings, the requirements of the
Drawings and Specifications shall be followed and are not waived or superseded in any
way by the Shop Drawing review.
1.06 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. One complete set of electrical drawings shall be reserved for as-built drawings. Any
approved deviation from the contract drawings shall be recorded on these drawings.
Drawings shall be checked monthly for completeness.
B. Completed as-built drawings shall be presented to the Engineer prior to final inspection.
EDC# 05004
16000 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.07 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide at the time of final inspection three sets of maintenance and operating
instruction for:
1. Main Service Equipment
2. Motor Control Center
3. Lighting and Power Panelboards
4. Fuses
5. Wiring Devices
6. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps
7. Disconnect Switches
8. Photo Control and Contactors
9. Emergency Generator
B. Furnish a qualified and accredited factory trained technician to train personnel
designated by the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of specialized
equipment.
C. The issuing of operating instructions shall include the submission of the name, address,
and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service company for
each item of equipment so that service and spare parts can be readily obtained.
1.08 CODES AND PERMITS:
A. All electrical work shall meet or exceed the latest requirements of the following codes
and/or other authorities exercising jurisdiction over the electrical construction work and
the project.
1. The National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) - 2005 Edition
2. The National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C-2)
3. The Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) - 2000 Edition
4. The International Building Code - 2003 Edition
5. Regulations of the local utility company with respect to metering and service
entrance.
6. Municipal and State ordinances governing electrical work.
B. All required permits and inspection certificates shall be obtained, and made available at
the completion of the work. Permits, inspections, and certification fees shall be paid for
as a part of the electrical work.
1.09 DEVIATIONS:
A. No deviations from the plans and specifications shall be made without the full knowledge
and consent of the Engineer or his authorized representative.
B. Should the Contractor find at any time during progress of the work that, in his judgement,
existing conditions make desirable a modification in requirements covering any particular
item or items, he shall report such items promptly to the Engineer for his decision and
EDC# 05004
16000 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
instruction.
1.10 COOPERATION:
A. This Contractor shall schedule his work and in every way possible cooperate with all
other Contractors on the job to avoid delays, interferences, and unnecessary work. He
shall notify them of all openings, hangers, excavations, etc., so that proper provisions
shall be made for his work. This shall not relieve him of the cost of cutting, when such is
required.
B. This Contractor shall do all cutting and excavating necessary for the complete
installation of his work, but he shall not cut the work of any other Contractor without first
consulting the Engineer. He shall repair any work damaged by him or his workmen,
employing the services of the Contractor whose work is damaged.
C. This Contractor shall by all means coordinate the location of ceiling lighting fixtures, both
recessed and surface mounted, with the Ceiling Contractor so that proper hangers and
supports shall be provided.
D. Any conflict between electrical and other trades shall be reported before construction
starts. No extra charges will be approved for work resulting from failure to coordinate
with other trades.
1.11 INSTALLATION:
A. Raceways, fixtures, devices, and other electrical equipment shall be installed in a neat
and workmanlike manner and in accordance with recognized good practice for a first
class installation.
B. The Engineer or his representative shall have the authority to reject any workmanship
not complying with the contract documents.
C. The Electrical Contractor shall personally or through an authorized licensed and
competent electrician, constantly supervise the work from beginning to complete and
final inspection.
D. Electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. Locations of proposed raceway, riser, location of structural elements, location and size
of chases method and type of construction of floors, walls, partitions, etc., shall be
verified before construction starts.
F. Consult owner and utility companies for underground lines before any underground work
is started. Contractors shall be responsible for any damage.
G. All empty conduits shall have a pull string installed. All flush recessed boxes shall have
blank plates installed.
EDC# 05004
16000 - 5
1.12 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFilLING:
A. General. The Contractor shall perform all excavation to install conduit structures and
equipment specified in this Division of the Specifications. During excavation, materials
for backfilling shall be piled back from the banks of the trench to avoid over-loading and
to prevent slides and cave-ins. All excavated materials not to be used for backfill shall
be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Grading shall be done to prevent
surface water from flowing into trenches and other excavations and water accumulating
therein shall be removed by pumping. All excavations shall be made by open cut. No
tunneling shall be done. All requirements of OSHA shall be complied with.
B. Trench Excavation. The bottom of the trenches shall be graded to provide uniform
bearing and support for each section of the conduit on undisturbed soil at every point
along its entire length. Over depths shall be backfilled with loose, granular, moist earth,
tamped. Removed unstable soil that is not capable of supporting the conduit and
replace with specified material.
C~ Backfilling. The trenches shall not be backfilled until it is reviewed by the Engineer or his
representative. The trenches shall be backfilled with the excavated materials approved
for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, and gravel or soft shale, free from
large clods of earth or stones, deposited in 6" layers and tamped until the conduit has a
cover of not less than the adjacent existing ground but not greater than 2" above existing
ground. The backfilling shall be carried on simultaneously on both sides of the trench so
that conduit is not displaced. The compaction of the filled trench shall be at least equal
to that of the surrounding undisturbed material, except that trenches occurring under
paved areas or in areas to be filled shall be backfilled in 6" maximum layers and each
layer compacted to 95% maximum density. Settling the backfill with water will not be
permitted. Any trenches not meeting compaction requirements or where settlement
occurs shall have backfill removed down to the top of the conduit then backfill with
approved materials as specified hereinbefore.
D. Positively no tree roots are to be damaged, hand dig where required. Damaged trees or
shrubbery shall be replaced in kind and must be approved by Engineer.
1.13 MATERIALS:
A. Materials specified by manufacturer's name shall be used unless approval of other
manufacturers are listed in addenda to these specifications. Request for prior approval
shall be submitted by mail' onlv. Facsimile will not be acceptable.
B. Drawings indicating proposed layout of space, all equipment to be installed therein and
clearance between equipment shall be submitted, where substitution of materials alter
space requirements on the drawings.
C. Material Standards: All materials shall be new and shall conform to the standards where
such have been established for the particular material in question. Publications and
Standards of the organization listed below are applicable to materials specified herein.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
EDC# 05004
16000 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
3. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA)
4. Irlsulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
7. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
D. Material of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer.
E. Materials not readily available from local sources shall be ordered immediately upon
approval.
F. The Engineer shall have authority to reject any materials, or equipment, not complying
with these specifications and have the Contractor replace materials so rejected
immediately upon notification of rejection.
G. Any material or equipment so rejected shall be removed from the job within 24 hours of
such rejection, otherwise the Engineer may have same removed at the Contractor's
expense.
1.14 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A. All equipment requiring electrical power connections shall be connected under this
section of these specifications.
B. Where electrical connections to equipment require specific locations, such locations
shall be obtained from shop drawings.
C. Drawings for location of conduit stub-up boxes mounted in wall or floor to serve specific
equipment, shall not be scaled.
D. Electrical circuits to equipment furnished under other sections of these specifications are
based on design loads. If actual equipment furnished has loads other than design loads
electrical circuits and protective devices shall be revised to be compatible with
equipment furnished at no additional cost to the Owner. Any revisions must have prior
approval by the Engineer. Before submittina shop drawinas. Electrical Sub-Contractor
shall alona with the Mechanical and Plumbina Sub-Contractor review voltaae and load
reauirements for mechanical and plumbina eauipment to determine the compatibilitv
between what is beina furnished and what is shown in the contract drawinas. The
Electrical Sub-Contractor shall alona with his submittals submit a statement that he has
reviewed all shop drawinas includina review with the Mechanical and Plumbina Sub-
Contractors.
E. Where equipment is indicated to be served thru conduit stub-up, conduit shall be
stubbed up not less than four inches above floor where transition shall be made to
sealtite flexible conduit for connection to equipment.
EDC# 05004
16000 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. The Contractor's attention is invited to other Divisions of these specifications, where
equipment requiring electrical service or electrically related work is specified to become
fully aware of the scope of work required for electrical service or related work.
G. Where electricity utilizing equipment is supplied separate from the electrical work, and is
energized, controlled or otherwise made operative by electrical work, the testing to
provide the proper functional performance of such wiring systems shall be conducted by
the trade responsible for the equipment. The electrical work shall, however, include
cooperation in such testing and the making available of any necessary testing or
adjustments to the electrical equipment.
H. Heating, air conditioning, and ventilating equipment is specified to be furnished and
installed under other sections of these specifications. The controls, likewise are
specified to be furnished thereunder. All necessary wiring, wiring troughs and circuit
breakers for power for this equipment shall be furnished and installed under this section
of the specifications, in accordance with the plans and/or diagrams furnished with the
equipment, or shown on these plans. Starters furnished by the Mechanical Contractor
shall be installed under this Division of the specifications. Power wiring to auxiliary
equipment on a piece of equipment remote from its main terminal box and interlocking of
apparatus shall be accomplished under Heating Ventilating Equipment section of the
specifications. Conduit and outlets for control wiring shall be furnished and installed
under mechanical section of these specifications. Control conductors for HV AC
equipment shall not be installed in same conduit with power conductors.
I. Contractor is to note that location of disconnect switches shown are schematic in nature.
Exact location of disconnect switch and mounting height shall be coordinated with field
conditions and equipment shop drawings. Locate disconnect as required to maintain
clearances required by National Electrical Code.
J. Variable frequency drives furnished with lift pumps shall be installed by the electrical
contractor in accordance with manufacturers instructions and wiring diagrams. Provide
power and control conductors as required. Number of conductors shown on plans are
for bidding purpose. Actual number of conductors will be determined by wiring diagrams
provided for the pump control requirements.
K. Each of the lift pump circuits shall be interlocked with the limit switch on the associated
check/control valve to insure the pump is started and stopped against a closed valve. A
pump start command, whether in the automatic mode or hand mode shall energize the
pump motor starter (only if the valve is closed as sensed by the valve limit switch) and
simultaneously energize the valve control solenoid to open the valve. When the lift
pump is energized the valve control solenoid shall open the valve. When the pump is to
be shut down, the valve solenoid shall be de-energized and the valve shall begin to
close. Only after the valve is fully closed, shall the motor starter to be de-energized,
stopping the pump motor. Circuitry shall be included to detect a "valve failure to open"
condition for each pump control valve.
EDC# 05004
16000 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.15 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, & PROTECTION
A. Inspect materials upon arrival at Project and verify conformance to Contract Documents.
Prevent unloading of unsatisfactory material. Handle materials in accordance with
manufacturer's applicable standards and suppliers recommendations, and in a manner
to prevent damage to materials. Store packaged materials in original undamaged
condition with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. Containers which are broken,
opened, damaged, or watermarked are unacceptable and shall be removed from tti"e
premises.
B. All material, except items specifically designed to be installed outdoors such as pad
mounted transformers or stand-by generators, shall be stored in an enclosed, dry
building or trailer. Areas for general storage shall be provided by the Contractor.
Provide temperature and/or humidity control where applicable. No material for interior
installation, including conductors, shall be stored other than in an enclosed weather tight
structure. Equipment stored other than as specified above shall be removed from the
premises.
C. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental
conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment or materials. Conditions
shall be those for which the equipment or materials are designed to be installed.
Equipment and materials shall be protected from water, direct sunlight, cold or heat.
Equipment or materials damaged or which are subjected to these elements are
unacceptable and shall be removed from the premises and replaced.
1.16 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. Remove oil, dirt, grease and foreign materials from all raceways, fittings, boxes,
panelboard trims and cabinets to provide a clean surface for painting. Touch-up
scratched or marred surfaces of lighting fixtures, panelboard and cabinet trims, motor
control center, switchboard or equipment enclosures with paint furnished by the
equipment manufacturers specifically for that purpose.
B. Do not paint trim covers for flush mounted panelboards, telephone cabinets, pull boxes,
junction boxes and control cabinet unless required by the Engineer. Remove trim covers
before painting. Under no conditions shall locks, latches or exposed trim clamps be
painted.
C. Unless indicated on the drawings or specified herein to the contrary, all painting shall be
done under the PAINTING Section of these Specifications.
D. Where plywood backboards are used to mount equipment provided by the electrical
contractor, paint backboards with two coats of light grey semi-gloss paint. Plywood shall
be 3/4" fire rated plywood. Paint shall be fire retardant paint.
EDC# 05004
16000 - 9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.17 GUARANTEE:
A Defective lamps shall be replaced up-to-date of acceptance and shall be guaranteed for
one year.
B. All systems and component parts shall be guaranteed for one year from the date of final
acceptance of the complete project. Defects found during this guaranteed period shall
be promptly corrected at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.18 SERVICE:
A The' electrical service and telephone service for this project must be coordinated with the
Engineer and the Utility Company. However, before installing service conduit
(underground or mast), Contractor shall contact Utility Company and verify voltage,
location and type of service. Prior to rough-in, coordinate an on-site meeting with each
Utility Company to review exact requirements. Submit letter of coordination to Engineer
for review.
1.19 SCHEDULING OF OUTAGES
A Electrical work requiring interruption of electrical power which would adversely affect the
normal operation of the other portions of the Owner's property, shall be done at time
other than normal working hours. Normal working hours shall be considered eight AM.
to five P.M. Monday through Friday.
B. Schedule all work requiring interruption of electrical power two weeks prior to actual
shutdown. Submit schedule in writing to Engineer indicating extent of system to be de-
energized, date and time when power is intended to be interrupted, and date and time
power will be restored. Schedule shall be subject to the review of the Engineer and the
Representative of the Owner.
END OF SECTION 16000
EDC# 05004
16005 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16005
POWER STYLE SWITCHBOARD
1.01 GENERAL
A. Section Includes
1. Main Switchboard - Furnish and install the service entrance switchboard
as herein specified and shown on the associated electrical drawings.
2. Distribution Switchboard - Furnish and install the distribution
switchboards as herein specified and shown on the associated electrical
drawings.
B. References
The switchboards and over current protection devices referenced herein are
designed and manufactured according to the following appropriate specifications.
1. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
2. ANSI/IEEE C12.16 - Solid State Electricity Metering.
3. ANSI C57.13 -Instrument Transformers.
4. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit breakers and Molded Case Switches.
5. NEMA PB 2 - Dead Front Distribution Switchboards, File E8681.
6. NEMA PB 2.1 - Proper Handling, Installation, Operation & Maintenance
of Dead Front Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
7. NEMA PB 2.2 - Application Guide for Ground Fault Protective Devices for
Equipment.
8. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes.
9. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead Front Switches.
10. UL 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
11. UL 891 - Dead Front Switchboards.
12. UL 943 - Ground Fault circuit Interrupters.
13. Federal Specification W-C-375B/Gen - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case,
Branch Circuit and Service.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall indicate front and side enclosure elevations with overall
dimensions shown, conduit entrance locations and requirements, nameplate
legends, one-line diagrams, equipment schedule, and switchboard instrument
details.
1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. To be considered for approval, a manufacturer shall have specialized in the
manufacturing and assembly of switchboards for at least fifty (50) years.
EDC# 05004
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated and in
accordance with standards listed in Article 1.02 - References.
C. The manufacturing facility shall be registered by Underwriters Laboratories
Incorporated to the International Organization for Standardization ISO 9002
Series Standards for quality.
, 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products in conformance with manufacturer's
recommended practices as outlined in applicable installation of Maintenance
Manuals.
B. Each switchboard section shall be delivered in individual shipping splits for ease
of handling. They shall individually wrapped for protection and mounted on
shipping skids.
C. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period.
D. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection and/or provide an
additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect structure from dirt,
water, construction debris, and traffic. Where applicable, provide adequate
heating within enclosures to prevent condensation.
E. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.
Lift only by lifting. means provided for this express purpose. Handle carefully to
avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to Nema PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of
switchboards.
1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide one (1) set of installations and maintenance instruction with each
switchboard. Instructions are to be easily identified and affixed within the
incoming or main section of the line-up.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warrant equipment to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for one (1) year from date of acceptance.
EDC# 05004
16005 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers
1. Shall be Square 0 Company
2. Substitutions must be submitted in writing three (3) weeks prior to original
bid date with supporting documentation demonstrating that the alternate
manufacturer conforms to all aspects of the specifications herein.
2.02 SWITCHBOARD - GENERAL
A. Utility Metering Compartment: The utility current transformer compartment shall
comply with the local utility construction compartments.
B. Short Circuit Current Rating: Switchboards shall be rated with a minimum short
circuit current rating of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 V AC maximum.
C. Future Provisions: All unused spaces provided, unless otherwise specified shall
be fully equipped for future devices, including all appropriate connectors and
mounting hardware.
D. Enclosure Type 1 - General Purpose:
1. Sections shall be aligned front and rear.
2. Removable steel base channels 1.5 inch floor sills shall be bolted to the
frame rigidly support the entire shipping section for moving on rollers and
floor mounting.
3. This switchboard enclosure shall be painted on all exterior surfaces. The
paint finish shall be a medium gray, ANSI #49, applied by the electro-
deposition process over an iron phosphate pre-treatment.
4. All front covers shall be screw removable with a single tool and all doors
shall be hinged with removable hinge pins.
5. Top and bottom conduit areas shall be clearly indicated on shop
drawings.
E. Nameplates: Provide 1 inch high x 3 inches engraved laminated (Gravoply)
nameplates for each device. Furnish black letters on a white background for all
voltages.
F. Bus Composition: Shall be plated copper. Plating shall be applied continuously
to all bus work. The switchboard bussing shall be of sufficient cross-sectional
area to meet UL Standard 891 temperature rise requirements.. The phase and
neutral through-bus shall have an ampacity as shown in the plans. For 4-wire
systems, the neutral shall be of equivalent ampacity as the phase bus bar.
Tapered bus is not acceptable. Full provisions for the addition of future sections
shall be provided. Bussing shall include all necessary hardware to accommodate
EDC# 05004
16005 - 3
16005 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
splicing for future sections shall be provided. Bussing shall include all necessary
hardware to accommodate splicing for future additions.
G. Ground Bus: Sized per NFPA 70 and UL 891 Tables 25.1 and 25.2 and shall
extend the entire length of the switchboard. Provisions for the addition of future
sections shall be provided.
2.03 SWITCHBOARD - INCOMING MAN SECTION DEVICES
A. Main Circuit Breaker:
1. Electronic Trip molded case full function 100% rated circuit breakers
through 3000 amps.
a. All electronic circuit breakers shall have the following time/current
response adjustments: Long Time Pickup, Long Time Delay, Short
Time Pickup, Short Time Delay, Ground Fault Pickup, Ground Fault
Delay and Instantaneous settings. Each adjustment shall have
discrete settings fully adjustable and shall be independent of all
other adjustments.
b. Circuit breaker trip system shall be a microprocessor-based true
rms sensing designed with sensing accuracy through the thirteenth
(13th) harmonic. Sensor ampere ratings shall be as indicated on the
associated schedule, drawing.
c. Local visual trip indication for overload, short circuit and ground fault
trip occurrences.
d. Local Time Pickup indication to signal when loading approaches or
exceed the adjustable ampere rating of the circuit breaker trip shall
be provided.
e. Communications capabilities for remote monitoring of circuit breaker
trip system, to include phase and ground fault currents, pre-trip
alarm indications, switch settings, and trip history information shall
be provided.
f. Circuit breaker shall be provided with Zone selective Interlocking
(ZSI) communications capabilities on the short-time and ground fault
functions compatible with all other electronic trip circuit breakers and
external ground fault sensing systems as noted on drawing.
2.04 SWITCHBOARD - DISTRIBUTION SECTION DEVICES
A. Group mounted circuit breakers through 1200 amp.
1. Circuit brakes shall be group mounted plug-on with mechanical restraint
on a common pan or rail assembly.
2. The interior shall have three flat bus bars stacked and aligned vertically
with glass reinforced polyester insulators laminated between phases.
The molded polyester insulators shall support and provide phase isolation
to the entire length of bus.
EDC# 05004
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Circuit breakers equipped with line terminal jaws shall not require
additional external mounting hardware. Circuit breakers shall be held in
mounted position by a self contained bracket secured to the mounting
pan by fasteners. Circuit breakers of different frame sizes shall be
capable of being mounted across from each other.
4. Line-side circuit breaker connections are to be jaw type.
5. All unused spaces provided, .unless otherwise specified, shall be fully
equipped for future devices, including all appropriate connectors and
mounting hardware.
B. Electronic trip molded case full function 100% rated circuit breakers through 1200
amp:
1. All electronic circuit breaks shall have the following time/currenUesponse
adjustment: Long Time Pickup, Long Time Delay, Short Time Pickup,
Short Time Delay, Ground Fault Pickup, Ground Fault Delay and
Instantaneous settings. Each adjustment shall have discrete settings fully
adjustable and shall be independent of all other adjustments.
2. Circuit breaker trip system shall be a microprocessor-based true rms
sensing designed with sensing accuracy through the thirteenth (13th)
harmonic. Sensor ampere ratings shall be as indicated on the associated
schedule, drawing.
3. Local visual trip indication for overload, short circuit and ground fault trip
occurrences.
4. Local Time Pickup indication to signal when loading approaches or
exceed the adjustable ampere rating of the circuit breaker trip shall be
provided.
5. Communications capabilities for remote monitoring of circuit breaker trip
system, to include phase and ground fault currents, pre-trip alarm
indications, switch settings, and trip history information shall be provided.
6. Circuit breaker shall be provided with Zone selective Interlocking (ZSI)
communications capabilities on the short-time and ground fault functions
compatible with all other electronic trip circuit breakers and external
ground fault sensing systems as noted on drawing.
7. Furnish thermal magnetic molded case circuit breakers for 250 amp
frames and below.
2.05 MIMIC BUS
A. Show the entire single line switchboard bus work, as depicted on the factory
record drawing on a photo engraved nameplate. The nameplate shall be at least
.032 inch thick anodized aluminum and located at eye level on the front cover of
the switchboard incoming service section.
2.06 METERING {CUSTOMER}
A. Manufacturers:
1. Square D Model CM 3250
EDC# 05004
16005 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Substitutions: Substitutions shall be made only after proper verification.
B. The switchboard shall be metered using:
1. Square D Type CM 3250 - Digital Circuit Monitor with 0.2% accuracy with
the following features: A, V, kW, kVAR, kVA, PF, F THD, K-Factor, kWh,
kVARd, kVAd, kVARh, kVAh, KYZ output, RS-485 communication port,
kWd, kVARd, kVAd, date/time stamping predicted power demand,
onboard alarms, minImax, readings, data log, event log, and extend
memory 100k.
2.07 METERING TRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturer: Shall be Square D Company.
B. Current Transformers: ANSI C57.13; 5 ampere secondary.
C. Voltage Transformers: ANSI C57.13; 120 V single secondary, (Not required for
type PM meters).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Examine area to receive switchboard to provide adequate clearance for
switchboard installation.
B. Check that concrete pads are level and free of irregularities.
C. Start work only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchboard in accordance with manufacturer's written guidelines, the
NEC, and local codes.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect complete installation for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage,
and grounding.
B. Measure using a Megger, the insulation resistance of each bus section phase-to-
phase and phase-to-ground for one minuet each, at minimum test voltage of
1000 VDC; minimum acceptable value for insulation resistance is 1 megohms.
NOTE: Refer to manufacturer's literature for specific testing procedures.
C. Check tightness of accessible bolted bus joints using calibrated torque wrench
per manufacturer's recommended torque values.
EDC# 05004
16005 - 6
B. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D. Physically test key interlock systems to check for proper functionality.
E. Test ground fault systems by operating push-to-test button.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust all operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement per
manufacturer's specifications.
C. Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values indicated.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 16005
EDC# 05004
16005 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16010
LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete panelboard shop drawings shall be submitted, listing as a minimum the
following items:
1. Voltage rating.
2. Bus assembly rating.
3. Main breaker rating by capacity, number of poles and interrupting rating in RMS
symmetrical amperes.
4. Surface or flush mounting.
5. Listing of branch breakers by capacity number of poles and interrupting rating in
RMS symmetrical amperes.
6. Top or bottom feed.
7. A schedule similar to that shown on the drawings, depicting branch breaker
arrangement and breaker sizes and giving full explanation for any difference
between the two.
B. Contractor utilizing switch gear other than Square "0" Company, shall submit layout of
electrical rooms delineating placement of equipment.
1.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. For the purpose of selecting quality and types of panels, equipment as manufactured by
Square "0" Company has been specified.
1.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and power panelboards as indicated in the
panelboard schedule and where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be of the dead-
front safety type, equipped with thermal magnetic molded case circuit breakers with
frame and trip rating as shown in the schedule.
B. Circuit breakers shall be HACR rated, quick-make, quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip-
indicating, and have common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication shall be
clearly shown by the breaker handle taking position between ON and OFF, when the
breaker is tripped. Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience outlets shall have
sensitive instantaneous trip setting of not more than 10 times the trip rating of the
breakers. Connection to bus in all panels shall be bolted. All breakers shall be 20
ampere trip, unless otherwise shown. All breakers shall be rated as shown on the panel
schedule.
EDC# 05004
16010 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall be the distributed phase type.
Three-phase, four-wire bussing shall be such that any three adjacent single-pole
breakers are individually connected to each of the three different phases in such a
manner that two or three-pole breakers can be installed at any location. All current-
carrying parts of the bus assembly shall be copper. Main ratings shall be as shown in
the panelboard schedule on the drawings.
D. Panel front shall be provided with a continuous piano hinge on one side.
E. A steel circuit directory frame permanently attached (spot welded) at factory (not glued),
and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door. The
directory card shall provide a space at least 1/4" high x 3" long for each circuit.
F. All panels shall be equipped with a copper equipment grounding bar. The bar shall have
lugs of sufficient size to handle all grounding conductors.
G. Sub-feed circuit breakers are not permitted in panels unless specifically called for.
H. Provide mounting hardware for all spaces shown on panelboard schedule.
I. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting at the top, odd numbering shall
be used in sequence down the left hand side and even numbers down the right hand
side.
J. Except where otherwise indicated on the drawings or required to avoid conflicts, mount
the panelboards so the tops of the cabinets will be 6 feet above the finished floors. For
panelboards which are too high, mount them so the bottoms of the cabinets will be not
less than 6 inches above the finished floors.
K. Locate the cabinets so that present and future conduits can be connected to them
conveniently. Coordinate the dimensions of the cabinets with the dimensions of the
spaces designated for installation prior to fabrication of the cabinets. Cabinet shall be
minimum 20" wide.
L. Wiring in panelboards shall be neatly grouped and secured with ty-wraps.
M. Electrical panels shall not be used as wireways or junction boxes for control conductors
unless indicated on plans.
N. Where spaces are called for in a panel, all mounting hardware shall be provided for the
frame size indicated.
O. Splices in panelboards are not permitted.
END OF SECTION 16010
EDC# 05004
16010 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16015
FUSES
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of manufacturer's published
literature and technical data sufficient for the engineer to determine whether system
function will be adversely affected, whether proposed fuses meet this specification, and
whether they are equal in quality.
1.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers are:
1 . Littelfuse
2. Cefco
3. Gould - Shawmut
1.03 EQUIPMENT/MA TERIAL
A. All fuses rated 600 volts or less and used for main, feeder, or branch circuit protection
with 200,000 ampere interrupting rating and shall be so labeled. Fuse classes and sizes
indicated on the drawings have been selected to provide a fully coordinated selective
protection system. To maintain this design, all fuses provided shall be furnished by the
same manufacturer. Should equipment provided require a different U.l. Class or fuse
size, the engineer shall be furnished with sufficient data to ascertain that system function
will not be adversely affected.
B. Current-Limitinq Fuses 601-6000 Amperes
Fuses rated over 600 amperes shall be U.L. Class "l" fuses, and shall have a minimum
time delay of 10 seconds at 500% rating.
C. Current-Limitinq Fuses 600 Amperes or less
All fuses 600 amperes and below shall be true dual-element time delay fuses with
separate spring-loaded thermal overload elements in all ampere ratings. All ampere
ratings shall be designed to open at 400 degrees Fahrenheit or less when subjected to a
non-load oven test. To eliminate induction heating, all fuse ferrules and end caps shall
be non-ferrous and shall be bronze or another alloy not subject to stress cracking.
D. Spare Fuses
At the time of final acceptance, the contractor shall furnish the owner's representative,
not less than three (3) spare fuses of each size and type installed. Spare fuses at main
switchgear are not required. .
END OF SECTION 16015
EDC# 05004
16015 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16020
RACEWAYS
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's literature for each type of conduit or tubing and fittings used in the
roject.
1.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers of rigid aluminum conduit are:
1. Allied Tube and Conduit Co.
2. Wheatland Tube Co.
3. Triangle
4. L.TV.
5. American Brass
6. E.T.P.
7. Robroy
B. Acceptable manufacturer's of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit are:
1. Certainteed
2. Georgia Pipe
3. Carlon
4. Can-Tex
5. Queen City
C. Acceptable manufacturer's of conduit fittings, bushings, and locknuts are:
1. O-Z/Gedney
2. Thomas and Belts
3. Raco
1.03 MATERIALS
A. All metallic conduit and electric metallic tubing shall be aluminum, of standard pipe
dimensions, smooth inside and out. Where the word "conduit" is used hereinafter it shall
mean either rigid aluminum conduit, aluminum electric metallic tubing, flexible aluminum
conduit, liquid tight flexible aluminum conduit or schedule 40 plastic conduit.
Intermediate grade conduit is not acceptable.
B. Galvanized rigid aluminum conduit shall be used in all areas where it will be exposed to
physical damage. Schedule 40 plastic conduit shall be used underground and in slab-
on-grade. In no case shall plastic conduit be exposed; switch to rigid aluminum conduit
when turning up exposed. All other conduit, unless otherwise specified or called for on
EDC# 05004
16020 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the plans, may be aluminum electric metallic tubing. Any exposed conduit on exterior of
the building shall be rigid aluminum onlv.
C. Plastic conduit shall be made from virgin polyvinyl chloride C-300 compound. Conduit
and fittings shall carry a UL label. Fitting and cement shall be produced by the same
manufacturer as the conduit to assure system integrity.
D. All conduit shall be concealed in building construction except as noted or shown
otherwise. In areas with no finished ceiling and where conduit is run exposed all runs
. down to switches, receptacles, etc. shall when possible be concealed in wall. It is the
intent of these specifications that all conduit will be concealed whenever possible.
E. EMT fittings shall be compression or and made of aluminum for sizes two inches or
smaller, aluminum set screw type fittings may be used on sizes 2 1/2" or larger.
Connectors and couplings shall be rain tight and shall have a nylon insulated throat. All
fittings shall be "UL" approved. Die cast, and indenter type fittings are not acceptable.
Fittings for flexible aluminum conduits and liquid tight flexible conduit shall be aluminum
and have nylon insulated throat.
F. Rigid aluminum conduit and EMT shall be not less than %" inch trade size, schedule 40
plastic conduit shall not be less than 3/4" trade size and not less than required by the
NEC or indicated. Conduit runs with more than 5 #12 conductors shall not be less than
3/4".
G. Conduit and EMT systems indicated on the drawings for communication and signaling
systems are for typical systems. Install conduit and EMT systems for the system being
installed.
H. Rigid aluminum conduit couplings and connections:
1. Install standard, conduit-threaded fittings.
2. Ream the ends of conduits after cutting and threading them.
3. For connection to sheet metal boxes, cabinets and other sheet metal enclosures,
install locknuts on the inside and outside of the enclosure for each connection.
I. EMT couplings and connectors:
1. Ream the ends of EMT after cutting them.
2. Install the following threadless type fittings:
a. Connectors: aluminum compression type with insulated throat or
aluminum tap-on type with insulated throat.
b. Couplings: aluminum compression or tap-on type.
EDC# 05004
16020 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J. Installation of plastic conduit:
1. Shall be installed in complete accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Shall be a minimum of 2'-0" below finished grade when not covered by concrete.
3. Shall have properly sized bond wire installed with all circuits.
4. Bends and turns shall be kept to a bare minimum.
5. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid crushing or cracking conduit. "DO NOT"
run vehicles over exposed conduit under any conditions.
6. All conduit and fittings shall be solvent welded.
7. Plastic conduit maybe turned up in masonry walls only. PVC conduit shall be
allowed to be routed concealed in masonry walls to a maximum height of 48"
A.F.F.
8. Plastic conduit shall not be bent with a propane torch or open flame. Contractor
shall utilize a heat gun, heat blanket, or hot box. Plastic conduit bent with such
shall not be scorched or marred.
K. Insulated bushings:
1. Install nylon insulated bushings on the end of all rigid conduit.
2. The insulating material shall be designed for rugged, long service.
3. Bushings which consist of only insulating material will not be accepted.
4. Fittings which incorporate insulated bushings will be considered for approval in
lieu of fittings with separate bushings.
L. All couplings and connections in location where water or other liquid or vapor might
contact the conduit and EMT shall also be watertight.
M. Close empty conduit and EMT as complete runs before pulling in the cables and wires.
N. Install exposed conduit and EMT parallel to or at right angles with the lines of the
building. Locate them so they will not obstruct headroom or walkways or cause tripping.
O. Avoid bends or offsets where practicable:
1. Do not install more bends, offsets or equivalent in any conduit or EMT run than
permitted by the NEC.
2. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.
3. Conduit hickeys may be used for making slight offsets and for straightening
conduits tubbed out of concrete.
4. Conduit or EMT bent with a pipe tee or vise will not be accepted.
5. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits or EMT.
P. Install conduit or EMT clamps:
1. At intervals as required by the NEC.
2. Above suspended ceilings, metal supports may be installed as permitted by the
NEC, except that conduit cannot be supported or secured to the T-bar grid or
EDC# 05004
16020 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
from the wire supporting the T-bar grid.
3. Trapeze, split ring, band or clevis hanger may be installed as permitted by the
NEC. Trapeze hangers shall be structural metal channels, angle irons or
preformed metal channel shapes with the conduit and EMT runs held on specific
center by U bolts, clips or Clamps. Do not support conduit from ceiling
suspension wire or from other conduit.
4. Chain, wire or perforated strap supports will not be acceptable. Nor are they
acceptable as a means of securing the conduit.
5. Fasten the clamps and other supports as follows:
a. For new masonry or concrete structures, install threaded metal inserts
prior to pouring the concrete.
b. For hollow masonry install toggle bolts. Bolts supported only by plaster
will not be accepted.
c. For metal structures install machine screws.
d. Attachments to wood plug, rawl plug, soft metal insert or wood blocking
will not be permitted.
Q. For vertical runs of conduit of EMT:
1. Install supports for conduit, EMT, cables and wires at intervals as required by the
NEC and as indicated on the drawings.
2. Conduit and EMT supports shall be supported by framing for the floors.
R. Conduits and EMT shall be kept 6" away from parallel runs of steam or hot water pipes.
S. Clogged raceways shall be entirely free of obstructions or shall be replaced.
T. Rigid aluminum conduit installed underground and in concrete shall be wrapped with
Scotchwrap #50 corrosion protection tape.
U. All empty conduit shall have nylon pull cord installed to provide for installation of cables,
conductors or wiring.
V. Do not combine conduit homeruns. Each homerun shall be separately routed directly to
panel unless specifically noted otherwise.
W. Install service conduit (electrical, and telephone) as follows:
1. All underground entrances shall have metallic sleeves through building
foundation walls and extend to undisturbed ground to avoid shear, and shall be
full weight, threaded aluminum conduit.
2. All 90 degree bends to be rigid metallic conduit, with a radius of not less than 10
times the diameter of the conduit.
3. Maintain a minimum cover of 24 inches below final grade for conduits.
END OF SECTION 16020
EDC# 05004
16020 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16030
CONDUCTORS
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of manufacturer's published
literature.
1.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
11.
General
Okonite
Senator
Triangle
Pirelli
Cerro
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
12.
Cyprus Rome
Essex
Carol
Southwire
American
CME
B. All wiring shall be manufactured in the United States.
1.03 MATERIALS
A. Ratings and sizes:
1. Shall be not less than indicated on the drawings and not less than required by
the NEC.
2. Minimum size shall be No. 12 AWG copper provided the maximum voltage drops
in the control circuits will not adversely affect the operation of the controls.
3. Conductor sizes indicated on the drawings are for copper conductors.
B. Conductors and ground wires:
1. Shall be copper.
2. Size No.8 AWG and larger shall be stranded.
3. Size No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid.
C. Conductor insulation:
1. Conductor insulation shall be the NEC type THHN.
D. Wire shall be factory color coded in size No.1 0 and smaller. Color shall be by integral
pigmentation with a separate color for each phase, neutral and grounding conductor.
Color code per phase shall be continuous throughout the project.
EDC# 05004
16030 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E. Manufacturer's name and other pertinent information shall be marked or molded clearly
on the overall jacket's outside surface or incorporated on marker tapes within the cables
and wires at reasonable intervals along the cables and wires.
F. Cables and wires indicated on the drawings for communication and signaling systems
. are for typical systems. Install cables and wires for the system being installed.
G. All wiring shall be in conduit unless specifically noted otherwise.
H. Every coil of wire shall be in the original wrapping and shall bear the Underwriters' Label
of approval.
I. Where wires are left for connection to any fixture or an apparatus, spare wire or cables
shall be provided at the ends for connections. Fixture connections at the outlet box shall
be made with insulated wire connectors.
J. Outer jackets shall be color coded as follows:
1. Three phase or single phase circuits, 120/208 volts:
a. Phase A - Black
b. Phase B - Red
c. Phase C - Blue
d. Neutral - White
e. Insulated ground wire - Green
2. Three phase or single phase circuits, 480/277 volts:
a. Phase A - Brown
b. Phase B - Orange
c. Phase C - Yellow
d. Neutral - Gray
e. Insulated ground wire - Green
3. Only for large power cables and wires which do not have color coded jackets:
NO.8 and larger.
a. Install bands of adhesive non-fading colored tape or slip-on bands of
colored plastic tubing over the cables and wires at their originating and
terminations points and at all outlets of junction boxes.
b. Color shall be permanent and shall withstand c1eanings.
K. Wiring for signal and control circuits shall conform to the recommendations of
manufacturers of the signal system or controls being installed so the system shall have
optimum performance and maximum service continuity. Communication and signaling
and control circuit wiring where run in conduit below grade or in a damp location shall be
listed for use in a damp or wet location.
EDC# 05004
16030 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L. No power circuit wiring shall be smaller than number 12. Where the homerun exceeds
100'-0" in length, number 10 (minimum) wire shall be used even though all such circuits
are not indicated on the plans.
M. When installing THHN extra care must be exercised so as not to damage nylon jacket.
When nylon jacket is damaged wiring shall be removed from service, and replaced with
new conductors.
END OF SECTION 16030
EDC# 05004
16030 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16040
. OUTLETS
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of manufacturer's published
literature.
1.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers are:
1. Raco
2. Steel City
3. Appleton
4. Hubbell
1.03 MATERIALS
A. Boxes shall be pressed sheet aluminum for all concealed work.
B. Where conduit runs are exposed, outlet shall be of the cast aluminum type.
C. For concealed work each box shall be provided with a square cornered plaster ring.
D. Each surface lighting fixture, receptacle and switch shall be provided with flush mounted
outlet box. The location of any outlet may be moved as much as 10'-0" by the Engineer
before the outlet is placed without incurring any extra cost. All dimensions refer to the
finished floor line. Outlet boxes shall be pressed sheet aluminum. Where conduit runs
are exposed outlets shall be of the cast aluminum tvpe.
E. Boxes shall be for the service and the type of outlet and shall not be less than 4" square
and 1-1/2" deep except where otherwise specified. Boxes installed in walls shall be
provided with a square cornered 1-1/2" plaster rino installed flush with surrace of wall.
Coordinate depth of plaster ring required for particular wall construction. Each outlet box
above ceiling shall be supported from a structural member of the building either directly
or by using a substantial and approved metal support. Conduit is not an approved
means of support. Boxes installed in wall shall be supported either directly to a stud or
between studs utilizing an approved bar hanger. In no case shall switch box support
and clips used for mounting boxes in old work be used unless specifically called for. Top
of outlet box shall be level.
F. All ceiling or wall recessed outlet boxes or their associated plaster rings shall be flush
with the finished surface. Using coverplate to secure wiring devices or shimming the
device is not acceptable. Contractor shall exercise due care when cutting opening in
walls or ceilings for outlet boxes so that opening size will permit the proper installation of
boxes and devices. Fixture studs in ceilings and bracket outlets shall be bolted with
EDC# 05004
16040 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
stove bolts or shall be locking type of stud mounting.
G. In addition to boxes indicated, install enough boxes to prevent damage to cables and
wires during pulling-in operations.
H. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused openings. Use threaded plugs for
cast metal boxes and snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.
I. "There shall be no outlets installed back to back. A minimum of 4" shall separate each
outlet."
J. Where the volume allowed per conductor exceeds that allowed in the NEC for the
minimum size outlet specified, a larger size outlet box shall be used and shall be sized in
accordance with the NEe.
K. Outlet boxes shall be clean and free from dust, paint, dirt, plaster ready mix joint
compound and lor any other debris.
END OF SECTION 16040
EDC# 05004
16040 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16050
WIRING DEVICES AND DEVICE PLATE
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of ELECTRICAL.
B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's
instructions.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet.
B. FS W-S-896 - Switch, Toggle.
C. NEMA WD 1 - General-Purpose Wiring Devices.
D. NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.
1.03 MANUFACTURERS
A. For the purpose of selecting quality and type of device, equipment manufactured by
Arrow Hart has been specified. The following manufacturers meeting this specification
are acceptable:
1. Bryant
2. Pass and Seymour
3. Hubbell
4. Eagle
5. Leviton
1.04 PRODUCTS
A. Switches: All wall switches shall be rated 20 ampere, 120/277 volts, have self grounding
. provisions, side wiring only and shall be of the silent type. Color shall be gray.
1. Single pole: Arrow Hart 1221.
, 2. Double pole single throw: Arrow Hart 1222.
3. Three way: Arrow Hart 1223.
4. Four way: Arrow Hart 1994.
5. Key switch single pole and three-way: Arrow-Hart 1191 and 1193 with 1187
cover plate, or Pass and Seymour equal. Three way and four way key switches
shall be keyed alike.
EDC# 05004
16050 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Receptacle: All receptacles shall be of the grounding type, of the configuration shown
on the drawings and shall be flush wall mounting type. Color shall be gray.
1. Standard duplex receptacle: 20 ampere, 125 volt, NEMA type 5-20 R, 2 pole, 3
wire, straight blade, U-grounding slot, Industrial specification grade. Arrow Hart
5342.
2. Ground fault interrupter receptacle: 20 ampere, 125 volts, NEMA type 5-20R, 2-
pole, 3-wire with grounded U slot. Arrow Hart AHGF 5342.
C. Device plates: Plates shall be furnished for all devices and outlets indicated on the
drawings (telephone, computer, TV, etc.). All plates on masonry walls shall be oversized
jumbo type.
1. Flush mounted plates: Beveled type with smooth rolled outer edge, stainless
steel type 302 with brushed finish.
2. Surface box plates, beveled, stainless steel, pressure formed for smooth edge to
fit box.
1.05 INSTALLATION
A. Switches:
1. Switches shall be connected to the live side of the circuit and shall control only
the outlets indicated.
2. Conductors shall be looped around the terminal screw.
3. Where more than one switch is indicated in the same location switches shall be
gang mounted under a common plate.
4. Where multi-wire, 277 volt switching (480 volt potential) occurs, a barrier shall be
provided between switches.
5. Center line of switches in general, shall be set 3'-6" above the floor (off position
down) and shall clear the door trim or corner by 4" or center the space oc.cupied.
6. Structural plans shall be consulted before placing switches so they will in every
case be located on the strike side of the door and clear door, chair, window, and
baseboard moldings.
7. Switches shall be screwed tight to the boxes and shall not depend on the cover
plate to pull them tight.
B. Receptacles:
1. Conductors shall be looped around the terminal screws, "DO NOT BACK WIRE
DEVICES."
EDC# 05004
16050 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Receptacles shall be grounded by the green wire bond and shall be pigtailed as
shown on the drawings.
3. Receptacles shall be screwed tight to the plaster ring or outlet box and shall not
depend on the device plate to pull them tight.
4. Center line of general use receptacles shall be in general, set 18" above the floor
with receptacle mounted in the vertical position and with grounding pole at the
top.
5.
6.
C. Plates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EDC# 05004
Center line of receptacles located adjacent to lavatories in toilets shall be set 3'-
6" above floor.
All receptacles installed in bathrooms, toilets, within 6 feet of lavatories or sinks
or on building exterior shall be ground fault circuit interrupter type.
Plates shall be level and all edges shall be in full contact with wall.
Plates shall be furnished for all devices and other outlets indicated on the
drawings.
Install plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas above
ceilings and on surface mounted outlets.
Plates shall not be used to keep devices secure.
Plates shall be clean and free from dust, plaster or paint and spots.
Plate shall cover openings around outlets.
END OF SECTION 16050
16050 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16060
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Lighting fixture submittals shall consist of manufacturer's literature including photometric
data and shall note on the submittals any special requirements which have been
specified.
B. The Engineer reserves the right to require sample fixtures for approval.
C. "Manufacturer's literature for all lamps."
1.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Lighting fixtures shall be selected from those fixtures included in the fixture schedule as
noted on the drawings or in the specifications.
B. Lamps:
1. Sylvania
2. Phillips
3. General Electric
4. E.Y.E.
1.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Review plans and specifications and provide lighting fixtures compatible with ceiling
suspension system specified.
B. Fixtures shall be selected from the fixture schedule not only by catalog number but with
consideration to mounting, number and types of lamps, and reference notes as
contained in the fixture schedule and as noted on the drawings and in the specifications.
Manufacturers not listed on fixture schedule or added by addendum will not be accepted.
C. Fluorescent ballast shall be electronic type as manufactured by Motorola, Advance,
General Electric or Magnetek. Ballast shall have five year warranty, total harmonic
distortion of less than 20%. Ballast shall be instant start and parallel lamp operation.
D. Support of lighting fixtures shall be the responsibility of the fixture installer and shall be
as follows:
1. Surface mounted fluorescent fixtures shall be supported by light weight channel
to two members of the ceiling suspension system. Two support channels are
required. Surface mounted fixtures mounted on sheet rock or plaster ceilings or
low density acoustical tile ceilings shall be mounted with two 1/4" x 1/4" x 4"
metal spacers between fixture and ceiling. Spacers shall be located to provide
EDC# 05004
16060 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
air gap between fixture and ceiling. Do not place spacers directly over ballast.
E. Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly.
F. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for equipment.
G. Lighting fixtures shall be located as shown on the lighting plan. If for any reason this is
impossible or impractical, the Engineer shall be notified immediately for a decision as to
the best direction for the shift.
H. Upon completion of installation, lighting fixtures and equipment shall be in first class
operating order, in perfect condition as to finish, free from defects. At final inspection,
fixtures shall be completely lamped, be complete with required diffusers, reflectors, side
panels, louvers or the other components necessary to complete fixtures. All fixtures and
equipment shall be clean and free from dust, insects, plaster or paint spots. Any
reflectors, diffusers, side panels or other parts broken prior to final inspection shall be
replaced by contractor.
I. Lamps shall be provided for all fixtures:
1. Incandescent lamps shall be medium base, inside frost extended service
(minimum 2500 hours).
2. 48" fluorescent lamps shall be 32 watt T8 41 OooK.
3. Metal halide lamps shall be mogul base, of the wattage called for in the fixture
schedule and shall be of the coated type. .
END OF SECTION 16060
EDC# 05004
16060 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16070
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of manufacturer's published
literature.
1.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers are:
1. Square "0" Company
1.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Disconnect switches shall be provided for all motors and strip heaters located out of
sight of motor controller, and where specifically indicated on the drawings. Disconnect
switches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors. When exposed to weather,
enclosure shall be NEMA - 4X. Switches shall be installed to be fully accessible in
accordance with Article 110-26 of the National Electrical Code.
B. All disconnects shall be heavy duty type and shall be equipped with factory installed
equipment ground kit bonded to the can for grounding purposes.
C. For single phase motors, a single - or double-pole toggle switch, rated only for
alternating current, will be acceptable for capacities less than 30 amperes, provided the
ampere rating of the switch is at least 125 percent of the motor rating. Enclosed safety
switches shall be horsepower rated in conformance with Table III of Fed. Spec. W-D-
865. Switches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors.
D. Each disconnect ground mounted serving exterior AlC units shall be equipped with a
padlock (Master 3206) all keyed alike.
E. All disconnects shall be equipped with provisions to lock the handle in the OFF position.
F. All disconnects shall be fusible type, fused in accordance with the name plate data on
the unit. Disconnects serving water heaters or resistance heat strips shall be fused at
125% of the full load amps of the unit.
G. Install fuses so that ampere rating can be read without having to remove fuses.
H. All fuses shall be as noted in Section 16015.
I. Disconnects shall be identified as required under Section 16120.
J. Maintain 3'-0" clearance in front of disconnect having voltage rating of 250 volts and 4'-
0" clearance in front of disconnect having voltage rating of 480 volts. Do not locate
disconnect over other electrical equipment (i.e.: transformers).
END OF SECTION 16070
EDC# 05004
16070-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16080
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall include as a minimum the following
information:
1. Voltage, phase and KV A ratings
2. ANSI, NEMA and ULlistings
3. Sound rating
4. Temperature rise - insulation system data
5. Taps
6. Neutral terminal sizing
7. Electrostatic shield
8. Physical dimensions and weight
1.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. For the purpose of selecting quality and type of transformers, equipment as
manufactured by Square D Company has been specified.
1.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Dry type transformers shall be provided where shown to provide 3 phase, 4 wire,
120/208 volt grounded wye service to specific panelboards. Primary rating shall be 480
volts. KV A ratings shall be as shown on the drawings.
B. Transformer shall be provided with six 2-1/2% full capacity taps, two above and two
below unless only four 2-1/2% taps, two above and four below are standard NEMA taps
for the specific KV A rating. Sound rating shall not exceed 50 db for those specified
above 75 KV A. Temperature rise shall not exceed 115 degrees C. under full load in an
ambient of 40 degrees C. Overload capacity shall not be less than 10% at rated voltage.
Minimum B.I.L. shall be 10 KV. Vibration dampers shall be provided as a standard
feature on all transformers.
C. Primary and secondary connections to dry type transformers shall be made with flexible
galvanized steel conduit.
D. Transformers shall be located a minimum of 6" from wall.
E. Lug kits shall be provided with each transformer.
1.04 INSTALLATION
A. Primary and secondary connections to dry type transformers shall be made with flexible
galvanized steel conduit.
B. Transformers shall be located a minimum of 6" from wall.
END OF SECTION 16080
EDC# 05004
16080 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16100
PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES AND FITTINGS
1.01 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES AND FITTINGS
A. Boxes shall be provided in the raceway systems wherever required for the pulling of
wires and the making of connections.
B. Pull boxes of not less than the minimum size required by the National Electrical Code
Article 370 shall be constructed of code-gauge aluminum or stainless steel. Boxes shall
be furnished with screw-fastened covers. Boxes located on the exterior of the structure
shall be watertight. Covers shall be secured with tamper proof screws.
C. Boxes shall be securely and rigidly fastened to the surface of which they are mounted or
shall be supported from structural member of the building either directly or by using a
substantial and approved metal rod or brace.
D. All boxes shall be so installed that the wiring contained in them can be rendered
accessible without removing part of the building.
E. Where several circuits pass through a common pull box, the circuits shall be tagged to
indicate clearly their electrical characteristics, circuit number and designation.
F. All junction boxes larger than 4" x 4" flush mounted in wall shall have overlapping cover
plate to cover rough-in openings.
END OF SECTION 16100
EDC# 05004
16100 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16110
GROUNDING
PART 1 GENERAL:
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract documents including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The work required under this section of the specifications consists of furnishing,
installation and connections of the building secondary grounding systems. Exterior
branch circuit wiring and feeder conductors extended beyond the building are included.
The building electrical system shall be a 3 phase, 4 wire groundedwye delta system
supplemented with equipment grounding system. Equipment grounding system shall be
established with equipment grounding conductors; the use of metallic raceways for
equipment grounding is not acceptable.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Industry Referenced Standards: The following specifications and standards are
incorporated into and become a part of this Specification by Reference.
1. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:
No.44 Rubber-Insulated Wire & Cables
NO.83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires
No.467 Electrical Grounding & Bonding Equipment
No.493Thermoplastic-lnsulated Underground Feeder & Branch Circuit Cables
No.486Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs
2. National Electrical Manufacturers' Standards (NEMA):
WC-5 Thermoplastic Insulated Wire & Cable
WC-7 Cross-linked-Thermosetting Polyethylene Insulated Wire
3. National Fire Protection Association Publication (NFPA):
No.70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Products produced by the following manufacturer which
conform to this specification are acceptable.
1. Hydraulically applied conductor terminations:
a. Square D
b. Burndy
EDC# 05004
16110-1
I
I
I
I'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. Ilsco
d. Scotch (3M)
e. Thomas and Betts (T&B)
f. Anderson
2. Mechanically applied (crimp) conductor terminations:
a. Scotch (3M)
b. Ideal
c. Thomas and Betts (T&B)
d. Burndy
1.04 GENERAL MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all materials under this section of the specifications. All materials shall be new.
B. All materials shall be UL listed and bear a UL label.
C. Refer to the specific specification section for the description and requirements of
materials mentioned herein for installation.
1.05 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Grounding electrode conductor shall be bare or green insulated copper conductor sized
as indicated on the drawings.
B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated type THHN conductors sized
as indicated on the drawings. Where size is not indicated on the drawings, conductor
size shall be determined from the National Electrical Code table of sizes of equipment
grounding conductors.
C. Bonding jumpers shall be flexible copper bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the
National Electrical Code table on sizes of equipment grounding electrode conductors.
1.06 TRANSFORMERS & MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Provide a conductor termination grounding lug bonded to the enclosure of each
transformer and motor controller.
B. Provide an equipment ground bar with bonding screw in each disconnect for grounding
purposes.
1.07 DEVICES
A. Each receptacle and switch device shall be furnished with a grounding screw connected
to the metallic device frame. Bond equipment grounding conductor to each outlet box.
For isolated ground receptacles, bond equipment grounding conductor to box, and
isolated ground conductor to device grounding screw.
EDC# 05004
16110-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.08 GROUND RODS
A. Ground rods shall be 3/4" x 10'-0" copper clad steel. Connection to all ground rods shall
be by exothermic weld.
1.09 INSTALLATION
A. Ground all non-current carrying parts of the electrical system, Le., wireways, equipment
enclosures and frames, junction and outlet boxes, machine frames and other conductive
items in close proximity with electrical circuits, to provide a low impedance path for
potential grounded faults.
B. Service entrance and separately derived electrical systems, grounding electrode system.
1. The neutral conductor of the electrical service serving the premises wiring
system shall be grounded to the ground bus bar in the service equipment which
shall be grounded to the cold water system, the ground rod system, and other
grounding electrodes specified herein or indicated on the drawings. Grounding
electrode conductors shall be installed in rigid, non-metallic conduit to point of
ground connection, unless subject to physical damage in which case they shall
be installed in rigid aluminum. Where metallic conduit is permitted, bond conduit
at both ends to grounding electrode conductor with a UL bonding bushing.
2. Make connection to main water line and lift station piping. Make connections
ahead of any valve or fittings whose removal may interrupt ground continuity.
3. Bond together the following systems to form the grounding electrode system. All
system connections shall be made as close as possible to the service entrance
equipment and each connected at the service entrance equipment ground bus.
Do not connect electrode systems together except at ground bus.
a. Cold water piping system
b. Ground rod system
c. Structural reinforcing steel
4. Grounding electrode connections to structural steel, reinforcing bars, ground
rods, or where indicated on the drawings shall be with chemical exothermic weld
connection devices recommended for the particular connection type.
Connections to piping shall be with UL listed mechanical ground clamps.
5. Bonding shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
6. Install ground rods with the top of the ground rods 12" below finished grade.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductor
1. Grounding conductors shall be provided in all branch circuit raceways and
cables. Grounding conductors shall be the same AWG size as branch circuit
conductors.
EDC# 05004
16110-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. Grounding conductors for feeders are typically indicated on the drawings and the
raceway is sized to accommodate grounding conductor shown. Where
grounding conductor size is not indicated on the drawings, conductor shall be in
accordance with the equipment grounding conductor table of the National
Electrical Code.
3. A grounding conductor shall be installed in all flexible conduit installations. For
branch circuits, grounding conductor shall be sized to match branch circuit
conductors.
4. A feeder serving several panel boards shall have a continuous grounding
conductor which shall be connected to each related cabinet grounding bar.
5. The equipment grounding conductor shall be attached to equipment with bolt or
sheet metal screw used for no other purpose. Where grounding conductor is
stranded, attachment shall be made with lug attached to grounding conductor
with crimping tools.
6. Ground all motors by drilling and tapping the bottom of the motor junction box
with a round head bolt used for no other purpose. Conductor attachment shall be
through the use of a lug attached to conductor with a crimping tool.
7. Equipment grounding conductors shall terminate on panelboard, switchboard, or
motor control center grounding bus only. Do not terminate on neutral bus.
Provide a single terminals lug for each conductor. Conductor shall terminate the
same section as the phase conductors originate. Do not terminate neutral
conductors on the ground bus.
D. Other Grounding Requirements
1. Lighting fixtures shall be grounded with a green insulated ground wire secured to
the fixture with a UL listed bond lug, screw, or clip specifically made for such use.
1.10 TESTING
A. Upon completion of the ground rod installation, grounding resistance reading shall be
taken before connection is made to the building cold water piping system. Ground
resistance readings shall not be taken within forty-eight hours of rainfall. Results of
ground resistance readings shall be forwarded, in writing, immediately to the Engineer
and Owner.
END OF SECTION 16110
EDC# 05004
16110 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16120
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit sample of laminated plastic identification plate with lettering.
1.02 MATERIALS
A. Laminated plastic plates with 3/16" high white letter etched on black background.
B. Plates shall be permanently mounted utilizing pop rivets or a permanent mastic/epoxy.
C. Painted, stenciled or indented tape identification is not acceptable.
1.03 ITEM IDENTIFICATION
A. All electrical apparatus such as wiring troughs, panelboards, individual circuit breakers,
transformers and disconnect switches shall have laminated plastic identification plates.
Identification shall match labeling shown on plans.
B. A "steel" circuit directory frame permanently attached at factory (not glued), and a-
directory card with a plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of each panel door.
The directory shall be typed to identify the load fed by each circuit and the areas served.
C. Circuit breakers and disconnects shall identify the equipment served and circuit and
panel from which it is served.
D. On all panelboards the exterior identification plate shall match that on the drawings and
the panel and circuit number serving the panel shall be designated within the panel.
END OF SECTION 16120
EDC# 05004
16120 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16180
INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings consisting of:
1. Manufacturer's published literature.
2. One line schematic of complete system.
1.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. Intrusion Alarm System manufacturers shall be as follows:
1. Ademco
2. Radionics
3. DSC
B. The acceptable manufacturers systems listed in 1.02 A, shall be installed by the
authorized local factory dealer/representative for that product. The factory dealer
representative shall hold a current low voltage contractor's license.
Any other interested parties shall submit a company resume showing years in business,
certification stating that he is an authorized representative for the manufacturer of the
equipment he is submitting for approval and that he maintains a fully equipped and
stocked service shop and shall respond to service calls within 12 normal working hours,
list of key personnel, copies of appropriate licenses and list of recently completed jobs
during the normal prior approval period.
1.03 GENERAL
A. Furnish and install a complete intrusion alarm system consisting of passive infrared
detectors, arm defeat key switches, voice/pager dialer, central monitoring and
transmitting equipment.
B. All wiring shall be in raceway by intrusion alarm Sub Contractor and shall be as
recommended by manufacturer furnishing equipment. All wiring shall be run in conduit.
The complete system shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
specifications. Each intrusion alarm circuit shall be protected from lightning by installing
surge protection units.
C. The alarm equipment shall be installed by a factory trained technician and placed in
working order. The technician shall instruct operating personnel in the operation,
adjustment and maintenance of the system.
D. Three sets of complete instruction for the operation, inspection, testing and maintenance
of the system, including wiring diagrams and spare replacement part list shall be
EDC# 05004
16180 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
furnished before final acceptance of the system. Also, provide all special tools that are
necessary for the maintenance of the equipment and include one set of fuses for each
type and size.
E. Intrusion Alarm System Subcontractor shall submit a certification stating that he is an
authorized representative for the manufacturer of the equipment he is submitting for
approval and that he maintains a fully equipped and stocked service shop and shall
respond to service within 12 normal working hours.
1.04 OPERATIONS
A. When the passive infrared detector notes an intrusion in shall cause an voice/pager
dialer to transmit telephone calls to supervisory personnel. All components shall be
double supervised for disarrangements. Arm defeat key switch shall permit authorized
access to the building. Digital key pad shall be located at the central monitoring and
transmitting equipment to arm or disarm the entire system.
1. Detector, Radial Pattern - Pulnix # PA 7100, surface ceiling mounted.
2. Control panel - Ademco Vista 50 with power supply, re-chargeable battery packs.
Automatic dialer - two channel burglar and fire digital key pad.
3. Provide United Securities products voice/pager dialer (USP #A VD 2002).
Connect dialer to Telco line and program as directed by Augusta Utility
Department.
4. Weatherproof arm-defeat key switch to shunt zone in use.
B. Control panel shall be equipped with a UL listed dialer for off premises central station
monitoring.
1.05 CONDUITAND OUTLETS
A. Conduit and its installation shall be as covered under Section 16020 of these
specifications.
B. Outlets and their installations shall be covered under Section 16040 of these
specifications.
C. Provide 1/2"C., from intrusion alarm control panel to telephone backboard.
END OF SECTION 16180
EDC# 05004
16180 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16190
ENGINE GENERATOR SET
1.01 GENERAL
A. Requirements contained in this Specification shall apply to and govern the work under
this Section.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor and material necessary to install a standby diesel engine-generator set of
the latest commercial type and design as specified herein.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall furnish information showing manufacturers' model number,
dimensions, and weights for the engine, generator, and major auxiliary equipment.
1.04 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following manufacturers meeting these specifications are acceptable:
1. Onan
2. Caterpillar
3. Detroit Diesel
4. Kohler
1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Proposed deviations from the specifications shall be treated as follows:
1. Request for substitutions shall be made a minimum of ten (10) days prior to bid
date. Manufacturers catalog data shall accompany each request and authorized
acceptance shall be by addenda only.
2. Under no circumstances will assemblers of units be acceptable. To qualify as a
manufacturer, the engine or alternator must be the item manufactured and the
completed engine generator set supplied by that manufacturer's authorized
dealer only.
3. The Contractor shall submit copies of pertinent drawings and schematic
diagrams for approval and shall include the following:
a. Engine generator set including plans and elevations or riser views
clearly indicating entrance points for each of the interconnections
required.
b. Engine generator/exciter control cubicle.
c. Fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and
combustion CFM requirements.
d. Exhaust mufflers and vibration isolators.
EDC# 05004
16190 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
e. Battery Charger, battery, and battery racks.
f. Actual electrical diagrams including schematic diagrams and
interconnection wiring diagrams for all equipment to be provided.
g. Legends for all devices on all diagrams.
h. Sequence of operation explanations for all portions of all
schematic wiring diagrams.
4. The specified standby KW shall be for continuous electrical service during
interruption of the normal utility source and shall be certified to this effect by the
manufacturer for the actual unit supplied.
5. These ratings must be substantiated by manufacturer's standard published
curves. Special ratings or maximum ratings are not acceptable.
1.06 MATERIALS
A. Engine: The engine shall be 1800 RPM, water-cooled in line or Vee type four-stroke
cycle compression ignition diesel. It shall meet specifications when operating on
Number 2 domestic burner oil. Engines requiring premium fuels will not be considered.
The engine shall be equipped with fuel, lube oil, and intake air filters, lube oil cooler, fuel
transfer pump, fuel priming pump, engine driven water pump, and unit mounted
instruments, water temperature gauge, lubrication oil pressure gauge, and battery
charging ammeter.
1. Governor - A gear driven hydraulic governor shall maintain frequency regulation
not to exceed 3% (1.8 hertz) from no load to full rated load.
2. Mounting - The units shall be mounted on a structural steel sub-base and shall
be provided with suitable spring-type isolators.
3. Safety Devices - Safety shut-off for high water temperature, low oil pressure,
over-speed, and engine over-crank shall be provided.
4. Guards - Guards shall be provided over all exposed moving parts as required
by OSHA.
B. Generator:
1. The generator shall be rated for continuous stand-by service at 900 KW, 1125
KV A at 0.8 power factor, 480/277 volts, three phase, four wire, 60 hertz, 1800
RPM.
2. The generator shall be a three phase, 60 hertz, single bearing, rotating field,
synchronous type built to NEMA standards. A voltage regulator shall be provided
to match the characteristics of the generator and engine. Voltage regulation shall
be + - 2% from no load to full rated load. Readily accessible voltage drop,
voltage level and voltage gain controls shall be provided. Voltage level
adjustments shall be a minimum of + - 5%. Generator and exciter shall be
inherently capable of parallel operation with other power sources of equivalent
electrical characteristics, and stator shall include a twelve lead, re-connectable
buss bar system for easy load connection.
EDC# 05004
16190 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Cooling System:
1. Radiator - A radiator with blower type fan shall be sized to maintain safe
operation 110 degrees F ambient temperature. Air flow restriction from the
radiator shall not exceed 0.5" HO.
2. The engine cooling system shall be pre-treated by the system supplier for the
inhibition of internal corrosion, and freezing.
D. Fuel System:
1. An in-base fuel tank shall be supplied and installed by the manufacturer of the
power system. The tank capacity shall be 1500 gallons. Tank shall be
constructed of "I" beams with a 3/16" floor plates and 10 gauge tank bottom.
Tank shall incorporate 1/2" drain plugs on each end, 2" fill cap with locking
provisions, level indicator, supply pipe and return pipe. Tank shall have access
plate for mounting of fuel level alarm and tank inspections. Tank shall be dual
wall construction provided with leak detection. At job completion, fuel tank shall
be topped off and left full.
2. Tank shall be mounted to the skids of engine generator. Isolator pads shall be
installed between pad and skid tank.
E. Weather Proof Housing and Exhaust Muffler;
1. Housing shall consist of a weather proof enclosure to completely enclose the
engine generator and accessories. Housing shall protect the engine generator
from the environment, yet be conductive to easy maintenance. Housing shall
have removable swing out doors on each side and lockable rear door for access
to meters and controls. Side doors shall have a means to pad lock. Construction
of housing shall be of a minimum 14 gauge sheet steel and painted
manufacturers standard color.
2. The exhaust muffler shall be a critical grade muffler. Muffler shall be factory
installed so that its weight is not supported by the engine. A flexible exhaust
fitting shall be supplied and installed between the muffler and exhaust manifold.
All accessories shall be factory installed. This includes flanges, muffler, tail pipe
and rain cap.
F. Automatic Starting System:
1. Starting Motor - A DC electric starting system with positive engagement shall be
furnished. The motor voltage shall be as recommended by the engine
manufacturer.
2. Automatic Control - fully automatic generator set start-stop controls in the
generator control panel shall be provided. Controls shall provide shutdown for
low oil pressure, high water temperature, over speed, over crank. Controls shall
include a 30 second single cranking cycle limit with lockout.
EDC# 05004
16190 - 3
/
s
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Jacket Water Heater - A unit mounted thermal circulation type water heater
incorporating a thermostatic switch shall be furnished to maintain engine jacket
water to 70 degrees F. the heater shall be 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz.
Provide pressure switch actuated by oil pressure to shut down heater when oil
pressure reaches running pressure. Two (2) - 120 volt, 20 amp circuits shall be
provided from panel "LP-A" to power the water heater, oil heater and the battery
charger.
4. Battery Charging Alternator - A belt driven battery charging alternator rated 24
volts, 35 amp DC shall be provided with transistorized voltage regulator.
5. Batteries - A lead - acid storage battery set of the heavy duty diesel starting type
shall be provided. Battery voltage shall be compatible with the starting system.
The battery set shall be rated no less than 220 amp-hours. Necessary cables
and clamps shall be provided.
6. Battery Racks - Battery racks shall be provided for each battery and shall
conform to NEC 480 - 7 (a) (1). They shall be constructed of metal and so
treated as to be resistant to deteriorating action by battery electrolyte. Further,
construction shall be such that nonconducting insulation material directly
supports the cells.
7. Battery Charger - A current limiting battery charger shall be furnished to
automatically recharge batteries. Chargers shall float at 2.17 volts per cell. It
shall include overload protection, silicon diode full wave rectifiers, voltage surge
suppressor, DC ammeter, DC volt- meter, and fused AC input. AC input voltage
shall be 120 volts, single phase. Amperage output shall be no less than 6
amperes.
G. Generator Control Panel:
1. Type - A generator mounted NEMA 3R type vibration isolated 14 gauge steel
control panel shall be provided. Panel shall contain, but not be limited to, the
following equipment:
a. Frequency meter, 3 ~ inch, dial type.
b. Voltmeter, 3 ~ inch, 2% accuracy.
c. Ammeter, 3 ~ inch, 2 % accuracy.
d. Ammeter - Voltmeter phase selector switch.
e. Automatic starting controls as specified.
f. Voltage level adjustment rheostat.
g. Dry contacts for remote alarm wired to terminal strips.
h. Individual fault indicator lights for low oil pressure, high water
temperature, over speed, and over crank.
i. Three position function switch marked, RUN-STOP and REMOTE.
j. Running time meter, oil pressure, battery charging ammeter, and
water temperature gauges.
EDC# 05004
16190 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
H. Main Line Circuit Breaker:
1. Type A main line, molded case circuit breaker mounted upon and sized to the
output of the generator shall be installed as a load circuit interrupting and
protection device. It shall operate both manually for normal switching functions
and automatically during overload and short circuit conditions.
2. The trip unit for each pole shall have elements providing inverse time delay
during overload conditions and instantaneous magnetic tripping for short circuit
protection. The circuit breaker shall meet standards established by Underwriters
Laboratories National Electric Manufacturer's Association, and National Electrical
Code.
I. Exhaust System:
1. A Maxim exhaust silencer model M41 to provide critical silencing shall be
furnished.
2. A seamless flexible exhaust adapter shall be furnished for the exhaust outlet.
3. Exhaust pipe shall be steel. Joints shall be welded with welded fittings,
companion flanges shall be provided for the silencer by the generator supplier.
4. A rain cap shall be provided at the end of the exhaust line.
J. Information Furnished to the Owner:
1. A factory authorized technician shall instruct the Owner's representative in the
proper operation and maintenance of the equipment installed and shall furnish at
least two copies of operating and maintenance instruction manuals covering the
engine generator and such auxiliary equipment as may require published
instructions or periodic maintenance.
2. The nearest and most convenient source of replacement parts and service.
1.07 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
A. Automatic transfer switches shall be furnished and installed as shown on the plans.
B. The rating shall be as shown on the plans for use on 480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire system.
C. The automatic transfer switch shall be UL 1008 as listed and be ASCO Bulletin 940, or
approved equal. Accessories to be included are time delay on start (3 sec.) to ignore
momentary outages, adjustable time delay transfer to normal (2 to 30 min.), cool down
timer, test switch to simulate outages and to load the plant, pilot contacts to initiate
starting of the engine, insulated neutral pad, three (3) sets of auxiliary contacts for
remote indication of switch position on normal and emergency, weekly exercise timer,
charger, described previously may be housed in the switch enclosure. The transfer
switch shall be housed in a NEMA enclosure where shown on the plans. For allowing
motor and transformer voltage decay prior to transfer, the transfer switch shall have
either a timed programmed neutral or timed contacts that may be wired into the motor
EDC# 05004
16190 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
starter circuits that will drop out selected motor starters then reenergized them after the
transfer is made. The time shall be adjustable up to 10 seconds.
1.08 INSTALLATION
A. All equipment shall be properly supported and additional support provided where
necessary.
B. Installation shall be according to the manufacturer' recommendations shall be done in a
neat workmanlike manner and shall be installed under the supervision of a
manufacturer's representative.
C. The manufacturer's representative shall be present during start-up and testing and shall
provide certification of the system.
1.09 MOUNTING
A. The engine generator shall be mounted on corfund vibration isolators on the concrete
pad, the complete engine generator and all controls shall be housed within a WP
enclosure with hinged side doors and hinged door over the instrument panel. The
concrete pad shall be provide by the contractor, sized as recommended by the generator
supplier.
1.10 SYSTEM SERVICE CONTRACT
A. The supplier of the standby power system shall provide a copy of and make available to
the owner his standard service contract which, at the owner's option, may be accepted
or refused. This contract will accompany any documents, drawings, catalog cuts,
specification sheets, wiring or outline drawings, etc. Submitted for approval to the
designing engineer. The contract shall be for the complete power system.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. The complete standby electrical system furnished under this Section shall be guaranteed
against defective parts and workmanship under terms of the manufacturer's and dealer's
standard warranty. But, in no event shall it be for a period of less than five (5) years or
3000 hours from date of final testinq and acceptance of the system and shall include
labor, parts and travel time for necessary repairs at the job site. Warranty information
shall be submitted along with construction site test data sheets. This information shall
list starting and ending dates and who is to be contacted for warranty service.
1.12 MANUFACTURING
A. The engine, including engine block, oil pan, and cylinder heads, generator and all major
items of auxiliary equipment shall be manufactured in the U. S. by manufacturers
currently engaged in the production of such equipment.
B. The unit shall be shipped to the job site by the manufacturer's authorized dealer having
a parts and service facility within a 75 mile radius of the iob site. In addition, and in order
not to penalize the owner for unnecessary or prolonged periods of time for service or
EDC# 05004
16190 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
repairs to the emergency system, the bidding generator set supplier must have no less
than eighty percent (80%) of all engine replacement parts in his stock at all times.
Certified proof of this requirement shall be available from the dealer.
1.13 TESTING
A. Prior to acceptance of the installation, equipment shall be tested to show it is free of any
defects and will start automatically and be subjected to full load test through the use of
existing loads and, dry type load banks supplied for this purpose at the job site by the
generator set supplier.
B. Load bank testing shall be done in the presence of the Owner's engineer or his
appointed representative only after the unit is permanently installed in accordance with
the plans and specifications. If testing is completed without benefit of Engineers
presence, testing shall be done again in his presence. Testing shall be for a period of
four (4) hours under full load.
C. Contractor shall supply all fuel necessary for load bank testing and shall before final
acceptance of generator unit top off tank leaving it full.
1.14 CERTIFICATE TEST REPORTS, MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Prior to the final inspection, deliver 4 copies of the following items to the Engineer:
1. A certificate by the manufacturer of the engine-generator set that the auxiliary
electrical power system has been properly installed, adjusted and tested.
2. Certified copies of all of the factory and construction site test data sheets and
reports for the engine-generator set and major auxiliaries.
3. Complete operating and maintenance manuals for the engine-generator set and
auxiliaries including wiring diagrams, technical data sheets and information for
ordering replaceable parts:
a. Include complete interconnection diagrams which indicate all components
of the system.
b. Include complete diagrams of the internal wiring for each of the items of
equipment.
c. The diagrams shall have their terminals identified to facilitate installation,
operation and maintenance.
B. Laminate or mount under plexiglas a set of operating instructions for the system and
install it under a neat frame, adjacent to transfer switch.
C. Furnish the services of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician for instructing
operating and maintenance personnel on the proper operation and maintenance of the
system at the time of testing.
END OF SECTION 16190
EDC# 05004
16190 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16200
MOTOR CONTROL CENTER
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete motor control center shop drawings shall be submitted, listing as a
minimum the following items:
1. Voltage rating.
2. Bus assembly rating.
3. Main breaker where required rating by capacity, number of poles and
interrupting rating in RMS symmetrical amperes.
4. Surface or flush mounting.
5. Listing of branch breakers by capacity number of poles and interrupting
rating in RMS symmetrical amperes.
6. Top or bottom feed.
7. A schedule similar to that shown on the drawings, depicting branch
breaker arrangement and breaker sizes and giving full explanation for any
difference between the two.
8. Starters
B. Contractor utilizing switch gear other than Square "0" Company, shall submit
layout of electrical rooms delineating placement of equipment.
1.02 MANUFACTURERS
A. For the purpose of selecting quality and types of panels, equipment as
manufactured by Square "0" Company has been specified.
1.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Description: Shall be dead front, free standing assemblies consisting of
enclosure, bussing, combination starters, circuit breakers, switches, and other
such items as may be shown or specified herein.
B. Quality Assurance:
1. The motor control center design shall be in accordance with the latest
applicable standards of NEMA and Underwriters Laboratories.
2. The motor control center design shall have been tested in a recognized
high power laboratory to prove adequate mechanical and electrical
capabilities.
C. Submittals:
1. Shop drawings shall show separate views of the elevation, profile, and
conduit openings. The elevation shall show the section, identification,
EDC# 05004
16200 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
EDC# 05004
and the unit identification. The drawings shall give dimensions of size
and location as follows:
a. Vertical section height, width, and depth.
b. Mounting channels.
c. Conduit openings top and bottom.
d. Wireway openings in sides.
e. Horizontal bus.
f. Ground bus.
2. The drawings shall contain a summary of the design specifications
containing but not limited to the following:
a. NEMA type enclosure and class of wiring.
b. Rated bus voltage.
c. Current ratings for horizontal bus, vertical busses, and ground
bus.
d. Bus material plating.
e. Bus bracing and short circuit rating.
3. The drawings shall contain a listing of each unit containing but not limited
to the following:
a. Unit location.
b. Nameplate.
c. Major contents of unit (starter, C.B. switch, M.C.P.) complete with
NEMA size and heater rating or current rating.
d. Size of load served (H.P. KVA, KW).
4. Shop drawings shall be complete and shall clearly list all accessories.
The Control Contractor shall review and approve all accessories required
for control wirinq prior to submittal.
Enclosures:
1. Each section shall be 90 inches high and not less than 20 inches wide
and 16 inches deep.
2. Each section shall contain 12 space factors and shall accept a maximum
of six front mounted unit starters per section.
3. Each section shall be physically independent free standing completely
separated from adjacent section except for wireways and busses. End
section shall have removable plates, wireways, and busses for future
additions.
4. A vertical wireway with a minimum of 19 square inches of cross sectional
area shall be adjacent to each vertical wireway and shall contain steel rod
cable supports with plastic cable ties. All wireway hardware to be captive.
5. Each section shall have a minimum of 6 inches vertical conduit and wiring
space at the bottom.
16200 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. Each section shall contain a horizontal wireway at the top isolated from
the horizontal bus and shall be readily accessible through a hinged cover.
7. Enclosure shall be furnished in baked enamel on cleaned phosphatized
steel in ASA #410. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 gasketed.
E. Bus:
1. Each section shall contain a horizontal bus located at center or near the
top of the control center, which has been tested for the capacity as
shown. Bus shall be sized as shown on drawings but in no case shall
main bus have a rating less than 1200 amperes based on UL
requirements.
2. The horizontal bus shall be of the same size for the entire length of the
control center, without reduction and shall have provisions for adding
future sections as shown.
3. Vertical bus in each section shall be rated as required by equipment feed,
but in no case shall it be less than 300 amperes, front mount.
4. The vertical bus shall be completely isolated and insulated by barriers to
effectively isolate the vertical busses from unit spaces except for stab
openings that accept unit bus stabs. Where space only is specified, bus
stab openings shall have snap in plastic covers installed. Bus barriers
shall be removable at joints, splices, etc., to allow bus maintenance.
5. A horizontal ground bus rated 25 percent of main bus shall be run
continuous through each section for the entire length of each motor
control center.
6. A neutral bus and/or neutral lugs shall be provided for all four (4) wire
motor control centers.
7. All buses shall be tin plated copper. All connections between horizontal
and vertical bus shall be made with bolts with spring washers.
8. All buses shall be braced as shown except no buss shall be braced as
shown for less than 22,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. Where current
limiters are employed in units, bus rating shall be a minimum of 42, 000
amperes RMS symmetrical.
F. Units:
1. All units protected 225 amp and less shall be draw out type. Bus stabs
shall be silver or tin plated and of such design that high currents tighten
their grip on the bus. Stabs shall be free floating and self aligning.
2. Unit shall be of modular dimensions and supported on steel pans. It shall
be possible to remove and relocate pans without the use of tools. Units
shall have covers mounted to the fixed enclosure. Door shall be
removable, but the door must open wide enough to allow unit equipment
to be removed or replaced without removing door. Doors shall be held
shut by captive hardware. Pilot devices and starter over load reset
buttons shall be door mounted. Interior of units shall be painted white.
3. Units shall be furnished with NEMA Class 1, Type B wiring. Terminals
shall be pull apart type for all control wiring. Terminals shall be mounted
in the unit not the vertical wireway.
EDC# 05004
16200 - 3
1. Combination starter (FVNR) units shall utilize the motor circuit protector
(MCP) as shown on the schedule on plans. The MCP shall provide
adjustable magnetic protection and be provided with pin insert to stop the
magnetic adjustment at 1,3000 percent of motor full load nameplate. The
MCP and starter shall have a combined fault current rating of 22,000
amps RMS symmetrical.
2. Starters shall be electrically operated, electrically held, three pole
assemblies with extinguishing characteristics and shall have silver
renewable contacts and be NEMA size 1 minimum. They shall have
provision for adding a minimum of six normally open or normally closed
electrical interlocks.
3. The overload relay assembly shall be of the melting alloy type. Single
speed starters shall have three overloads.
4. Each starter shall be for 120 volt control power obtained from an integral
one (1) fuse control transformer. A control circuit disconnect shall be
installed in the protective device of each starter unit to disconnect control
power from starter when the protective device is opened. An individual
control circuit fuse shall be provided for each starter.
5. Each starter shall be equipped with the following control devices: Reset
button, 2 N.O. Auxiliary contacts. Reversing and two speed starters shall
have two (2) N.O. and two (2) N.C. contacts. Additional-control devices
shall be furnished as shown on drawings.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4. Circuit breakers or MCP shall be externally operated and shall be
interlocked to prevent closing the circuit breaker, MCP or switch with the
door open and to prevent opening the door with the breaker or switch on.
It shall be possible to defeat the interlocks for maintenance or inspection.
Door mounted handles that must engage the circuit breaker or switch
handle while the door is being closed are not acceptable. Each unit shall
have an engraved black and white bakelite nameplate riveted or glued in
place.
5. Padlock facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect in the
off position with from one to three padlocks, with the door open or closed.
G. Starters (FVNR):
H. Circuit Breakers:
1. Circuit Breakers: All separate circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic
common trip, FA frame, and larger. All circuit breakers shall have the
following minimum RMS symmetrical interrupting capacity unless shown
larger on drawings.
480 Volts
100A 225A 400A 600A 800A 1,200A
25KA 25KA 30KA 35KA 35KA 35KA
EDC# 05004
16200 - 4
16200 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I. Sluice Gates:
1. Sluice gates are equipped with a controller on top of each sluice gate
motor. It has open and close push buttons and status indicating lights.
Power wiring shall be provided by a 15 amp, 3 pole breaker in the Motor
Control Center. The open-close and status lights shall be duplicated in
the cubicle containing the breaker feeding the sluice gates. Control
conductors as required shall be provided from the sluice gate controller to
the Motor Control Center for paralleling this operation.
J. Control Devices:
1. All push buttons, pilot lights, selector switches, and other control devices
shall be separate, standard size (full) and shape, heavy duty oil-tight
units.
2. All pilot lights to be transformer type with long lamps and push to test.
3. Each control device to be equipped with nameplates.
4. All control relays shall be 600 volt minimum 10 amp rated convertible
contacts.
1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Where the schedules and diagrams show deviations from these specifications,
the schedules and diagrams shall take precedence, but only for particular
feature.
1.06 INSTALLATION
A. Motor control centers shall be installed on four (4) inch thick concrete pads
unless specifically shown otherwise. Pad shall extend a minimum of two (2)
inches to all sides and shall have beveled edges.
B. Orientation of motor control centers shall be as shown on the drawings.
C. Motor control centers shall be grounded as shown on drawings.
D. Verify all accessories as shown on drawings. Perform all necessary additions
and modifications to make the motor control center conform to the drawings.
1.07 INFORMATION FURNISHED TO OWNER
A. Equipment brochures showing equipment type and model.
B. Six (6) sets of shop drawings.
C. Three (3) sets of installation instructions.
D. The nearest and most convenient source of replacement parts and service.
END OF SECTION 16200
EDC# 05004
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 16220
CONSTRUCTION REVIEWS INSPECTION AND TESTING
1.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with General and Special Conditions requirements
1.02 CONSTRUCTION REVIEWS
A. The Engineer or his representative shall observe and review the installation of all
electrical systems shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
B. Before covering or concealing any conduit below grade or slab, in wall or above ceiling,
the contractor shall notify the Engineer so that he can review the installation.
1.03 CONTRACTOR'S FINAL INSPECTION
A. At the time of the Contractor's final inspection, all systems shall be checked and tested
for proper installation and operation by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer or
his representative.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the personnel, tools and equipment required to inspect and
test all systems.
C. Following is a list of items that the contractor must demonstrate to the Engineer or his
representative as complying with the plans and specifications. Please note that this list
does not necessarily represent all items to be covered in the final inspection, but should
give the Contractor an idea of what is to be reviewed.
1. Service ground, show connection to ground rod and cold water main.
2. Demonstrate that main service equipment is properly bonded.
3. Demonstrate that all panels have breakers as specified, ground bar, copper bus,
typed directory for circuit identification and that they are free of trash.
4. Demonstrate that all conduits are supported as required by the National Electrical
Code.
5. Demonstrate that all outlet boxes above or on the ceiling are supported as
required by the National Electrical Code.
6. Demonstrate that outlet boxes in wall or ceilings of combustible materials are
flush with surface of wall or ceiling, and that outlet boxes in walls or ceilings of
non-combustible materials are so installed that the front edge of the box or
plaster ring is not set back more than 1/4".
EDC# 05004
16220 - 1
16220 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7. Demonstrate that outlet boxes in wall are secure.
8. Demonstrate that all devices are properly secured to boxes, that device plates
are properly aligned and are not being used to secure device.
9. Utilizing a Woodhead No. 1750 testing device, demonstrate that all 125 volt
receptacles are properly connected.
10. Demonstrate that all fixtures have specified lamps, ballast and lens, and that they
are supported as required by the National Electrical Code or as called for on the
drawings or in the specifications.
11. Demonstrate that all disconnects requiring fuses are fused with the proper size
and type, and that all disconnects are properly identified.
12. Demonstrate that Engine Generator Set is in proper working order and meeting
all requirements outlined in specification.
13. Demonstrate that the Intrusion Alarm System is in proper working order and
meeting all requirements outlined in specification.
END OF SECTION 16220
EDC# 05004
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 17000
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 - SCOPE
This section describes the methods for measurement and payment of all contract bid items.
PART 2 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The following item numbers correspond to the contract bid items in the proposal section of
these contract documents.
2.1 STRUCTURES
ITEM ST -1 - Electrical Building shall be measured as a lump sum and shall include
all costs for the materials, labor and equipment to construct the specified building complete.
ITEM ST -2 - Cast in place concrete for the pump station, including reinforcing steel,
hatches and embeds shall be measured as a lump sum and shall include costs for the specified
concrete, reinforcing steel, hatches, excavation, de-watering, soil stabilization, site preparation, form
work, asphalt cutting, collars and boots, grouting and/or other corrections, embeds, installation,
grouting inverts, finishing, and normal backfill as specified. No additional payment shall be made
ITEMS ST -3 and ST -4 - Precast concrete grit trap and by-pass structures installed,
complete with piping, hatches and appurtenances shall be measured individually (each) and shall
include costs for the structure, internal piping, hatches excavation, de-watering soil stabilization, site
preparation, asphalt cutting, collars and boots, grouting and/or other connections, installation,
grouting inverts, and normal backfill as specified. No additional payment shall be made for these
items.
2.2 PUMP STATION/STRUCTURE PIPING & EQUIPMENT
ITEM PS-l - Miscellaneous non-embed steel shall be measured as a lump sum and
shall include the costs for all materials, labor and equipment required to install the handrails, grating,
pipe supports and any other miscellaneous steel without a specific pay item. No additional payment
shall be made for these items.
ITEM PS-2 - Internal pump station pipe, valves and fittings shall be measured as a
lump sum and shall include the costs for all materials, labor and equipment required for a complete
installation. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
17000-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ITEMS PS-3 and PS-4 - Submersible pumps shall be measured individually for each
size and shall include the costs for all materials, labor and equipment required for a complete
installation. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM PS-5 - Portable hydraulic grit pump and accessories shall be measured
individually (each) and shall include the costs for all materials, labor and equipment required for the
specified self contained system. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM PS-6 - Hydraulic grinder system shall be measured individually (each) and
shall include the costs for all materials, labor and equipment required for a complete installation. No
additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM PS-7 - Sump and accessories shall be measured individually (each) and shall
include the costs for all materials, labor and equipment required for a complete installation. No
additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEMS PS-8 thrOll!!h PS-IO -Sluice gates shall be measured individually for each
size and shall include the costs for all materials, labor and equipment required for a complete
installation. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
2.3 MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL
ITEM ME-I - HV AC equipment shall be measured as a lump sum and shall include
the costs for all materials, labor and equipment required to install the HV AC equipment complete
with all required appurtenances in accordance with the Plans. No additional payment shall be made
for these items.
ITEM ME-2 - Pump Station and Electrical Building plumbing and accessories shall
be measured as a lump sum and shall include the costs for all materials, labor and equipment required
to install the plumbing and appurtenances to a point five feet outside of the structures. No additional
payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM ME-3 - Electrical equipment shall be measured as a lump sum and shall
include the costs for all materials, labor and equipment required to install the electrical equipment
complete with all required appurtenances in accordance with the Plans and Division 16 of these
specifications. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM ME-4 - Instrumentation, Controls and SCADA shall be a lump sum allowance
of $95,000.00, which will be used to pay the direct cost of the Instrumentation, Controls and SCADA
subcontractor (MR Systems, Inc.). Only the direct cost of the subcontractor will be paid under this
item and shall include the cost for all material, labor and equipment required to install a complete and
operational system as described in Section 11900 and as may be modified by the Owner. Any
overhead and/or profit desired by the General Contractor shall be included in the pay item for Lump
Sum Construction.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
17000-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.4 SANITARY SEWER YARD PIPING AND APPURTENANCES
ITEMS S-l throu2h S-3 - All gravity piping line items shall be measured in linear
feet and shall include costs for piping and installation, trench excavation, trench box, dewatering,
asphalt cutting, normal joints and gaskets, normal backfill, infiltration and exfiltration testing,
mandrel pulling, and CCTV camera inspection as required. Linear measurements shall be taken
through manholes but not through special structures. Camera inspection shall include all costs for
closed circuit camera inspection of the sanitary sewer system, including mobilization, demobilization,
inspection, video tape copies, and field reports. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEMS S-4 throu2h S-8 - All force main piping line items shall be measured in
linear feet and shall include costs for piping and installation, trench excavation, trench box,
dewatering, asphalt cutting, normal or restrained joints and gaskets, normal backfill, pressure and
leakage testing, and pipe flushing. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM S-9 - Select backfill shall be measured in cubic yards and shall include costs
for the backfill and installation as well as all transportation and stockpiling charges and offsite
disposal costs of unsuitable material. The volume of material included shall be the actual measured
"in-place" volume. The maximum trench width used to calculate the volume will be 7 feet for force
main piping and 10 feet for gravity piping. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM S-10 - Miscellaneous pipe fittings and connections shall be measured in pounds
and included costs for all fittings and installation including normal joints and gaskets, mechanical
joint restraint, etc., regardless of material. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEMS S-l1 and S-14 - Pre-cast manholes shall be measured individually (each) and
shall include costs for manholes up to six feet in depth, excavation, dewatering, asphalt cutting,
collars and boots, grouting and/or other connections, installation, normal backfill, and vacuum testing
as specified. Manhole vacuum testing shall include all costs for testing equipment, testing labor,
mobilization, demobilization and reporting. Manholes failing testing shall be retested at Contractor's
expense. Repairs to failing manholes shall be made external to the manhole utilizing a method
approved by the Augusta Utilities Department. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEMS S-12. S-13 and S-15 - Additional sanitary manhole depth line items shall be
measured by vertical foot and shall include costs for excavation, dewatering, and backfill as specified
by type and class. No additional payment shall be made for these items. Type 1 manholes shall be
connected to pipe 42" or less in diameter, and Type 2 manhole shall be connected to pipe 48" to 84"
in diameter. Class 1 additional depth shall apply to each manhole greater then 6-feet but not more
than 10- feet in depth. Payment for Class 1 shall be the actual depth between 6- feet and 10- feet.
Class 2 additional depth shall apply to each manhole greater than 10-feet in depth, but not exceeding
20-feet in depth. Payment for Class 2 shall be the actual depth of the manhole between 6-feet and
20-feet. Class 3 additional depth shall apply to each manhole exceeding 20-feet in depth, but not
exceeding 3D-feet in depth. Payment for Class 3 shall be the actual depth of the manhole between
6-feet and 3D-feet.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
17000-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ITEMS S-16 throu2h S-19 - All valve line items shall be measured individually for
each size and type and shall include costs for valve, valve boxes/vaults/manholes, valve extensions,
excavation, dewatering, asphalt/concrete cutting, all associated fittings, installation, normal backfill,
and testing. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM S-20 - Flow monitoring manholes shall be measured individually (each) and
shall include the costs for manhole, excavation, dewatering, asphalt/concrete cutting, all associated
valves and fittings, installation, normal backfill, and testing. No additional payment shall be made
for these items.
ITEM S-21 - Ductile Iron polyethylene pipe encasement shall be measured in linear
feet and shall include costs for pipe wrap materials and installation. No additional payment shall be
made for these items.
ITEM S-22 - Concrete pipe encasement shall be measured in cubic yards and shall
include costs for concrete, installation, excavation, dewatering, soil stabilization, pipe stabilization,
asphalt cutting, and normal backfill. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM S-23 - Miscellaneous Class A concrete for thrust blocks shall be measured in
cubic yards and shall include costs for concrete, reinforcing steel, embeds, form work, installation,
excavation, dewatering, soil stabilization, pipe stabilization, asphalt cutting, and normal backfill.
No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM S-24 - Cut and plug manholes shall be measured individually (each) and shall
include costs for cutting of existing pipelines, plugging of existing pipelines, excavation, dewatering,
asphalt/concrete cutting, and normal backfill. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
2.5 WATER MAIN AND APPURTENANCES
ITEMS W-l and W-2 - All piping line items shall be measured in linear feet and
shall include costs for piping and installation, trench excavation, trench box, dewatering, asphalt
cutting, normal joints and gaskets, normal backfill, pressure and leakage testing, pipe sterilization,
bacteriological testing and flushing. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM W -3 - Select backfill shall be measured in cubic yards and shall include costs
for the backfill and installation as well as all transportation and stockpiling charges and offsite
disposal costs of unsuitable material. The volume of material included shall be the actual measured
"in-place" volume. The maximum trench width used to calculate the volume will be 7 feet. No
additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM W -4 - Miscellaneous ductile or cast iron pipe fittings and connections shall be
measured in pounds and include costs for all fittings and installation except normal joints and gaskets
regardless of material. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
17000-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ITEM W.5 - Fire hydrants shall be measured individually (each) and shall include
costs for hydrants, soil surface preparation, connection to water main, all associated valves and
fittings, concrete pad (if required), excavation, asphalt/concrete cutting, installation, normal backfill,
and testing. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEMS W-6 and W-7 - All valve line items shall be measured individually for each
size and type and shall include costs for valves, valve boxes/vaults/manholes, valve extensions,
excavation, dewatering, asphalt/concrete cutting, all associated fittings, installation, normal backfill,
and testing. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM W-8 - Two inch water service, meter, pressure reducing valve and backflow
preventer shall be measured as a lump sum and shall include the costs for all materials, labor and
equipment required to install the water service, meter, pressure reducing valve and backflow
preventer complete with boxes/vaults and all other required appurtenances. No additional payment
shall be made for these items.
ITEM W -9 - Polyethylene pipe wrap shall be measured in linear feet and shall include
costs for pipe wrap materials and installation. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM W -10 Miscellaneous Class A concrete for thrust blocks shall be measured in
cubic yards and shall include costs for concrete, installation, excavation, dewatering; soil
stabilization, pipe stabilization, asphalt cutting, and normal backfill. No additional payment shall be
made for these items.
2.6 PAVEMENT STRUCTURES
ITEMS P-l and P.2 - Graded aggregate base and asphalt pavement shall be measured
in square yards for each type and thickness and shall include costs for base and asphalt materials and
installation, temporary striping and permanent striping and markers (both temporary and permanent).
No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM P.3 - Aggregate base and concrete paving shall be measured in square yards
for each type & thickness and shall include cost for base and concrete materials and installation. No
additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM P-4 - Concrete sidewalk and building stoops shall be measured in square yards
and shall include costs for removal and disposal of existing concrete, 3000 psi concrete, installation,
site preparation, formwork, and finishing. Existing concrete shall be removed to the nearest joint as
directed by the project representative. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM P.5 - Curb and gutter shall be measured in linear feet and shall include costs
for concrete, installation, site preparation, formwork, and finishing. No additional payment shall be
made for these items.
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
17000-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS
ITEM M-l- Flowable fill shall be measured in cubic yards and shall include costs
for all materials, labor, equipment, and excess materials. No additional payment shall be made for
these items.
ITEM M-2 - Rock excavation shall be measured in cubic yards and shall include costs
for blasting, labor, equipment, and material removal and offsite disposal costs of unsuitable material.
The volume of material included shall be the actual measured "in-place" volume. The maximum
trench width used to calculate the volume will be 7 feet for force main piping and 10 feet for gravity
piping. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM M-3 - Foundation backfill shall be measured in cubic yards and shall include
costs for the backfill and installation as well as all transportation and stockpiling charges and offsite
disposal costs of unsuitable material. Quantities shall be verified by trench volume calculation up
to maximum trench width of 7 feet for force main piping and 10 feet for gravity piping. No
additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM M-4 - Clearing and grubbing shall be measured in acres and shall include costs
for vegetation removal, stockpiling, disposal and any required permitting. No additional payment
shall be made for these items.
ITEM M-5 - Bypass pumping operations shall be measured as a lump sum and shall
include the cost for all delivery charges, site preparation, pumps, piping, fittings, and labor necessary
to install, operate, maintain and remove the various bypass pumping operations needed to install the
proposed sewer lines and structures. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM M-6 - Drainage structures shall be measured individually (each) and shall
include costs for the structure, excavation, dewatering, asphalt cutting, collars and boots, grouting
and/or other connections, installation, and normal backfill as specified. No additional payment shall
be made for these items.
ITEMS M-7 throu2h M-9 - All storm piping items shall be measured in linear feet
and shall include costs for piping and installation, trench excavation, trench box, dewatering, asphalt
cutting, normal joints and gaskets, and normal backfill. No additional payment shall be made for
these items.
ITEM M-IO - Flared end sections shall be measured individually (each), without
regard to size, and shall include costs for installation, trench excavation, trench box, dewatering,
asphalt cutting, normal j oints and gaskets, and normal backfill. No additional payment shall be made
for these items.
ITEM M-ll - Stone dumped riprap shall be measured in square yards of accepted
material of the specified thickness and shall include costs for riprap, fabric, grout or cushioning sand
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
17000-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(if required) and installation. Area measurements will be made parallel to the surface on which the
material is place. No additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM M-12 - Grading for the entire project shall be measured as a lump sum and
shall include the costs for all materials, labor and equipment required to perform the required grading
for the project.
ITEM M-13 - 6'Chain link fencing with barbed wire, installed complete with all
required appurtenances shall be measured in linear feet and shall include all materials, labor and
equipment necessary for a complete installation. No additional payment shall be made for these
items.
ITEM M-14 - Chain link fence gates with barbed wire (6' by 12'), whether single or
double gate, installed complete with all required appurtenances shall be measured individually (each)
and shall include all materials, labor and equipment necessary for a complete installation. No
additional payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM M-15 - Permanent grassing for the entire project shall be measured as a lump
sum and shall include the costs for all materials, labor, equipment, transportation, stockpiling,
installation, soil stabilization and soil amendments (fertilizer, etc.) as required. No additional
payment shall be made for these items.
ITEM LS-l - Lump sum construction includes, but is not limited to, the items
described in the bid schedule under Lump Sum Construction and on the Detailed Estimate. No
separate or additional payment shall be made for these items.
2.8 DEDUCTIVE ALTERNATES
ITEM DA-l- Deductive Alternate No.1 shall be measured as a lump sum credit for
supplying wao EMU submersible pumps in lieu of ITT Flygt submersible pumps for the two 350
horse power submersible pumps and the one 40 horse power submersible pump, complete with all
required appurtenances.
END OF SECTION
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
17000-7